JP7292678B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "pachislot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that performs a lottery based on a ball entering a starting hole, variably displays symbols on a display means, and provides a predetermined game value when a specific display result is obtained. For this type of game machine, there has been conventionally proposed a game machine provided with an operation button that allows the player to adjust the sound volume of the game machine (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-042927 A

However, when the player himself/herself adjusts the volume, if it is possible to freely adjust the volume in consideration of the presentation state of the gaming machine, the presentation effect on the player and the influence on other players around the player may be reduced. From the point of view, there is a risk of causing a decline in the interest in the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest in gaming.

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that variably displays symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and provides a predetermined profit based on the result of the variative display,
an effect sound output means capable of outputting a game-related effect sound;
volume change means capable of changing the volume of the effect sound based on the player's volume change operation;
volume level gauge image display control means for performing control to display a volume level gauge image that allows the player to recognize which volume is set as the volume of the effect sound;
a volume limiting means for limiting the upper limit of the volume that can be changed by the volume changing means based on an administrator's operation;
The volume level gauge image can be displayed when the volume change operation is performed,
The volume level gauge image display control means includes:
When the upper limit of the volume is limited by the volume limiter, it is possible to execute limit display control based on the limit of the upper limit,
When the upper limit of the volume is not limited by the volume limiting means, it is possible to execute unrestricted display control based on the fact that the upper limit is not limited,
The limited display control at least displays a maximum level of the selectable volume level gauge image that is less than a maximum level of the selectable volume level gauge image that would be displayed when the unrestricted display control is executed. is a control that allows
Furthermore, it further comprises specific level gauge image display control means for controlling display of a specific level gauge image different from the volume level gauge image,
The specific level gauge image and the volume level gauge image can be displayed simultaneously from a state in which both the images are hidden ,
When the volume change operation is performed, the display mode of the volume level gauge image can be changed by the performed volume change operation, but the display mode of the specific level gauge image is not changed. is configured as
Further, the specific level gauge image may be displayed on the specific level gauge image depending on which of the limited display control and the unrestricted display control the display control of the volume level gauge image is executed. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the display mode of the image is not changed.

In the above configuration, the volume of the effect sound changed based on the operation of the player is displayed in the volume image, and the upper limit of the volume of the effect sound that can be changed is limited based on the operation of the administrator . It is configured so that the display control of the volume image is made different between when there is no restriction and when there is no restriction . As a result, the player can grasp that the upper limit of the sound volume of the effect sound is limited, and the hall side appropriately informs the player that the sound volume adjustment range is limited. (See, for example, paragraphs 2416-2431, FIGS. 247-256, etc.).

Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in amusement in a game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the back and front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind; Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from behind; FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 1; It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a main part of a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a). and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray between the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of a door frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front and lower side; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is at the upper movement end position; is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where has moved to the raised position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button outer decoration board, and button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. FIG. 11 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit; (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is a connection between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). FIG. 10C is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching portion is provided between the plate units, and FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of the same. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit. , and (d) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO. (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame; Fig. 10 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a closed state; It is a front view which shows each decoration board|substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board|substrate of the site|part of the production|presentation operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame; It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. FIG. 100(a) is exploded and it is the exploded perspective view seen from the front. It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. It is the perspective view which shows the part of a tank rail enlarging and seeing the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of 2nd embodiment from back. (a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 107 is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107; FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with tank rails and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as seen from the rear right. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with tank rails and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as viewed from the rear left. (a) is a rear view of the body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and (b) is a left side view of the body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 113(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 113(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 114(b) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail. (a) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a ) is a perspective view of the tank rail, etc., seen from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc. of FIG. 116 and viewed from the front; FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc., shown in FIG. 116 and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. Fig. 3 is a viewed perspective view; 119(a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. 119(b) is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a), viewed from the front; FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) being exploded and viewed from behind; (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the squeak line in FIG. 119 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku-ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. 119(a) is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 119(a). FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at an out-ball outlet of an out-ball passage; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which an out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right; (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front left; is a perspective view. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the lower right rear. (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), and (c) is cut along the sacer line in (a). It is a sectional view. FIG. 129(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sea line in FIG. 129(a). FIG. 128 is an exploded front perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 when it is exploded and viewed from behind; 128 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an explanatory view showing elimination of clogged balls in the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; 128 is an explanatory view showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which center accessories and the like are made opaque; FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front right; FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front left; FIG. 138 is a rear perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137; FIG. It is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view cut along the Suse line in FIG. 137; FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line in FIG. 137; It is an explanatory view showing the positions of the rear cell and the cell fixing piece from the front of the game board. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear cell and the cell fixing piece disassembled from the front structural member and the game panel and viewed from the front, and (b) is the front structural member and the game panel showing the rear cell and the cell fixing piece. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after disassembling the . (a) is a four-sided view of the cell fixing piece, (b) is a front perspective view of the cell fixing piece, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the cell fixing piece. (a) is a front perspective view of the cloon in the center distribution unit of the center role, (b) is a plan view of the cloon in (a), and (c) is the saw in (b). It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the line. (a) is an explanatory view partially showing a perspective view of the center distribution unit of the center accessory of the game board; (b) is a partial perspective view of the center distribution unit of the center accessory of the game board; 1 is an explanatory diagram shown in a plan view in FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cloon of a different embodiment from FIG. 149, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cloon of a further different embodiment, and (c) is a distribution unit of a further different embodiment It is an explanatory diagram showing. (a) is an exploded perspective view of a part of the attacker unit of the center accessory and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit partially exploded and viewed from the rear. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the attacker unit of the center accessory, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the attacker unit of the center accessory, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the second starting opening opening/closing unit, the first big winning opening opening/closing unit, the second big winning opening opening/closing unit, and the V sorting unit in the attacker unit, and (b) is the attacker unit. is a perspective view of the second starting opening opening/closing unit, the first big winning opening opening/closing unit, the second big winning opening opening/closing unit, and the V sorting unit in FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the second starting port opening/closing unit in the attacker unit of the center accessory and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded view of the second starting port opening/closing unit viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view. (a) is a perspective view of the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is closed, and (b) is a perspective view of the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is opened. It is a figure, (c) is an explanatory view showing the state of each configuration of the second starting port opening and closing unit when the second starting port is closed, and (d) is opening the second starting port. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each configuration of the second starting port opening/closing unit at time; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the first major winning opening opening/closing unit in the attacker unit of the center accessory and viewed from the front; (b) is an exploded perspective view of the first major winning opening opening/closing unit viewed from the back 1 is an exploded perspective view; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each configuration of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing unit when the first big prize winning hole is closed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each configuration when the first big prize winning hole is open. is an explanatory view showing the state of each configuration of the first big winning opening opening and closing unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the second large winning opening opening/closing unit in the attacker unit of the center accessory and viewed from the front; 1 is an exploded perspective view; FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the V distribution unit in the attacker unit of the center accessory and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the V distribution unit viewed from the rear. . (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the V allocation unit, the V winning opening sensor, the losing opening sensor, and the center right ball path, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. . (a) is a perspective view showing a mounting state of an opening/closing unit of a different embodiment, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. In the attacker unit of the center role, the relationship between the attacker front plate, the second starting opening sensor, the second large winning opening sensor, the V winning opening sensor, the losing opening sensor, the attacker base plate, and the center right ball passage is a perspective view. It is an explanatory diagram showing. (a) is an explanatory view showing a side cross section of a door body of a different embodiment applied to the first grand prize opening opening/closing unit in the attacker unit of the center accessory, and (b) is a plan view showing (a). It is an explanatory diagram. (a) is a perspective view seen from the rear with wiring omitted in the vicinity of the attacker unit in the center accessory, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the binding pedestal exploded in (a). It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the center base of the main body unit and the attacker base plate of the attacker unit and the binding pedestal in the center accessory. It is a six-sided view of a binding pedestal. (a) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal seen from above, (b) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal seen from above and rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal seen from below. . (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a main part of the center accessory with a plurality of wires bundled on the binding pedestal with a binding band, and (b) is a state in which the binding pedestal is separated in (a). It is an exploded perspective view showing. (a) is a perspective view showing a binding pedestal of an embodiment different from the binding pedestal of FIG. 168, and (b) is a perspective view showing a binding pedestal of a further different embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a use state of the wire locking portion on the rear surface of the game board in a perspective view. Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the game board disassembled into the effect unit, the mounting supporter and the back box and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit of the game board disassembled into the effect unit, the mounting supporter, and the rear box, as seen from the rear; (a) is a six-sided view of the mounting supporter in the back unit, (b) is a front perspective view of the mounting supporter in (a), and (c) is a rear view of the mounting supporter in (a). is a perspective view. 176 (a) is a perspective view showing a mounting supporter of an embodiment different from the mounting supporter of FIG. 175, and (b) is a perspective view of a main part of the mounting supporter having a different body shape in the mounting supporter of (a). (c) is an explanatory view showing a rear perspective view of a main part of a mounting supporter of an embodiment different from the mounting supporter of (a). 176 (a) is a perspective view of a mounting supporter having a different form from the mounting supporter of FIG. 175 as viewed from the front left, (b) is a front view of the mounting supporter of (a), and (c) is of (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the mounting supporter from the front right, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the mounting supporter of (a) from the back. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back, while showing an enlarged portion of the mounting supporter as a main part with the back box made transparent. (a) is a rearward photograph of one mounting supporter portion of FIG. 175 in the rear unit, and (b) is a rearward photograph of the mounting supporter portion of FIG. 177 in the rear unit. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit of a game board for each unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back unit of a game board for each unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit seen from the front, and (c) is a back front left effect unit seen from the back. (d) is a cross-sectional view of the back front left effect unit cut along the sacer line in (a). It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back front left production|presentation unit in a back unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back front left production|presentation unit in a back unit, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the back after effect unit in the back unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back-side effect unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-side effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing the unit base side, the upper back decoration body, and the lower back decoration body from the front in the back rear effect unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing the unit base side, the upper back decoration body and the lower back decoration body from behind in the back rear effect unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the locking mechanism of the back upper decoration in the back rear effect unit and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the locking mechanism of the back upper decoration. 1 is an exploded perspective view; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of a lock mechanism in a locked position in the back upper decoration, and (b) is a perspective view showing a lock mechanism in an unlocked position in the back upper decoration. It is an explanatory diagram. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear lower decorative body of the back-rear effect unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear lower decorative body of the back-rear effect unit, viewed from the rear; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how wiring is routed on the rear surface of the back-rear lower decorative body of the back-back production unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the first rotary decoration in the back rear lower decoration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the first rotary decoration in the back rear lower decoration from the rear 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the back-back effect unit showing a state in which the back-back upper decoration body is moved to the drop position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the back-back production unit showing a state in which the back-upper decorative body and the back-back lower decorative body are moved to the center position; (a) is a front view of the game board showing the display screen of the effect display device in a blacked out state, and (b) is the display screen of the effect display device and the back front left back of the back front left effect unit in the back unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship with a decoration sheet. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing the back upper right decoration, the back right middle decoration, and the back lower right decoration of the back right effect unit in the back unit in a state of being moved to the appearance position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear left decorative body of the rear rear left effect unit in the rear unit is moved to the first appearance position; It is a front view of the front view of the game board shown in a state in which the rear left decorative body of the rear rear left effect unit in the rear unit is moved to the second appearance position. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear upper decorative body of the rear rear effect unit in the rear unit is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper rear decoration body and the lower rear decoration body of the rear rear effect unit in the rear unit are moved to the center position; It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a flow chart of vibration alarm processing in the game board. It is a front view of the door frame of 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the door frame of 2nd embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame of 2nd embodiment from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame of 2nd embodiment from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame of 2nd embodiment from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment, which is disassembled into a door frame top add unit and others, viewed from the front; (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear; be. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit as seen from the rear. (a) is a side cross-sectional view of the upper portion of the door frame of the second embodiment, and (b) is an exploded side cross-sectional view showing the door frame top add unit and others in (a). (a) is an exploded perspective view of the main parts of the door frame according to the second embodiment, as seen from the rear after disassembling the right side panel and the right side decorative sheet from the right side unit of the door frame; (b) is an exploded perspective view of the right side panel; is a perspective view of the from the left rear. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 214; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 217. FIG. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process subsequent to FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production|presentation preliminary determination process (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S234). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 1st special design normal processing (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about hit determination processing (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a big hit design determination table (B), and a small hit design determination table (C). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design variation process (step S283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process (step S284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a jackpot control process (step S235A). It is a flow chart which shows an example of button production execution processing. (A) is a table showing an example of a button effect determination pattern, and (B) is a table showing an example of a button effect execution pattern. This is a specific example of the effect when the button effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the insane effect execution process at the time of entering a ball. It is a time chart which shows an example at the time of execution of the insane effect and the mute effect. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the light emitting state of the door frame during execution of the madness effect and the muting effect; It is a flow chart which shows an example of suggestion production execution processing at the time of ball entry. It is an explanatory diagram showing light emitting locations on the game area when the suggestive effect is executed. (A) is a front view of a volume control switch that can be operated by a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall according to the present embodiment. (B) is a correspondence table of base volumes and player-adjustable volume levels. (A) is a display example in which both the volume control bar display and the maximum adjustment amount display in the present embodiment are displayed. (B) is a display example of the light amount adjustment bar display 4200 in this embodiment. (A) shows a display mode during variation of the decorative pattern, and (B) is a display example of displaying the volume control bar display and the maximum adjustment amount display during the variation of the decorative pattern. (C) is a display example showing a display mode when the decorative symbols are stopped. (A) shows a display mode during variation of the decorative pattern, and (B) is a display example of displaying the volume control bar display and the maximum adjustment amount display during the variation of the decorative pattern. (C) is a display example based on the prohibition flag that accompanies the notification effect. (A) shows a display mode during variation of the decorative pattern, and (B) is a display example of displaying the volume control bar display and the maximum adjustment amount display during the variation of the decorative pattern. (C) is a display example showing a display mode when the decorative symbols are stopped. (A) to (C) are examples showing that the upper limit of the volume level is restricted. (D) shows a conventional reduced display mode. (A) and (B) are diagrams for explaining a situation in which the notification image is difficult to visually recognize. (C) is an embodiment in which the display area of the notification image is enlarged to hide the volume control bar display, and (D) is an embodiment in which the display area of the notification image is reduced to improve the visibility of the decorative pattern. This is an example. 5 is a table showing an example of message display of characters displayed when volume level and light intensity are adjusted; FIG. 11 is a table showing an example of a character message display when an operation is performed to increase the volume level beyond a limited volume level; FIG. (A) shows the display mode of the current volume level and the volume level of the upper limit of adjustment, and (B) shows the volume level of the upper limit of adjustment. The display mode in the case of is shown.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, main frame and outer frame 1 is an exploded perspective view viewed from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 89) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a.
Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player can operate the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player side and a power board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501; I have.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310 and a setting change board, a function display unit 1400 displaying a game situation based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a game panel 1100 are arranged behind the game panel 1100. a peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 attached to the front surface thereof. A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) general winning opening 2001, first lower starting opening 2003, first upper starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening 2006, second big winning An opening 2007, a V winning opening 2008, and a losing opening 2009 are provided. The obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁General winning gate 2001, gate 2002, first lower starting gate 2003, first upper starting gate 2004, second starting gate 2005, first big winning gate 2006, second big winning gate 2007 (V winning gate 2008, losing gate 2009 ) are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B is the general winning opening 2001, the gate 2002, the first lower starting opening 2003, the first upper starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second The player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 195 so as to be accepted or passed through the big winning opening 2007 (V winning opening 2008, losing opening 2009) or the like.

In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, or displays a start opening display portion 2110, a back front display portion 2110, and a back front display portion 2110 according to the game state changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. A top effect unit 3200, a back front left effect unit 3300, a back right effect unit 3400, a back rear effect unit 3600, etc. can perform light emitting effects and movable effects to entertain the players.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front.
The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right at the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends short in the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recessed portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 and the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10 are formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape.

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. Lateral fixing portion 23b, flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the rear side of horizontal fixing portion 23a, and from the rear side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and right with an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a has an upper end that is slanted so as to be positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion 44a. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b that are spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grille member 46 communicates the interior of the panel front member 42 (the panel interior space 40a) with the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates the interior space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain plate with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by means of two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the interior space 40a of the curtain board by the main body frame speaker 622 to the outside is transmitted to the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. can be directed into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 at the . As a result, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his or her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, the balls are discharged from the port member 47 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players who are wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, since the effect sound can also attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output an effect sound with a deeper bass, and it is possible to amuse the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the shape of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the left front, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG.
The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door, a handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the tray unit 200. A door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. A speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end when viewed from the rear on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the rear surface of the door frame main relay board 104. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the rear view left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame secondary relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 covering a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 covering the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 operates a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to release the ball. 540 is used to play a game of hitting the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular flat plate door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. .

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a tray unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101 a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner circumference thereof, and is close to the outer circumference of the door frame base 101 , and a lower side forming the inner circumference extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, and a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42). A cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted through the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a in the front-rear direction, and the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b in a front view. and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates in the front-rear direction and allows the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to face forward.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) in a front view and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be favorably guided forward (toward the player).

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (FIG. 82). and FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame left side lower decoration board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4; It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG.
By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 (parts extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box-like shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The cut-out portion 114a is formed at the position corresponding to the upper tray ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at the position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101 d of the door frame base 101 .

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 . The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to rotate with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. can support.

[3-1h. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. Fig. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the back and front, and (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. 2 is a front perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 2, and (d) is a rear perspective view of the cylinder lock in (a). Fig. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in Fig. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and Fig. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in Fig. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. Fig. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Fig. 34(a) from the front, and Fig. 36(b) shows the state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of Fig. 34(a). It is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock, (c) is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock shown in the state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening and closing with the frame 4 . The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 which is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder main body 131 and rotates together with a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. A second cam member 135 attached rotatably about an axis in the front-rear direction at a portion below the cylinder body 131 in the upper end side rotates at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 A band plate-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached to the second cam member 135 at the lower end side of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is the first cam member 134 that rotates. a strip-shaped second arm 137 which is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135; ing.

Also, the cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder main body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from behind except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets that rotatably attach the rear cover 138 attached to 115 and the upper and lower end sides of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139 and .

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be integrally rotatable. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136 .

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are spaced apart at an angle of 90 degrees around their respective rotation axes. are doing. In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

The rear cover 138 has a cylindrical shaft portion 138a that protrudes outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces of the rear cover 138. The shaft portion 138a is engaged with the L-shaped engagement slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. It is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 by means of.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are made of metal. .

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3 , the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440 b of the door frame right side unit 430 .

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder main body 131 which penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end of which is attached to the front piece. there is A rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130A.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmitting member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131. 34(a) and 34(b), etc., a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131. As shown in FIGS.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the cylinder lock 130 is configured such that the upper and lower end sides of the first arm 136 are aligned with the rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower end sides of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower portions of the rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state by using a proper key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will happen. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 should be rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is reversed from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise. direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 .
The force that acts upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is generated by the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the portion where the first cam member 134 is attached. 134 is proportional to the horizontal distance from the center of rotation. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 decreases, while the force acting upward on the second arm 137 decreases. greater power to do so.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the upward force acting on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136 . , mainly via the second arm 137, the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned counterclockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is performed. It will work.

On the other hand, when the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is used to rotate the first cam member 134 clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 from the normal state, the upper end side of the first cam member 134 rotates to the right of the center of rotation. As the first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, the second arm 137 attached to the lower end of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate in the direction of .

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 . The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. , and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 in the horizontal direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 that tends to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases. The arm 137 exerts a greater force to rotate the second cam member 135 .

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. As a result, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise mainly via the second arm 137 . Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned clockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the operation is reversed to that described above. It will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 in which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are phased at an angle of 90 degrees to each other. , so that at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is engaged regardless of the rotational position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132). , the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated, and the locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 can be improved.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 can be provided at a different position, the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 can be changed to any position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a part that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be used. cost increase can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudulent person who has knowledge of the structure may insert a tool behind the cylinder body 131 from the front. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, the door frame 3 may be opened to commit fraud. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool can be inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and the door frame 3, the body frame 4, etc. are opened. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees. A straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135 at the part attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of the one arm 136 or the second arm 137 Even when positioned above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. be in a state where Therefore, by positioning the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 at the dead center by either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, so the rotation of the first cam member 134 The key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated without a large resistance to rotation, and unlocking/locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted in the keyhole can be forcibly rotated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key from being damaged.

In addition, since the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason Even if one of the arms is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. Therefore, if the rotation is transmitted by a gear, the tip of the tool may be hooked on the teeth of the gear, causing the gear to rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 are rod-shaped with smooth surfaces, it is possible to make it difficult for the tip of the tool to get caught on the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, thereby preventing the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 from moving. It is possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 from being unlocked due to illegal operation of the locking unit 650.例文帳に追加be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , but not limited to, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt , and so on.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 37(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 can be supplied. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end, and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entering from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed actuation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball feed solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feed crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is arranged on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) projecting downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the discharge solenoid 542 by the discharge control section 633b (see FIG. 203) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball release button 222 of the tray unit 200, the upper tray ball release slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the operation transmission portion 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the inlet 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if the game ball B is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball extracting member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being caught in the partition portion 143a. You can prevent bouncing.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The tamper-proof member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string that has been set to make an illegal game ball B enter or exit the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004, etc., the ball launching device 540 shoots (hit ball). The string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b by the momentum of the illegal game ball B, and then the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b can be cut by the narrowed V-shaped portion formed by 148b, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 39(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper left corner in a front view, and is a penetration that communicates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. A ball passage 150a and a full ball receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and can communicate with a lower full discharge passage 610b of a lower full ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4. and a mouth 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and even though the ball is fired by the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4, it does not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received by a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c which are open forward near the lower right corner in front view. and a ball discharge port 150d that discharges the balls forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e. and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 .
As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. to that effect and urge them to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a, and serves as a lower full-tank ball path unit 610 in the later-described payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can abut on a projecting portion 163 b of the glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is arranged with a space in the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . Also, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects further rearward than the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the rear. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--E in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is moved by the player's operation. It can be driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290, which will be described later. a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 to be described later; A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. a front lens 185;

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the handle 195 is attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

One end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle 195 so that the handle 195 can be returned to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291 c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear tubular portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d can be inserted into the three grooves 181c. is inserted, the handle base 181 is brought into a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291 .

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially extending outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two ring portions extending in an arc around the rotating shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. A slit 195d and a locking projection 195e projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center relative to the slit 195d and locking the other end side of the handle return spring 190 are provided. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 rotate clockwise and clockwise around one spoke portion 195b horizontally extending leftward from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotated). Two spokes 195b extend counterclockwise from 120 degree angles. The three spoke portions 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c so that a player's finger can be inserted thereinto.

An outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape in which the rounded side of the U-shape faces forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to be translucent as a whole, and is partially provided with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. there is The three handle guides 196 have mounting stays 196 b attached to the rear side of the spokes 195 b of the handle 195 so that the guide portions 196 a are positioned behind the outer ring portion 195 c of the handle 195 . A guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, is inserted into the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196, thereby restricting movement in the front-rear direction.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in the shape of a disk having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are divided into 5 groups: 1 in the center, 3 in the middle, 2 in the upper left corner of the outer circumference, 2 in the upper right corner of the outer circumference, and 2 in the lower part of the outer circumference. (see Figure 72). This handle decoration board 184 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with 3 systems for a total of 15 systems so that each can emit light in full color. I'm trying

Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and a command and address line from the peripheral control board 1510. , and a clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510 are connected. . Then, in the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into five groups according to the command. Each set of ten LEDs 184a can be illuminated with an appropriate color and intensity.

In this way, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which is larger in number than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected, can be individually (in this case, assembled). Since it is possible to control each unit, the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electric wiring can be simplified.

The handle front lens 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and is translucent. The handle front lens 185 has a lens member inside which is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel front lens 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor. When the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. FIG. The internal resistance of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance, and the handle 195 rotates. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with strength corresponding to the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, detects static electricity acting from the player when the player touches the handle 195, and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the driving of the ejection solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the launch of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be pressed. By canceling the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 is operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and includes a handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200, an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface, An annular board cover 294 covering the handle cover decoration board 293 from the front and a handle cover 295 covering the outer periphery of the inner 292 and having the rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 are provided.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and a front cylindrical portion 291a whose inner diameter decreases forward from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. a tubular rear tubular portion 291c penetrating through the intermediate wall portion 291b and extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter allowing insertion of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181; and the inner periphery of the rear tubular portion 291c. A plurality of (here, three) projections 291d are provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

In addition, the handle cover base 291 includes a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion on the rear side of the front end of the outer circumference of the front cylindrical portion 291a, and a portion extending from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. A cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f projecting forward to the front cylinder portion 291f, a guide piece 291g projecting outward from the front cylinder portion 291a at a portion between the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, a front cylinder and an opening 291h penetrating at the lower portion of the portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate cross section from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear cylindrical portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 at its rear end. The rear tubular portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three ridges 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylindrical portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position near the front tubular portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide piece 291g through the space between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, a U-shaped guide portion is formed. A guide piece 291g can be positioned within 196a to restrict movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h extends from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e in the front-rear direction, and extends through the front cylindrical portion 291a with a size within an angle range of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. .

The inner member 292 has an annular base portion 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notch portions 292c that are cut from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e with the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 inserted from the front. The leg portion 292 b extends outward in a curved shape, and its rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 . The notch portions 292c are provided in the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The steering wheel cover decoration board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right from the center. divided (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with 3 systems for a total of 18 systems so that each group can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the steering wheel cover decoration board 293 has two power lines (one of which is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, commands from the peripheral control board 1510 and A wiring cable made up of four wires, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. there is Then, when the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decoration board 293 receives a command addressed to the address through the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into six groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each set.

The substrate cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and having an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and the front plate portion 294a. and a cylindrical side plate portion 294b with an outer peripheral edge of the cylindrical side plate portion 294b extending short rearward. The substrate cover 294 has a front plate portion 294a located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and a side plate portion 294b extending to the base portion 292a of the inner 292. As shown in FIG.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at its front end, and has a spindle frustum (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , etc.), and a plurality of (here, four) notch openings 295b are provided in the circumferential direction by notching forward from the rear end. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and has a plurality of cutout openings 295b that are aligned with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292 .

The handle cover 295 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b to appear on the outer surface. , circular and radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. A portion behind the handle cover unit 290 is inserted, and the handle 195, the handle front lens 185, and the like are positioned on the front side of the handle cover unit 290. As shown in FIG. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291, and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 is mounted. 101b.

A handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is rotatably supported by a handle base 181 at a central hub portion 195a. In addition, the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) between the front cylindrical portion 291a and the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported while its movement in the longitudinal direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 being decorated with light, the interior of the handle cover base 291 (front cylindrical portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be decorated with light.

The handle cover unit 290 has cutout openings 295b and cutouts 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, so that when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 is positioned on both the left and right sides and on the lower side. It is possible to make it look as if a hole communicating with the inside of the front tubular portion 291a is open. As a result, the player is relieved from the mental anxiety of sticking his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. can be done.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the right plate decoration unit 275 and the right side unit 430 of the door frame.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is positioned below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, when the liquid or the game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, it passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292, It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed into the outer frame base assembly of the outer frame 2, as shown in FIG. It is provided on the extension line of the slanting direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the three-dimensional structure 40. As shown in FIG. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the opening portion 291h, the cutout portion 292c, and the cutout opening portion 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter into the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his/her fingers into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the main body frame speaker By vibrating the 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised, and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the body frame 4, the right cutout opening 295b can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 and the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

In addition, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B can be typed.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by placing a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously hit into the game area 5a with a constant strength even if the hand is not twisted continuously. As described above, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the handle 195 in various ways, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be provided in which the player can select a hitting operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform the rotation operation without discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the left side is provided to be openable and closable, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, there is a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer periphery connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c is provided, so that the handle in a conventional pachinko machine is provided. A handle 195 and a handle cover unit 290 in a form never seen before can be seen at the site where the player is, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest. At the same time, the player can be motivated to play the game with the pachinko machine 1, and the player who is playing in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

In addition, since the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grips the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the player can be given a feeling different from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine for the operation of the handle 195, and the player can be entertained and entertained by the operation of hitting the game ball B with a new feeling. can be suppressed.

Then, when the player operates the handle 195 and causes the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to output the production sound, the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to be output. The air inside the enclosure 624 due to the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the inner space 40a and the port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 causes sound pressure. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transmitted to the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291, and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Sound pressure stimulation can be applied to the player's finger operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Accordingly, sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , the player can be surprised, the player can feel the arrival of a chance, and the operation amount of the steering wheel operation can be changed, which can entertain the player and prevent the player from getting bored. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. The inside of the unit 290 can be cooled, and the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 can be made comfortable, thereby relieving the stress on the player and suppressing the loss of interest in the game. can.

In addition, as described above, the handle 195 and the handle 195 may be pressed against the finger of the player operating the handle 195 while inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 on which the handle cover unit 290 is provided is applied to the grill member 46. Since stimulation is applied by guiding by a plurality of blades 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are reduced compared to the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibrating device. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism, etc., and the handle unit 180 can be made difficult to break. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile. Although the appearance is greatly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and the pachinko machine can be played without hesitation. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which the player's fingers can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. is provided, when the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the area below the handle cover unit 290 is visible through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it is possible to give a sense of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player can be relieved. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided through the portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 facing downward, and the port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward through the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295 b and the opening 291 h to enter the port member 47 .

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit 295 of the handle cover unit 290 has the same diameter at the front end as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be grasped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated with only fingers, and the outer ring The portion 195c can be operated like a steering wheel of an automobile, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b can be gripped by a finger, or the handle cover unit can be operated by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of performing an operation such as pinching the inside and outside of the 290 with fingers and capable of various game ball B hitting operations (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, etc., and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, fingers may be hung between the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 to grasp them, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be gripped by fingers while straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to steering wheel operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, steering wheel operations that cannot be performed with conventional pachinko machines can be performed, thereby providing a variety of steering wheel operations to the player. , making it difficult for the player to get bored by entertaining the steering wheel operation.

Also, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. The appearance can be such that the 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance to attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from increasing more than necessary. By suppressing the game area 5a (door window 101a) from being pressed upward, it is possible to avoid narrowing of the game area 5a, and it is possible to relatively enlarge the game area 5a, The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of the players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the luminous decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are conspicuous. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

A handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided at a portion facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle for opening and closing the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that deteriorates its appearance, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports an outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and a flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction, and A guide piece 291g is provided, and even if the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the forward movement of the outer ring portion 195c can be restricted by the guide piece 291g or the like. 195c and spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, after detecting that the player is touching the handle 195 by the handle touch sensor 192, since the operation of the handle 195 is received and the game ball B is hit, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be hit even if the handle 195 is operated in a touched state. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball B in a state in which the handle 195 is not touched, prevent the handle operation using a tool, and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . Mounting base (illustration omitted) protruding forward attached to the mounting base, Dish unit relay board (illustration omitted) attached to the right of the mounting base, and ball attached to the top surface of the mounting base A rental operation unit 220, an upper tray ball removal pre-unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray ball removal pre-unit, It has

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate right decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be press-operated by the player. The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation part cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation part base 315 housed inside the production operation part cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation part base 315. A ring-shaped effect operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer periphery board cover 325 covering the upper side of the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. and a partial relay board unit 330 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit 350, which can protrude upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 is provided, and the operation unit base 315, and is attached to the effect operation unit 350. A production operation part elevating mechanism 360 that supports the part unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projection force of the production operation part unit 350 by the production operation part lifting mechanism 360. there is

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball renting operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper plate 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. A guide passage portion 201a (Fig. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 extends from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, the outer diameter of the game ball B is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port.

In addition, the guiding passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball B static electricity can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the portion of the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a conventional door frame cut at the same portion as (a). It is a cross-sectional view showing the main part, and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray between the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in the left side with respect to the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the center axis. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is shaped like a cylinder extending straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 150d goes straight to the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b by the lower tray ball supply port 211j, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided in the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a possibility that the game balls B are concentrated in the region on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B flow from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 toward the lower tray 202 side. As a result, the full-tank detection sensor 154 may be activated and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room left in the lower tray 202. There is

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall (ball guiding portion 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is extended obliquely to the left and forward, as shown in FIG. is tilted to More specifically, the distance between the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it becomes a distance.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is positioned to the left of the central axis line (the line indicated by the dashed line) of the rear end (ball outlet 150d) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. are moving to

As a result, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is moved leftward by moving the lower plate ball removal hole 202a to the left. In the state where 202a is closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of game balls B stored on the right side of the lower tray 202. - 特許庁In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray balls are supplied. Since the left side wall of the port 211c extends obliquely and forms a gap between it and the rear end of the lower plate 202 through which the game ball B can flow, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B released from the post-extraction unit 240 (ball extraction guide path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the obliquely extending left side wall and released. , and the game balls B can be properly stored in the entire lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. It has a main body 212 and a plate unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

In addition, the plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball rental operation unit 220. It has a pre-extraction unit (not shown) and an after-extraction upper tray unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the pre-extraction upper tray unit.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a that penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a that penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. and an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) extending vertically and having an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate main body 212 .

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has a front end opened to the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a tubular rear end of the upper tray ball passage of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed opening, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper tray. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball feed guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the post-ball extraction unit 240 and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feed opening 211a is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210. The game ball B inside is supplied from the ball receiving opening of the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

Further, the plate unit base 211 of this embodiment has a ball guiding portion 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower plate 202 to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The ball guiding portion 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper tray 201 by the ball extraction guide path 241c to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (left portion of the lower tray 202). be. As shown in FIG. 50(a), the ball guiding portion 213 forms part of the inner wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. More specifically, the ball guiding portion 213 forms a left inner wall facing the right inner wall where the ball extraction guide path 241c is opened in the inner wall of the cylindrically formed lower tray ball supply port 211c. It is inclined so as to move leftward from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the left inner wall (ball guiding portion 213), at least one game ball B is placed between the front surface of the plate unit base 211 (the rear end of the lower plate 202) and the portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. A distance (gap) is formed through which the liquid can flow. As a result, when the game ball B, which has flowed through the ball extraction guiding portion 241c from the upper plate 201, abuts against the ball guiding portion 213 from the right side, it is guided left forward by the inclination of the ball guiding portion 213, and the game is played. The ball B can be guided to the left end side in the lower plate 202 away from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202. - 特許庁In other words, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion in the lower tray 202 (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lower tray ball supply port 211j in the conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, and thus is guided by the ball extraction guideway 241c. When the game ball B contacts the inner wall on the left side of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, it rolls forward while rebounding to the right, and is sent to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b in the lower tray 202. Instead, it is stored in the area on the right side of the bottom plate 202 where the bottom plate ball extraction hole 202b is provided. Therefore, in the conventional product, the accumulation of the game balls B (indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50(b)) concentrates in the region on the right side of the center of the lower tray 202, and the right side in the lower tray 202 When the game balls B concentrated in the area block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B are not released from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, and the tank is full. There is a risk that the detection sensor 154 will be activated and determine that the lower tray 202 is full even though there is still room in the left area within the lower tray 202 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball guide portion 213 is provided, the game ball B flowing through the ball extraction guide portion 241c is guided to the left area in the lower tray 202. can do. Also, in the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray balls are supplied. From the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guidance path 241c) The game balls B discharged to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower tray 202, and the game balls B can be accumulated throughout the lower tray 202. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, as evidence of the above effects, the inventors of the present application have found that when the full tank detection sensor 154 is activated, the fuel is stored in the respective lower trays 202 in the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. The number of game balls B was counted. The game ball B was counted 10 times in each case. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), the lower tray 202 of the present embodiment (product of the present embodiment) holds more game balls B than the conventional product at any time. It was confirmed that it was possible to store about 40% more game balls B than the conventional product on average.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the left plate decorative board 273, the right plate decorative board 278, and the operation part relay board 332. It is for The plate unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 . The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball rental operation unit in the plate unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning cash or a prepaid card put into the machine after subtracting the amount of the rented game ball B, adjusting the sound volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball ejection button 222 located near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and a button on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the upper tray ball extraction button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball rental operation base 223, a ball rental display unit 226 arranged in the rear lower part of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental button 224 on the outside of the base unit 221. A volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the letters "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball-shaped LED, and can be visually recognized from the player's side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. A ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sound for presentation such as music, voice, and sound effects output from the top central speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It is for adjustment. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern is applied to the part of , as if the sound is coming out of the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the volume control button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light amount adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern of a light bulb is applied to the part of . The diameter of the circle on the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 brightens the light, and pressing the "-" side darkens it.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are colored in different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player is unlikely to make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the amount of light are adjusted by using the contact operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation portion 301, the player participation type effect requiring the operation of the effect operation portion 301 is not executed. Sometimes, the effect operation unit 301 is appropriately operated to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the volume of the sound and the brightness of the amount of light have to be changed, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the light amount can be directly adjusted. can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after upper plate ball removal]
The unit before ball removal of the upper plate and the unit after removal of upper plate ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging B to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed opening from the rear, and a rear base 241 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be vertically slidable. , a spring (not shown) that urges the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. ing.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball. A ball feeding guideway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward; A ball removal guidance path 241c for guiding the game ball B downward from the position and then guiding it rightward in rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port is opened forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in the state assembled to the plate base unit 210. formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper disk ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an operation receiving portion (not shown) projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion. and a projecting operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the tray unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward. The lower end of button 222 abuts. When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

In the post-upper-disc-ball-extraction unit 240, the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 moves through the operation receiving portion of the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is positioned at the end of upward movement. In addition, since the upper disk ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball ejection button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the contacting ball extracting member 143 can move downward, and the ball extracting member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extracting member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves toward the entrance 141a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B, which has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201, is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b opening below the entry port 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring, the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission part 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c which is engaged, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 or discharged to the lower tray 202 side by the upper tray ball extraction unit 240. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape that extends laterally in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction protrudes further forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. and a lower front decorative portion 252b that protrudes forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. - 特許庁

A left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side protrusions 252a, respectively.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the plate unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and is provided with an effect operation unit attachment portion to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached. . The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 includes a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263 .

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid. 265 closes the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pushed backward, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved to open the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

When the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed to move the lower tray ball removal lid 265, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a remains open. , and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed rearward and then released. returns to its normal position, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate left decorative unit and plate right decorative unit]
The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200 .

The left plate decoration unit 270 includes a left plate decoration body 271 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and which has translucency, and a left plate decoration which has translucency penetrating the left plate decoration body 271. It is provided with a lens 272 and a left plate decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the left plate decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The left plate ornament 271 has a semi-circular arc projecting forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The left plate decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the left plate decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the left plate decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the left plate decoration body 271 can be decorated with light.

The left plate decoration unit 270 is connected to the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420 at its left end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The right plate decoration unit 275 includes a right plate decoration body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends in the left and right direction and has translucency, and a right plate decoration that has translucency penetrating through the right plate decoration body 276. A lens 277 and a right plate decorative substrate 278 provided behind the right plate decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The right plate ornament 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the center axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The right plate decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decorative body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the right plate decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the right plate decoration 276 can be decorated with light.

The plate right decorative unit 275 is connected to the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430 at its right end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the right plate decoration substrate 278 are lit, the entire front surface of the right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a, a step can be formed in which the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his finger on the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side swelling portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Alternatively, it can be used as a finger hold when operating an effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. In addition, the step between the left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52(a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and Fig. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from front and below. be. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is at the upper movement end position, and (b) is a effect operation from the state of (a). FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the part unit has moved to the raised position;
FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. (vibration) so that the player can participate not only in the operation of hitting the game ball B but also in the performance during the game. The effect operation section 301 has a contact operation section 302 provided above a pressing operation section 303 . In the effect operation unit 301 , the contact operation part 302 and the press operation part 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter about 5/8 the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300 .

The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface of the plate unit 200 at the center in the left-right direction and has a spherical outer shape, and the production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside and is attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and an effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). An outer periphery decoration board 320, an outer periphery board cover 325 attached to the operation part base 315 so as to cover the performance operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 from above, and an operation part relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 315. 330 and.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes the effect operation unit 350 having the effect operation unit 301, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for lifting and lowering the effect operation unit 350, and the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 for adjusting the projection force. The effect operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 by the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the production operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315 . The effect operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer circumference of the effect operation unit 300 (the periphery of the effect operation section unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward, and an annular shape having an insertion opening 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the production operation section 301 is inserted. and a unit top cover 312 . The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower sides of the operation portion base 315 . The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311 . In other words, the effect operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the effect operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled on the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

At least the upper unit cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加Further, the effect operation section cover unit 310 is connected so that the left plate decoration 271 and the right plate decoration 276 extend outward from both left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212 a of the upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 . The operation unit base 315 is covered with the unit lower cover 311 on the front and the bottom, and is covered with the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 on the top. The operation unit base 315 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped body portion 315a with an open top, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the body portion and having a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body portion 315a accommodates the effect operation portion unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

The effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange section 315b. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the peripheral substrate cover 325 .

The upper surface of the flange portion 315 b of the operation portion base 315 is positioned substantially flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 when assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

[3-5e-3. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 315 . The operation part relay board unit 330 covers the board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body part 315a of the operation part base 315, the operation part relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation part relay board 332 from behind. and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 as shown.

The operation part relay board 332 includes the effect operation part peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), button outer decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor main body 358, button middle decoration board 364, and operation buttons. It relays connection between the elevation drive motor 367 , the pressure detection sensor 373 , the elevation detection sensor 374 , the protrusion force detection sensor 375 , the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 .

[3-5e-4. Production control unit]
The effect operation section unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303. is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed tubular button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and a button body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be able to move up and down by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and arranged above the button base 354 and an annular button exterior decoration substrate 355 having a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof.

In addition, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 attaching the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. a contact sensor body 358 connected to and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353 .

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved to bulge upward, a tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. and a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351 a is formed in a shape that constitutes a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 . The upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape whose diameter is about half the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351 a (cylindrical portion 351 b ) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation portion cover unit 310 . The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351 c is locked to the button base 354 . Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side of a certain width bulges upward from the outer periphery. The contact detection member 352 is located below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is formed to bulge upward obliquely and have a flat inner surface. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 looks like a part of decoration of the button body 351 . The contact detection member 352 has flat plate-like downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends and the rear end of the outer peripheral edge. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351 a of the button body 351 . The contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punching metal to suppress the capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 can be satisfactorily controlled. It can be decorated with light emission in a normal state.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358 . As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. can be done. In other words, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 .

The button sleeve 353 has a vertically extending tubular sleeve body 353a and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a.
The button sleeve 353 is formed entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353 a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 , and the length of the sleeve body 353 a is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351 b of the button body 351 . The button sleeve 353 can upwardly transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is disc-shaped with a diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. As shown in FIG. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at symmetrical portions with respect to the center, a center hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and protruding from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center. and a pair of guide pins 354c. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough for the elevation cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat detection piece 354 d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . The locking portion 351c of the button body 351 of the button base 354 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. A pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a, and the button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable. Further, the button base 354 is vertically moved by guiding the pair of guide pins 354 c to the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 . The bottom surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365 .

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the external button decoration board 355. As shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a line on a concentric double circumference. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately lighting the LED 355a of the button exterior decoration substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. Vibration motor 356 is arranged such that its rotating shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation section 301 . Also, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation section 301 (the effect operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation section 301 . In addition, the vibration caused by the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 includes a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, and supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrodes that it has inside. The connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352 . That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrodes and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined value, but signals in multiple stages may be output according to the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor main body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352 . In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body can be detected with the effect operation unit 350 projecting upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of 351 .
Thus, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 .

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported by a effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be vertically movable. When the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like one sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation portion 303. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), it does not move further downward even if it is pressed, and is in a state in which the pressing operation cannot be performed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . Then, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. . Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pushed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing force. It is detected by sensor 373 . Thereby, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button main body 351, when the contact operation unit 302 is operated, the upper surface of the smooth spherical button main body 351 is touched. As a result, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having unevenness due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302 . Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351 , by forming minute unevenness or a plurality of streaks on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 , an arbitrary tactile sensation can be given to the contact operation part 302 . can be provided, the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player more can be provided.

In the above description, the button body 351 is transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be made opaque or translucent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351 . This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved.
Further, when the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button main body 351 can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 provided below. can entertain.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can raise and lower the production operation unit unit 350. As shown in FIG.
The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached inside the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit 350, and has a substantially circular outer circumference. A pair of cylinders arranged symmetrically, the lower ends of which are attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the upper ends of which extend upward through the operating portion base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362 and a disk-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer circumference smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353 are attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 to direct light upward. and a button interior decoration board 364 on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and urging the button base 354 upward. and a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 315 a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363 .

Furthermore, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operating button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, and the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating drive motor 367. a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 that meshes with the lifting drive gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361; and a lift cam drive gear member 370 having a central shaft 366 therethrough and rotatably mounted thereon.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is connected at the lower end to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366. When rotated, the elevating cam raises and lowers the button base 354. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 is attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a press detection sensor 373 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and an elevating mechanism base 361 that is attached to the elevation cam drive gear member 370. (Elevation cam member 371) by detecting the rotation position of the elevation detection sensor 374 to detect the elevation of the effect operation unit 350, and the elevation mechanism base 361 attached to the elevation mechanism base 361, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 of the elevation undersprung holding member A projection force detection sensor 375 that detects the projection force of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385 is provided.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a, a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 and lifting springs that penetrate the base body 361a. and a pair of through holes 361c through which the 365 can pass. The base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 .
A driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a projecting force detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. The lifting mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b. Thus, a space in which the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. As shown in FIG. A pair of through-holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through-holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, forward and rearward from the center, at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363 . A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods.

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. The lower protrusion of the upper base 363 is brought into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372 to form a space between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361 in which the lifting cam member 371 can be accommodated. can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button middle decoration substrate 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration substrate 364 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, through which the guide shaft 362 is inserted. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lower lifting spring holding members 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 374. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevation cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 . The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by 180 degrees on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see FIG. 55, etc.). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371 a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The lift cam member 371 is configured so that when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in plan view of the lift cam member 371, it extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b. is formed in The elevation cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 by the cam portion 371a by rotating, and the button base 354 (the effect operation portion unit 350) which is urged upward by the elevation spring 365. can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion projecting upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 . The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of housing the elevation cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projection into contact with the lower end of the lower projection of the upper base 363 . be able to.

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state). This press detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 from the normal state. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 detects the button base 354. The detection piece 354d can be detected to detect the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370 c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 , thereby detecting the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 . is detected.

The projection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385 d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 in the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 .

The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can vertically support the effect operation unit 350 via a button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in the front-rear direction, and the button base 354 is lifted by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation section unit 350 can be urged upward through it. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 rotates the elevation cam member 371 by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 to move the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) up and down with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310. can be made In addition, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration substrate 364 .

In the normal state, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 has the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 engaged with the engaging section 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a)). ). In this normal state, the effect operation unit 350 is positioned at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The part unit 350 does not move downward.
Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected. In addition, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation section unit 350 match, and the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

In a normal state (state in which the effect operation section unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the elevation drive gear 368 is engaged. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c while rolling from the 371c to the left part of the engaging portion 371c of the first cam 371b.

Then, when the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second cam member 371 rotates. Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the effect operation section unit 350 is in the state of the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381, although the details will be described later. can. Since the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, the effect operation unit 350 is lifted with a projecting force corresponding to the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. Can be protruded into position.

When the effect operating unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is positioned between the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam portion 371d of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation section unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moved upward, and the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 is above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. also protrudes upwards.

When the button main body 351 (pressing operation portion 303) of the effect operating unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of this raised position, the effect operating unit 350 , and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 . When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit 350 (the pressing operation part 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the button main body 351 ( Pressing of the pressing operation portion 303) is detected.

In order to return the effect operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c). is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

In addition, when returning the effect operation section unit 350 to the lowered position, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lifting spring lower holding member 385 downward to reduce the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also increases. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the operation button elevation drive motor 367 that rotates the elevation cam member 371, thereby reducing damage (failure) of the operation button elevation drive motor 367. Also, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops, and the guide pin 354c moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the effect operation section unit 350 returns to the original lowered position.

In the above description, in the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 to the first cam 371b ( An example has been described in which the button base 354 (the button main body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once by moving from the engaging portion 371c) to the second cam 371d. In a normal state where the button main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) is locked by the locking portion 371c of the 371 and is moving to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 moves the lifting cam member 371 in a plan view. You may make it rotate in the direction of rotation. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevation cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e. will move upward along the When the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, if the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 can be protruded upward at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. can be stopped. By protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, the button body 351 can be pushed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can be pushed downward. can function as

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 (operation button elevation drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operational feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be reduced.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) can be changed according to the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371. , and the degree of expectation for the game by varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first upper start port 2004 and the second start port 2005). can be suggested to the player.

At least one shallow concave portion capable of engaging the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371. As shown in FIG. As a result, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Further, when a concave portion is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is engaged with the concave portion so that the operation button elevation drive motor 367 stops the elevation cam member 371 from rotating. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Projection power adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, thereby causing the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) to protrude upward ( projection force) can be changed. The projection force adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 .

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and from the gear portion 384a An adjusting screw 384, which has a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on its outer periphery, through which a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and an adjusting screw 384, the pair of guide shafts 362 pass therethrough, and the lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365 are in contact with each other.

The protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to form a gap with the lower surface of the base body 361a. The rotation shaft of the projection force adjusting drive motor 381 protrudes into the gap between it and the base body 361a.

The adjusting screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 to the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . A screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 includes a main body portion 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b that penetrates vertically through the center of the main body portion 385a and is screwed with the screw portion 384b, and a front and rear portion of the main body portion 385a. It has spring holding recesses 385c which are provided at both ends and which are recessed downward to accommodate the lower ends of the lifting springs 365, and flat detection pieces 385d which extend upward from the front end of the body portion 385a. . The lift lower spring holding member 385 is penetrated by the guide shafts 362 at the centers of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385 d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 . The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 rotates the adjustment screw 384 by the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, thereby vertically moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 through the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 becomes smaller (see FIG. 56). reference). That is, when the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force of the lifting/lowering spring 365 that urges the effect operation section unit 350 upward can be increased, and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. As a result, the urging force that urges the effect operation section unit 350 upward by the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the upward projection force of the effect operation section unit 350 .

The detection piece 385d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the lift unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. That is, the detection piece 385d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 is maximized. As a result, when the protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is moving the lift unsprung member 385 upward, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 moves the lift unsprung member 385 upward. By stopping the upward movement of 385, further compression of the lifting spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 can be prevented.

In addition, as described above, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body. Detecting the contact or approach of an object to be detected (for example, a player's finger, etc.) to 351, the production operation unit unit 350 is protruded by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 and brought into contact with the object to be detected. Sometimes, the vertical position of the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 may be appropriately selected to vary the projecting force of the button body 351 . As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be varied, so that if the button body 351 strongly abuts, something good will happen to the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is not possible, and to increase the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, according to the game state (for example, a special lottery lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first lower starting port 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2005) By increasing or decreasing the projecting force of the button body 351 depending on the result of the lottery of the symbols, it is possible to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the biasing force by twisting the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to protrude the effect operation section unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it is impossible to use a force different from the original use. A large amount of stress will act on the compression coil spring, and there is a risk that the internal structure will deteriorate and break at an early stage.
On the other hand, in the projection force adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, by changing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, the projection force ( Since the biasing force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the lifting spring 365, and early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. It can be made to protrude stably over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 and the like. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button external decoration board, and button internal decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has a performance operation section 301 on the upper surface thereof which can be operated by the player. The effect operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 capable of being operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation section 303 capable of pressing operation. The contact operation portion 302 is provided above the pressing operation portion 303 (button main body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) that can project upward is inclined so that the upper part is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. In other words, the center of the effect operation section 301 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300 . As a result, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can easily see the effect operation section 301.例文帳に追加

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation part unit 350 is in the state of the effect. It matches the spherical surface of the operation section cover unit 310 . Further, in a normal state, even if the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation portion 303 (the effect operation portion unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament to the player, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the production operation unit 300 has a production operation unit peripheral decoration board 320 arranged below a unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer circumference of the pressing operation unit 303 (production operation unit unit 350). , an annular button external decoration substrate 355 and an inner button decoration substrate 364 are arranged inside near the outer edge of the pressing operation portion 303 . The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outside in the order of the button outer decoration board 355 and the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 centering on the inside button decoration board 364 . The LEDs 355a inside the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the button outer decoration substrate 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352, but since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, it is translucent. Therefore, the light from them can be transmitted upward (toward the player).

The production operation unit 300 can light-embellish the annular unit upper cover 312 by means of the LEDs 320 a of the production operation section peripheral decoration board 320 . In addition, the LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 can be used to decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the central portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 can be decorated with light by means of the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364. FIG.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decoration board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inner decoration board 364 are arranged in rows on the circumference, By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation portion 303 . In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged concentrically, light is emitted from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, and light is emitted from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to show the player a lighting effect that converges.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position where the pressing operation part 303 (effect operation part unit 350) is aligned with the surface of the unit top cover 312, as shown in FIG. 58(a). state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable contact operations in accordance with the player-participation type production to be executed.

As an effect (player participatory effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs voices, sound effects, and the like. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button main body 351, the process proceeds to the next performance stage. When the contact is detected, the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 emit light to decorate the button body 351, so that the player recognizes that the contact operation has been accepted. The touch operation unit 302 may be given an operational feeling. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game in which the player is advantageous) is given to the player by means of the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. You may suggest it.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351 , the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351 . As a result, it is possible to impart an operational feeling to the contact operation section 302, and to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may give a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game. good.

In addition, as an effect in the normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to prompt the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300, or a voice, sound effect, etc. is output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). The urging force of the spring 365 protrudes (pops up) upward. More specifically, in a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), the button base 354 and the effect operation unit 350 (the button main body 351 and the pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrude upward due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365 to reach the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, so that the player can be greatly surprised. It can attract a lot of attention.

After that, the game shifts to an effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303), and the player is entertained by the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303. FIG. More specifically, when the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is in the raised position and is pressed downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) is activated. When the button body 351 moves downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 , and the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373 . As a result, the pressing operation of the button main body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the presentation can be changed with the pressing operation as a trigger, and the player can be entertained by the player participation type presentation.

In addition, during the above effects, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion force (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude. may be suggested. Further, when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351 .

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is activated. The main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. As a result, the button main body 351 abuts the player's finger or the like and gives an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In this case as well, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the projection force of the button body 351, so that the player's expectations for the game may be suggested by the strength of the projection force.

In addition, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like is outside the projecting range of the upward projecting button body 351 and within a predetermined distance from the projecting button body 351. The button main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the player approaches the . As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers or the like, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the projecting force of the button body 351 is strengthened or weakened by the projecting force adjusting mechanism 380, and the degree of expectation for the game is suggested to the player by the strength of the wind pressure applied to the player's fingers or the like. You can do it.

Furthermore, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is projected with a strong projection force by the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously and a sound (projection sound) is generated, so that the projection sound surprises the player. can be done. In addition, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak projection force by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the projection of the button body 351. , the player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 suddenly protrudes.

As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the pushing force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button main body 351 (pressing operation part 303) is generally operated. It is also possible to execute an effect such that a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button is performed. Alternatively, the pushing force of the lifting spring 365 may be strengthened by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player presses the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as an effect after the effect operation section unit 350 (the button body 351) is projected, an effect may be executed in which the projecting button body 351 is touch-operated. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be touched. Also, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380. This makes it difficult to move the protruding button body 351, thereby preventing the button body 351 (contact operation) from moving. 302) can be easily operated.

In addition, as an effect for projecting the effect operation unit 350, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction so that the button base 354 The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d to project the button base 354 (button main body 351) from the lowered position to the raised position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 and the button main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is lifted and lowered. The drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in plan view, thereby moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and moving the elevation cam member 371 in the middle of the third cam 371e. may be stopped so that the upward projection of the button body 351 is stopped at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 .

In this way, even when the button body 351 is protruded halfway by the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation portion 303. Thus, the player can enjoy the player-participation type production. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied according to the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , can entertain the player.

Furthermore, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after projecting the effect operation unit 350, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. be minimized. As a result, since the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation section unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is improved. can entertain. In addition, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn. The biasing force may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be made to press the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more diverse effects can be achieved. An effect can be presented, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

In addition, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detection body is provided so that the contact of the player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at a plurality of contact stages (approach stage). A plurality of stages of threshold values corresponding to the capacitance of 352 may be provided, and the effect may be changed according to each stage. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases as the player's finger or the like approaches the button body 351 (contact detection body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. may be provided to detect in multiple stages and be utilized for production. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are away from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 and are not in contact with the button body 351, By dividing the stage into stages in which a player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, etc., and changing the performance according to each stage, even one contact detection sensor body 358 presents a variety of performances to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the above-described embodiment, as a normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 385 has been moved upward, but this is not a limitation, and as shown in FIG. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. Further, the urging force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can prevent early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lower lift spring holding member 385 .

As described above, according to the production operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for various patterns of player participation type production, the player can be entertained with various productions, and the player is bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult.

By the way, the effect operation unit 300 is provided with an annular (two circular arcs combined) effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 on the upper part of the spherical effect operation part cover unit 310, and the effect operation part outer periphery A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the effect operation section unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decoration board 320 . In addition, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operating unit 350, a button middle decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode ) comes close to the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, and the proximity of the production operation section outer circumference decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364 changes the capacitance of the sensor electrode, and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may make an erroneous detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) is provided between the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decoration board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 or the inside button decoration board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is moved by moving the production operation section unit 350 up and down. , and between the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, a shield connected to a ground (GND) that does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 allows the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, and to prevent erroneous detection in the main body 358 of the contact detection sensor.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, a plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) shows the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). and (c) is a representation in which the left plate decoration unit, the right plate decoration unit, and the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can move forward and backward. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit or the like; FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative touch detector, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right contact detection body 390L and right contact detection body 390R on the lower side of the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. A left contact detection sensor main body 391L and a right contact detection sensor main body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the top surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his or her finger or the like from the left side to the right side, when the player's finger or the like is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor main body 391L becomes detection, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-detection. becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button main body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body to change. Both right 391R are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to its original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-detection, and the electrostatic capacity of the right contact detection body 390R The capacitance has changed and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the combination of detection and non-detection of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R and the pattern of the change, the movement of the player's fingers etc. can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect contact operations with more diverse movements, and to present to the player a player-participation-type effect that allows the contact operation unit 302 to perform various contact operations. , the player-participation-type effect that operates the contact operation unit 302 can be more enjoyable. It should be noted that more complicated motions can be detected by increasing the number of contact detection bodies.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60( a ) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor body 392 . According to this embodiment, a single contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact of a human body or the like at any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state in which the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of mutually different locations. can do.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's finger or the like touches any part of the surface of the button body 351, the A contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and the accuracy of detecting contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 may be used as a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may get injured, or where there is a risk of causing annoyance to other players). A certain part, a part where there is a risk of fraudulent conduct, etc.) may be provided so that when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a caution or warning may be issued.

Further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is a switching mechanism that connects only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor body 392 between one contact detection sensor body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393. This is an example in which a portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired site (contact detection body 352). . The switching unit 394 may be "switched by a switching circuit using relays or transistors", "switched by other electronic circuits", or "a movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c)." The unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are switched along with the movement".

For example, in the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type production is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of touching by the switching part 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's finger or the like touches. good. As a result, it is possible to present to the player a player-participation-type presentation with a high game quality by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the left plate decoration unit 270, the right plate decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are configured to move forward and backward, the front side of the effect operation unit 300 is the first When the contact detection body 393a is provided and the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, and when the effect operation unit 300 and the like are retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394. You may make it switch so that it may carry out.

As a result, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is protruded (moved) forward, the contact or approach of the player is detected by the first contact detection body 393a, and the forward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped. to As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 300 or the like from unnecessarily pressing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, thereby avoiding giving the player an unpleasant feeling. be able to.

On the other hand, if the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed behind the effect operation unit 300 or the like. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second contact detection body 393b is switched to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching portion 394 when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward. Then, when the player's finger or the like is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped, and the finger or the like is released from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. is notified to the player, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is in a non-detection state, the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured due to the gap behind the effect operation unit 300 and the like, and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the contact detection body 395 for detecting the contact of the player's fingers or the like has a star-shaped outer shape to have decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is circular, polygonal, geometrical, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a shape imitating a predetermined item. A shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like may be used. Thereby, the contact detection body 395 which can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so that the appearance of the button body 351 and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, but is not limited to this, and the contact detection body can be made of metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It should be noted that the contact detection body is preferably provided on the back side of the transparent surface member so as not to be directly touched by the player's fingers or the like. can be smooth.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the button interior decoration substrate 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. A contact detection body 397 may be provided under the transparent surface member 396, and a decoration body 398 may be provided therebelow. As a result, the decoration body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the performance operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detection body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 prevents the decorative body 398 provided below from being visually recognized. Alternatively, the decoration 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396 or the like. good.

Also, the contact detection body 352 may be formed so that it cannot be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detection body include "a body formed of a transparent member" and "a body formed so as to be seen integrally with the decoration of the surface member such as the button body". As a result, since the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, it does not detect the contact of the player's finger or the like or perform a contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player-participation type effect is executed and the player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By causing the player to notice the existence of the contact detection body 352 (contact operation part 302) for the first time, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest. can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. Figure 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back.
FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. A door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422 a are mounted vertically and arranged at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side base 421 are attached to the lower front surface of the door frame left side base 421. The front side of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front surface are covered. A left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421, a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 .

In addition, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides forward the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and an upper and lower light guide member 427 in the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction, and the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction on the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame and a left-side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the inner layer 3a is partly outside. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 422b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, ie, four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 422a having the second LEDs 422b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 422b. Also, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit full-color light from the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 15 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although not shown, this door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light with appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side thereof is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 423b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the door frame left side lower decoration board 423. As shown in FIG.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, ie, 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 423a having the second LEDs 423b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two in order from the top. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to sixth from the top, and from the seventh to ninth from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit 6 first LEDs 423a divided into 3 groups and 12 second LEDs 423b divided into 4 groups in full color. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 21 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although not shown, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be caused to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A tubular holding tube 424b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the front side around the through hole 424a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of a left side upper light guide member 427 described later is inserted into the holding tube 424b of the left side upper reflector 424, thereby holding the light guide shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction. is. This holding tube 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427 projecting forward through the holding cylinder 424b, the second light guide plate 422 of the door frame left upper decorative substrate 422 facing through the through holes 424a on both upper and lower sides thereof is formed. The light from the LED 422b irradiates the light guide shaft portion 427a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides, so that the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, the left side upper reflector 424 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the front side around the through hole 425a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that protrude forward through the holding tube 425b, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof are formed. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, which faces the door frame more, irradiates the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decorative body 426. - 特許庁

Further, the left side lower reflector 425 is provided with an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating in the front-rear direction at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 426 a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding tube 424 b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding tube 425 b of the left side lower reflector 425 . In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left lower light guide member 429, are inserted from behind. The door frame left side decoration 426 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421 . In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a certain shape recessed in an arc so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. are doing.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. As shown in FIG. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft 427a passes through the holding tube 424b of the left upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . The left-side upper light guide member 427 guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left-side upper decorative substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left-side center light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . This left side middle light guide member 428 guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG.
In addition, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . The left side lower light guide member 429 guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial patterned portion of the door frame left side base 421 is the same as the color of the circular or radial patterned portion of the handle cover 295 . In addition, the color of the portion of the door frame left side base 421 outside the circular or radial pattern is the same as the color of the portion of the handle cover 295 outside the circular or radial pattern.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the part above the center in the vertical direction projects slightly forward than the part below, and the vicinity of the lower end gently curves to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end thereof is below the door window 101a and located on the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. is located above the speaker mouth 211b in the . The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is positioned outside the left side of the door frame top unit 450 . The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks like a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door-frame left-side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door-frame left-side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decoration substrate 423 are placed at a certain distance rearward from the front surface of the door-frame left-side decoration 426 . is provided, the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the door frame The left side decoration body 426 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 rearward. is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the upper left light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the middle light guide member 428 on the left side, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower light guide member 429 on the left side. As a result, the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

Also, the first LED 422 a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 , the first LED 423 a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 , the light guide shaft portion 427 a of the left side upper light guide member 427 , and the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 422b and 423b. As a result, the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a irradiate the light with an even amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 is evenly distributed. It can be decorated with light emission in a plane.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b extending along the width center in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the light from the second LED 422b or the second LED 423b projects the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, , Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to understand, and the left side of the door frame The appearance of the luminous decoration of the side decorations 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door-frame right side unit from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--E in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface and arranged vertically at regular intervals, and a door frame right side base 431. A door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and a door frame right side lower A right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and a door frame right side attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. A side decoration 435 is provided.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and a right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side lower decorative board. A right-side lower light guide member 437 that guides light from one LED 433a forward is provided.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. The left side decoration 438 is provided between the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A light-transmitting right side left lens 439 having a fitting decorative portion 439a, and a plurality of light-transmissive right side left lenses 439 and a right side base 431 of the door frame are mounted so as to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431, and penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decoration 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decoration 440 and the door frame right side base 431. A translucent right-side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440 is provided.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width on the left and right. The door frame right side base 431 has a rear end extending vertically over the entire height, and a front end extending substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and then curved rearward. After extending diagonally rearward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens 439). A plurality of reflector portions 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to the front end are provided at a portion of the height where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided. These reflector portions 431a have rear end sides that are inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a and are inclined toward the side surfaces, and have curved bottom surfaces.

In addition, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a which are provided behind the front-back direction center in the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) is a , penetrates in the left and right direction (they are recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the door-frame right-side base 431 reflect light emitted backward from a third LED 432c of a door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and a third LED 433c of a door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. The light is reflected in the direction, and the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are decorated with light (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame with a gap in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light.

On this door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Moreover, the first LED 432a having the second LEDs 432b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 432b. Moreover, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two LEDs and the remaining two LEDs. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c. and the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 21 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems. He is trying to control a total of 24 systems|strains of 3 systems|strains for 1 group above the 3rd LED433c divided into 2 groups.

Although not shown, this door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 4, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 3 groups, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 groups, and 2 The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group out of the grouped groups can be caused to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light.

On this door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs, ie, 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c are mounted. Moreover, 1st LED433a in which 2nd LED433b is provided in the upper-lower both sides is provided in the center (center between) of those 2nd LED433b. In addition, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 LEDs from 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c. and the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 27 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 can control only up to 24 systems at the maximum. Among them, 3 systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side, and the third LED 433c on the rear side ) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame. This can suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although illustration is omitted, this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 has two LEDs for supplying electric power for driving a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, two lower third LEDs 433c, and an LED driver 433d. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A clock line and a distribution cable consisting of four electric wires are connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of Six first LEDs 433a divided into four sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and two third LEDs 433c in the lower set of the two sets, each set It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity every time.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with through holes 434a penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. In addition, a cylindrical holding tube 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 434a contacts the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. Around the sides it is shaped like a dish widening forward. Thereby, the light from 2nd LED432b and 2nd LED433b can be diffused widely ahead.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434. , the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a projecting forward through the holding cylinder 434b, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 facing through the through holes 434a on both upper and lower sides thereof, The light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame irradiates the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of 435.

Further, the right side reflector 434 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 .

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinders 434b of the right side reflector 434. As shown in FIG. The tip ends of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from behind. The door frame right side decoration 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426 . In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a certain shape recessed in an arc so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. are doing.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals from above the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side upper light guide member 436 guides the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be brightly illuminated.

The right-side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are vertically spaced apart from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side lower light guide member 437 guides forward the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 by the light guide shaft portion 437a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be brightly illuminated.

The door frame right side left side decoration body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decoration holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a front end side formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 . The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door-frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is two-color-molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, in the same manner as the handle cover 295 and the door-frame left-side base 421 described above. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decoration body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a, when fitted into the decorative hole 438a, matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 . The decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is positioned to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration. Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decoration 438. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decoration part 439a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in the horizontal direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 .
The door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3 . Further, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front end side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b in the same manner as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes rightward to the right side of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 when fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 . The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 is located on the right side of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side right side decoration 440. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decoration part 441a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the colors of the circular or radial pattern portions of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are the same as those of the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned portion of the side base 421, and is outside the circular or radial patterns of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. is formed to have the same color as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the same height portion of the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed to have substantially the same height as the door frame 3 from its upper end to its lower end. The door frame right side unit 430 has an upper portion located outside the right side of the door frame top unit 450 .

The door frame right side unit 430, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded.

The door-frame right-side unit 430 has a substantially half-height portion that protrudes forward greatly from the top, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for a player seated in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacently on the right side of the island facility of the game hall to see the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it is possible to block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. By making it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, the other players can play without hesitation.

According to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433 are provided at positions that are somewhat backward from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative body 435 . is provided, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the door frame The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board 432 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration body 435 rearward. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

Furthermore, the door-frame right-side unit 430 emits light from the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433, so that the reflector portion of the door-frame right-side base 431 is illuminated. 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 that is attached can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since a part of the left and right side surfaces of the screen-like door frame right side unit 430 (portion of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) can be decorated with light, the pachinko machine 1 can be used by other players. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be made conspicuous and has a high appeal to the players.

Further, according to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the front-side LED 432b on the front side of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433 The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. Together with the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration 435 are decorated with light. Therefore, due to the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are illuminated to be decorated with light, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiates the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front side. luminous decoration or prevent it. As a result, the right-side door-frame decoration 435 and the right-side left-side door-frame decoration 438 and right-side right-side door-frame decoration 440 on the rear side can be made completely independent of each other to be decorated with light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light emitting performance with a higher performance effect.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and a light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 432b and 433b. As a result, the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with a uniform amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame right side decoration 435 has a decoration portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the horizontal direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . As a result, even if the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b causes the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a to be projected onto the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadow is not projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided at the portion where the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are located, the shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a can be obscured. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the bottom end of the.

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; (see Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and a pair of top speakers provided on both left and right sides of the pair of top center speakers. Side speakers (not shown), a box-shaped speaker box with the top center speaker and top side speakers facing diagonally downward and forward, and a door frame top decoration covering the front of the top center speaker and top side speakers A top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the body 453, a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and above the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the door frame.

The door-frame top base 451 extends laterally by approximately the same length as the distance between the door-frame left-side unit 420 and the door-frame right-side unit 430 . The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decoration 453 extends laterally in a semicircular arc along the front end of the top cover 452 in plan view. The front surface of the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 455a to emit light.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decoration substrate 456 can light-embellish the left portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

A pair of top center speakers are spaced left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as speech and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters and output high-pitched sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker and top side speakers are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 , a door frame top left decorative board 456 , a door frame top right decorative board 457 , a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame secondary of the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are sunk from the front to the rear portion of the upper inner side of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 . It is Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame is made opaque, Fig. 10 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration 271 and the plate right decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, the unit upper cover 312 and the button main body 351 of the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, a plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a unit upper cover 312, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decoration 453 are the left plate decoration board 273, the right plate decoration board 278, the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, and the door frame. Since the right side upper decoration board 432, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, these decoration boards are arranged. By properly emitting light from the LED, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, or the player can be shown a light emitting performance such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the horizontal direction. As a result, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is positioned in the center of the plate unit 200, the visual impact can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be conspicuous.

In addition, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation section 301 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous, thereby forming a single sphere. , the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be made difficult to recognize that the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be operated. This pachinko machine can be made to recognize that it is a pachinko machine 1 different from a pachinko machine, can strongly attract the interest of the player, can enhance the appealing power to the player, and can be used as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, in the plate unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation section 301 (the contact operation section 302 , and the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the gigantic sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the production operation section 301 can easily see the entire production operation section 301, and the production operation section 301 can be easily seen. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the gigantic spherical performance operation section 301, and to heighten expectations for execution of the player-participation type performance by operating the performance operation section 301.例文帳に追加At the same time, when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the performance operation unit 301, and the player participation type performance can be enjoyed by the operation of the performance operation unit 301 to increase interest. A decrease can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. FIG. 71 shows the door frame right side unit 430 as an example of a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 .

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns applied to the outer surface are formed in two colors using two types of synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. Circular and radial patterns are formed by appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the part other than the pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b. Radial patterns become difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decoration body 440, even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decoration hole 440a (decoration portion 441a) does not change.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding. By appropriately selecting and combining the color of resin), light transmittance, etc., it is possible to greatly change the appearance even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when minor changes are made, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed on the island equipment to give a colorful feeling to the players. It is possible to enhance the appeal to

Although two-color molding is shown in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the two-color molded door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The frame right side right side decoration body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a circular or radial pattern is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side are provided outside the door window 101a facing forward from the game area 5a of the door frame 3. Decorative bodies such as the surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and a polka dot decoration is formed by the two-color molding. Since the decoration body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decoration body at the same time. There is no need to apply a desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the substrate in a flat shape.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle are light-transmissive. When the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are formed in the same color with different ratios, since the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, the polka-dot circles are difficult to see, and the appearance looks as if the polka-dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle is colored white and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle is colored pink, the color difference between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b causes The polka-dot circles become clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background decorated with white polka-dots. Thus, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. Cost can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. When the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row on the island equipment, the island equipment is made colorful. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a strong impact on the players who are playing in the game hall and attracting the players.

Further, a handle cover 295 having decorations molded in two colors from a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances on a portion of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decoration 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are provided, so that the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorations to improve the appearance. can be done.

In addition, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color-molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Thus, the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be clearly seen, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layers 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. In order to prevent the inner layer 3a from being seen through from the outside, the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin having a high light transmittance for the outer layer 3b at the time of a model change. Thus, it is possible to greatly change the way of looking at the decoration of the decoration, and it is possible to easily change the appearance (decoration) without changing the shape of the decoration.

In addition, as described above, the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance makes it difficult to see the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the inner layer 3a has a pattern (pattern by shape, painting, printing, attaching a sticker, etc.). In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b. By using such a synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so the appearance (decoration) of the decoration can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the decoration. , it is possible to suppress the increase in cost for model change.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate that can irradiate the inside of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. 433, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the others, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the door frame 440 emit light, the inner side of the decorations formed on the surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 The portion of the layer 3a (portion of polka dots) can be decorated with bright light, and the outer side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light, thereby improving the appearance and allowing the player to see the right side of the door frame. The luminous decorations of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a can also illuminate the outer layer 3b. The entire side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 can be decorated with light emission, and the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are displayed neatly and the game is played. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the attention of players.

In addition, as described above, the decoration of the decorative bodies such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molding (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances. Since it is formed by molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that is visible when the LED is not lit can be made different from the decoration that is visible when the LED is illuminated, and the change in the decoration can strongly attract the player's interest. In detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, when a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is caused to emit light. Without it, only the surface-exposed portions of the inner layer 3a are visible.
On the other hand, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED directly irradiates the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion of the inner layer 3a where the hole is formed. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the part exposed to the surface and the part of the hole in the inner layer 3a can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not illuminated can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated.
On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion of the surface are luminous decoration. The part to be illuminated can be varied, and the decoration to be illuminated can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be made different by the light emission of the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by causing the LED to emit light according to the game state, the change in the decoration of the decorative body informs the player of the arrival of a chance or the change of the hitting operation (for example, "right hitting"). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of suggesting and capable of various performances.

In addition, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) have different projection amounts in the front-rear direction, Since the pachinko machine 1 can give different impressions (appearances) when viewed from the left front and from the right front, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player passes in front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is different from that of the previous excursion, thereby attracting interest in the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appealing power to attract players who are wandering around the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 to select the pachinko machine 1 to play. .

[3-10. Arrangement and system of LEDs in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement of each LED provided on the door frame 3 and the control system will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73 and the like. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner in a front view for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player's rotating operation. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of an automobile steering wheel.

The handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a whose front side is covered with a handle front lens 185. Between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a, a handle decoration substrate 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided. is provided. A handle cover decorative substrate 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. As shown in FIG.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a divided into these five groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and the LEDs 184a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a row on the handle cover decorative substrate 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 on the bottom right and . The LEDs 293a divided into these six groups are controlled in 18 systems by an LED driver 293b, and the LEDs 293a in each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, so that the light is emitted to rotate around the handle 195, and the light is emitted toward the center of the handle 195. A player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated and a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195.例文帳に追加In addition, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be illuminated by the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293. FIG.

Further, the door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view.
The door frame 3 includes the plate left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decorative body 276, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decoration substrate 273 behind the plate left decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decoration substrate 278 behind the plate right decoration 276, Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 behind door frame left side decoration 426, door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decoration 435 A side lower decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, four LEDs 273a are mounted on the front surface of the plate left decorative substrate 273 in a row in the horizontal direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a of the plate right decorative substrate 278 to be described later to emit light. (illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 273a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by an LED driver, and the LEDs 273a of each group can emit light in appropriate full colors.

The plate right decorative board 278 has four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 278a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the plate left decorative board 273, and the LEDs 278a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted vertically at regular intervals, and two LEDs 422a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 422a. It has eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for driving a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The eight second LEDs 422b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight from the top. It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 422c. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two of each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. It has 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 423b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled in 21 systems by an LED driver 423c. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a on the front surface. It has eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. In addition, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 emits light from a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. LED driver 432d. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The eight second LEDs 432b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight from the top. It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The first LED 432a divided into two groups, the second LED 432b divided into three groups, the third LED 432c divided into two groups, and the third group divided into two groups in the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 A set of third LEDs 433c on the upper side of the LEDs 433c is controlled by 24 systems by an LED driver 432d. It can emit light in full color.

On the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a on the front surface. 12 mounted second LEDs 433b, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. and an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top. , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. Further, the rear four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 groups, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the 2 groups , LED driver 433d, and the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c of each set can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 423 provided on the right side of the door window 101a are used. The substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are formed in a shape asymmetrical with respect to the lateral center of the door window 101a. In addition, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

The door-frame left-side upper decorative board 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decorative board 423, and the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433 are mounted on the respective front surfaces. While the numbers of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b are the same, the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72 A system connected by a chain line or a two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the lighting pattern of the LEDs for performing the lighting effects.

On the door frame top center decorative board 455, there are six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, the LEDs 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. and an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled in nine systems by an LED driver, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface with a left-right opening. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface with a left-right direction opening. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 passes through the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The light guide shaft portion 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are arranged to form the opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426. The light is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect of brightly emitting dots in front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. A player can be surprised by a light-emitting effect of flashing spot light.

In the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the door frame left side lower Second LED 423b of decorative board 423, second LED 432b of door frame right side upper decorative board 432, second LED 433b of door frame right side lower decorative board 433, LED 455a of door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board The LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are appropriately illuminated to light-embellish the entire outer circumference of the door window 101a, or to make the light move along the outer circumference of the door window 101a. can be shown to or played by the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the system of LEDs connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. In FIG. 72, the system of the LEDs connected by the dashed line allows the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to perform planar light emission (surface light emission). can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transferred to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. By the shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is guided to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Therefore, compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the parts of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be illuminated brightly with high brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 And even if the part of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 is spot-lighted with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the performance image, the decorative body, etc. within the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 projecting forward (connecting the front ends projecting forward in an arc shape in plan view). Since it is provided on a straight line in the vertical direction, the light of the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and is emitted behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and by emitting spot light with high brightness, other players can be attracted to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, according to the door frame 3, the parts for spot light emission are provided in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 which protrude forward outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player does not block the light of the spot light emission because the spot light emitting portion is located outside the player. As a result, when the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are spot-lighted, even other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the high-intensity spot light. Therefore, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the interest of the players can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine in the game hall can be used to select the pachinko machine to play. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of attracting players who are wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, on both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422 a, first LED 423 a, first LED 432 a, first LED 433 a) for spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) preferably belong to the same system. As a result, both sides sandwiching the light guide pins (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED Since the surface LEDs have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation portion 302 in the effect operation portion 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the upper surface. A performance operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 is provided. This performance operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The performance operating section peripheral decoration board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decoration board 321 and a rear decoration board 322 .

18 LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 in the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321, 6 are spaced apart on the circumference near the inner periphery, and 3 are spaced apart on the circumference between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. , and the remaining nine are spaced on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining thirteen LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 in the effect operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the thirteen LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322, four are provided on the circumference near the inner circumference, two at intervals near both ends of the arc, and three are provided midway between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. They are spaced on the circumference, and the remaining six are spaced on the circumference near the outer circumference, three by three near the ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decoration substrate 321 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. are divided into three sets of one piece each, and three sets of three pieces each of the nine pieces on the outer circumference in the circumferential direction, for a total of nine sets. The 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decoration board 322 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. There are 3 sets of 3 pieces each, and 2 sets of 9 pieces near each end of the outer circumference. That is, on the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled in 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to this effect operation unit peripheral decoration board 320, by appropriately emitting light from the 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, the effect operation unit 301 emits light such that the light rotates or emits light such that the light concentrates at the center. It is possible to show the player a performance or a light emission performance in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 3 extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a on one side and the other in the left-right direction so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction differs from each other. A door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration are provided. Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted and door frame left side lower decorations on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted behind each of 435 A substrate 423, a door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 and forward Light guide shaft portion 427a of left side upper light guide member 427, light guide shaft portion 428a of left side middle light guide member 428, light guide shaft portion 429a of left side lower light guide member 429, right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the right side of the door frame. The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are caused to emit light, so that the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are illuminated. It is possible to make planar light emitting decoration (surface light emission), and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward passes through the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is radiated forward from the front ends (front end surfaces) of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. Corresponding to the tip of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in the frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 You can make the part where you are in a point-like light-emitting decoration (spot light emission).

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 are The second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b are caused to emit light appropriately, so that the door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting decorated in a plane, or a part of the left-side door-frame decoration 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting, or the left side of the door frame may be decorated. The entire side decoration body 426 and the right side decoration body 435 of the door frame can be illuminated in a planar manner and a part thereof can be decorated in a point manner, so that the player can see various lighting effects. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and keeps the player entertained, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are divided, and the door frame right side A plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the upper side decoration board 432 and the lower right side decoration board 433 of the door frame are symmetrical to each other. Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems, the left side of the door frame Lighting patterns of the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the decorative body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side. , for example, the data for the left side of the door frame decoration 426 may be diverted to the data for the right side of the door frame 435, or the left side of the door frame decoration 426 and the door frame Since it is possible to create data with the same flow on the right side decorative body 435 side, the labor involved in creating lighting pattern data can be simplified (with the same creation time ) It becomes easier to construct more complicated lighting pattern data, and it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects with high effects. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting a sufficient performance effect for the lighting performance of the door frame left side decorations 426 and the door frame right side decorations 435 on both the left and right sides of 101a.

Moreover, since the two second LEDs 422b, second LEDs 423b, second LEDs 432b, and second LEDs 433b provided with the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a interposed are the same system. , so as to sandwich the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, the light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, 2nd LEDs 423b, 2nd LEDs 432b, and 2nd LEDs 433b provided in the are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light from the respective second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b light guide shaft portion 427a and guide shaft portion 427a. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a become thin so as to cancel out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are planarly decorated with light emission by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 433b. The first LED 432a and the first LED 433a light-embellish the portions corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portions 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a in a dotted manner. As a result, it is possible to show the player a lighting effect that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, such as a planar light and a partial light in a dot shape, and the light is bright in a dot shape. The player's interest can be strongly attracted by the light emission effect, etc., and the player can be surprised by the light emission effect, in which the pachinko machine does not have a conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the horizontal direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower side on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrates 433 are asymmetrical to each other, at first glance, the left side of the door frame upper decorative substrate 422, the lower left side of the door frame decorative substrate 423, the upper right side of the door frame decorative substrate 432, and the right side of the door frame. Since the side lower decorative board 433 can be identified, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid mistaking the lower right side decorative substrate 433, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, using the door frame 3 as an example, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decorative substrate 273, the plate right decorative substrate 278, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The upper side decoration board 432, the lower door frame right side decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used as the decoration board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the LED drivers and connectors of colors other than white that are attached to the decoration board are attached to the rear side of the board. I'm trying As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decoration board is reflected forward, so that the decorations in the front can be illuminated more brightly, and the light from the front (player side) is reflected. This makes the decorative substrate inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has a large number of decorative boards, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that each decorative board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 includes a character identification unit 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numerals, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b using different colors (indicated by shades of different shades in FIG. 74). and have

More specifically, as the character identification portion 7a, the character "bottom left" is displayed on the dish left decorative board 273, the character "bottom right" is displayed on the plate right decorative board 278, and the character "upper left" is displayed on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. , the letters "lower left" on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the letters "upper right" on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the letters "lower right" on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied substantially over the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is not provided on the entire rear surface, but partially so as not to interfere with the soldering of the LEDs and the like mounted on the decorative substrate. .

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decoration board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example. The decorative substrate may also be provided with identification portions 7 such as the character identification portion 7a and the color identification portion 7b.

In the above-described embodiment, the identifying section 7 includes both the character identifying section 7a and the color identifying section 7b. Alternatively, only the color identification section 7b may be provided.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the identification part 7 (the character identification part 7a and the color identification part 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to make a decoration board with a similar shape. This makes it possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work and to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the front side of the decoration board can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decoration board The light is reflected forward on the front surface of the decoration board, so that the decorations in front can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), thereby improving the appearance. can do better.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is provided over substantially the entire decoration board, the desired color can be obtained by just looking at a part of the decoration board. ) can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of kinds of decorative substrates are superimposed during assembly, if a part of the decorative substrate is visible, the desired decorative substrate can be easily found. can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification part 7b is different for each decoration board, when preparing the decoration boards required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly, the same color can be used. When there is a decorative board provided with the identification portion 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared redundantly. Alternatively, when the colors are insufficient in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative board that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decoration substrates necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decoration substrate is prepared or the prepared decoration substrate is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to surely prepare the required number of decorative substrates, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification portion 7a as the identification portion 7 for distinguishing from the other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the operator can read the characters of the character identification portion 7a. By doing so, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front and rear surfaces of each decoration board are white and the identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface, the decoration provided in front of the decoration board is highly transparent. Also, the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decoration can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decoration board. is possible, the decorative body can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the player can be entertained by the light emission performance with high performance effect, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decoration board so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance due to being visible, and improve the appearance of the decoration (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by being provided on the back surface of the decorative board, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the labor of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Effects of door frame]
According to this embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired portion to detect the player's approach or contact is detected. and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are switched by the switching unit 394, and when the player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect a change in capacitance, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with a desired part, Control means such as the main control board 1310 , the peripheral control board 1510 , the peripheral control section 1511 , and the effect display control section 1512 can execute predetermined control according to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching portion 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided at the other parts is prevented. is cut, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 provided in the other part changes due to the player approaching or touching the other part, the contact detection body 393 is Since the switching unit 394 has disconnected the connection, the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at the desired portion can be reliably detected. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection.

As described above, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 among the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions. It is possible to detect capacitance with one contact detection sensor body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. In the control means of (1), the number of channels involved in detection of the player's approach or contact can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for presentation can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more production means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, production display devices, etc.) by the control means, the increase in the production means allows the player to enjoy more diverse productions. It is possible to present the game, make it difficult for the player to get bored, sufficiently entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at the desired parts by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. Connects to the contact detection sensor main body 392, detects the player's approach or contact with a desired part, and controls the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by the means, while monitoring a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, the number of channels that can be used for production can be relatively reduced. The number can be increased, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

Further, since the capacitance of a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor main body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhancing the appeal to the player. can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection bodies 393 can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting it to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . can be connected, compared to the case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts can be reduced. can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body can be eliminated. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the 392, and it is possible to facilitate the realization of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided. are dispersedly arranged, and when a player-participation type performance is executed in which a plurality of dispersedly arranged contact detection bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor body 392 is operated by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player touches in order. By switching the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the , it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection bodies 393 in order. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. Then, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of patching metal, the player side of which is covered with the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to 351 (the effect operation unit 350).

In this way, when the player's approach or contact with the effect operation section unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section lifting and lowering are performed. A predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button main body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button middle decoration board 364, and the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380, so that the player is entertained by the effect. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. It can be made to function as a contact operation part. Since the effect operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. Since various performance operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine having an operation button that can only be operated by pressing, and can be used for other pachinko machines. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players by being differentiated from other machines.

In addition, according to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a predetermined effect is output to the player side. Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and output a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player to the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) to the contact thereof in multiple steps, the effect corresponding to each step is output. By doing so, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection device having electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be used. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal to the player.

In addition, as described above, the operation unit can perform a variety of effect operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of performance operations, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to make the player enjoy the player-participation type performance, and to reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is made of a punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes, the player can easily touch the button main body 351 through the plurality of holes. It is possible to reduce the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in a state of approach or non-contact, and to avoid erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 . Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in the capacitance. It is possible to widen the range for detecting the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350). As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. When the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 (the button body 351) by executing the player participation type performance. When requested, since the contact detection body 352 covered with the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing in the player participation type performance can be made difficult to miss, and the player can surely participate in the player participation type performance. The effect can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. The light emitting effect from the LEDs 364a of the middle decoration board 364 can be output to the player side, and the player can surely enjoy the light emitting effect and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be pressed is provided with the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. 352 can reinforce the effect operation unit 350, and even if the player strongly presses or hits the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) when performing a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be made difficult to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the effect operation part unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the effect operation part unit 350 can be operated by pressing the effect operation part unit 350 without worrying about the player. It is possible to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, and the plate thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be made thinner compared to the case where the contact detection body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, the space for providing the contact detection body 352 can be easily secured, the contact detection body 352 can be easily provided, the degree of freedom in design can be increased, and the appeal to the player is higher. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal. The button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) can be easily made into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach or contact, and the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed is covered by the button body 351. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the contact detection body 352 formed with a plurality of holes, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the contact detection body 352 is formed with a plurality of holes. is used as an operation unit, the button main body 351 can be operated without a sense of incongruity, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed by entertaining the performance.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 which is easy to clean.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect The performance output through (via) the operation section unit 350 can be surely enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since it is provided, the effect means is covered by the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection body 352 (the effect operation unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly put together. To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being easily provided at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 with a performance operating unit 350 and a performance means or the like having such functions and effects and capable of being differentiated from other pachinko machines. can be made easier.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) provided to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, so that the player approaches the effect operation unit 350. Or it can detect contact. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it contacts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation section unit 350 protrudes in , the player can be presented with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by a performance not found in the conventional pachinko machine, to strongly attract the player's interest to the performance operation unit 350, and to the player. It is possible to reliably make the user notice the projection of the effect operation unit 350. - 特許庁

When the effect operation section unit 350 is projected, if the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction of the upper end portion of the lifting spring 365 (upward), the lifting spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the lift spring 365 is moved in a direction (downward) away from the upper end portion side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 is weakened and the bias force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, it is possible to change the urging force of the effect operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 . In this way, since the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded with various projecting forces, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by physical force, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the effect operation can be performed. It is possible to entertain the performance by the protrusion of the part unit 350, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the projecting force of the effect operation unit 350 is changed in accordance with the game state, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 with a finger or the like, the effect operation unit 350 is moved with a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, and the player can strongly feel that something good is happening (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous), and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the expectation for.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 is the pressing operation unit 303 capable of pressing operation, when the player participatory effect is executed, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 to perform the game. It is possible to make the player participate in the player-participation type performance, and to entertain the pressing operation of the performance operation section unit 350, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, it is possible to operate the effect operation unit 350 at any time. When the player participatory effect of pressing the effect operating unit 350 is executed, the effect operating unit 350 is protruded by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, so that the player participatory effect is performed by effect images, sounds, etc. Even without guiding the execution start of the performance, the player can be made to quickly recognize the start of execution of the player participation type performance, and the motivation for the pressing operation of the performance operation part unit 350 can be increased to perform the player participation type performance. can entertain you even more.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 350 is protruded by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected using a drive motor. As a result, the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded easily and vigorously, and the effects described above can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity varies depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different protrusion force for each threshold. becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages. By projecting with a projecting power, it is possible to present a more diverse performance to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of it and to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is popped up by executing the player participation type effect, so that the player can enter the effect operation unit 350 which is provided so that the player can advance and retreat. approaches or touches, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player of the effect operation unit 350 touches changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the contact due to the approach or contact of the player is detected. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be captured, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected.
Then, by detecting the contact detection sensor main body 358 or moving forward or backward (pressing) of the production operation unit 350 by the player, the production operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320, the button outer decoration board 355, the production operation part lifting mechanism 360, the inside button decoration board 364, the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600 and other effect means execute a predetermined effect. In other words, when the player advances or retreats the effect operation unit 350 or approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. can function as On the other hand, when the player advances and retreats (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so the effect operation unit 350 can be made to function like a effect operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, since it is possible for the player to perform a variety of performance operations, the player can enjoy various performance operations by executing a player participation type performance that enables the player to perform the performance operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type presentation, thereby suppressing the decline of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 provided near the portion of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (under the upper surface portion 351a). , the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detection body 352 (the button body 351) and the player. It is possible to execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact thereof in multiple stages, the production can be presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present more diverse performances to the player, to prevent the player from getting tired of the game, and to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation (non-contact operation, A sense of operation can be given to the contact operation), and the player can enjoy the performance operation more.

Furthermore, the player is provided with a production operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressable), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350. Therefore, in the player-participating production, the player has an operation (pressing operation) to advance and retreat the production operation unit 350, an operation to approach or touch the production operation unit 350 with a finger or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc., and the variety of operations can increase a player's willingness to participate in the player participation type performance, and facilitate participation in the player participation type performance. can be done. When the player participates in the player-participation type production, various operations using the production operation section unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest.

In addition, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 to the locking part 371c of the elevation cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the effect operation unit 350 is locked so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, by making the effect operating unit 350 unable to move forward and backward by the guide pin 354c and the elevation cam member 371 until the effect to move the effect operating unit 350 forward and backward is executed, the effect operating unit 350 350 can be prevented from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the arbitrarily moving or swinging of the performance operating unit 350, thereby making the performance by the performance operating unit 350 more enjoyable. can be made available.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is hard to be seen by a player, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, an output circuit, etc. are separated, Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be matched with the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. , and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player can attach the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the decoration 398. When a finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398. changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect is executed in which light is emitted to the player side by the external button decorative board 355, the internal button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. Therefore, the player side The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 by the light emitted to the button, and the executed performance can entertain the player.
At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 is detected by the button body 351 or the contact detection body 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is a part of the decoration portion. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be compared with the button external decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (effect) is blocked, the player will not be bothered by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the player, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effects of the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 in a good state, so that the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button outside covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected. Since the decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decorative body 398 is designed to irradiate the player with light, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 can be attached to the effect operation section 301 (contact operation section). 302), and the player can be provided with a feeling of light operation. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type production is executed, the player's fingers or the like are made to approach or contact the button main body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 approaches or contacts the finger or the like. Upon detection of contact, an effect is executed by the external button decorative board 355, the internal button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398, thereby allowing the player to participate in the player participation type effect, and allowing the player to participate in the player participation type effect. You can enjoy the type production.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's finger or the like are detected. Since it is possible to change the effects of the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, or the decoration 398 according to the distance from the button outer decoration board 355, the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc. It is possible to change the performance by the decorative board 364 inside the button or the decorative body 398, so that the player can see a more colorful performance, and the colorful performance makes it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

In addition, it is designed to detect a change in capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the external decoration board 355, the button interior decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 changes, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 is not affected by the game. The pachinko machine 1 that can easily detect the approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is adapted to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be a conductive member. When the contact detection body 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and the vapor deposition film can be thickened to have a metallic luster so that it looks like a part of the decoration. can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punching metal having a design like a star or a heart, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 look like a part of decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detection bodies 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable from the player's side, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacity is increased by the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (surface side). Depending on the change, the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect presentation means such as the effect display device 1600 produce a predetermined effect. Contact detection body 395 etc. (including contact detection body 352, left contact detection body 390L, right contact detection body 390R, contact detection body 393, and contact detection body 397, etc.) for presenting the , the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact detection body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and high appeal to players. In addition, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and an effect is presented according to the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 and the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. Since a predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. As a result, the button main body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation section 301 . Since the contact detection body 395 or the like that can be seen through the button body 351 has a design property, the effect operation unit 301 looks like it has a design property. The pachinko machine 1 having the operation part 301 can give a strong impact to a player and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being differentiated from other pachinko machines. In addition, as described above, the contact detection body 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, so that the contact detection body 395 and the like (the button main body 351) can strongly arouse interest in the player. It is possible to heighten expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (performance operation section 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participatory performance for operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, since the contact detection body 395 or the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button main body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape with a design, at first glance, depending on the player, the effect presentation It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the presence of the effect operation unit 301 (the button main body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player-participation-type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is activated by the contact detection body 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or touch the button body 351. It is possible to make the player notice that it is the operation unit 301, and to give the player unexpectedness to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participatory effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detection body 395 or the like is stopped. Since the performance is presented by the performance presenting means by changing the electric capacity, the player can be surprised, and the presented performance can amuse the player and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means in accordance with the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like to the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like is presented. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized. In addition, since the effect is presented in accordance with the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 and the like, the player's fingers and the like approaching the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 and the like can cause contact. Since it is possible to detect the interval (distance) by dividing it into multiple stages, by presenting an effect according to each stage, it is possible to present a more colorful effect to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult to get tired of.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detection body 395 or the like, Designability can be imparted to the contact detection body 395 or the like, deterioration in appearance due to the contact detection body 395 or the like can be prevented, and the contact detection body 395 or the like can be made conspicuous, and the above effects can be achieved. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a device having designability without forming the contact detection body 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed in a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the manufacturing cost of the contact detection body 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button main body 351, the contact detection body 395 and the like are prevented from being contaminated with dust, food and drink, etc., and cleaning is easy. can be More specifically, since the contact detection member 395 or the like is made of a material having unevenness such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and it is troublesome to clean the dirt. However, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the button main body 351, even if the contact detection body 395 and the like is made of a punching metal having unevenness, the button body 351 This makes it possible to prevent dirt from adhering, and to reduce the burden on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as it is easy to clean.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact detection bodies 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button main body 351 so that the player does not touch the contact detection bodies 395 and the like, the contact detection bodies 395 and the like are made of a metal vapor deposition film or the like. When a material such as foil stamping that enhances the design is used, it is possible to prevent early wear due to touch by the player, and to increase the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detection body 395 and the like. Since it is possible to use an object that does not feel good to the touch or an object that gives discomfort to the player as the sensing element 395 or the like, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the material used for the contact sensing element 395 or the like, and to meet the needs. The contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed from suitable materials.

In addition, when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like to change the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button main body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the player brings his/her finger or the like closer to or touches the button main body 351. can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the actions of fingers and the like.

In addition, an effect is presented to the player through the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., and when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395, etc. , the button main body 351, the contact detection body 395, and the like are executed, the effect presented to the player is executed. can be provided, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like, and touches the contact detection body 352. When the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area is detected by (contact detection sensor main body 358), a plurality of LEDs 355a of button outer decoration board 355 and a plurality of LEDs 364a of button inner decoration board 364 emit light to play through button body 351. A light emission effect in which light is emitted to the player, a effect in which the player's finger or the like that is in contact with the button body 351 is vibrated by the vibration motor 356, and a projection upward of the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. , the button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can enjoy the game. can let Also, at this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the player can be surprised and amused by the effects. , and the willingness to operate the button body 351 can be enhanced. Then, when the player's finger or the like touches the button body 351 and moves the finger or the like appropriately to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation portion 303, so that the contact detection body The player can be entertained with a variety of performance operations by the contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351, and the player is less likely to get bored and is interesting. can be suppressed.

Also, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body 351. The approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a can be detected, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, so that the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look better.

In addition, on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, and the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360 are provided, so that the player can receive light and light through the button body 351. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. can be easily imparted, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so that it can be opened and closed; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.例文帳に追加

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570, based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653, and the door frame hooks 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The body frame base unit 500 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the horizontal direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left, right, and rearward directions.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e in the front view, and a substrate unit is inserted in the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view. A circular speaker opening 501g for facing forward the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620, and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

Further, the body frame base 501 has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch is depressurized and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . Further, the body frame base 501 has a body frame open switch for detecting opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame open switch is attached. there is When the body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch is depressing and can detect the opening of the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. A detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 .

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this manner, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511 a that penetrates vertically on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion in front view and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge first body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded profile.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a back perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. In this state, when the handle 195 is rotated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 has a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the side of the first rail cover 554 is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. As shown in FIG.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 91).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the top surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the top end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from behind to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the center of the delivery blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically along the left side of the rear view to the lower end. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585 , the first transmission gear 586 , the second transmission gear 587 , and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581 and covered with a dispensing device front lid 583 on the front side. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 has a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, and three blade pieces 589a are provided at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a is arranged so that the distance between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the portion extending toward the rotating shaft from above in the payout passage 580a and then extending rightward in rear view. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removing movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 89).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down faster.

In this way, in the state in which the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b by the force of the contact. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B is prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the back cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball extraction passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the In addition, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings.
As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of Game Ball B in Payout Unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full by voice (for example, ``Please remove the ball! stop temporarily until

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are ejected from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball extraction lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 92(b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The substrate unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the lower outer frame assembly 40 through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guiding part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guiding part 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the ink is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 96) and
The payout control board 633 activates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 .
The back cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 97(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails and the like as viewed from above, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 100(a) viewed from below. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right side wall 552e) with a length of about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. . The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guiding portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur.
On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the clogged place can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and an overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is inclined to be lower, and part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g. and a discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is overflowed. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is flattened rearward from a low position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a. It extends in a shape.
The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. In the following, the container-shaped area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 as well. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h whose front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by releasing it to a wide area of the tank rail 553 .

In addition, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outer left portion of the rear wall 552c of the tank rail 553 in front view. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not fall backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the position about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end of the tank rail 553 (right end in front view) is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )are doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a stepwise manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be avoided. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned to Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

In addition, on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since it is provided with a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be distant from the ball tank 552 to which game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B can be prevented from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, a second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine provided with the tank rails and the like of the second embodiment, viewed from behind and showing an enlarged portion of the tank rails. Fig. 107(a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 106 together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 107 as seen from the front, and (c). 2 is a rear perspective view of the tank rail and the like in (a). FIG. Fig. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the front, and Fig. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carka line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in cross section. The tank rail 553A of the second embodiment, which is different from the above, has a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball straightening member 556A in addition to the tank rail 553A. , the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, and the same components will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560 . The tank rail 553A extends leftward in a groove shape that opens upward. The tank rail 553A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A in front view, and a A ball straightening member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stop member 557 capable of blocking the circulation of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction downstream of the bulging portion 553b. The circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream (on the ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A; and an opening 555c penetrating through the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A at the portion where the meandering portion 553c is provided. Straightening pieces 556a of a ball straightening member 556A, which will be described later, are inserted through the openings 555c from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A extends back and forth at its upstream end side and is attached rotatably around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. It has flat plate-like rectifying pieces 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking down the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row. The game ball B is restrained from moving rapidly to the downstream side, thereby preventing the occurrence of ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball straightening member 556A is positioned below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball straightening member 556A is attached is It is possible to prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, the weight of the wire causes the game ball B to contact the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A. may not be able to rotate upward, and there is a risk that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exhibited. In contrast, in this embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted to prevent ball biting and ball bite in the tank rail 553A. The occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves first to the downstream side, ball jamming is likely to occur. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, thereby preventing the upper game ball B from moving downstream first. can be suppressed, and the occurrence of ball jamming can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wire from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. Arranging the terminal board (for example, the external terminal board 558) to which the electric wire is connected or near the control board, or arranging the terminal board or the control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (the ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, a third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as seen from the rear right. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as viewed from the rear left. FIG. 113(a) is a rear view of the body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and FIG. 113(b) is a left side view of the body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 114(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114(b). Fig. 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of (a) from the lower right back. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 116 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 116 and viewed from the rear.

The tank rail and the like of the third embodiment are similar to the tank rail and the like of the first embodiment (the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stop member 557), a protective cover 559 for covering the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added.

The tank rails and the like of this embodiment are attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extend left and right into a box-like ball tank 552 that is open upward. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 above the portion where it is located, is open upward, and extends leftward in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 has a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

The tank rail 553 has an opening on the bottom surface of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion that decreases in height toward the downstream side) so that dirt and dust in the tank rail 553 can drop. A plurality of portions 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided at portions below a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball straightening member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d is opened downward and rearward of the tank rail 553, extends to the left and right, and is formed in a size that the game ball B cannot pass through. When the game ball B exists on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly visually recognized from behind through the opening 553d. Also, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's finger, a thin stick, or the like through the opening 553d. As a result, ball clogging occurring at that portion can be eliminated through the opening 553d. In addition, through the opening 553d, the ball straightening member 556 can be lifted through the game ball B of the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail or the like is located to the left of the ball tank 552 and closes a predetermined range above the right end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends leftward with a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. A second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part from the part spaced between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 of the tank rail 553 to the left end, and the first rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 A ball straightening member 556 provided between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stop member 557 provided near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. and a protective cover 559 covering the second rail cover 555 from the middle in the left-right direction to the middle in the left-right direction across the ball rectifying member 556 .

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. .

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the side of the first rail cover 554 is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a), etc.).

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked up and down are arranged in one row. When trying to overtake the game balls B in the lower stage, the game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball clogging). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is circulated in the tank rail 553 in two stages, the game ball B on the upper stage comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a, By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent the player from overtaking the game ball B on the lower side. As a result, the game balls B on the lower side first move to the downstream side, and the game balls B on the upper side move after that, so that the game balls B can be aligned in one row. At this time, since the game ball B on the upper side presses the straightening piece 556a from below, the ball straightening member 556 moves so that the straightening piece 556a moves upward, and the game ball on the upper side due to its own weight The ball B can be pushed downward, and the vertical swing of the ball straightening member 556 (straightening piece 556a) can promote the movement of the game ball B on the upper side to the lower side, as well as the tank rail. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the relevant portion of 553 (the portion whose height decreases toward the downstream).

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

The protective cover 559 includes a strip-like top plate portion 559a extending left and right, a flat plate-like rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. It has a flat plate-like front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front side and the left side thereof, and a flat plate-like guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The guide plate portion 559d is formed such that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left, and the rear end of this portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover 559 is positioned so that the top plate portion 559a covers the upper portion from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction when assembled to the main body frame 4. A space is formed between the spherical straightening member 556 and the spherical straightening member 556 so that the spherical straightening member 556 can swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG.

The front plate portion 559 c extends rightward from the top plate portion 559 a at its right end, and extends to the ball tank 552 along the tank rail 553 . The guiding plate portion 559d projects forward from the front plate portion 559c at a portion on the front side of the top plate portion 559a with a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and is formed to be able to guide the game ball B leftward. It is The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the upper end of the tank rail 553 is inclined. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap between the rear surface of the payout base 551 and the game ball B, which cannot enter.

The protective cover 559 can prevent contact with the ball straightening member 556 from the outside in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be checked by inserting a thin rod into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 and contacting it from below, or by inserting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 through the opening 553d. It can be confirmed by pushing it upward by lifting the game ball B, for example.

In addition, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B, which has entered behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, to the left by the guide plate portion 559 d so that it can be discharged to the outside from the left side surface of the body frame 4 . .

In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, the protective cover 559, etc. are made of a transparent material. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

In addition, since the upper side of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is possible to prevent dirt, dust, etc. from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

In addition, since the top of the tank rail 553 is covered by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, the ball straightening member 556 and the game ball B cannot be touched from above. Therefore, when dirt or dust adheres to the game ball B or the like, it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, and the like. It is significant that a plurality of openings 553d are provided at the bottom of the . More specifically, when the ball straightening member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553 is covered with dirt or dust, the game ball B inside is touched through the opening 553d, and the game ball B or the game ball B is touched through the opening 553d. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be shaken by pressing, the dirt, dust, etc. adhering to the game ball B or the like can be dropped. Garbage, dust, etc. dropped from the game ball B or the like can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the body frame 4 , the portion where the tank rail 553 extends leftward at a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction is provided behind the external terminal plate 558 , so that the wire connection terminal 558 a of the external terminal plate 558 is provided. When the electric wire connected to the ball contacts the ball straightening member 556 from above, the ball straightening member 556 rotates upward due to the weight of the wire even if the game ball B contacts the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556. There is a possibility that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the sphere rectifying member 556 cannot be exhibited sufficiently.

In addition, since the wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 is connected to a wire whose tip is stripped of the coating, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, the wire connection terminal If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to 558a is insufficient, there is a possibility that the remaining game ball B may cause a short circuit.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball straightening member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball straightening member 556. can do. As a result, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted to allow the ball to move within the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, if for some reason an electric wire is pulled out from the external terminal plate 558 and the tip of the wire comes into contact with the game ball B existing behind the external terminal plate 558, a short circuit will occur and necessary information will be sent to the game hall computer. It becomes impossible to receive it, and an error occurs in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 is provided with the guide plate portion 559d, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason is guided to the left and It can be discharged outside from the left side of the frame 4 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal plate 558, thereby preventing the occurrence of a short due to the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding short-circuiting of electric wires, it is possible to ensure that the computer (hall computer) in the game hall receives the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the game ball B is discharged to the left side of the body frame 4 by the guide plate portion 559 d of the protective cover 559 , the game ball B can be discharged behind the body frame 4 . It is possible to avoid the occurrence of troubles such as disconnection or short-circuit due to contact with various electric wires and wiring provided on the side.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, a substrate unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. FIG. 119(a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a board unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) when viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) when viewed from the rear. FIG. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the squiggly line in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku-ku line in (a), and (c) is a ) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface of the front base 661 attached to the rear side. A rear base 662, and an out ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B ejected downward from the game board 5 flow, and a game through which the out ball passage 663 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects balls B one by one, a ball extraction guide part 627 that receives and guides the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to the right in front view, The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide part 627 is circulated, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball removal discharge passage 665 are closed. and a passageway wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 as shown.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open forward and elongated in the left and right direction. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction. A ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are made of transparent members. Accordingly, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be well visually recognized from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, making it easy to check ball clogging or the like. there is

The out ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of a flat plate-like partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, and is open at the front. The front end is closed by front base 661 .

The out-ball passage 663 is open upward at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends in the left-right direction. Out-ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in a row while making it meander in the left-right direction, a downward guiding portion 663c that guides downward the game balls B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, and the lower end of the downward guiding portion 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d which is open downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. - 特許庁An out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball straightening portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a so that the left end side is lower. In addition, the out-ball straightening portion 663b has a depth in the front-rear direction that narrows toward the downstream side (leftward), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. It has depth. In addition, the portion of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b that is left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a lower vertical height as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball straightening section 663b.

The downward guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out ball straightening portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. It is bent backward in a small crank shape so that it becomes like this. Thereby, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663 d ) of the downward guiding portion 663 c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662 a of the rear base 662 . An out-sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guiding portion 663c. Since the downward guide portion 663c is bent in a crank shape and is formed in a curved shape so as not to have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, the downward guide portion 663c passes the out sensor 664 and bends in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the part where the game ball B is located, it does not bounce upward toward the out-sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out-sensor 664 .

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch with high durability and long life because the game ball B passes frequently.

The ball discharge guide portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball discharge receiving portion 663 a in the out ball passage 663 . The ball removal guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream side that bends rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , is connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 123(a), etc.).

The ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. As shown in FIG. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 while being open rearward, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666 . The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located forward of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. In other words, between the ball discharge path 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap corresponding to one game ball B or more is formed.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball discharge guide portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is inclined more than the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. A lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) has a ball discharge port 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

The ball removal passage 665 has a plurality of projections 665d alternately protruding inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guiding portion 665b. In the ball discharge passage 665, a game ball B flowing through a vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward contacts with a plurality of projections 665d alternately, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag manner and flow. An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B ejected downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

Since this ball discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guiding portion 665a and the vertical guiding portion 665b, when the ball removing lever 593 is operated to discharge the game ball B in the ball tank 552, , a large number of game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that has been struck into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 is detected and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball discharge lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to move the game ball B discharged to the ball discharge passage 580b side to the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball removal guide part 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 which are separated and independent. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. can be counted. Therefore, based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664, the number of game balls B can be accurately counted. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B counted by the out sensor 664 (the number of out balls) is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first lower starting opening 2003, the first upper starting opening 2004, the second starting opening The number of game balls B discharged from the game board 5 after being accepted by the winning openings such as the opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007 (V winning opening 2008, losing opening 2009), and the number of game balls B It is the sum of the number of game balls B that are discharged from the game board 5 after being hit into the area 5a and not being accepted in any of the winning openings, and are accepted in the out-opening 2020 or the sub-out-opening 2021. It is the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls).

In addition, since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is defined as "payout within a predetermined period. number/number of out-balls in a predetermined period=payout rate in a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the substrate unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow. The game ball B flowing through the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, so the "out ball" on the game board 5 is detected. There is no need to provide an out-ball detection unit, the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified, and the cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, between the rear end of the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided. , the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are kept away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., and the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are used by many game balls B The pachinko machine 1 can reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to the static electricity, the induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of the game balls B, and the malfunction caused by the circulation of the game balls B is reduced. can be

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball straightening section 663b of the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the circulation of the game ball B Since the impact applied to the out-sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the out-sensor 664 is quickly worn out and damaged.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, the displayed payout rate will be larger than usual if a large amount of game balls B are paid out. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraud can make other players, staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. easily notice the fraudulent activity, and can make them hesitate to perform the fraudulent activity. can be

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position where the player cannot see it, the staff of the game hall can see it for the same reason as above. can detect fraudulent activity. Also, when performing maintenance etc. on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay board , connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.).

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, To reduce the cost of a game board 5 without providing an out-ball detection unit, and to secure a space in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the discharged game balls B.例文帳に追加By installing a performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can entertain the players more.

In addition, since the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude alternately, the game ball B circulates through the vertical guide portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage to the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, the out-ball passage 663 is provided with a meandering out-ball straightening portion 663b, and the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 is provided with a vertical guide portion 665b having a plurality of projecting projections 665d. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B that circulates in the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B.

In addition, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, the game ball B is less likely to collide with other pachinko machines or walls provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines. It is possible to avoid damage to the machine, walls, etc. In addition, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter. Collection of discharged game balls B can be facilitated.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 can be Only by discharging the game ball B struck into the area 5a downward, it is possible to deliver it to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660, so the configuration for discharging the game ball B on the game board 5 , the configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously flowing through the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged and to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is hard to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the part for collecting the game balls B on the island facility side ( An out receiving part, a bucket, etc.) need not be advanced to a position superimposed on the outer frame 2, and labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126 and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. FIG. 126(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guiding piece 667 for guiding the game ball B rearward is provided at the out ball outlet 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660 . More specifically, in this embodiment, in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is a confluence portion 663e that joins the ball removal discharge passage 665. As shown in FIG. The merging portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball removal discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes slightly rearward from the front wall of the out-ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts against the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely backward and downward. . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.), and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island facility side.

In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. Even if it is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, by moving the out-ball passage 663 away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., the static electricity generated by the circulation of many game balls B in the out-ball passage 663, the electric noise caused by the induced current, etc. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633 and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B can be provided.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, an out-ball sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at a portion of the out-ball discharge port 663d in the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f that is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opens downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. and a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of 664 .

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the downward guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. As shown in FIG. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660 .

The sensor cover 668 has a main body portion 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 on the base end side. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the opposite side of the base end side of the main body portion 668a. have.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. An engaging claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is engaged with an engaging portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recessed portion 663f of the base unit 660 on the out-ball straightening portion 663b side.

The sensor cover 668 accommodates the out-sensor 664 in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out-sensor 664 coincides with the out-ball passage 663, and the locking claw portion 668c moves upward. By rotating and closing the locking claw portion 668c by locking it to the locking portion 663g, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and closing the out sensor. A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126(a)). In this state, the through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out-sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out-ball passage 663 is detected by the out-sensor 664, the through-hole 668b is detected. discharged downwards. The through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as an out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG.

When replacing (removing) the out-sensor 664, by operating the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668, the locking claw portion 668c is elastically deformed to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated about the base end side of the body portion 668a to open so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward. , and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the contact-threatening object indicated by the two-dot chain line (for example, the outer frame 2) , the upper end surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing.
As a result, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the contact-threatening object, and the sensor cover 668 will be prevented from being damaged. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so many game balls B circulate. However, as described above, the out-sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with the outer frame 2 or other objects that may come into contact. Therefore, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out-sensor 664 from below. There is a possibility that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover 668 may open. When the sensor cover 668 opens and the out-sensor 664 drops downward during the game, the out-sensor 664 detects the game ball B even though the game ball B is hit in the game area 5a. Therefore, the main control board 1310 or the like notifies the occurrence of the abnormality. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 so that the staff of the game hall can confirm the abnormality. Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the contact risky substance, the body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risky substance, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outside portion opposite to the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the sensor attachment recess 663f. In addition, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664 . Therefore, when the game balls B are jammed in the out-ball passage 663, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game balls B are jammed can be specified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game balls B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned over to stand upright in an upside-down state, and the replacement of the out-sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668 and the out-ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660 can be performed. It is possible to easily perform the confirmation work of the inside and the inside of the ball removal discharge passage 665, and the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out-sensor 664 is damaged, the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. Thus, it is possible to alleviate the player's frustration due to the interruption of the game, suppress the decline in interest, suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, and reduce the burden on the game hall side. can.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out-sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 will not be removed from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a suspended state and does not fall off, loss of the sensor cover 668 can be avoided.

In addition, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, at the outer part near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B in the base unit 660 circulate, Since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). ), and is relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to one end of the game ball B passing through the out sensor 664. Since the sensor cover 668 is opened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped. .

[4-14. Third Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Next, a board unit 700 of a third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right, and (b) is the board unit of (a) 1 is a perspective view seen from . 128(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. 129(a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), and (c) is cut along the Sacer line in (a). FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view taken along the sea line in FIG. 129(a).

131 is an exploded front perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, and FIG. 132 is an exploded rear perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 133(a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127, and FIG. 133(b) is a back perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. FIG. 134 is an explanatory view showing elimination of ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 135 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG.

The substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A described above only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. Components similar to those of the board unit 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. 127 to 136, illustration of the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e is omitted.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or the board unit 620A. The substrate unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

This board unit 700 includes a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, and a first ball path 701 provided behind the first ball path 701 and released downward from the game board 5. A second ball path 702 through which the game ball B can circulate, a first ball sensor 703 for detecting the game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701, and a game ball circulating in the second ball path 702. A second ball sensor 704 for detecting B and a ball extraction passage 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flows. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are open upward, respectively. Eject downwards.

In this embodiment, in the game board 5, the game ball B received in the out port 2020 or the sub-out port 2021 flows through the first ball path 701, and in the game board 5, the general winning port 2001, the first lower starting port 2003, the game ball B received in the first upper starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2007 (V winning hole 2008, losing hole 2009) is the second ball. It is configured to flow through path 702 . In other words, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704 . As a result, the general winning opening 2001 of the game board 5, the first lower starting opening 2003, the first upper starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007 (V winning opening 2008 , loss opening 2009), etc.), the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704. are different from each other, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act with respect to the prize winning opening.

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the front base 711. A rear base 712 having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and having a ball extraction passage 705, and a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. and a front base 711 and a rear base 712 to eliminate clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and prevent unauthorized tools from entering. a crime prevention cover 714 provided openable and closable on the rear base 712; and a frame relay board 716 . In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in the shape of a box that is elongated in the left and right direction and is open rearwardly and upwardly. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from behind. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that is long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall, and a release opening 711b that is open in the lower peripheral wall at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction. ing. The front base 711 accommodates the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball socket 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports the crime prevention cover 714 rotatably about an axis extending in the left-right direction at the front end side of the elimination opening 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and elongated in the left and right directions. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball extraction passage 705. have. The ball removal passage 705 is provided in a box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open rearward. The ball removal passage 705 is closed on the rear end side by a passage wall member 715 . A portion of the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 (a portion on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , the rear side of which is closed by a passage wall member 715 .

In addition, the rear base 712 includes a first ejection guide portion 712a that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then ejects it downward, and a second ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guide portion 712b that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The entrance sides of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the entrance of the first ejection guide portion 712a opens forward. , the inlet of the second discharge guide portion 712b is open upward. The outlets of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The first ejection guide portion 712 a and the second ejection guide portion 712 b are open rearward from the front wall, and are closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715 .

In the rear base 712, the exits of the ball extraction passage 705, the first discharge guide portion 712a, and the second discharge guide portion 712b are located to the left of the dissolving port 711b of the front base 711 in front view. are arranged in order from the right to the left. The exit of the ball removal passage 705 widens greatly forward at the front end and slightly widens rearward at the rear end with respect to the exits of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b (Fig. 128(b) )). That is, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is formed larger (broader) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into the box-shaped front base 711 from behind and accommodated therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 . The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d inclined downward from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c toward the right, The straightening wall portion 713e extends obliquely downward to the left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the upper right shelf portion rises rightward from a position separated rightward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e. A lower shelf portion 713f that extends to the right from the portion 713d, a right wall portion 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to substantially the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and a right wall portion 713g. An upper wall portion 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a U-shaped opening that is connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opens upward. and a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is positioned on the right side of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 includes a lower wall portion upper portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e, and an upper portion extending vertically upward from the left end of the lower wall portion upper portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The protruding middle wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extending downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall portion 713k, and the lower shelf portion 713f near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f extend vertically and vertically. It has an extending hanging wall portion 713m and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the lower wall portion upper portion 713j. A portion of the lower wall portion lower 713n located below between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is notched vertically to a size through which the game ball B can pass.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, and has a plurality of obstacles spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. The ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, a groove wall portion 713i, It has a flat partition wall portion 713p that divides the space surrounded by the lower wall portion upper portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower portion 713n into front and rear.

In addition, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of cutouts that are recessed from the front and rear ends of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f toward the partition wall portion 713p. has a notch 713q. Each of the notch portions 713q is provided so that a gap in the front-rear direction smaller than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled on the board unit 700. Dirt, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of laterally extending guide ribs 713r. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by a lower wall portion upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p. It is surrounded by a lower wall portion upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the rear side of the front portion 713s and the partition wall portion 713p. 713t and.

In the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion, the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are positioned below the portion between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. In other words, the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are accommodated with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 extend leftward from the inner wall portion 713k from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. .

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion forward of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the lower wall portion 713n. have. When the first ball guiding portion 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is the entrance side of the first ejection guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. is coming. In front of the partition wall portion 713p, the first ball guide portion 713u guides the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f to the right and then to the rear, It can be delivered to the first ejection guiding portion 712 a of the rear base 712 .

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, a portion of the lower wall portion lower portion 713n that is open downward (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t) ) is located below the second discharge guide portion 712 b of the rear base 712 . As a result, the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be transferred to the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713 d is positioned to the right of the right end of the dissolution opening 711 b of the front base 711 . The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is positioned to the left of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, the portion of the front base 711 immediately above the clearance opening 711b is covered with the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the straightening wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and the left end side is curved downward vertically. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so as to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height through which one game ball B can pass. . The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can straighten a plurality of game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

Between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, as described above, the vertical dimension is formed to narrow toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B circulates). Depending on the amount of balls B distributed, a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, resulting in ball clogging (see FIG. 134). Since the straightening wall portion 713e is located above the clearing port 711b, when ball clogging occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to clear the clearing port 711b. In the opened state, a bar-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the dissolution port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f, and the game ball B is bitten by the tool. You can clear the clogged ball by hitting the .

By the way, since the lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q for eliminating ball clogging and for dropping dirt and dust downward, a wire-shaped unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a catheter may be used. from below through the notch 713q and into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). There is a risk of cheating on the game board 5 provided above by extending upward from the ball path 702). Insertion of such an unauthorized tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, and there is a similar concern in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d in which the notch portion 713q is provided.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat plate-like obstruction ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extending downward. is provided, even if the tip of the linear unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the hindrance rib 713o and the tip ends. Movement can be blocked and further unauthorized tool insertion can be blocked (see FIG. 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

In addition, in the portion of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b on the right side of the middle wall portion 713k, the lower part and the left and right sides thereof are the rectifying wall portion 713e in which the notch portion 713q is not provided, and the lower wall. Since it is closed by the upper part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool cannot be inserted from below through the corresponding cutout part 713q of the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b. No fraudulent act is performed through the notch 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of notches 713q in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f. (see Figure 136). Dust discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t in the upper left shelf 713b is discharged through the rectifying wall 713e, the lower wall upper 713j, and the middle wall 713j. It is housed in the space surrounded by the wall portion 713k. As a result, dust or the like does not adhere to the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t.

Further, wiring cables are connected by connectors to the left end sides of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t. It protrudes leftward from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude leftward from the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends leftward from the left side above the sensor housing portion front 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t, it is formed on the upper left shelf portion 713b. Dirt and dust that have fallen downward through the cutout portion 713q are guided leftward by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l, and the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 protruding leftward from the inner wall portion 713k. It is possible to prevent the product from falling on the wiring cable and the connector, thereby avoiding the occurrence of problems caused by dust or the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a straightening wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form the first ball path 701, and the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 rear left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, and rear base 712 A second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The crime prevention cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction. Moreover, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, the crime prevention cover 714 closes the release port 711b when the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and placed horizontally. is released and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward to be vertical, the disengagement opening 711b is open. In other words, the security cover 714 can open and close the dissolution opening 711b.

By closing the security cover 714, the removal opening 711b of the front base 711 can be closed. It can be prevented from being inserted into the two ball path 702). In addition, the security cover 714 opens the clearing port 711b of the front base 711 by opening the clogged ball between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713. Therefore, a bar-shaped tool can be inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to clear the clogging of the game balls B. can be done. This ball clogging elimination work is carried out with the body frame 4 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 .

The security cover 714 has a lower end (an end on the side of the elastic locking portion 714a) in a state in which the release port 711b is opened (in a vertical state). It is positioned below the height of the connection tube portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate the clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713, after opening the body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame 4 is opened with the security cover 714 open. is to be closed against the outer frame 2, the open crime prevention cover 714 comes into contact with the contact-hazardous object (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), and the body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and to securely close the security cover 714 so that the security cover 714 exhibits its crime prevention function.

Further, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason while the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, even if the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. , the open crime prevention cover 714 comes into contact with the object that may come into contact with from the front. Since the crime prevention cover 714 rotates in the direction to close when it contacts, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the crime prevention cover 714 being caught by the contact-threatening object, and damage to the security cover 714 and the contact-threatening object can be avoided. .

It should be noted that the security cover 714 of the present embodiment rarely causes clogging of the game balls B between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and is basically kept closed. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to make it difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705 that is open rearward. In addition, the passage wall member 715 closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open rearward on the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and closes the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b. The game ball B that has flowed through the secondary ejection guide portion 712b can be ejected downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716 .

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715 . The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192 of the door frame 3, the single button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 and the main control board 1310. .

As shown in FIG. 129(a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment has an upper left shelf portion 713b and a part of an upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 extending from the ball socket 711a of the front base 711. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5.例文帳に追加The game ball B dropped to the upper left shelf portion 713b or the upper right shelf portion 713d through the ball socket 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d to the lower shelf portion 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls leftward on the lower shelf portion 713f. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are piled up and down on the lower shelf 713f, they are collapsed by the upper rectifying wall 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B rolling to the left on the lower shelf portion 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is stored in the sensor housing portion front 713s. After being detected by the first ball sensor 703 and passing through the first ball guiding portion 713u, the ball passes through the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712 and is discharged downward. On the other hand, in the case behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t, the ball is discharged downward through the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game balls B flow through paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. A first spherical path 701 is located on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and a second spherical path 702 is located on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p. Therefore, the game ball B dropped forward from the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

In addition, the base unit 710 moves the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in order to extract the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like into the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712. can be discharged downward through the The game ball B ejected downward from the first ejection guide portion 712a (first ball path 701), the second ejection guide portion 712b (second ball path 702), and the ball extraction passage 705 of the base unit 710 is It is delivered to the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B on the side.

According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of this embodiment, since the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are provided with a plurality of cutouts 713q, dust can be collected through the cutouts 713q. Since dust can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to avoid obstruction of the circulation of the game balls B by dust etc., and suppress the occurrence of clogging etc. can be made

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparently, the door frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board can be opened from the main body frame 4. 5 is removed, from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700), presence or absence of clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). can be easily verified. In addition, since the notch portion 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713, the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and the crime prevention cover 714 is opened to remove a rod-shaped tool from below through the clearing opening 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and ball clogging can be eliminated by the tool.

Furthermore, a dissolution opening 711b that opens downward is provided in a portion below the rectifying wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a security cover 714 that closes the dissolution opening 711b is provided. In addition to being able to eliminate ball clogging as described above, in a normal state, by closing the elimination opening 711b with the security cover 714, a linear illegal tool can be passed from the elimination opening 711b to the first ball path 701 or the like. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being inserted into the second ball path 702 and has a high deterrent effect against fraud.

In addition, since the crime prevention cover 714 for opening and closing the release port 711b is opened and closed by rotating it about the axis in the left-right direction at the front end side, the body frame 4 can be opened and closed while the crime prevention cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If you try to close the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the potentially dangerous object (connection cylinder 43a of the rear panel member 43), and the body frame 4 will not be able to be closed. The security cover 714 can be made to notice that it has been forgotten to be closed, and the crime prevention cover 714 can be reliably closed so that the crime prevention function of the crime prevention cover 714 can be exhibited.

Furthermore, since a plurality of flat plate-like obstruction ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward, linear Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool attempts to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the inhibition rib 713o to prevent the tip from moving. Further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

Further, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank due to the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713 as described above. Therefore, even if an illegal linear tool is inserted from the exit side of the first ejection guide part 712a or the second ejection guide part 712b, the entry can be prevented by the complicated path. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 .

Further, since all the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). There is no need to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the game ball B, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced. A space corresponding to the structure can be secured, and by installing a performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can entertain the players more.

In addition, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, respectively. By comparing with the count number of , it is possible to determine whether or not cheating is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against cheating.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, the displayed payout rate will be larger than usual if a large amount of game balls B are paid out. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraud can make other players, staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. easily notice the fraudulent activity, and can make them hesitate to perform the fraudulent activity. can be

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position where the player cannot see it, the staff of the game hall can see it for the same reason as above. can detect fraudulent activity. Also, when performing maintenance etc. on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay board , connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.).

Also, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball extraction path 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 The game ball B without a ball is not counted. Therefore, only the game balls B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 .

In the above embodiment, the first ball path 701 is the out ball and the second ball path 702 is the safe ball. Alternatively, the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 may pass through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 701 regardless of the safe ball or the out ball. Any one of the sphere paths 702 may be flowed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the security cover 714 is rotated to open and close the dissolution opening 711b. However, the security cover 714 is not limited to this. It is good as a thing.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, by partitioning with one partition wall portion 713p, the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 is separated into the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 before and after the two paths. Although it is shown that the ball is discharged through one of the three ball paths, it is not limited to this, and the ball path is divided into three or more in the front and back by a plurality of partition walls, and any ball path is provided. The game ball B released from the game board 5 passing through may be ejected downward.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 145. FIG. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which the center accessories and the like are made opaque. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 viewed from the front right, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 viewed from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 141 is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. 144 is a cross-sectional view cut along the Suse line in FIG. 137, and FIG. 145 is a cross-sectional view cut along the Sese line in FIG.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, and a first lower starting opening for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B to be paid out) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a first upper starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, a second big winning opening 2007, and a V winning opening 2008 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a first lower starting opening 2003, a first upper starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006 in the game area 5a. , and the second big winning opening 2007, etc., so as to be received or passed through, the driving operation of the handle 195 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a are performed.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 203) for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, and vibrations for detecting vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1). and a sensor 1040 (see FIG. 203, etc.). A plurality of obstructing nails (not shown) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 is provided behind a transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and supports the rear surface cells 1130 that decorate the inside of the game area 5a, and the rear surface cells 1130 on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. A cell fixing piece 1140, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 are hit into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 203, etc.) for controlling the .

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 to be mounted.

A production display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the production display device 1600. - 特許庁

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a and are always open. A gate 2002 that detects the passage of the game ball B, a first lower start port 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open to accept the game ball B, and an upper warp passage A first upper starting port 2004 through which the game ball B distributed by the center distribution unit 2520 through 2513 is accepted, and a game according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2002. To the second start port 2005 that can accept the ball B, the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 A first big winning hole 2006 or a second big winning hole 2007, and a second big winning hole 2007 that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B. and a V winning port 2008 for receiving the game ball B received by the V distribution unit 2660 and distributed by the V distribution unit 2660 . The game board 5 is also provided with a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 203) for detecting magnetism acting illegally within the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided at the most downstream in the game area 5a, is always open to receive the game ball B, and discharges the received game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning it. An out port 2020 is provided upstream of the out port 2020 in the game area 5a, and is always open to receive the game ball B, and the received game ball B is not returned to the outside of the game area 5a. and a sub-out port 2021 for discharging. The out port 2020 is composed of a left out port 2020a and a right out port 2020b with the first lower starting port 2003 interposed therebetween. In addition, the sub-out port 2021 includes a left sub-out port 2021a provided to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and a right sub-out port 2021b provided to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the game region 5a. It consists of two.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and having three general winning mouths 2001 and a left sub-out mouth 2021a, and the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side upper left unit 2300 provided slightly above, and a general prize winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a first upper start opening 2004, a second A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, a second big winning opening 2007, a V winning opening 2008, and a right sub-out opening 2021b is provided.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped main unit 2510 having a gate 2002 and a first upper starting opening 2004, and a lower right part of the main unit 2510. One general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2001 are provided. An attacker unit 2600 having an opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, a second big winning opening 2007, a V winning opening 2008, and a right sub-out opening 2021b.

The rear unit 3000 includes a vibration sensor 1040 for detecting vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a box-shaped sensor 1040 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and having an open front and a rectangular rear wall. A back box 3010 having an opening 3010a, a lock slider 3020 detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 to the rear wall of the back box 3010, and a back box 3010 arranged behind the effect display device 1600. and a back board unit 3040 attached to the rear wall of the .

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, and the front end in the back box 3010 A back front upper effect unit 3200 provided along the upper side, a back front left effect unit 3300 provided along the left side near the front end in the back box 3010, and a slightly rearward from the front end in the back box 3010. A back right effect unit 3400 provided along the right side, and a back rear left effect provided at the upper left corner near the rear end in the back box 3010 behind the back front left effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 It has a unit 3500 and a rear rear effect unit 3600 provided in the vicinity of the rear end in the rear box 3010. - 特許庁

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a plurality of attachment supports 3050 for attaching the back rear effect unit 3600 to the back box 3010 and an attachment supporter 3060 for attaching the back right effect unit 3400 to the back box 3010. - 特許庁

[5-1. Front component]
The front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143 and the like. The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The front structural member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 which is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front structural member 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004. from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. This out port 1008 is closed from the front by the starting port unit 2100 .

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 pass through the lower full ball path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front structural member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are separated in the horizontal direction. and a plurality of engaging stepped portions formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging step portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . be.

The panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset above the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is the left side and the left side except for the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated to penetrate the lower portion. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 1008 at its upper portion.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion. and a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging stepped portions on the lower side of the . The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion by elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the boundary of the game area 5a from being clearly visible. It is possible to give a sense of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear to emit light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. rear cell]
The rear cell 1130 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148 and the like. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing the positions of the rear cells and cell fixing pieces from the front of the game board. Fig. 147(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear cells and cell fixing pieces disassembled from the front structural members and the game panel, and (b) is the front structural members and the rear cells and the cell fixing from the game panel. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a piece exploded and viewed from behind; FIG. 148(a) is a four-sided view of the cell fixing piece, (b) is a front perspective view of the cell fixing piece, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the cell fixing piece. The rear cell 1130 is provided so as to be visible from the front through the transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and is for decorating the inside of the game area 5a.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment is provided on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 in the game panel 1100, and includes a film-like rear cell 1130 having a predetermined pattern and a rear cell 1130. and a cell fixing piece 1140 that supports (attaches to) the panel plate 1110 so that it can float within a predetermined range.

As shown by shading in FIG. 146, the rear cell 1130 is provided in the game area 5a (within the frame of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 when viewed from the front) behind the area in which the game balls B circulate. . Specifically, the rear cell 1130 extends from the middle of the upper right guide passage group 2541 in the center accessory 2500 in the vertical direction to the lower right guide passage group 2542 in the region between the inner rail 1002 and the center accessory 2500 . It is provided behind three areas, an area halfway and an area from the left to the bottom of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 .

The rear cell 1130 has a part that protrudes into the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 . Specifically, the rear cell 1130 provided near the gate 2002 has a portion protruding into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 when viewed from the front. The guide passage group 2542 is decorated from behind.

The rear cell 1130 is provided with a plurality of support holes 1131 having a shape in which a round hole having a diameter larger than the width of the long hole is provided in the center of the long hole having semicircular arc-shaped ends in the longitudinal direction. The rear cell 1130 is supported by the panel plate 1110 by attaching the cell fixing piece 1140 to the panel plate 1110 through the support hole 1131 from behind. In addition, the rear cell 1130 is provided with an opening 1132 at a predetermined position through which a sensor, game ball B, etc. can pass.

The support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 is provided at a position that is difficult to see from the front when the game board 5 is assembled. Specifically, it is provided at a rear portion near the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500 . As a result, even if the panel plate 1110 and the center accessory 2500 are transparent, it is difficult to see the rear side due to the presence of the peripheral wall portion 2511a and the like. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 148, the cell fixing piece 1140 has a rectangular flat body piece 1141, a projection 1142 projecting short in a cylindrical shape from the center of the body piece 1141, and a projection 1142 and the body piece 1141 passing through. and a pair of positioning pins 1144 projecting cylindrically from both sides of the body piece 1141 with the projection 1142 therebetween. The cell fixing piece 1140 is transparent so as not to stand out when assembled on the game board 5 .

The body piece 1141 of the cell fixing piece 1140 is formed in a size that substantially covers the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 . The protrusion 1142 has a half diameter of the central round hole in the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 and protrudes slightly longer than the thickness of the rear cell 1130 .

A mounting hole 1143 of the cell fixing piece 1140 is provided coaxially with the protrusion 1142 , and a counterbore is provided on the side opposite to the protrusion 1142 . This attachment hole 1143 is for attaching the cell fixing piece 1140 to the panel plate 1110, and a countersunk head attachment screw is inserted therethrough. The positioning pin 1144 protrudes from the main body piece 1141 in the same direction as the projection 1142 longer than the projection 1142 . The positioning pin 1144 is inserted into the positioning hole 1110b provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 to position the cell fixing piece 1140 at a predetermined position.

The rear cell 1130 is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a pair of positioning pins 1144 of the cell fixing piece 1140 are inserted through the support holes 1131 from the rear to the panel plate 1110. is inserted into the positioning hole 1110b. As a result, the cell fixing piece 1140 is positioned at a predetermined position on the panel plate 1110, and the mounting hole 1143 of the cell fixing piece 1140 is positioned coaxially with the mounting hole 1110a of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. In this state, the cell fixing piece 1140 can be attached to the panel plate 1110 by screwing a mounting screw (not shown) into the mounting hole 1110a of the panel plate 1110 from behind the cell fixing piece 1140 through the mounting hole 1143 and tightening it. .

The rear cell 1130 is a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and is printed with a predetermined pattern. The material of the rear cell 1130 includes "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", and "polyethylene resin." ", "polystyrene resin", "impact-resistant polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

When the cell fixing piece 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 , a gap larger than the thickness of the rear cell 1130 is formed between the body piece 1141 and the panel plate 1110 by the protrusion 1142 . A gap is also formed between the inner circumference of the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 and the protrusion 1142 and the pair of positioning pins 1144 (see FIGS. 147 and 148, etc.). Therefore, the rear cell 1130 is supported behind the panel plate 1110 so as to be movable within a predetermined range. That is, the rear cell 1130 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 with a predetermined amount of backlash. As a result, compared to the case where the panel plate 1110 is attached to the entire surface, the labor required for attaching the rear cell 1130 can be simplified, and the amount of the rear cell 1130 used can be reduced. Therefore, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Also, since the rear cells 1130 are provided on a part of the panel plate 1110, the number of the rear cells 1130 that can be removed from the resin sheet can be increased compared to the conventional cells that are attached to the panel plate. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the rear cell 1130 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with rattling through the cell fixing piece 1140, even if the rear cell 1130 expands and contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the panel plate 1110 does not move. The difference in expansion and contraction can be absorbed by rattling. Thus, even if the rear cell 1130 shrinks with respect to the panel plate 1110, the rear cell 1130 can be prevented from wrinkling or cracking, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the rear cell 1130 can be maintained. be able to.

Furthermore, since the rear cell 1130 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with the mounting screws via the cell fixing piece 1140, the rear cell 1130 can be easily attached and detached from the panel plate 1110, so that the rear cell 1130 with different designs can be used. By exchanging, it is possible to easily cope with a change in specifications, model, or design of the pachinko machine 1, suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and have a more decorative effect. A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players can be provided by replacing the rear cells 1130 with high-quality patterns.

In addition, since the rear cell 1130 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel plate 1110, the distance from the player to the rear cell 1130 is longer than when it is provided on the front side of the panel plate 1110. , it is possible to reduce the feeling of pressure on the player.

In addition, it is desirable that the rear cell 1130 has translucency, and the pattern of the rear cell 1130 can be decorated with light emitted from LEDs provided behind the panel plate 1110 (rear cell 1130). Thus, the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved, and the luminous decoration of the rear cell 1130 can strongly attract the player's interest, and the appeal of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the rear cell 1130 is attached to the panel plate 1110 using the mounting screws through the cell fixing piece 1140. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may be sandwiched between the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120 and attached.

[5-4. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 from the lower side and the rear side, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . Thereby, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are received. can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123) below. The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664 .

[5-5. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 203) for controlling game content and the payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and has.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) ) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 . In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main In order to open the control board box 1320, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first lower starting opening sensor 2101, a first upper starting opening sensor 2524, a gate sensor 2501, a second starting opening sensor 2601, and a first big winning opening. Opening sensor 3002, second prize winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, loss opening sensor 2604, starting opening solenoid 2632, first attacker solenoid 2642, second attacker solenoid 2652, V distribution solenoid 2662, center distribution drive It is connected to the motor 2525, the magnetic sensor 1030, the vibration sensor 1040, and the like.

[5-6. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the lottery result of normal symbols, the lottery result of special symbols, and the like. .

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2002. It is provided with a normal symbol display made up of two LEDs and a normal reservation display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the reception of game balls B to the gate 2002. - 特許庁

In addition, the function display unit 1400 is a first special symbol consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004. A pattern display, a first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004, and the second start port A second special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to 2005, and a hold related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2005 a second special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying numbers.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening/closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "hit" or the like. A round indicator consisting of five LEDs displaying (number of rounds) is provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided behind the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 203) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 203).

The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600, although the details will be described later. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface of the peripheral control board box 1520 protrudes rearward beyond the binding band CT fastened to the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. .

[5-8. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 142 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center, although the details will be described later. The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-like center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 .

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is installed in a landscape orientation. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The performance display device 1600 includes two upper fixed pieces 1601 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixed piece 1602 protruding downward from the lower end surface. This performance display device 1600 is installed in two fixed grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner peripheral surface of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1601, the lower fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the lock slider 3020, and the lock slider 3020 is slid leftward in rear view. It is attached to the back box 3010 by pressing.

In addition, the effect display device 1600 has a plurality of wire locking portions 1603 provided on the rear surface. After protruding rearward from the rear surface of a member (unit base) forming the rear surface of the effect display device 1600, the wire locking portion 1603 extends in the left-right direction along the rear surface, and is formed in an L shape. ing. The wiring locking portion 1603 has a claw-shaped hook portion 1603a projecting toward the rear surface of the unit base at its tip, and a ridge portion 1603b projecting short forward from each of two sides in the longitudinal direction. (see Figure 172). The front end of the wiring locking portion 1603 is formed obliquely such that the surface (front surface) facing the rear surface of the unit base, including the hook portion 1603a, is located rearward toward the front end. This makes it easier to insert the wire EC from the front end side of the wire locking portion 1603 into between the wire locking portion 1603 and the rear surface of the unit base. In addition, the wire locking portion 1603 has a U-shaped cross section due to the two ridges 1603b, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. In this embodiment, the member (rear case) provided with the wire locking portion 1603 in the effect display device 1600 is formed transparent. Therefore, the wire locking portion 1603 and the like are also transparent.

A plurality of wire locking portions 1603 in the effect display device 1600 are provided on both the left and right sides of the portion to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. One is provided on each side (left side in rear view). Each wire locking portion 1603 is provided so as to extend outward in the left-right direction.

In addition, the effect display device 1600 has a through portion 1604 penetrating back and forth at a portion of the unit base where the wire locking portion 1603 is provided (see FIG. 172). Due to this through portion 1604, when the wire EC is locked between the wire locking portion 1603 and the rear surface of the unit base, the wire EC bends in the through portion 1604 and hangs from the wire locking portion 1603 to the wire EC. pressure can be released.

[5-9. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear end partially projects into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. there is

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A gate 2002 for detecting the passage of the game ball B, a first lower starting port 2003 provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and always open to accept the game ball B, and a center accessory 2500. A first upper starting port 2004 where the game ball B distributed by the center distribution unit 2520 entering the upper warp passage 2513 is accepted, and a normal symbol lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2002 According to the result, the second start port 2005 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B, the first special symbol or the first lottery by accepting the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 A first large prize winning port 2006 and a second large prize winning port 2007 which enable the acceptance of the game ball B according to the second special pattern drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2005, and the second large prize winning. It is provided with a V winning opening 2008 and a losing opening 2009 in which a game ball B received in the opening 2007 is distributed and received by a V distribution unit 2660.例文帳に追加

In addition, the front unit 2000 further includes an out port 2020 and a sub-out port 2021 for discharging the game ball B hit into the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 are always open so that the game ball B can be received. In addition, the out port 2020 is provided at the downstream end of the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2501 that detects the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a first lower start opening sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first lower start opening 2003, A first upper start opening sensor 2524 that detects the game ball B received in the first upper start opening 2004, a second start opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2005, and a second A second big winning hole sensor 2602 for detecting the game ball B accepted in the big winning hole 2007, a V winning hole sensor 2603 for detecting the game ball B accepted in the V winning hole 2008, and a winning hole 2009 It is provided with a loss opening sensor 2604 for detecting the game ball B that has been hit, and a magnetic sensor 1030 for detecting illegal magnetism acting within the game area 5a.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning holes 2001 are arranged at the lower part of the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The gate 2002 is arranged above the center in the vertical direction near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. The first lower starting port 2003 is arranged between the two out ports 2020 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The first upper starting port 2004 is arranged in the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 on the upper right of the first lower starting port 2003 . The second starting port 2005 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end in the game area 5a. The first big winning opening 2006 is arranged to the right of the first lower starting opening 2003 and below the first upper starting opening 2004 in the game area 5a. The second big prize winning opening 2007 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 2006 and below the second start opening 2005 . The V winning opening 2008 and the losing opening 2009 are arranged below the second big winning opening 2007 . The V winning opening 2008 and the losing opening 2009 are arranged side by side.

The out port 2020 is composed of a left out port 2020a and a right out port 2020b, and is arranged below both left and right sides of the first lower starting port 2003 at the downstream end of the game area 5a. The sub-out port 2021 is composed of a left sub-out port 2021a and a right sub-out port 2021b. The left sub-out port 2021a is arranged to the left of the three general winning ports 2001 on the left side, and the right sub-out port is arranged. 2021b is arranged at the lower right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and having three general prize-winning ports 2001 and a left sub-out port 2021a, and a slightly upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. and a side upper left unit 2300 provided in the .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and includes a gate 2002, a first upper start opening 2004, a second start opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, a second A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a big winning opening 2007, a V winning opening 2008, a losing opening 2009, and a right sub-out opening 2021b is further provided.

[5-9a. starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 includes a first lower starting port 2003 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received, and a game ball B that is always open to receive the game ball B. It has an out port 2020 that discharges the ball B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning it. In addition, the starting port unit 2100 has a first lower starting port sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in the first lower starting port 2003 (see FIG. 203).

Out port 2020 is provided at a position lower than first lower starting port 2003 . The out port 2020 of the starting port unit 2100 includes a left out port 2020a provided on the left side of the first lower starting port 2003, a right out port 2020b provided on the right side of the first lower starting port 2003, have. The left out port 2020a and the right out port 2020b are provided at symmetrical positions with the first lower starting port 2003 therebetween. The first lower start opening 2003 is open upward with a width through which one game ball B can pass. The left outlet 2020a and the right outlet 2020b are each open upward with a width of two game balls B, and are provided at the lowest position in the game area 5a.

The starting port unit 2100 is provided with a difference in height between the first lower starting port 2003 and the out port 2020 smaller (lower) than the difference in height between the first starting port and the out port in the conventional pachinko machine. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that the first lower starting port 2003 is provided below the conventional first starting port, and the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear relatively wider. can.

The starting port unit 2100 is provided below the first lower starting port 2003 and has a starting port display section 2110 capable of displaying a predetermined pattern. The starting opening display section 2110 is composed of one 7-segment LED. This starting point display section 2110 can display a predetermined pattern (including numbers) according to the progress of the game. When the starter unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, the starter display part 2110 closes the outlet 1008 from the front, making the outlet 1008 invisible to the player. This allows the player to recognize that the outlet 2020 is the lowest end of the game area 5a.

In the starting port unit 2100 assembled on the game board 5, the first lower starting port 2003 is positioned directly below the central release portion 2514a on the stage 2514 of the center accessory 2500, and is released from the central release portion 2514a. A game ball B can be accepted with a high probability.
The game ball B received in the first lower starting port 2003 is detected by the first lower starting port sensor 2101, guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and guided to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is delivered and discharged downward.

The game ball B received in the out port 2020 (the left out port 2020a and the right out port 2020b) is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being transferred to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, It is discharged downward from the sphere guiding unit 3100 .

[5-9b. side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139, 141 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive the game balls B at all times, one sub-out opening 2021 (left sub-out opening 2021a) which is open to receive the game balls B at all times, It has

The three general winning holes 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002, and are provided at higher positions toward the left. Each general prize winning opening 2001 is opened with a size (width) corresponding to one game ball B. A sub-out port 2021 (left sub-out port 2021a) is provided to the left of the leftmost general winning port 2001 .
The left sub-out port 2021a is open with the size (width) of one game ball B.

Also, the side unit 2200 has a shelf 2201 on the right side of the rightmost general prize winning opening 2001, which slopes down toward the right. The shelf 2201 extends rightward to near the right end of the left outlet 2020a in the starter unit 2100. As shown in FIG. That is, when the game ball B rolls on the shelf 2201, it is received by the left out port 2020a.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general prize winning openings 2001 and the left sub-out opening 2021a protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁
This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and discharged downward.

Also, the side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the left sub-out port 2021a to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. - 特許庁The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is ejected downward.

[5-9c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-9d. Center role]
Next, the center role item 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. Figure 149 (a) is a perspective view of the cloon in the center distribution unit of the center role, (b) is a plan view of the cloon of (a), and (c) is the software of (b). - is a cross-sectional view taken along line S-. FIG. 150(a) is an explanatory view partially showing a perspective view of the center allocation unit in the center accessory of the game board, and (b) shows the center allocation unit in the center accessory of the game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows partially with a top view. Figure 151 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a clone of an embodiment different from that of FIG. 149, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a clone of a further different embodiment, and (c) is a distribution of a further different embodiment It is an explanatory view showing a unit.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame.

Although the details will be described later, the center accessory 2500 includes one general prize winning opening 2001 that is always open to accept the game ball B, a gate 2002 through which the game ball B can pass, and a gate 2002 that can accept the game ball B. A first upper start port 2004 that is always open, a second start port 2005 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B in the gate 2002, and the second start port 2005. Lottery of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 and the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second start port 2005 A first big winning hole 2006 and a second big winning hole 2007 that open and close to accept the game ball B according to the result, and a V winning hole that can accept only the game ball B accepted in the second big winning hole 2007. 2008 and.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 can receive the game ball B in the game area 5a and the loss opening 2009 for receiving the game ball B which was not received in the V winning opening 2008 after being received in the second big winning opening 2007. and a right sub-out port 2021b (sub-out port 2021) that is always open to receive the game ball B and eject it out of the game area 5a without giving a predetermined privilege.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped body unit 2510 and an attacker unit 2600 attached to the bottom right outside of the body unit 2510 . The main unit 2510 has a gate 2002 and a first upper starting port 2004 . The attacker unit 2600 has one general prize winning port 2001, a second starting gate 2005, a first big winning gate 2006, a second big winning gate 2007, a V winning gate 2008, a losing gate 2009, and a right sub-out gate 2021b. there is

Also, the center accessory 2500 has a plurality of binding bases 2550 attached to the main unit 2510 and the attacker unit 2600 . The binding pedestal 2550 has a ring-shaped band holding portion 2552, which will be described in detail later. The wiring EC can be supported (held) by the center accessory 2500 in a bundled state.

[5-9d-1. main unit]
The main unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail. The main unit 2510 has a gate 2002 and a first upper starting port 2004 . The main unit 2510 includes a transparent frame-shaped center base 2511 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a lower warp passage 2512 capable of guiding game balls B from the outside of the center base 2511 to the inside of the frame, and an upper warp passage 2513, a stage 2514 which is provided at the lower side of the frame of the center base 2511 and releases the game ball B flowing through the lower warp passage 2512 into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction; The game ball B, which is provided above the stage 2514 within the frame of the center base 2511 and has circulated through the upper warp passage 2513, is swung to either the first upper starting port 2004 or the sorting ball discharge port 2526 (not shown). and a center sorting unit 2520 for sorting.

The center base 2511 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2511a extending in the front-rear direction, a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2511a and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral wall portion. and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2511c protruding from the inner periphery of 2511a. The peripheral wall portion 2511a extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . In addition, the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2511a, excluding the frame-like (annular) lower side portion, protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . That is, the center base 2511 has the flange portion 2511b extending outward from the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2511a at the frame-shaped lower side portion. As a result, when assembled on the game board 5, the peripheral wall portion 2511a can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame.

The thickness of the flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511c is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511c protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2511a at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2511 c (flange portion 2511 b ) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2511 a is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

A plurality of support portions 2511c are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2511a. The support portion 2511c is also provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a where the flange portion 2511b does not protrude, thereby reinforcing the peripheral wall portion 2511a. In addition, the support portion 2511c has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2511a formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2511a or in a linear shape, so that the support portion 2511c is not conspicuous. The support portion 2511c has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2511a within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2511c to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). It is made to be inconspicuous from.

The lower warp passage 2512 is located on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2511a in a front view and is located in front of the front surface (flange portion 2511b) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). ing. The lower warp passage 2512 can guide the entering game ball B to the stage 2514 .

The upper warp passage 2513 is open at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a that is forward of the flange portion 2511b and above the lower warp passage 2512 so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. The upper warp passage 2513 can guide the entering game ball B to the center distribution unit 2520 .

The stage 2514 has a curved shape in which the central side in the left-right direction is depressed, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first lower starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the horizontal direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2514 has a portion (central release portion 2514a) slightly higher than both left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portion 2514b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the stage 2514 is assembled on the game board 5 , the raised portion (central release portion 2514 a ) at the center in the left-right direction is located directly above the first lower starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2514a in the center of the stage 2514, it is received in the first lower starting port 2003 with a very high probability.

The center distribution unit 2520 includes a dish-shaped croon 2530 that rotates the game ball B guided by the upper warp passage 2513 and then releases it downward, and a third that guides the game ball B released from the croon 2530 to the right. One guideway 2521, a sorting ball discharge port 2526 recessed downward on the right side of the first guideway 2521, and a game ball B on the right side of the sorting ball discharge port 2526. A second guideway 2522 in which a first upper starting port 2004 opens at the end) and a sorting ball discharge port 2526 are provided so that they can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It has a flat center distribution piece 2523 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second guide path 2522 .

The center distribution unit 2520 can distribute the game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 to either the first upper starting port 2004 or the distribution ball discharge port 2526 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 141, the main unit 2510 is provided on the right outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2511a. It has a group 2541 and a lower right guide passage group 2542 which is provided below the upper right guide passage group 2541 and consists of a plurality of passages (here, two) through which the game ball B can flow.
Between the upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542, there is a portion where the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is exposed, and a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are provided in this portion. ) are planted.

The upper right guide passage group 2541 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2511a at the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and is located on the right side of the upper right first guide passage 2541a away from the peripheral wall portion 2511a and the upper right first guide passage 2541a. and an upper right second guide passage 2541b provided. A left side wall of the upper right second guide passage 2541b is formed by part of the peripheral wall portion 2511a. The entrance of the upper right first guide passage 2541a and the entrance of the upper right second guide passage 2541b are separated left and right. The exit of the upper right first guide passage 2541a and the exit of the upper right second guide passage 2541b are adjacent to each other at the same height. The upper right first guide passage 2541a and the upper right second guide passage 2541b extend downward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. In the upper right guide passage group 2541, the upper right second guide passage 2541b is longer than the upper right first guide passage 2541a.

The lower right guide passage group 2542 is provided below the upper right guide passage group 2541, and is provided on the left side of the lower right first guide passage 2542a away from the peripheral wall portion 2511a and the lower right first guide passage 2542a. and a lower right second guide passage 2542b. The left side wall of the lower right second guide passage 2542b is formed by part of the peripheral wall portion 2511a. The entrance of the lower right first guide passage 2542a and the entrance of the lower right second guide passage 2542b are provided adjacent to each other on the left and right.

The entrance of the lower right first guide passage 2542a is formed so that the width in the horizontal direction is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B, and a gate 2002 is provided so as to contact the left wall. That is, the lower right first guide passage 2542a has two entrances, an entrance through the left gate 2002 and an entrance that does not pass through the right gate 2002. One entrance of the lower right first guide passage 2542a The gate 2002 is provided directly below between the exit of the upper right first guide passage 2541a and the exit of the upper right second guide passage 2541b. The lower right first guide passage 2542a narrows in width in the left-right direction below the gate 2002, and extends downward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B.

The entrance of the lower right second guide passage 2542b is provided adjacent to the left side of the gate 2002, and is formed to have a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the left-right direction. The lower right second guide passage 2542b extends downward with a substantially constant width. The exit of the lower right first guide passage 2542a and the exit of the lower right second guide passage 2542b are provided adjacent to each other on the left and right at the same height.

With the center accessory 2500 assembled on the game board 5, the upper right guide passage group 2541 extends downward from near the upper end of the game area 5a to a height of about 4/5 of the total height of the game area 5a. ing. The lower right guide passage group 2542 extends downward from a position slightly higher than 2/3 of the total height of the game area 5a to a position slightly lower than 1/2 of the total height of the game area 5a. The upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542 are formed such that the right end sides thereof are along the right rail 1005 .

The upper right first guide passage 2541a of the upper right guide passage group 2541 has the right end of its entrance located directly below the lower end of the impinging portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and the game ball B that abuts against the impinging portion 1006 does not move. Most of them are formed to enter the upper right first guide passage 2541a. The game ball B that has circulated through the upper right first guide passage 2541a is more likely to enter the lower right first guide passage 2542a of the lower right guide passage group 2542 than the game ball B that has circulated through the upper right second guide passage 2541b.

The lower right guide passage group 2542 has an exit offset to the left of the right rail 1005 . The game ball B that has circulated through the lower right first guide passage 2542 a of the lower right guide passage group 2542 is highly likely to flow down onto the attacker upper shelf 2612 of the attacker unit 2600 . In addition, the game ball B that has passed through the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542 is released to the central opening 2605 and the right opening 2606 provided on the right side of the attacker upper shelf 2612 of the attacker unit 2600. likely to

The body unit 2510 has one binding pedestal 2550 attached to the rear side of the center base 2511 (see FIGS. 166 to 170, etc.), although the details will be described later.
The binding pedestal 2550 has an annular band holding portion 2552, and by binding a plurality of wirings EC with a binding band CT passing through the band holding portion 2552, the plurality of wirings EC can be attached to the center base 2511 in a bundled state. can be supported.

[5-9d-1a. Center distribution unit]
The center allocation unit 2520 in the main body unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 will be described in more detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150 and the like. The center distribution unit 2520 includes a dish-shaped croon 2530 that rotates the game ball B guided by the upper warp passage 2513 and then releases it downward, and a third that guides the game ball B released from the croon 2530 to the right. One guideway 2521, a sorting ball discharge port 2526 recessed downward on the right side of the first guideway 2521, and a game ball B is guided to the right on the right side of the sorting ball discharge port 2526, and the right end (downstream A second guideway 2522 in which a first upper starting port 2004 opens at the end) and a sorting ball discharge port 2526 are provided so that they can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It has a flat center distribution piece 2523 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second guide path 2522 .

The sorting sphere outlet 2526 and the center sorting piece 2523 of the center sorting unit 2520 are located directly above the stage 2514 (approximately at the center in the left-right direction), and have a length of 60 mm to 70 mm (here, 65 mm). ). The center distribution piece 2523 of the center distribution unit 2520 advances and retreats in a predetermined pattern by a center distribution drive motor 2525 (see FIG. 203). The center distribution piece 2523 is inclined rearward from the front end by a predetermined width so that the lower surface moves upward as it goes forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. As a result, when the center distribution piece 2523 moves forward, the front end of the center distribution piece 2523 makes it difficult to bite the game ball B, and even if it does bite, the friction is reduced, so biting is minimized. are doing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 150(b), the center distribution unit 2520 is guided to the right by the distribution ball entry sensor 2527 that detects the game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 and the center distribution piece 2523. The first upper start opening sensor 2524 for detecting the game ball B received in the first upper start opening 2004 through the second guide path 2522 and the center distribution piece 2523 guide it to the second guide path 2522. and a sorting ball discharge sensor 2528 for detecting a game ball B received in a sorting ball discharge port 2526 without being able to do so. The distributed ball sensor 2527 and the distributed ball discharge sensor 2528 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 203).

This center distribution unit 2520 circulates in the upper warp passage 2513 and is detected by the distribution entrance ball sensor 2527 and released from the croon 2530, the game ball B is secondly guided with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). The game ball B that can be distributed to the path 2522 side and distributed to the second guide path 2522 is received by the first upper starting port 2004 . The game ball B received in the first upper starting port 2004 is detected by the first upper starting port sensor 2524 (see FIGS. 150(b) and 203), and then the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 , and discharged downward through the back ball guiding unit 3100 . As a result, the game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 from the game area 5a is distributed to the second guideway 2522 (first upper starting port 2004) side by the center distribution piece 2523 that advances and retreats at a constant rhythm. It is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not it is possible. At this time, in the cloon 2530 provided upstream of the center distribution piece 2523, since the game ball B is released to the first guideway 2521 after turning to some extent, it can be seen that it advances and retreats back and forth. The center distribution piece 2523 projects forward and can guide (distribute) the game ball B to the first upper starting port 2004. Depending on whether the game ball B is released from the croon 2530 The player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained in multiple stages.

On the other hand, in the center distribution unit 2520, the game ball B that has fallen to the distribution ball discharge port 2526 is detected by the distribution ball discharge sensor 2528, and transferred to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, The ball is discharged downward through the back ball guide unit 3100 .

A clown 2530 of the center distribution unit 2520 is transparent. This croon 2530 is provided with a dish-shaped rolling surface portion 2531 in which the game ball B circulating through the upper warp passage 2513 is supplied and the center is depressed so as to be low, and there is only one game ball B in the center of the rolling surface portion 2531. It has a passage opening 2532 that is pierced with a size that allows passage, and a peripheral wall portion 2533 that extends upward from the outer peripheral edge of the rolling surface portion 2531 .

The rolling surface portion 2531 of the croon 2530 includes a central surface portion 2531a that extends outward from the center so as to become higher, and a central surface portion 2531a that extends outward from the outer peripheral edge of the central surface portion 2531a so as to become higher. , and a peripheral surface portion 2531b having a larger angle from the horizontal than the central surface portion 2531a. In this embodiment, the central surface portion 2531a of the rolling surface portion 2531 is inclined at an angle of 4 degrees with respect to the horizontal. On the other hand, the peripheral surface portion 2531b is inclined at an angle of 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

The rolling surface portion 2531 is located between the game ball B and the peripheral wall portion 2533 when the game ball B is in contact with both the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b. It is formed so that a fixed amount of gap is generated (see FIG. 149(c)). In other words, the boundary between the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b is provided at a position longer than the radius of the game ball B from the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533 toward the center. The distance (horizontal distance) from the boundary between the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral surface portion 2531b to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533 is within the range of 3/5 to 5/5 of the diameter of the game ball B. is desirable.

As shown in FIG. 149, the passage opening 2532 of the croon 2530 has a square inner circumference, that is, a non-circular shape. This passage opening 2532 penetrates a square of an inscribed circle slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. Passage opening 2532 is provided such that its diagonal line extends in the front-rear direction. In addition, the passage opening 2532 is formed so as to become smaller toward the bottom, making it easier to release the game ball B directly below.

The peripheral wall portion 2533 is higher than the diameter of the game ball B and extends upward. This prevents the game ball B supplied to the rolling surface portion 2531 from jumping out from the rolling surface portion 2531 .

In the croon 2530 of this embodiment, the game ball B that has circulated through the upper warp passage 2513 is supplied from the left to the right near the outer peripheral edge of the rear portion of the rolling surface portion 2531 . The game ball B supplied to the croon 2530 turns clockwise on the peripheral surface portion 2531b of the rolling surface portion 2531 while contacting the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533 due to its momentum. Since the centrifugal force acting on the game ball B decreases as the attenuation of It will happen.

Then, when the turning game ball B reaches the central surface portion 2531a from the peripheral surface portion 2531b, the inclination angle of the central surface portion 2531a is sufficiently looser (smaller) than the inclination angle of the peripheral surface portion 2531b, so the game ball B rolls. Due to the centrifugal force acting according to the speed, the game ball B turns for a while while being in contact with both the central surface portion 2531a and the peripheral edge surface portion 2531b. After that, when the rolling speed of the game ball B is further attenuated, the centrifugal force acting on the game ball B is further reduced. It will enter the passage opening 2532 provided in the center of the surface portion 2531a and drop down into the first guideway 2521 below.

More specifically, the game ball B supplied to the croon 2530 does not turn many times in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 2533 because the inclination angle of the peripheral surface 2531b is large and steep. Most of them turn while contacting both the central surface portion 2531 a and the peripheral surface portion 2531 b without contacting the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2533 . At this time, since the cloon 2530 (peripheral wall portion 2533) is made transparent, the game ball B can be made to look as if it is turning while being in contact with the circumferential wall portion 2533, and a game familiar to the cloon of the conventional pachinko machine. It does not make people feel uncomfortable.

By the way, in the clun in the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball B turns while being in contact with the peripheral wall. It is possible to change from the turning direction to the direction of the central passage port. At the timing when the center distribution piece 2523 protrudes forward and the game ball B can be distributed to the first upper start opening 2004, there is a problem that the game ball B enters the passage opening. On the other hand, according to the croon 2530 of the present embodiment, the inclination of the peripheral surface portion 2531b of the rolling surface portion 2531 allows the game ball B to turn at a position away from the peripheral wall portion 2533. At the timing when the center distribution piece 2523 which can be seen to be present protrudes forward and the game ball B can be distributed to the first upper starting port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaked to cause abnormal vibration, impact, etc. is applied, the abnormal vibration, impact, etc. are not transmitted to the game ball B through the peripheral wall portion 2533, and the rolling direction of the game ball B is prevented from being changed to the direction of the passage port 2532. can do.

In addition, abnormal vibrations and impacts caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 also act on the rolling surface portion 2531, but the contact point of the game ball B with the rolling surface portion 2531 (peripheral surface portion 2531b) is Since it is positioned sufficiently below the center of gravity of the ball B, the peripheral surface portion 2531b is relatively displaced under the game ball B by the force acting due to the abnormal vibration, impact, etc., and the peripheral surface portion The rolling direction of the game ball B is not changed even through 2531b.

For this reason, abnormal vibrations and impacts caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 act on the game ball B rolling on the rolling surface portion 2531 via the peripheral surface portion 2531b, and the rolling direction of the game ball B is increased. Since it is possible to avoid that the is changed, the center distribution piece 2523 that can be seen to move back and forth can project forward and distribute the game ball B to the first upper start port 2004. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken at a possible timing to cause abnormal vibration or impact, the abnormal vibration or impact causes the rolling direction of the game ball B to be directed toward the passage opening 2532. , it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized entry into the passage port 2532, and reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, in the croon 2530 of the present embodiment, the inner peripheral shape of the passage port 2532 provided in the center (center) of the rolling surface portion 2531 is a square, which is a non-circular shape. Operation and effects can be achieved. More specifically, if the inner peripheral shape of the passage opening of the croon is circular, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the game ball B may not be able to reach the passage opening depending on the rolling direction and rolling speed of the game ball B relative to the passage opening. It may twirl along the edge of the frame more times than necessary. In a state in which the game ball B is circling around the edge of the passage opening, the pachinko machine is struck or shaken to apply abnormal vibration or impact, thereby delaying the entry of the game ball B into the passage opening. It is possible to make it earlier or earlier. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 is hit at the timing when the game ball B is guided to the second guideway 2522 (first upper starting port 2004) by the center distribution piece 2523 that can be seen to move back and forth. By applying abnormal vibrations, shocks, etc. by shaking or shaking, the game ball B may enter the passage opening and cheating may be accomplished. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed from the island facility. , force is more likely to act on the pachinko machine 1 in the rearward direction (front-rear direction) than in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. Therefore, unfair abnormal vibrations, shocks, etc. that hit or shake the gaming machine mainly act in the front-rear direction.

In order to solve the above problems, in the present embodiment, the passage opening 2532 of the croon 2530 is formed so that the inner peripheral shape thereof is a non-circular square, and the direction in which the diagonal extends is oriented in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game ball B, which is turning while gradually decreasing the turning radius on the rolling surface portion 2531, first comes into contact with one of the four corners of the passage opening 2532, so that it can reach the corners. The rolling speed of the game ball B can be greatly attenuated by the contact, and the game ball B can enter the passage opening 2532 quickly. In addition, since the inner peripheral shape of the passage opening 2532 is a square, even if the game ball B rolls along one side of the passage opening 2532, the extension direction at the end of the side is different from that of the next side by 90 degrees. Because of the abutment, a reaction force acts on the game ball B in the direction opposite to the rolling direction, and the game ball B does not twirl around the edge of the passage opening 2532 . For this reason, the center distribution piece 2523, which can be seen to move back and forth, protrudes forward and can distribute the game ball B to the first upper start port 2004, and the pachinko machine 1 is started. Even if an attempt is made to illegally enter the passage opening 2532 by hitting or shaking the game ball B to apply abnormal vibration or impact, the game ball B will immediately enter the passage opening 2532 as soon as it touches the passage opening 2532. It is possible to make it difficult to determine the timing of performing an act, and to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed.

In addition, since the diagonal line of the passage opening 2532 is oriented in the front-rear direction, each side forming the peripheral edge of the passage opening 2532 extends in a direction (diagonal direction) intersecting the left-right direction. Therefore, compared to the case where the edge (side) of the passage opening extends in the left-right direction, the game ball B and the passage opening 2532 are more likely to be damaged due to abnormal vibration or impact in the front-rear direction caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1. The relative movement distance between the edges (sides) can be shortened, and the influence of abnormal vibrations, shocks, and the like can be reduced. Therefore, when the game ball B is about to enter the passage opening 2532, the timing of the game ball B entering the passage opening 2532 can be adjusted by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 to apply abnormal vibration or impact. Even if an attempt is made to delay or accelerate the adjustment, the influence of the abnormal vibration or impact on the game ball B can be reduced, and the achievement of fraud can be prevented.

In addition, since the extending direction of the diagonal line of the square passage opening 2532 in the croon 2530 is oriented in the front-rear direction, the shape of the passage opening 2532 can be understood more clearly when viewed from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. You can make it look easy. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the croon 2530 (rolling surface portion 2531) having the passage opening 2532 of a non-circular square shape (looks like a rhombus here), which has never been seen in the pachinko machine 1 so far. As a result, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a strong impact on the player and is highly appealing to the player, and makes it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as a game machine to play. The pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the peripheral surface portion 2531b of the rolling surface portion 2531 is linearly inclined in cross section, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be inclined in an arc shape, or may be inclined in a polygonal line shape. Also by this, there can exist an effect similar to the above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral edge surface portion 2531b having an inclination angle different from that of the central surface portion 2531a is provided so that the game ball B rolls on the rolling surface portion 2531 in a state where it is difficult to contact the peripheral wall portion 2533. However, it is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide a ridge that protrudes from the rolling surface 2531 at a height that allows the game ball B to get over, or the outer peripheral side of the rolling surface 2531 A stepped portion may be provided so as to be higher, or a recessed groove portion may be provided so that the outer peripheral side of the rolling contact surface portion 2531 is higher. Also by this, there can exist an effect similar to the above.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the non-circular passage opening 2532 of the croon 2530 has a square inner peripheral shape, but is not limited to this. The inner peripheral shape of the passage port 2532 may be star-shaped. In addition to achieving the same effects as described above, this also provides the player with a book having a star-shaped passage opening 2532 that has never been seen before in a pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be shown, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's expectation for the game ball B which circulates the croon 2530 can be heightened, and the decline of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. be able to. In addition, the inner peripheral shape of the passage port 2532 includes “triangular”, “square”, “pentagonal”, “hexagonal”, “polygonal”, “elliptical”, “diamond”, and “heart”. ","clover shape","spade shape","irregular shape", and other non-circular shapes.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, only one passage port 2532 is provided in the rolling surface portion 2531 of the rune 2530, but this is not a limitation, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (here, four) passage openings 2532 may be provided in the moving surface portion 2531 . When a plurality of passage openings 2532 are provided, different benefits may be given to the player depending on the passage openings 2532 into which the game balls B enter. In the embodiment of FIG. 151(b), the inner circumferential shapes of the four passage openings 2532 are different from each other, such as a diamond shape, a heart shape, a clover shape, and a spade shape. In this way, in addition to the effects similar to those described above, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B enters the passage opening 2532 having a desired shape. can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the disk-shaped croon 2530 in the center distribution unit 2520 is provided with a non-circular passage opening 2532, but the present invention is not limited to this. A non-circular winning opening and a losing opening may be provided on the flat rolling surface portion of the distribution unit 2800 as shown. More specifically, the sorting unit 2800 has a flat rolling surface portion 2803 which is inclined downward in the forward direction and provided with loss openings 2802 on both left and right sides of one winning opening 2801 in the vicinity of the front end, A guide surface portion 2804 that guides the game ball B released forward from the front end of the rolling surface portion 2803 to the outside in either the left or right direction, and the guide surface portion 2804 and the rolling surface portion 2803 are provided on both left and right outer sides, and the rear end is A side surface portion 2805 that coincides with the rear end of the rolling surface portion 2803 and is inclined so that the front end is located below the downstream end of the guide surface portion 2804, and a side surface portion 2805 provided near the rear end of the rolling surface portion 2803. and lateral rotors 2807 provided in the vicinity of the front ends of the side surface portions 2805, respectively.

In addition, the sorting unit 2800 includes a weir portion 2808 protruding low upward from both left and right sides of the rolling surface portion 2803, a rolling surface portion 2803, a guiding surface portion 2804, and two side surface portions 2805. and a peripheral wall portion 2809 that extends upward from the diameter of the game ball B. The weir portion 2808 suppresses the entry and exit of the game ball B from both the left and right sides of the rolling surface portion 2803 . In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2809 prevents the game ball B from falling out of the sorting unit 2800 .

The peripheral wall portion 2809 has a semi-arc shape on the rear end side and a cannonball-like shape with a longitudinal length substantially equal to the diameter of the semi-arc shape when viewed from above. The longitudinal length of the peripheral wall portion 2809 is 2.5 times the diameter of the central rotor 2806 . In other words, the diameter of central rotor 2806 is 0.4 times the length of peripheral wall 2809 in the front-rear direction. In addition, the diameter of the central rotor 2806 is about four times the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm), and the length of the peripheral wall 2809 in the front-rear direction is about 10.5 times the diameter of the game ball B. . In addition, the rolling surface portion 2803 has a length (width) in the left-right direction a little over five times the diameter of the game ball B, and a length (depth) in the front-rear direction five to seven times the diameter of the game ball B. is.

The rolling surface portion 2803 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with a longitudinal length slightly longer than the diameter of the central rotor 2806 and a lateral length longer than the longitudinal length. Further, the rear end side of the rolling contact surface portion 2803 extends to a portion forward of the center of the central rotating body 2806 , and both left and right sides thereof are obliquely bent toward the central rotating body 2806 . The rolling surface portion 2803 is only inclined in the front-rear direction and horizontal in the left-right direction. In the vicinity of the front end of the rolling surface portion 2803, there are left and right winning openings 2802 with the winning opening 2801 at the center in the left-right direction therebetween. The winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 are rectangular holes having the same size and a square inner peripheral shape, and the direction in which the diagonal line extends is oriented in the front-rear direction.

The central rotating body 2806 is provided with a plurality of disk-shaped protrusions protruding upward. This central rotating body 2806 is always rotating at a constant speed counterclockwise in plan view.

The lateral rotator 2807 always rotates at a faster speed than the central rotator 2806 . The horizontal rotating body 2807 has one protruding piece protruding in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction, and the game ball B can be hit to the rear end side of the side surface portion 2805 by the protruding piece. The left lateral rotator 2807 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, and the right lateral rotator 2807 is rotated clockwise in plan view.

In the sorting unit 2800 of this embodiment, the central rotating body 2806 rotates at a speed of 16.7 rpm, and the lateral rotating body 2807 rotates at a speed of 625 rpm, which is much higher than the central rotating body 2806 . As described above, since the rotation speed of the horizontal rotator 2807 is high, even if a detection piece is provided on the horizontal rotator 2807 to detect the presence or absence of rotation, the sensor may not be able to reliably detect the detection piece. be. More specifically, the sensor that detects the detection piece operates at regular intervals to detect the detection piece. Since the piece may not be detected at all, it is necessary to make the detection period of the sensor sufficiently shorter than the rotation period of the detection piece. If the rotation of the detection piece is fast and the rotation cycle is further shortened, the detection cycle of the sensor must be further shortened. This increases the load on the control unit, increasing the risk of runaway or malfunction due to overload.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a reduction gear for detection (not shown) is provided to transmit the rotation of the horizontal rotor 2807 from the rotation shaft after deceleration (for example, deceleration to 250 rpm). A detection piece is provided on the detection reduction gear, and the rotation is detected by a sensor. As a result, the rotation speed of the detection piece for detecting the rotation of the horizontal rotator 2807 is slowed down, so that the rotation can be reliably detected by the sensor, and the presence or absence of rotation of the horizontal rotator 2807 can be determined. . In addition, since the rotation speed of the detection piece is slowed down, there is no need to shorten the detection period of the sensor unnecessarily, and the detection period can be set to an appropriate value, thereby suppressing an increase in the load on the main control board 1310. can be done.

In this sorting unit 2800, for example, a game ball B received in a predetermined variable winning hole is supplied to the vicinity of the right end of the guiding surface portion 2804. As shown in FIG. The game ball B supplied to the vicinity of the right end of the guide surface portion 2804 rolls to the vicinity of the front end of the right side surface portion 2805, and is flipped backward by the horizontal rotating body 2807 rotating near the front end of the side surface portion 2805. . Then, the game ball B flipped backward enters the rolling surface portion 2803 through the central rotating body 2806 from the rear end side of the side surface portion 2805, and rolls forward due to the inclination of the rolling surface portion 2803. . Then, the ball is received in either the prize winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 provided near the front end of the rolling surface portion 2803, or enters the guiding surface portion 2804 through the sides thereof. The game ball B that has entered the guide surface portion 2804 from the rolling surface portion 2803 rolls to one of the left and right side surface portions 2805 according to the portion where it has entered. In addition, the game ball B that rolls from the guiding surface portion 2804 to the left side surface portion 2805 is repelled by the rotating horizontal rotating body 2807 in the same manner as the movement on the side surface portion 2805 described on the right, and the side surface portion 2805 It enters the rolling surface portion 2803 through the central rotating body 2806 from the end side.

Thus, in the sorting unit 2800, the basic flow of the game balls B supplied to the rolling surface portion 2803 rolls on the rolling surface portion 2803 from either the left or right side surface portion 2805 through the central rotating body 2806. After moving, sending to either the left or right side surface portion 2805 by the guiding surface portion 2804 is repeated until the game ball B is received in either the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 .

By the way, if the inner shape of the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 as the passing opening provided on the rolling surface portion 2803 is circular, depending on the rolling direction and rolling speed of the game ball B with respect to the passing opening, etc., The game ball B may be kicked by the passage (ripped out in golf terminology) and roll away from the passage. Then, when the game ball B kicked into the passing hole (winning hole 2801) enters another passing hole (losing hole 2802), the game ball B enters the winning hole 2801, and the winning hole 2801 There is a risk that the player will be kicked by the player and enter the adjacent losing hole 2802, disappointing the player and reducing interest. In addition, due to such a phenomenon, the variation in the acceptance probability (winning probability) of the game ball B to the winning opening 2801 in the rolling surface portion 2803 (distribution unit 2800) increases, and the acceptance probability to the winning opening 2801 becomes unstable. As a result, there is a risk that the player will be distrusted and that it will be difficult to provide a pachinko machine with the same performance.

In this embodiment, since the inner peripheral shape of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 is a non-circular square shape, when the game ball B contacts the edges of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802, the game ball B is received in the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 with which the game ball B is in contact, and the game ball B is not kicked by the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 and received in another losing opening 2802 or the winning opening 2801.例文帳に追加Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being kicked and accepted by the adjacent winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, the game ball B unnecessarily enters the losing opening 2802, causing the player to It is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.
In addition, since it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being unplanned to be accepted into the prize winning opening 2801 and to reduce the variation in the acceptance probability of the game ball B to the winning prize opening 2801, the player is distrusted. This can be avoided, and the pachinko machine 1 with the same performance as the probability of acceptance into the prize winning opening 2801 can be reliably provided.

In addition, since the inner peripheral shape of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 is square, which is a non-circular shape, and the diagonal line thereof extends in the front-rear direction, the peripheral edges of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 Since each of the constituent sides extends in a direction (diagonal direction) intersecting the horizontal direction, the edges (sides) of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 extend in the horizontal direction. Compared to the case, the relative movement distance between the game ball B and the edges (sides) of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 due to abnormal vibration or impact in the front-back direction caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. It can be shortened, and the influence of abnormal vibration, impact, etc. can be reduced. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2801, even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibration or shock, the influence of the abnormal vibration or shock can be reduced. , it is possible to prevent the achievement of the fraudulent act of illegally winning the game ball B into the winning hole 2801.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since the dams 2808 provided along the left and right sides of the rolling surface 2803 are protruded upwards shorter than the radius of the game ball B, the dams 2808 are projected on the rolling surface 2803. , even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to apply abnormal vibrations or shocks in the left-right direction, the point of contact of the game ball B with the weir portion 2808 is sufficiently farther than the center of gravity of the game ball B. , the dam portion 2808 moves relative to the game ball B by the force acting due to the abnormal vibration, impact, etc., and the game ball B moves through the dam portion 2808. The rolling direction of is not changed from the forward direction to the left-right direction. Therefore, abnormal vibrations and impacts caused by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1 act on the game ball B rolling on the rolling surface portion 2803 via the weir portion 2808, and the rolling direction is changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent behavior in which the rolling direction of the game ball B is directed in the direction of the winning opening 2801 due to the abnormal vibration, impact, etc., and is illegally accepted into the winning opening 2801. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, since the extending direction of the diagonal line of the square of the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 is oriented in the front-rear direction, the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 can be seen from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. can make the shape of . Therefore, a distribution having a rolling surface portion 2803 provided with a square winning opening 2801 and a losing opening 2802 in a non-circular shape (here, it looks like a rhombus) which has never been seen in the pachinko machine 1 so far. Since the unit 2800 can be shown to the player, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used as a game machine to play. can be made easy to select, and the game on the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the non-circular winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 have the same shape. may have different shapes to make the winning opening 2801 more conspicuous.

[5-9d-2. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2600 of the center role item 2500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 152 to 164 and the like. FIG. 152(a) is an exploded perspective view of a part of the attacker unit of the center role, seen from the front, and FIG. 152(b) is an exploded perspective view of a part of the attacker unit, seen from behind. be. FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center role viewed from the front, and FIG. 154 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit of the center role viewed from the rear. Figure 155 (a) is a front perspective view of the second starting opening opening/closing unit, the first big winning opening opening/closing unit, the second big winning opening opening/closing unit, and the V sorting unit in the attacker unit, and (b) is a front perspective view. It is the perspective view which looked at the second starting opening opening/closing unit, the first big winning opening opening/closing unit, the second big winning opening opening/closing unit, and the V sorting unit in the attacker unit from behind.

Fig. 156 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the second starter opening/closing unit in the attacker unit of the center accessory and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the second starter opening/closing unit as seen from the rear. 1 is an exploded perspective view; FIG. Figure 157 (a) is a perspective view of the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is closed, and (b) is the second starting port opening/closing unit when the second starting port is open. is a perspective view of, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each configuration of the second starter port opening and closing unit when the second starter port is closed, and (d) is an explanatory view showing the state of each configuration when the second starter port is opened. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each configuration of the second starting port opening/closing unit when it is on;

Figure 158 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the first grand prize opening opening/closing unit in the attacker unit of the center role, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the first grand prize opening opening/closing unit. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from above; FIG. FIG. 159(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of each configuration of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing unit when the first big prize winning opening is closed, and It is an explanatory view showing the state of each configuration of the first big winning opening opening and closing unit when it is.

Figure 160 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the second large winning opening opening/closing unit in the attacker unit of the center role, and (b) is an exploded front view of the second large winning opening opening/closing unit. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from above; FIG. Figure 161 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the V distribution unit in the attacker unit of the center role and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the V distribution unit viewed from the rear. is. FIG. 162(a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the V sorting unit, the V winning slot sensor, the losing slot sensor, and the center right ball path, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. is. FIG. 163(a) is a perspective view showing a mounting state of an opening/closing unit of a different embodiment, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded.

The attacker unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 includes one general winning opening 2001, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening 2006, second big winning opening 2007, V winning opening 2008, losing opening 2009, and right sub-out opening. 2021b. The attacker unit 2600 includes a second starting opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2005, and a second big winning opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007. 2602, a V winning opening sensor 2603 for detecting the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2008, and a loss opening sensor 2604 for detecting the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009.

The attacker unit 2600 is attached to the center base 2511 of the main unit 2510, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The attacker base plate 2610 is a flat plate, and the attacker base plate 2610 is provided on the front side of the base plate 2610. Second starting port 2005, first big winning port 2006, second big winning port 2007, V winning port 2008, losing port 2009, right sub-out port 2021b, and flow path of game ball B, second starting An attacker front plate 2620 holding the front end sides of the mouth sensor 2601, the second big winning mouth sensor 2602, the V winning mouth sensor 2603, and the losing mouth sensor 2604 is provided.

In addition, the attacker units 2600 are attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610, respectively. A large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, a second large winning opening opening/closing unit 2650 for opening and closing the second large winning opening 2007, and a game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 of the V winning opening 2008 or the losing opening 2009. and a V distribution unit 2660 for distributing to any one.

In addition, the attacker units 2600 are respectively held in front of the attacker base plate 2610 and behind the attacker front plate 2620, and a plurality of LEDs for decorating the second starting port 2005 with light are mounted on the upper surface. A second starting opening decoration board 2671, a first big winning opening decoration board 2672 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface for decorating the first big winning opening 2006, and a second big winning opening 2007 are decorated with light. A second large prize winning opening decoration substrate 2673 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface for making the V winning opening 2673 and a V winning opening having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface for decorating the V winning opening 2008 and the losing opening 2009 with light emission. and a decorative substrate 2674 .

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610, and the center right ball path 2675 that guides downward the game ball B received in the second start port 2005 and the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610 A center right ball path 2676 that guides the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2008 and the losing opening 2009 backward and holds the rear end sides of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604. , is equipped with

The center upper right ball path 2675 of the attacker unit 2600 is received by the second starting port 2005 and detected by the second starting port sensor 2601 in front of the attacker base plate 2610, and then guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620 to A game ball B that has passed through the first opening 2611a of the base plate 2610 enters. After entering the center right ball path 2675, the game ball B is guided downward, then guided backward by the first gutter portion 2615 of the attacker base plate 2610, and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, The back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward.

The center right ball path 2676 of the attacker unit 2600 extends in the front-rear direction and is provided above two passage portions 2676a that are adjacent to each other in the left and right direction. and a sensor abutment portion 2676b with which the failure opening sensor 2604 can abut. The two passage portions 2676a are inclined so that the rear end sides thereof are lowered. The sensor contact portion 2676b is brought into contact with the rear portions of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604, thereby controlling the horizontal, downward, and rearward movement of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604. can be regulated.

Further, the center right ball path 2676 further has an annular band holding portion 2676c that protrudes rearward behind the sensor contact portion 2676b so that the binding band CT can be inserted therethrough. By using the band holding portion 2676c and the binding band CT, it is possible to bundle and hold a plurality of wires EC connected to the V winning opening sensor 2603, the losing opening sensor 2604, and the like.

The center right ball path 2676 cooperates with the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660 to sandwich the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 from above and below (see FIG. 162). The center right ball path 2676 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610 in a state assembled to the game board 5, and the front ends of the two passage portions 2676a face the seventh opening 2611g of the attacker base plate 2610. I'm in. In the passage portion 2676 a of the center right ball path 2676 , the ball is received in the second big winning opening 2007 and is sorted by the V sorting unit 2660 to either the V winning opening 2008 or the losing opening 2009 , and the attacker front plate 2620 The game ball B that is guided backward by and passes through the seventh opening 2611g of the attacker base plate 2610 enters. The game ball B that has entered the passage portion 2676a is guided backward by its inclination, delivered from the rear end to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward.

In addition, the attacker unit consists of a substrate base 2677 attached to the rear side of the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630, an attacker relay substrate 2678 attached to the rear side of the substrate base 2677, and an attacker relay substrate 2678 attached to the rear side of the attacker relay substrate 2678. and a magnetic sensor holder 2680 attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610 to hold the magnetic sensor 1030 .

The attacker unit 2600 also has one binding pedestal 2550 attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610 (see FIGS. 166 to 170, etc.), although the details will be described later. The binding pedestal 2550 has an annular band holding portion 2552, and by binding a plurality of wirings EC with a binding band CT passing through the band holding portion 2552, the attacker base plate 2610 can be attached to the attacker base plate 2610 in a state where the plurality of wirings EC are bundled. can be supported by

[5-9b-2a. Attacker base plate]
The attacker base plate 2610 has a flat base plate main body 2611 as shown in FIGS. 152 to 154 . The base plate main body 2611 penetrates in the front and rear at the upper part, and the second starting opening sensor 2601 and the second starting opening door body 2631 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2005 are inserted and received in the second starting opening 2005. The first opening 2611a through which the game ball B passes, the second opening 2611b through which the wiring connected to the second starting opening decoration board 2671 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth below the first opening 2611a, and the second opening A third opening 2611c through which the second big prize winning opening door body 2651 for opening and closing the second big prize winning opening 2007 is penetrated in the front and rear direction below the third opening 2611b and the third opening 2611c. A fourth opening 2611d through which wiring connected to the second grand prize winning opening decoration board 2673 is inserted, and a V winning opening door that penetrates back and forth on the left and below the fourth opening 2611d and opens and closes the V winning opening 2008. A fifth opening 2611e through which the body 2661 is inserted, and a sixth opening 2611f through which the game ball B received in the general prize winning opening 2001 passes through on the left side of the fifth opening 2611e, and a fifth opening 2611e. a seventh opening 2611g through which the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are inserted and the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2008 and the losing opening 2009 passes; An eighth opening 2611h through which the wiring connected to the V winning opening decoration board 2674 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth below the opening 2611g, and which penetrates back and forth to the left of the eighth opening 2611h and the seventh opening 2611g. A ninth opening 2611i through which the game ball B received in the cage right sub-out opening 2021b passes, and a wiring connected to the first prize winning opening decoration board 2672 penetrated in the left side of the ninth opening 2611i. A tenth opening 2611j and a first opening 2611k through which a first big winning opening door 2641 for opening and closing the first big winning opening 2006 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth above and to the left of the tenth opening 2611j. And, below the eleventh opening 2611k, there is a twelfth opening 2611l which penetrates back and forth and through which the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2006 passes.

In addition, the attacker base plate 2610 has a flat plate-like attacker upper shelf 2612 that extends left and right so that the left end is lowered above the first opening 2611a in the front surface of the base plate body 2611 and that protrudes forward. A sensor holding recess 2613 recessed rearward on the left side of the fourth opening 2611d below the third opening 2611c in the front surface of the plate body 2611 and into which the rear end of the second prize winning opening sensor 2602 is inserted. there is

Furthermore, the attacker base plate 2610 passes through a plurality of mounting bosses 2614 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the base plate main body 2611 in a cylindrical shape, and after being received in the second starting port 2005, passes through the first opening 2611a to the upper right of the center. A first gutter portion 2615 that guides backward the game ball B guided by the ball path 2675, and a second gutter portion that guides backward the game ball B that has passed through the sixth opening 2611f after being received in the general winning opening 2001. 2616, and a third gutter portion 2617 that guides backward the game ball B that has passed through the ninth opening 2611i after being received in the right sub-out port 2021b.

[5-9d-2b. Attacker front plate]
Attacker front plate 2620 is formed transparent. The attacker front plate 2620 has a flat front plate main body 2621 and a wall forming portion 2622 extending rearward in a plate shape from the rear surface of the front plate main body 2621 . A central opening 2605 and a right opening 2606 are formed by the wall forming portion 2622 of the attacker front plate 2620 .

In addition, the wall forming part 2622 of the attacker front plate 2620 includes the general winning opening 2001, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, the V winning opening 2008, the losing opening 2009, the right sub-out opening 2021b, and the game ball B In addition to the passage, etc., a sensor holding portion 2623 that holds the front end side of the second starting opening sensor 2601, the second big winning opening sensor 2602, the V winning opening sensor 2603, the losing opening sensor 2604, the second starting opening decoration board 2671, A substrate holding portion 2624 for holding the first big winning opening decoration board 2672, the second big winning opening decoration board 2673, the V winning opening decoration board 2674, and the like are formed.

Furthermore, the attacker's front plate 2620 has an attacker's right guide passage 2625 that guides the game ball B guided by the attacker's upper shelf 2612 . The game ball B can be guided leftward from the second starting hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2007 by this attacker right guide passage 2625 .

[5-9d-2c. Second start gate opening/closing unit]
As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 of the attacker unit 2600 is a flat plate-like second starting opening door body provided so as to be able to advance and retreat forward through the attacker base plate 2610. 2631, a starting opening solenoid 2632 (see FIG. 203) for advancing and retreating the second starting opening door body 2631 according to the normal pattern drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2002, and the second starting opening door It has a unit case 2635 that holds the body 2631 and the starting solenoid 2632 and is composed of a first case portion 2633 and a second case portion 2634 . The second starting port 2005 is open to the right, and a flat plate-like second starting port door body 2631 extends forward and backward and up and down on the right side of the second starting port 2005 (second starting port sensor 2601). It is installed in the extended state.

In addition, the second starting opening opening and closing unit 2630 advances and retreats in the opposite direction to the front and rear movement of the second starting opening door body 2631, penetrates the attacker base plate 2610 and protrudes forward, so that the game ball It has a flat guide piece 2636 capable of guiding B to the second starting port 2005 (second starting port sensor 2601). The guide piece 2636 is held (supported) by the unit case 2635 so as to be able to move forward and backward. A flat plate-shaped guide piece 2636 extends rightward from near the bottom of the second starting port door body 2631 . The guide piece 2636 is inclined so that the right end side is lower. In FIG. 155, since the second starter door body 2631 of the second starter door opening/closing unit 2630 protrudes (advances) forward, the guide piece 2636 that moves in the opposite direction is retracted, and the second starter door 2005 It is a figure which shows the state when closing.

Although not shown, the second start opening/closing unit 2630 is rotatable about a vertical axis inside the unit case 2635. is transmitted to the second starting opening door body 2631 and the guiding piece 2636 to move the second starting opening door body 2631 and the guiding piece 2636 forward and backward.

The second starter opening door body 2631 of the second starter opening opening/closing unit 2630 includes a door piece 2631a which is in the shape of a flat plate elongated in the front-rear direction and is provided with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction. It has a flat plate-like base portion 2631b extending upward, and an opening/closing pin 2631c projecting upward from the base portion 2631b in a cylindrical shape. The door piece 2631a of the second start opening door body 2631 is inclined so that the front end side thereof moves rearward as it goes downward. Further, the door piece 2631a is inclined such that the vicinity of the front end of the right side face moves leftward as it goes forward, and its thickness becomes thinner as it goes forward.

The second starting port door body 2631 is inclined rearward from the front end by a predetermined width so that the right side thereof moves leftward as it goes forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. As a result, when the second starting port door body 2631 moves forward, it is difficult to bite the game ball B between the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620 and the front end of the second starting port door body 2631. However, since the friction is reduced, biting is reduced as much as possible.

The base 2631b of the second starting door door 2631 is supported by the door supporting portion of the second case portion 2644 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the door piece 2631a protrudes forward through the door slit 2634c of the second case portion 2644. can do. The opening/closing pin 2631c of the second starting port door member 2631 is slidably inserted into the first slit 2637e of the opening/closing link 2637 .

The starting solenoid 2632 is held in the unit case 2635 so that the plunger 2632a advances and retreats in the left-right direction (rightward). The starting opening solenoid 2632 is provided so as to overlap vertically (in plan view) with respect to the second starting opening door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636 . A plunger 2632a that advances and retreats in the starting port solenoid 2632 is urged in a projecting direction by a spring (not shown). Therefore, when the starting port solenoid 2632 is not energized, the plunger 2632a protrudes due to the biasing force of the spring, and the second starting port door body 2631 protrudes forward due to the open/close link 2637 that transmits the advance and retraction of the plunger 2632a. While the second starting port 2005 is closed, the guide piece 2636 retreats into the unit case 2635, making it impossible to guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 side.

The unit case 2635 is composed of two members, a first case portion 2633 and a second case portion 2634 . The first case portion 2633 is formed in a box shape that is open forward, left and right, and downward. On the other hand, the second case portion 2634 is formed in a box shape with an open top and a rear. Accordingly, by combining the first case portion 2633 and the second case portion 2634 with each other, the respective open portions are closed. The first case portion 2633 has a shaft portion 2633a that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and supports the open/close link 2637 so as to be rotatable.

A second case portion 2634 of the unit case 2635 extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the front-rear direction along with a door support portion 2634a for supporting the second starting port door 2631 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. A guide piece support portion 2634b for supporting the guide piece 2636 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, a door body slit 2634c penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the door piece 2631a of the second start opening door body 2631 can be inserted, and a guide. It has a guide piece slit 2634d penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the guide piece main body 2636a of the piece 2636 can be inserted.

The door supporting portion 2634a of the second case portion 2634 has a U-shaped cross section that opens upward, and the base portion 2631b of the second starting port door 2631 is slidable in the front-rear direction. inserted. The guide piece support portions 2634b are formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and a pair of the guide piece support portions 2634b are provided so as to be spaced apart in the left-right direction so that the open portions thereof face each other. Left and right side ends of the guide piece body 2636a of the guide piece 2636 are inserted into the pair of guide piece support portions 2634b so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction.

The guide piece 2636 includes a flat guide piece main body 2636a that is long in the left-right and front-rear directions, a notch portion 2636b cut forward from the rear side of the guide piece main body 2636a, and a notch portion 2636b in the guide piece main body 2636a. and an opening/closing pin 2636c projecting upward in a columnar shape from the right portion. A guide piece main body 2636a of the guide piece 2636 is supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by inserting rear portions of both left and right edges into a pair of guide piece support portions 2634b of the second case portion 2634. As shown in FIG. Further, the front end side of the guide piece main body 2636a can pass through the guide piece slit 2634d of the second case portion 2634 and protrude forward.

The guide piece 2636 is inclined rearward from the front end by a predetermined width so that the lower surface moves upward as it goes forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. As a result, when the guide piece 2636 moves forward, it is difficult to bite the game ball B between the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620 and the guide piece 2636. Minimize inclusions as much as possible.

A notch portion 2636b of the guide piece 2636 is notched in a U shape forward from the rear side as shown in FIG. 157 and the like. The notch 2636b is formed so that the opening/closing link 2637 is positioned therein and does not come into contact with the opening/closing link 2637 when the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 is assembled. Although the details will be described later, the presence of the notch portion 2636b of the guide piece 2636 realizes a compact second starting port opening/closing unit 2630. As shown in FIG. The opening/closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is slidably inserted into the second slit 2637g of the opening/closing link 2637. As shown in FIG.

The opening/closing link 2637 includes a vertically extending cylindrical base portion 2637a supported by the unit case 2635 so as to be rotatable about the vertical axis, and a lower arm extending outward from the lower end of the base portion 2637a. 2637b, a pair of transmission pins 2637c extending downward in a columnar shape from the tip of the lower arm at a predetermined interval, and a first pin extending from the upper end of the base portion 2637a in a direction orthogonal to the lower arm 2637b. an arm 2637d, a first slit 2637e cut from the tip of the first arm 2637d toward the base 2637a, a second arm 2637f extending from the upper end of the base 2637a in the opposite direction to the first arm 2637d, and a second slit 2637g cut from the tip of the second arm 2637f toward the base 2637a.

By inserting the shaft portion 2633a of the first case portion 2633, the cylindrical base portion 2637a is held so as to be rotatable about the axis in the vertical direction. The lower arm 2637b extends forward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the base 2637a. A tip of a disk-shaped plunger 2632a of the starting solenoid 2632 is inserted between the pair of transmission pins 2637c. The first arm 2637d extends leftward from the upper end of the base portion 2637a longer than the lower arm 2637b. The first slit 2637e extends from the tip of the first arm 2637d to near the center in the longitudinal direction of the first arm 2637d, and the opening/closing pin 2631c of the second starting port door body 2631 is slidably inserted. The second arm 2637f extends rightward from the upper end of the base 2637a with the same length as the first arm 2637d. The second slit 2637g extends from the tip of the second arm 2637f to near the longitudinal center of the second arm 2637f, and the open/close pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is slidably inserted.

In this second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the unit case 2635 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610, and the second starting opening is passed through the first opening 2611a of the base plate main body 2611. The door 2631 and the guide piece 2636 are configured to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 . In addition, the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 is configured such that the second starting port door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636 are colored in a predetermined color (for example, red, black, blue, etc.) to stand out. there is In addition, the unit case 2635 of the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 is formed transparent, so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside and the light can be transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 157(c) and 157(d), the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 has the starting port solenoid 2632 oriented in the horizontal direction so that the plunger 2632a projects rightward in the assembled state. . The second starting port door body 2631 is provided above the starting port solenoid 2632 . The guide piece 2636 is provided between the second starting port door body 2631 and the starting port solenoid 2632 . The opening/closing link 2637 is provided such that the lower end of the base portion 2637a is positioned below the guide piece 2636 and the upper end of the base portion 2637a is positioned above the base portion 2631b of the second starting port door body 2631.

Further, the opening/closing link 2637 is provided such that its central axis is positioned slightly forward of the rear end of the starting solenoid 2632 within the range where the tip of the plunger 2632a of the starting solenoid 2632 advances and retreats. A second starting opening door body 2631 is provided to the left of the base portion 2637a of the opening/closing link 2637, and a guide piece 2636 is provided so that the base portion 2637a of the opening/closing link 2637 is inserted into the notch portion 2636b. ing. This notch portion 2636b is formed so that the opening/closing link 2637 (base portion 2637a) does not come into contact with it.

The base 2631b of the second starting port door 2631 is inserted into the door supporting portion 2634a that is open to the upper side of the second case portion 2634, and the first arm 2637d of the opening/closing link 2637 is positioned above the base 2631b. is positioned, and the open/close pin 2631c is inserted into the first slit 2637e. As a result, the second starting opening door body 2631 is restricted from moving vertically and horizontally by the door body supporting portion 2634a and the first arm 2637d.

As for the guide piece 2636, both left and right ends of the guide piece main body 2636a are inserted into the guide piece support portions 2634b of the second case portion 2634, and movement in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction is restricted by the guide piece support portions 2634b. The opening/closing pin 2636 c of the guide piece 2636 is inserted into the second slit 2637 g of the opening/closing link 2637 .

The second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 has a spring (not shown) attached to the starting port solenoid 2632, as shown in FIGS. The force causes the plunger 2632a to protrude to the right. In this state, the tip of the plunger 2632a is positioned to the right of the central axis of the base 2637a of the opening/closing link 2637, so that the disk-shaped portion of the tip of the plunger 2632a is inserted between the pair of transmission pins 2637c. As a result, the lower arm 2637b extends forward and to the right with respect to the central axis of the base portion 2637a. Therefore, the tip of the first arm 2637d extending perpendicularly to the lower arm 2637b is positioned forward of the central axis of the base 2637a, and the tip of the second arm 2637f is positioned rearward of the central axis of the base 2637a. located in The opening/closing pin 2631c of the second starting door 2631 is inserted into the first slit 2637e of the first arm 2637d, and the opening/closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is inserted into the second slit 2637g of the second arm 2637f. Since it is inserted, the second starting port door body 2631 advances and the guide piece 2636 retreats.

As a result, the front end of the second starting port door body 2631 protrudes forward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 , and the front end of the guide piece 2636 is positioned rearward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 . In this state, the guide piece 2636 does not guide the game ball B toward the second start opening 2005, and for some reason even if the game ball B goes to the second start opening 2005, the second start opening door body 2631 prevents it from being accepted by the second starting port 2005 .

On the other hand, when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and according to the normal symbol drawn (the normal symbol is "normal hit"), when the starting solenoid 2632 is energized in a predetermined pattern, the biasing force of the spring is applied. Its tip moves to the left so that plunger 2632a retracts against it.
In this state, the tip of plunger 2632a is positioned to the left of the center axis of base 2637a of opening/closing link 2637. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the starting port solenoid 2632 is energized and the plunger 2632a is retracted, the opening/closing link 2637 is moved to the center of the base portion 2637a via a pair of transmission pins 2637c between which the disk-shaped portion of the tip of the plunger 2632a is inserted. Rotate clockwise about the axis. By this rotation, the tip of the first arm 2637d of the opening/closing link 2637 is positioned rearward of the central axis of the base portion 2637a, and the tip of the second arm 2637f is positioned forward of the central axis of the base portion 2637a. Become.
The opening/closing pin 2631c of the second starting door 2631 is inserted into the first slit 2637e of the first arm 2637d, and the opening/closing pin 2636c of the guide piece 2636 is inserted into the second slit 2637g of the second arm 2637f. Since it is inserted, the guide piece 2636 moves forward while the second starting port door body 2631 moves backward.

As a result, the front end of the second starting opening door body 2631 is positioned rearward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 and the front end of the guide piece 2636 protrudes forward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 . When the game ball B flows down on the upper surface of the guide piece 2636 in this state, the game ball B is guided by the guide piece 2636 and rolls to the left. Accepted in 2005.

After being detected by the second starting hole sensor 2601 , the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2005 is guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620 and enters the center upper right ball path 2675 . Then, the game ball B that has entered the center right ball path 2675 is guided backward by the first gutter portion 2615 of the attacker base plate 2610, and after being delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, It is discharged downward from the sphere guiding unit 3100 .

In the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630, when the guide piece 2636 is protruding forward, the front end of the notch 2636b of the guide piece 2636 is located behind the front surface of the unit case 2635, and the notch 2636b does not hinder the circulation of the game ball B, and the notch 2636b is difficult for the player to see.

Further, the second starting opening/closing unit 2630 detachably holds a sensor holding recess 2635a which is recessed rearward from the front surface of the unit case 2635 and can hold the rear portion of the second starting opening sensor 2601, and the magnetic sensor 1030. a magnetic sensor holding portion 2635b that can hold a magnetic sensor, a band holding portion 2635c that annularly protrudes rearward from the rear surface and through which the band portion CTa of the binding band CT can be inserted, and wiring provided below the band holding portion 2635c on the rear surface It has an engaging portion 2635d and a penetrating portion 2635e that penetrates the unit case 2635 at the wire engaging portion 2635d. The sensor holding recessed portion 2635a is provided to the left of the second starting port door member 2631. As shown in FIG.

The sensor holding recess 2635a of the unit case 2635 can hold the second starting opening sensor 2601 so that the detection hole faces the left-right direction, and the axis of the detection hole is inclined to the left. state can be maintained. The unit case 2635 can detachably hold the rear part of the second start opening sensor 2601 from the outside by means of the sensor holding recess 2635a. Further, the sensor holding recess 2635 a can hold the second starting opening sensor 2601 so that the lower end of the detection hole is slightly below the extension line of the upper surface of the guide piece 2636 . As a result, the game ball B guided by the guide piece 2636 can be reliably passed through the detection hole of the second starting opening sensor 2601 and detected.

A band holding portion 2635c of the unit case 2635 is provided with an annular opening directed in the left-right direction. Accordingly, when the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is passed through the band holding portion 2635c and fastened (bound) together with the wiring EC, the wiring EC can be extended in the vertical direction.

After protruding rearward from the rear surface of the unit case 2635, the wire locking portion 2635d extends rightward along the rear surface in a rear view, and is formed in an L shape. The wire locking portion 2635d has a hook-like tip formed on the rear surface side of the unit case 2635, and the surface facing the unit case 2635 including the hook-like portion gradually tapers toward the unit case 2635 toward the tip. sloping away from As a result, the wiring EC extending vertically from the right side in a rear view can be inserted into the wiring locking portion 2635d, and the hook-shaped portion at the tip thereof can prevent the wiring EC from coming off (falling off). .

The penetrating portion 2635e allows the wiring EC to pass between the inside and outside of the unit case 2635, and when the wiring EC is inserted and locked between the wiring locking portion 2635d and the outer surface of the unit case 2635, The wire EC bends into the through portion 2635e, and the pressure applied to the wire EC from the wire locking portion 2635d can be released.

According to the band holding portion 2635c and the wire locking portion 2635d of the unit case 2635, the lower portion of the wire EC held by the band holding portion 2635c by the binding band CT is locked by the wire locking portion 2635d. The wiring EC can be arranged along the rear surface of the unit case 2635 .

The wiring EC held by the band holding portion 2635c and the wire locking portion 2635d includes the magnetic sensor held by the magnetic sensor holding portion 2635b, the second starting opening sensor 2601, the starting opening solenoid 2632, and the second starting opening decoration board. 2671, etc., but other wirings EC may be held.

According to the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 of the present embodiment, the starting port solenoid 2632 is provided so that the plunger 2632a advances and retreats in the left-right direction, and the second starting port door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636 Since they are provided so as to overlap vertically (in a plan view), the dimension in the front-rear direction of the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 can be reduced as much as possible. In addition, since the guide piece 2636 is provided with a notch portion 2636b into which a part of the opening/closing link 2637 for advancing and retreating the second starting opening door body 2631 and the guide piece 2636 is inserted, the guide piece 2636 and the opening/closing link in a plan view are 2637 can be made as small as possible, and the miniaturization of the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 can be realized. Therefore, by making the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 smaller, it is possible to easily secure a space behind, so that the accessories and decorations in the rear can be made larger, and new accessories and decorations can be added in the rear. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by arranging or arranging, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the rear accessory etc., and the game can be played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game of the player.

In addition, since the unit case 2635 of the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 is attached behind the attacker base plate 2610, the unit case 2635 (starting port solenoid 2632) is made difficult to see from the player side by the attacker base plate 2610. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the starter solenoid 2632 being visible, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance.

Furthermore, since the unit case 2635 holding the second starting port door 2631 and the starting port solenoid 2632 is composed of the first case portion 2633 and the second case portion 2634, the second starting port An increase in the number of parts of the opening/closing unit 2630 can be suppressed, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the unit case 2635 is composed of the first case portion 2633 and the second case portion 2634, the second start opening door body 2631 and the start opening solenoid 2632 are arranged in the first case portion 2633 and the second case portion 2634. It is possible to hold it by sandwiching it with the case portion 2634, and it is possible to simplify the labor required for assembly.

In addition, the unit case 2635 of the second starting opening/closing unit 2630 is provided with a sensor holding recess 2635a into which the rear end side of the second starting opening sensor 2601 is inserted. are in contact with each other, the unit case 2635 can restrict the movement of the second starting port sensor 2601 in a predetermined direction, and it is possible to position the second starting port sensor 2601 at a predetermined position. . Further, when assembling the game board 5, the second starting opening sensor 2601 can be guided by the sensor holding recess 2635a of the unit case 2635, so that the assembling work can be facilitated.

[5-9d-2d. First Grand Prize Opening Opening/Closing Unit]
As shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, the first big prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 of the attacker unit 2600 is a flat plate-like first big prize winning opening which is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat forward through the attacker base plate 2610. The door body 2641 and the first big prize opening door body 2641 are drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first lower start opening 2003 or the first upper start opening 2004 or accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2005 According to the first special symbol or second special symbol (for example, "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", etc.) or according to the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning opening 2008 A unit case that holds a first attacker solenoid 2642, a first big prize opening door 2641 and a first attacker solenoid 2642, and is composed of a first case part 2643 and a second case part 2644 2645 and .

The flat plate-like first big prize winning port door body 2641 extends in the left-right direction above the first big prize winning port 2006 that opens upward, so that the left end side is lower.

In addition, the first big prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 is rotatably supported around the vertical axis by a plunger head 2646 attached to a plunger 2642a of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and a unit case 2645. It has an opening and closing link 2647 that advances and retreats the first big winning opening door body 2641 by rotating with the advance and retreat of the plunger head 2646 .

The first big prize winning opening door body 2641 of the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 includes a door piece 2641a that is in the shape of a flat plate that is long in the left and right direction and that is inclined so that the left end side is low, and a door piece 2641a that extends forward from the rear side of the door piece 2641a. and a link slit 2641c that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the door piece 2641a to the right of the notch 2641b and is long in the left and right direction. The front side of the door piece 2641a is bent stepwise so that the portion on the right side of the center is positioned backward, and the rear side is bent in a stepped shape so that the portion on the left side of the center is positioned forward. are doing. In other words, the shape of the door piece 2641a in plan view is formed such that another rectangle that is long left and right is superimposed on the upper right corner of a rectangle that is long left and right.

The first big prize winning opening door body 2641 is inclined rearward from the front end by a predetermined width so that the lower surface moves upward as it goes forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. Thereby, when the first big prize winning opening door body 2641 moves forward, the game ball B is hardly bitten between the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620 and the front end of the first big winning prize opening door body 2641, Even if it bites, it reduces friction as much as possible because it reduces friction.

As shown in FIG. 159, the notch portion 2641b of the first big prize winning opening door body 2641 is provided at a portion located forward and leftward from the center of the rear side of the door piece 2641a. The cutout portion 2641b has a trapezoidal shape that tapers forward, and the right edge of the cutout portion 2641b extends forward and backward near the center of the rear side of the door piece 2641a. It extends straight to The opening/closing pin 2647d of the opening/closing link 2647 is slidably inserted into the link slit 2641c. The first big prize winning opening door 2641 is supported by a unit case 2645 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction.

The first attacker solenoid 2642 is held in the unit case 2645 so that the plunger 2642a advances and retreats in the horizontal direction (leftward). The first attacker solenoid 2642 is provided so as to overlap vertically (in a plan view) with respect to the first big winning opening door body 2641 . The plunger 2642a that advances and retreats from the first attacker solenoid 2642 is urged in a direction in which it protrudes by a spring (not shown). Therefore, when the first attacker solenoid 2642 is not energized, the plunger 2642a protrudes due to the biasing force of the spring. A door 2641 protrudes forward. By projecting forward the first big winning opening door body 2641, the top of the first big winning opening 2006 can be closed and the game ball B cannot be accepted.

The unit case 2645 is provided so that the first case portion 2643 and the second case portion 2644 are vertically separated. Between the first case portion 2643 and the second case portion 2644, the first big winning opening door body 2641 is held so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The unit case 2645 has a ball passage 2645a through which game balls B can flow. The ball passage 2645a has an upstream end that opens forward on the front surface of the unit case 2645 below the first big prize opening door 2641, and a downstream end that opens downward at the rear of the unit case 2645. ing. The ball passage 2645a of this embodiment circulates the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006. FIG. The first case portion 2643 extends downward in a cylindrical shape and has a shaft portion (not shown) that rotatably supports the opening/closing link 2647 .

The plunger head 2646 includes a connecting portion 2646a attached to the plunger 2642a by inserting a disc-shaped portion at the tip of the plunger 2642a of the first attacker solenoid 2642, and a connecting portion 2646a protruding upward from the upper end of the connecting portion 2646a and extending leftward. and a transmission slit 2646c penetrating vertically through the projecting portion 2646b and extending in the front-rear direction. The transmission pin of the opening/closing link 2647 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2646c. The plunger head 2646 advances and retreats in the left-right direction together with the plunger 2642a by attaching the connecting portion 2646a to the plunger 2642a.

The opening/closing link 2647 has a vertically extending cylindrical base portion 2647a supported by the unit case 2645 so as to be rotatable about the axis in the vertical direction, and a triangular shape extending outward from the base portion 2647a. a flat plate-like extension piece 2647b, a transmission pin 2647c that extends downward in a cylindrical shape from one tip of the extension piece 2647b, and a transmission pin 2647c that extends downward in a column shape from the remaining tip of the extension piece 2647b. and an open/close pin 2647d.

The cylindrical base portion 2647a is held so as to be rotatable about the axis in the vertical direction by inserting the shaft portion (not shown) of the first case portion 2643 . The extension piece 2647b extends forward from the vicinity of the lower end of the base portion 2647a so as to widen in a triangular shape. The extension piece 2647b is formed in a triangular shape with the base portion 2647a as one vertex, and one tip vertex is located to the left of the central axis of the base portion 2647a and close to the base portion 2647a. The apex serving as the tip is positioned to the right of the center axis of the base 2647a and far from the base 2647a. The transmission pin 2647c extends downward from the vertex (tip) of the extension piece 2647b near the base 2647a, and is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646. As shown in FIG. The opening/closing pin 2647d extends downward from the vertex (tip) of the extending piece 2647b far from the base 2647a, and is slidably inserted into the link slit 2641c of the first grand prize winning opening door 2641.

When the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 is assembled on the game board 5, the unit case 2645 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610. A special winning opening door body 2641 is configured to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 . Also, the upstream end of the ball passage 2645a of the unit case 2645 is located behind the twelfth opening 2611l of the attacker base plate 2610. As shown in FIG. In addition, the first big prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 is configured such that the first big winning opening door body 2641 is colored in a predetermined color (for example, red, black, blue, etc.) to stand out. In addition, the unit case 2645 of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 is formed transparent, so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside and the light can be transmitted.

As shown in FIG. 159(a) and the like, in the assembled state, the first attacker solenoid 2642 of the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 is oriented in the horizontal direction so that the plunger 2642a protrudes leftward. A plunger head 2646 is attached to the tip of the plunger 2642a of the first attacker solenoid 2642 so as to extend upward. The first big winning opening door body 2641 is provided above the first attacker solenoid 2642 so that the protruding portion 2646b of the plunger head 2646 is located in the notch portion 2641b, and the protruding portion 2646b of the plunger head 2646 The upper end of the protrudes upward from the door piece 2641a (notch 2641b) of the first big prize opening door body 2641. The notch 2641b is formed so that the plunger head 2646 (projection 2646b) does not come into contact with it. In addition, the first big prize winning opening door body 2641 is supported by a unit case 2645 at both left and right edges of a door piece 2641a so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction.

The opening/closing link 2637 has a base portion 2637a located above the door piece 2641a (notch portion 2641b) of the first big prize winning opening door body 2641. As shown in FIG. The center axis of the open/close link 2647 is slightly forward of the rear end of the first attacker solenoid 2642 within the range where the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646 that advances and retreats together with the plunger 2642a of the first attacker solenoid 2642 advances and retreats. It is provided to be located in The transmission pin 2647c of the opening/closing link 2647 is inserted into the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646, and the opening/closing pin 2647d is inserted into the link slit 2641c of the first big prize opening door body 2641.

In the normal state, the plunger 2642a of the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 protrudes leftward due to the biasing force of the spring (not shown) of the first attacker solenoid 2642, and the plunger head 2646 advances and retreats together with the plunger 2642a. is located at the left end of travel. In this state, since the transmission slit 2646c of the plunger head 2646 is positioned to the left of the central axis of the base 2647a of the opening/closing link 2647, the transmission pin 2647c of the opening/closing link 2647 is also to the left of the central axis of the base 2647a. located in
Also, in this state, the opening/closing pin 2647d of the opening/closing link 2647 is positioned forward of the central axis of the base portion 2647a. The front end of the first big winning opening door body 2641 having the link slit 2641c into which the opening/closing pin 2647d of the opening/closing link 2647 is inserted protrudes forward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. Acceptance of the game ball B into the winning opening 2006 is disabled. That is, the first big prize winning opening 2006 is closed.

On the other hand, according to the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 or accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005 (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", etc.) Or, in response to the reception of the game ball B into the V winning opening 2008, the first attacker solenoid 2642 is energized in a predetermined pattern. Then, the tip of the plunger 2642a moves rightward against the urging force of the spring so that the plunger 2642a is retracted, and the plunger head 2646 moves rightward together with the plunger 2642a. When the plunger head 2646 moves to the right, the transmission slit 2646c moves to the right of the center axis of the base 2647a of the open/close link 2647, so that the transmission pin 2647c inserted in the transmission slit 2646c As a result, the open/close link 2647 rotates counterclockwise. Due to this rotation, the opening/closing pin 2647d of the opening/closing link 2647 moves rearward from the center axis of the base portion 2647a, and the opening/closing pin 2647d is inserted through the link slit 2641c, and the first big prize opening door body 2641 moves. will slide backwards.

As a result, the front end of the first big winning opening door body 2641 is located behind the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and the first big winning opening 2006 is opened so that the game ball B can be received. In this state, as shown in FIG. 152(a), the front end of the notch 2641b of the first big prize opening door 2641 is located forward of the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and is visible from the front. It has become. At this time, the cutout portion 2641b of the first big winning opening door body 2641 protrudes from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 at a distance shorter than the radius of the game ball B, so the game ball B of the cutout portion 2641b contacts. Therefore, the circulation of game balls B is not hindered.

The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006 is guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620, passes through the twelfth opening 2611l of the attacker base plate 2610, and enters the ball passage 2645a of the unit case 2645. Then, the game ball B that has entered the ball passage 2645a is transferred from the downstream end to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and after being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 3002 (see FIG. 203), is discharged to

According to the first big prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 of the present embodiment, the first attacker solenoid 2642 is provided so that the plunger advances and retreats in the left and right direction, and the first big prize winning opening door body 2641 moves up and down. Since they are provided so as to overlap (in a plan view), the front-rear dimension of the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be made as small as possible. In addition, since the notch portion 2641b into which a part of the plunger head 2646 for advancing and retracting the first big prize winning port door 2641 is inserted is provided in the first big prize winning port door 2641, the first big prize winning in plan view is provided. The area of the region composed of the gate body 2641, the plunger head 2646 and the opening/closing link 2647 can be made as small as possible, and the miniaturization of the first prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be realized. Therefore, by making the first big prize opening opening/closing unit 2640 smaller, it is possible to make it easier to secure a space behind, so that the accessories and decorations in the back can be made larger, and new accessories and decorations can be added in the back. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by arranging and doing the body, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the accessories in the back. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the unit case 2645 of the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 is attached behind the attacker base plate 2610, the unit case 2645 (first attacker solenoid 2642) can be seen from the player side by the attacker base plate 2610. It is possible to make it difficult, suppress deterioration in appearance due to the first attacker solenoid 2642 being visible, and provide a pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance.

Furthermore, since the unit case 2645 holding the first big prize opening door 2641 and the first attacker solenoid 2642 is composed of the first case portion 2643 and the second case portion 2644, the first An increase in the number of parts of the big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be suppressed, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the unit case 2645 is composed of the first case portion 2643 and the second case portion 2644, the first big winning opening door 2641 and the first attacker solenoid 2642 are combined with the first case portion 2643. It is possible to hold it by sandwiching it with the second case portion 2644, and it is possible to simplify the labor required for assembly.

Further, in the first big winning gate opening/closing unit 2640, when the first big winning gate 2006 is closed by the first big winning gate door body 2641, one of the notches 2641b of the first big winning gate door body 2641 is opened. A first big prize winning opening decoration board 2672 is provided, which protrudes forward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 and has an LED capable of irradiating light upward to the first big winning opening 2006. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED of the first big prize winning opening decoration board 2672 can illuminate the game ball B rolling on the first big winning opening door body 2641 through the notch 2641b from below. As a result, the player can see an effect in which the game ball B rolling on the first big prize opening door body 2641 is illuminated, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine so far. The player's interest can be strongly attracted, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

[5-9d-2e. Second Grand Prize Opening Opening/Closing Unit]
As shown in FIG. 160, the second large winning opening opening/closing unit 2650 of the attacker unit 2600 includes a flat plate-like second large winning opening door body 2651 provided so as to be able to advance and retreat forward through the attacker base plate 2610. , The second special winning opening door body 2651 is selected by receiving the game ball B at the first lower starting opening 2003, the first upper starting opening 2004, and the second starting opening 2005. The second attacker solenoid 2652 for advancing and retreating according to the second large winning opening door body 2651 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 are held and the first case part 2653 and the second case part 2654 The unit case 2655, the plunger head 2656 attached to the advancing and retracting plunger 2652a of the second attacker solenoid 2652, and the unit case 2655 rotatably support the plunger about the axis in the vertical direction. It has an open/close link 2657 that advances and retreats the second big winning opening door body 2651 by rotating with the advance and retreat of the head 2656 .

The second big prize winning opening door body 2651 of the second big winning opening opening/closing unit 2650 includes a door piece 2651a that is in the shape of a flat plate that is long in the left and right direction and that is inclined so that the left end side is low, and a left-right center at the rear end of the door piece 2651a. and a link slit 2651c penetrating vertically through the base 2651b and extending horizontally. The second big winning opening door 2651 is supported on the upper surface of the unit case 2655 (first case portion 2653) so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. An opening/closing pin 2657e of the opening/closing link 2657 is slidably inserted into the link slit 2651c.

The second big prize winning opening door body 2651 is slanted from the front end to the rear by a predetermined width so that the lower surface moves upward as it goes forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. Thereby, when the second big winning opening door body 2651 moves forward, it is difficult to bite the game ball B between the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620 and the front end of the second big winning opening door body 2651, Even if it bites, it reduces friction as much as possible because it reduces friction.

The second attacker solenoid 2652 is held in the unit case 2655 in such a direction that a plunger 2652a that advances and retracts when energized protrudes leftward. The second attacker solenoid 2652 is provided so as to overlap vertically (in a plan view) with respect to the second prize winning opening door body 2651 . The second attacker solenoid 2652 has a spring (not shown) and is biased by the spring in a direction in which the plunger 2652a protrudes. The plunger 2652a has a disk-shaped tip.

The unit case 2655 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610 .
The unit case 2655 is composed of a first case portion 2653 and a second case portion 2654 which are vertically separated from each other. The unit case 2655 holds (supports) the second big winning opening door 2651 on its upper surface so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Also, the unit case 2655 holds the second attacker solenoid 2652, the plunger head 2656, and the open/close link 2657 inside.

A first case portion 2653 of the unit case 2655 has four slide holding pieces 2653a protruding upward in an inverted L shape from the upper surface. The two slide holding pieces 2653a are provided at the left and right ends of the first case portion 2653 so that the top ends of the horizontally extending portions of the upper ends face each other. The two sliding holding pieces 2653a can hold (support) the left and right ends of the door piece 2651a of the second big winning opening door body 2651 so as to be slidable. The remaining two slide holding pieces 2653a are provided on the upper surface of the first case portion 2653 at the rear portion near the center in the left-right direction so that the tips of the horizontally extending portions of the upper ends face each other and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. there is The two slide holding pieces 2653a can hold (support) the left and right ends of the base portion 2651b of the second big prize opening door body 2651 in a slidable manner.

In addition, the first case portion 2653 of the unit case 2655 has a fan-shaped through-hole 2653b penetrating vertically between two slide holding pieces 2653a in the center in the left-right direction. . An opening/closing pin 2657e of the opening/closing link 2657 is inserted through the through hole 2653b from below.

The second case portion 2654 of the unit case 2655 is formed in a box-like shape that is open upward and elongated in the left and right directions, and has a shaft portion 2654a that extends upward in a cylindrical shape from near the left end of the bottom wall. . A shaft portion 2654a of the second case portion 2654 is for rotatably supporting the opening/closing link 2657. As shown in FIG.

The plunger head 2656 has a connection portion 2656a attached to the plunger 2652a by inserting the disc-shaped portion at the tip of the plunger 2652a of the second attacker solenoid 2652, and an extension portion extending leftward from the connection portion 2656a. 2656b and a transmission portion 2656c provided at the tip of the extension portion 2656b. The transmission portion 2656c is formed in a U-shape that opens forward in plan view, and the transmission pin 2657c of the opening/closing link 2657 is slidably inserted therein. The plunger head 2656 advances and retreats in the left-right direction together with the plunger 2652a by attaching the connecting portion 2656a to the plunger 2652a.

The opening/closing link 2657 includes a vertically extending cylindrical base portion 2657a supported by the unit case 2655 so as to be rotatable about the axis in the vertical direction, and a first arm 2657b extending outward from the base portion 2657a. , a transmission pin 2657c that extends upward in a cylindrical shape from the tip of the first arm 2657b, and a second pin that extends outward from the base portion 2657a in a direction different from that of the first arm 2657b longer than the first arm 2657b. It has a second arm 2657d and an opening/closing pin 2657e that extends upward in a cylindrical shape from the tip of the second arm 2657d.

By inserting the shaft portion 2654a of the second case portion 2654, the cylindrical base portion 2657a is held so as to be rotatable about the axis in the vertical direction. The first arm 2657b extends forward from the lower end of the base 2657a. The transmission pin 2657 c is slidably inserted into the U-shaped transmission portion 2656 c of the plunger head 2656 . The second arm 2657d extends rightward from the upper end of the base 2657a. The second arm 2657d has an extending direction different from that of the first arm 2657b by 90 degrees, and extends twice as long as the first arm 2657b. The opening/closing pin 2657e is slidably inserted into the link slit 2651c of the second big winning opening door body 2651 through the through hole 2653b of the first case portion 2653 of the unit case 2655.

The unit case 2655 of the second large winning opening opening/closing unit 2650 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610 in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the second large winning opening opening/closing unit 2650 passes through the third opening 2611c of the base plate main body 2611. A winning opening door body 2651 is configured to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 . In addition, the second big prize opening opening/closing unit 2650 is configured so that the second big prize opening door body 2651 is colored in a predetermined color (for example, red, black, blue, etc.) to stand out. In addition, the unit case 2655 of the second prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2650 is formed transparent, so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside and the light can be transmitted.

In the normal state, the second large winning opening opening/closing unit 2650 advances the second large winning opening door body 2651 by the biasing force of the spring of the second attacker solenoid 2652 so that the front end of the second large winning opening opening/closing unit 2650 is ahead of the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610. , making it impossible to accept the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007 . That is, the second big prize winning opening 2007 is closed.

On the other hand, according to the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 or accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005 (For example, the lottery special symbols are "big win", "medium win", "minor win", etc.), and when the second attacker solenoid 2652 is energized in a predetermined pattern, it resists the biasing force of the spring. As a result, the plunger 2652a is retracted, and the opening/closing link 2657 is rotated via the plunger head 2656 attached to the tip of the plunger 2652a. Due to the rotation of the open/close link 2657 , the second big winning opening door body 2651 retreats and the front end is positioned behind the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 . As a result, the second big winning hole 2007 is opened and the game ball B can be received.

The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2602 provided in front of the attacker base plate 2610 below the second large winning opening 2007, and then the attacker It is further guided downward by the front plate 2620 . A V winning opening 2008 and a losing opening 2009 are provided below (downstream) the second large winning opening sensor 2602, and the game ball B detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2602 It will be distributed to either the V winning opening 2008 or the losing opening 2009 .

After being detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603 on the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2008 is guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620, and passes through the seventh opening 2611g of the attacker base plate 2610. Enter center right ball path 2676 through . On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the losing hole 2009 is detected by the losing hole sensor 2604 on the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and then guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620, and the seventh opening 2611g of the attacker base plate 2610. , and enters passage portion 2676a of center right lower ball path 2676. Then, the game ball B that has entered the passage portion 2676a of the center right ball path 2676 is transferred from its downstream end (rear end) to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and from the back ball guiding unit 3100 downward. Ejected.

According to the second big winning gate opening/closing unit 2650 of the present embodiment, the second attacker solenoid 2652 is provided so that the plunger 2652a advances and retreats in the horizontal direction, and the vertical movement of the second big winning gate door body 2651 is performed. (in a plan view), the dimension of the second big prize opening opening/closing unit 2650 in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible.
Therefore, by making the second big prize opening opening/closing unit 2650 smaller, it is possible to make it easier to secure the space behind, so that the accessories and decorations in the back can be made larger, and new accessories and decorations can be added in the back. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by arranging and doing the body, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the accessories in the back. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the unit case 2655 of the second big winning opening opening/closing unit 2650 is attached behind the attacker base plate 2610, the unit case 2655 (second attacker solenoid 2652) can be seen from the player side by the attacker base plate 2610. It is possible to make it difficult, suppress deterioration in appearance due to the second attacker solenoid 2652 being visible, and provide a pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance.

Furthermore, since the unit case 2655 holding the second big prize opening door 2651 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 is composed of the first case portion 2653 and the second case portion 2654, the second An increase in the number of parts of the big winning opening opening/closing unit 2650 can be suppressed, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the unit case 2655 is composed of the first case portion 2653 and the second case portion 2654, the second attacker solenoid 2652 is sandwiched between the first case portion 2653 and the second case portion 2654. It becomes possible to hold it, and the labor required for assembly can be simplified.

[5-9d-2f. V distribution unit]
The V distribution unit 2660 of the attacker unit 2600 includes, as shown in FIG. It holds a V distribution solenoid 2662 for advancing and retreating the body 2661, a V winning opening door body 2661 and a V distribution solenoid 2662, and is composed of a first case portion 2663 and a second case portion 2664. a plunger head 2666 attached to a plunger 2662a that advances and retreats of the V distribution solenoid 2662; It has an open/close link 2667 that advances and retreats the V winning opening door body 2661 by rotating by advancing and retreating.

The V prize opening door body 2661 of the V distribution unit 2660 has a flat plate shape slightly longer than one game ball B on the left and right sides, and a door piece 2661a inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the rear end of the door piece 2661a. and a link slit 2661c provided at the rear end of the base portion 2661b and penetrating vertically and extending left and right. The V winning opening door 2661 is supported in the unit case 2665 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. An opening/closing pin 2667e of the opening/closing link 2667 is slidably inserted into the link slit 2661c.

The V winning a prize opening door body 2661 is slanted from the front end to the rear by a predetermined width so that the lower surface moves upward as it goes forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower.
As a result, when the V winning opening door 2661 moves forward, it is difficult to bite the game ball B between the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620 and the front end of the V winning opening door 2661. Since friction is reduced, biting is reduced as much as possible.

The V distribution solenoid 2662 is held in the unit case 2665 in such a direction that a plunger 2662a that advances and retracts when energized protrudes leftward. The V distribution solenoid 2662 is provided so as to overlap vertically (in a plan view) with respect to the V winning opening door 2661 . The V distribution solenoid 2662 has a spring (not shown) and is biased by the spring in a direction in which the plunger 2662a protrudes. The plunger 2662a has a disk-shaped tip.

The unit case 2665 is attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610 .
The unit case 2665 is composed of a first case portion 2663 and a second case portion 2664 which are vertically separated from each other. The unit case 2665 holds (supports) the V winning opening door 2661 slidably in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the second case portion 2664 inside. Also, the unit case 2665 holds the V distribution solenoid 2662, the plunger head 2666, and the open/close link 2667 inside.

A first case portion 2663 of the unit case 2665 is shaped like a box that is open downward and elongates in the left and right directions. The second case portion 2664 is formed in a box-like shape that is open upward and elongated in the left and right direction. The second case portion 2664 has two slide holding pieces 2664a protruding upward in an inverted L shape from the upper surface of the bottom wall. The two slide holding pieces 2664a are provided so that the top ends of the horizontally extending portions of the first case portion 2663 face each other, centered on a portion slightly leftward with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The two slide holding pieces 2653a can hold (support) the left and right ends of the base portion 2661b of the V winning opening door body 2661 so as to be slidable.

The second case portion 2664 also has a shaft portion 2664b that extends upward in a cylindrical shape from near the rear end to the left of the two slide holding pieces 2664a on the bottom wall. A shaft portion 2664b of the second case portion 2664 is for rotatably supporting the opening/closing link 2667. As shown in FIG.

The unit case 2665 has a sensor abutting portion 2665a on the lower surface of the outer surface, with which a part of the V winning opening sensor 2603 or the losing opening sensor 2604 abuts. By bringing the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 into contact with the sensor contact portion 2665a, movement of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 in a predetermined direction can be restricted. More specifically, the sensor contact portion 2665a is formed in a stepped shape with the right side being higher than the left side. Upward and leftward movement can be restricted.

The plunger head 2666 has a connection portion 2666a attached to the plunger 2662a by inserting the disc-shaped portion at the tip of the plunger 2662a of the V distribution solenoid 2662, and an extension portion extending leftward from the connection portion 2666a. 2666b, and a transmission pin 2666c projecting downward from the tip of the extending portion 2666b in a cylindrical shape. The transmission pin 2666c is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2667c of the opening/closing link 2667. As shown in FIG. The plunger head 2666 advances and retreats in the left-right direction together with the plunger 2662a by attaching the connecting portion 2666a to the plunger 2662a.

The opening/closing link 2667 includes a vertically extending cylindrical base portion 2667a supported by the unit case 2665 so as to be rotatable about the vertical axis, and a first arm 2667b extending outward from the base portion 2667a. , an elongated hole-shaped transmission slit 2667c penetrating vertically through the first arm 2667b and extending in the longitudinal direction of the first arm 2667b, and the first arm 2667b from the base portion 2667a in a direction different from that of the first arm 2667b. It has a second arm 2667d extending outward longer than 2667b, and an opening/closing pin 2667e extending downward in a cylindrical shape from the tip of the second arm 2667d.

By inserting the shaft portion 2664b of the second case portion 2664, the cylindrical base portion 2667a is held so as to be rotatable about the axis in the vertical direction. The first arm 2667b extends forward from the upper end of the base 2667a. A transmission pin 2666c of the plunger head 2666 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2667c. The second arm 2667d extends rightward from the upper end of the base 2667a. The extension direction of the second arm 2667d differs from that of the first arm 2667b by 90 degrees, and it extends twice as long as the first arm 2667b. The opening/closing pin 2667e is slidably inserted into the link slit 2661c of the V winning opening door 2661. As shown in FIG.

This V distribution unit 2660 has a unit case 2665 attached to the rear side of the attacker base plate 2610 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and the V winning opening door 2661 through the fifth opening 2611e of the base plate main body 2611. is configured to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 . In addition, the V distribution unit 2660 is configured such that the V winning opening door 2661 is colored in a predetermined color (eg, red, black, blue, etc.) to stand out. In addition, the V distribution unit 2660 has a transparent unit case 2665 so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside and light can be transmitted.

Furthermore, in the V allocation unit 2660 , the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are in contact with the sensor contact portion 2665 a on the lower surface of the unit case 2665 . A sensor contact portion 2676b of a center right ball path 2676 is in contact with the V winning hole sensor 2603 and the losing hole sensor 2604 from the left, right, downward, and rearward directions. In other words, the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are sandwiched between the V sorting unit 2660 and the center right ball path 2676, and their vertical, rearward, and horizontal movements are restricted (see FIG. 162). ).

In the V distribution unit 2660, when the V distribution solenoid 2662 is not energized, the V prize opening door body 2661 advances due to the biasing force of the spring of the V distribution solenoid 2662, and the front end is the attacker base plate 2610. It protrudes forward from the front surface of , making it impossible to accept the game ball B into the V winning opening 2008. That is, the V winning opening 2008 is closed. As a result, the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 and flowing down toward the V winning opening 2008 can be guided to the losing opening 2009 on the right side by the inclination of the V winning opening door body 2661. The game ball B can be distributed to the loss opening 2009. - 特許庁

Then, the game ball B distributed (accepted) to the losing port 2009 is detected by the losing port sensor 2604 on the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610, and then guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620, and the attacker base plate 2610 through the seventh opening 2611g to enter the passage portion 2676a of the center right lower ball path 2676; Then, the game ball B that has entered the passage portion 2676a of the center right ball path 2676 is transferred from its downstream end (rear end) to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and from the back ball guiding unit 3100 downward. Ejected.

On the other hand, when the V distribution solenoid 2662 is energized, the plunger 2662a is retracted against the biasing force of the spring, and the opening/closing link 2667 is rotated via the plunger head 2666 attached to the tip of the plunger 2662a. Due to the rotation of the open/close link 2667 , the V winning opening door body 2661 retreats and the front end is positioned behind the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 . As a result, the V winning opening 2008 is opened and the game ball B can be received. In this state, when the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 flows down, it is received in the V winning opening 2008 . In other words, it is distributed to the V winning opening 2008 .

In addition, the energization of the V distribution solenoid 2662 may be energized at a constant cycle regardless of the progress of the game, or the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 It may be energized in a predetermined pattern according to the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by acceptance or acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2005. - 特許庁

After being detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603 in front of the attacker base plate 2610, the game ball B distributed (accepted) to the V winning hole 2008 is guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620, and is guided backward by the attacker base plate 2610. through the seventh opening 2611g of the center right hemispherical path 2676. Then, the game ball B that has entered the passage portion 2676a of the center right ball path 2676 is transferred from its downstream end (rear end) to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and from the back ball guiding unit 3100 downward. Ejected.

According to the V distribution unit 2660 of the present embodiment, the V distribution solenoid 2662 is provided so that the plunger 2662a advances and retreats in the left-right direction, and the V prize opening door body 2661 vertically (in plan view) ) Since the V distribution unit 2660 is provided so as to overlap, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the V distribution unit 2660 can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, by making the V distribution unit 2660 smaller, it is possible to easily secure a space behind, so that the accessories and decorations in the back can be made larger, and new accessories and decorations can be arranged in the back. By doing so, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the rear accessories, etc., and the player's It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Also, since the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660 is attached behind the attacker base plate 2610, the unit case 2665 (V distribution solenoid 2662) is made difficult to see from the player side by the attacker base plate 2610. is possible, it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the V distribution solenoid 2662 being visible, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance.

Furthermore, since the unit case 2665 holding the V winning opening door 2661 and the V distribution solenoid 2662 is composed of the first case portion 2663 and the second case portion 2664, the V distribution unit An increase in the number of parts of the 2660 can be suppressed, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the unit case 2665 is composed of the first case portion 2663 and the second case portion 2664, the V winning opening door 2661 and the V distribution solenoid 2662 are arranged in the first case portion 2663 and the second case portion 2664. It is possible to hold it by sandwiching it with the case portion 2664, and it is possible to simplify the labor required for assembly.

In addition, a sensor contact portion 2665a is provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660, and the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are in contact with the outer surface of the unit case 2665. The unit case 2665 can restrict the movement of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 in a predetermined direction, and the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 can be positioned at predetermined positions. can. Further, when assembling the game board 5, the sensor contact portion 2665a of the unit case 2665 can guide the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604, thereby facilitating the assembly work.

[5-9d-2g. Second Embodiment of Opening/Closing Unit]
Next, an opening/closing unit 2700 of an embodiment different from the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630, the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, the second big winning opening opening/closing unit 2650, and the V sorting unit 2660 is shown in FIG. 163 for a detailed description. FIG. 163 is a perspective view from the bottom rear. This opening/closing unit 2700 is attached to the rear side of a flat base plate 2710 .

The opening/closing unit 2700 includes a flat plate-like door 2701 which penetrates a base plate 2710 and is provided so as to be able to move back and forth; a solenoid 2702 as a driving means for moving the door 2701 forward and backward; and a unit case 2705 configured by two of a first case portion 2703 and a second case portion 2704 .

A door 2701 of the opening/closing unit 2700 is inclined rearward from the front end by a predetermined width so that the lower surface moves upward as it goes forward. That is, it is tapered so that the front end becomes narrower. As a result, when the door body 2701 moves forward, it is difficult to bite the game ball B between the front plate (not shown) and the front end of the door body 2701. It's getting less and less.

The solenoid 2702 is held in the unit case 2705 in such a direction that a plunger 2702a that advances and retracts when energized projects rightward. The solenoid 2702 has a spring (not shown) and is biased by the spring in a direction in which the plunger 2702a protrudes. The plunger 2702a has a disk-shaped tip.

In this opening/closing unit 2700, when the solenoid 2702 is not energized, the plunger 2702a protrudes due to the biasing force of the spring. It retreats so that it may be located behind the front of 2710 . As a result, the game ball B cannot be guided to a reception opening (not shown) by the door 2701, and reception of the game ball B to the reception opening is disabled.

In the opening/closing unit 2700, when the solenoid 2702 is energized and the plunger 2702a is retracted against the biasing force of the spring, the opening/closing link (not shown) advances the door body 2701, and the front end of the door body 2701 moves toward the first opening 2710a of the base plate 2710. It will be in a state of protruding forward from the front through. Since the door 2701 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, the ball sensor 2711 whose detection hole protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 2710 through the second opening 2710b on the left side of the door 2701 The game ball B can be guided to. Therefore, when the game ball B flows down onto the door 2701 while the door 2701 is protruding, the game ball B can be guided toward the ball sensor 2711 by the upper surface of the door 2701, and the game ball B can be moved. It can be detected by passing through the detection hole of the ball sensor 2711 . That is, it is possible to accept the game ball B into the acceptance port.

The opening/closing unit 2700 includes an annular band holding portion 2706 provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2705, and a mounting member provided in the unit case 2705 for attaching the opening/closing unit 2700 to the mounting boss 2710c of the base plate 2710. and a sensor abutting portion 2708 which is provided in the unit case 2705 and can abut against the ball sensor 2711 held by the sensor holding portion 2710d of the base plate 2710 .

As illustrated, a plurality of band holding portions 2706 are provided at different positions on the outer surface of the unit case 2705 . Specifically, two band holding portions 2706 are provided on the left side surface 2705L of the unit case 2705 and one band holding portion 2706 is provided on the right side surface of the unit case 2705 . Each band holding portion 2706 has an annular opening directed vertically. The band holding part 2706 tightens (bundles) together with the wiring EC connected to the solenoid 2702, the ball sensor 2711, etc. in a state where the band part CTa of the binding band CT is passed through the annular part, thereby binding the wiring EC. It is for holding in the unit case 2705 .

Two mounting portions 2707 are provided, and project outward from the left and right side surfaces of the unit case 2705 in a flange shape. The sensor holding portion 2710d is provided integrally with the mounting portion 2707 protruding from the left side surface 2705L of the unit case 2705. As shown in FIG. The sensor holding portion 2710d closes a portion of the rearwardly open portion of the U-shaped sensor holding portion 2710d that can accommodate a portion of the ball sensor 2711 in the base plate 2710 . Thereby, the rearward movement of the ball sensor 2711 held by the sensor holding portion 2710d can be restricted. The open U-shaped portion of the sensor holding portion 2710d faces rightward (toward the unit case 2705).

In the opening/closing unit 2700 of this embodiment, when assembled on the game board 5, the two mounting portions 2707 are mounted with their front surfaces in contact with the rear ends of the mounting bosses 2710c of the base plate 2710. As shown in FIG. The ball sensor 2711 has a front portion provided with a detection hole through the second opening 2710b from the rear of the base plate 2710 and protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 2710, and a U-shaped sensor holding portion 2710d at the rear. housed inside. A portion of the rear end of the ball sensor 2711 contacts the sensor contact portion 2708 , and a portion of the peripheral side surface of the rear portion of the ball sensor 2711 contacts the left side surface 2705 L of the unit case 2705 .

A front plate (not shown) provided in front of the base plate 2710 is in contact with the front end of the ball sensor 2711 . Thereby, the ball sensor 2711 is positioned at a predetermined position. In addition, as described above, since the left side surface 2705L of the outer side surface of the unit case 2705 is in contact with a part of the ball sensor 2711, the unit case 2705 prevents the ball sensor 2711 from moving in a predetermined direction. It has a regulatory function.

In this embodiment, the wiring EC connected to the solenoid 2702 extends outside from the rear portion of the left side surface 2705L of the unit case 2705, and the rear end of the ball sensor 2711 provided on the left side of the unit case 2705 The wiring EC connected to extends backward. The wires EC extend rightward along the lower surface of the unit case 2705, and are fastened by a binding band CT to a band holding portion 2706 provided at the lower rear end of the right side surface of the unit case 2705. there is For details of the binding band CT, refer to [5-9a-1. wiring locking part].

At this time, the wire EC connected to the solenoid 2702 is tightened with little slack, and the wire EC connected to the ball sensor 2711 is tightened with a large slack. Accordingly, when the unit case 2705 is removed from the base plate 2710, the ball sensor 2711 is not pulled backward by the wiring EC until the unit case 2705 is separated from the base plate 2710 to some extent. That is, the opening/closing unit 2700 can be separated from the base plate 2710 to some extent while the ball sensor 2711 is held by the sensor holding portion 2710d, and the opening/closing unit 2700 can be checked (maintained).

In addition, since the wiring EC connected to the ball sensor 2711 is held by the band holding portion 2706 by the binding band CT, even if the opening/closing unit 2700 is removed from the base plate 2710 together with the ball sensor 2711, the wiring EC The opening/closing unit 2700 and the sphere sensor 2711 are connected, and loss of the sphere sensor 2711 can be prevented.

According to the opening/closing unit 2700 of this embodiment, the solenoid 2702 is provided so that the plunger 2702a advances and retreats in the left-right direction, so the front-rear dimension of the opening/closing unit 2700 can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, by making the opening/closing unit 2700 smaller, it is possible to easily secure a space in the rear. By doing so, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the rear accessories, etc., and the player's interest in the game can be improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the unit case 2705 of the opening/closing unit 2700 is attached behind the base plate 2710, the unit case 2705 (solenoid 2702) can be made difficult to see from the player side by the base plate 2710, and the solenoid 2702 can be A pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance can be provided by suppressing deterioration in the appearance due to being visible.

Furthermore, since the unit case 2705 holding the door 2701 and the solenoid 2702 is composed of the first case portion 2703 and the second case portion 2704, an increase in the number of parts of the opening/closing unit 2700 is suppressed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Since the unit case 2705 is composed of the first case portion 2703 and the second case portion 2704, the door 2701 and the solenoid 2702 are sandwiched between the first case portion 2703 and the second case portion 2704. It becomes possible to hold it in such a way that it is squeezed, and it is possible to simplify the labor required for assembly.

In addition, since the sensor contact portion 2708 is provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2705 of the opening/closing unit 2700 and the ball sensor 2711 contacts the outer surface of the unit case 2705, the unit case 2705 prevents the ball sensor 2711 from Movement in a predetermined direction can be restricted, and the ball sensor 2711 can be positioned at a predetermined position. Further, when assembling the game board 5, the ball sensor 2711 can be guided by the sensor contact portion 2708 of the unit case 2705, so that the assembling work can be facilitated.

Further, since the unit case 2705 of the opening/closing unit 2700 is provided with a plurality of ring-shaped band holding portions 2706, the band portions CTa of the binding band CT are passed through the band holding portions 2706 and tightened together with the wiring EC, whereby the wiring EC can be connected to the unit. It can be held in the case 2705, and the wiring EC can be made difficult to see from the player side by collecting the wiring EC.

In addition, since a plurality of band holding portions 2706 are provided, a required band holding portion 2706 can be used according to the routing direction of the wiring EC. Therefore, even if the installation position of the opening/closing unit 2700 is changed due to model or design change, etc., even if the winding direction of the wiring EC is changed, it can be dealt with by using one of the band holding portions 2706. , the opening/closing unit 2700 can be highly versatile, and the opening/closing unit 2700 can be reused, so that an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the unit case 2705 is provided with the band holding portion 2706, before the game board 5 is assembled, the wiring EC of the ball sensor 2711, which is separate from the opening/closing unit 2700, is connected to the band holding portion 2706 by the binding band CT. It is possible to prevent the sphere sensor 2711 from being left unattached during assembly.

Furthermore, since the unit case 2705 is provided with the sensor contact portion 2708 that contacts the rear end of the ball sensor 2711, the opening/closing unit 2700 can be opened while the ball sensor 2711 is held by the sensor holding portion 2710d of the base plate 2710. When attached to the base plate 2710 , the ball sensor 2711 can be attached with the sensor contact portion 2708 restricting the rearward movement of the ball sensor 2711 . Therefore, it is not necessary to attach the ball sensor 2711 separately from the opening/closing unit 2700, and the assembly of the game board 5 can be facilitated.

[5-9d-2h. Attachment of the sensor in the attacker unit]
Next, regarding the attachment of the sensors (here, the second starting opening sensor 2601, the second big winning opening sensor 2602, the V winning opening sensor 2603, and the losing opening sensor 2604) in the attacker unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500, see FIG. 154, 162, 164, etc., will be described in detail. Figure 164 shows the relationship between the attacker front plate, the second starting opening sensor, the second large winning opening sensor, the V winning opening sensor, the losing opening sensor, the attacker base plate, and the center lower right ball passage in the attacker unit of the center role. is an explanatory view showing the in perspective view.
In FIG. 153, the positional relationship between the V-winning sensor 2603 and the losing sensor 2604 and the center right ball path 2676 is not disassembled in order to make it easier to understand the mounting state.

First, the external shapes of the sensors (sphere sensors) such as the second starting opening sensor 2601, the second big winning opening sensor 2602, the V winning opening sensor 2603, and the losing opening sensor 2604 will be described. The ball sensor has a detection hole for detecting the game ball B through which the game ball B can pass. When viewed from the axial direction of the detection hole for detecting the game ball B, the ball sensor is formed in a rectangular shape with the size of two squares arranged side by side. A detection hole is also provided on one side. Also, one of the four corners of the rectangle that is close to the detection hole is chamfered. Further, the ball sensor is formed so that the thickness in the axial direction of the detection hole is approximately half the diameter of the detection hole. Therefore, the sphere sensor is formed in a shape of a thin flat plate having a detection hole provided on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction. The sphere sensor accommodates a substrate and a connector in the interior on the side opposite to the detection hole with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, a connector to which the wiring EC from the outside is connected is provided on one of the longitudinal end faces of the sphere sensor which is farther from the detection hole. Hereinafter, the side of the sphere sensor where the detection hole is provided with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction will be referred to as the detection side, and the opposite side will be referred to as the connector side.

Attachment of the second starting opening sensor 2601 in the attacker unit 2600 will be described. The second starting hole sensor 2601 is for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2005 . The second starting port sensor 2601 is oriented so that the detection side is located forward from the center in the longitudinal direction. The detection side of the second starting opening sensor 2601 is housed in a sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620 that is open rearward. As a result, the movement of the second starting opening sensor 2601 in the forward, vertical and horizontal directions is restricted by the attacker front plate 2620 . Further, the second starting opening sensor 2601 is held by the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620 in a state in which the axis of the detection hole is tilted so that the right side in the front view is higher than the horizontal direction. That is, the second starting opening sensor 2601 is positioned by the attacker front plate 2620 in a state in which the axis of the detection hole is inclined.

This second starting hole sensor 2601 detects the game ball B that circulates to the left, and since the positioning of the detection hole in the axial direction must be particularly accurate, the second starting hole sensor A sensor holding portion 2623 of an attacker front plate 2620 that accommodates the front end side (detection side) of the sensor 2601 is formed in a U shape so as to surround the peripheral edge of the second start opening sensor 2601 on the detection side. As a result, the second starting opening sensor 2601 can be positioned at a desired position with high accuracy, so that the game ball B guided leftward by the guide piece 2636 of the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 can be detected smoothly. It can be detected by passing through the hole, and the stagnation and stagnation of the game ball B on the guide piece 2636 can be suppressed.

The connector side of the second starting port sensor 2601 protrudes rearward from the base plate main body 2611 by passing through the first opening 2611 a of the attacker base plate 2610 from the front. The connector side of the second starting port sensor 2601 is inserted into a sensor holding recess 2635 a provided on the outer surface of the unit case 2635 of the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 . As a result, the connector side of the second starting port sensor 2601 is restricted from moving rearward, vertically, and horizontally by the sensor holding recess 2635a. Therefore, the second starting opening sensor 2601 is mounted in a state sandwiched between the front attacker plate 2620 and the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 (unit case 2635).

Next, the attachment of the second big winning opening sensor 2602 in the attacker unit 2600 will be described. The second big winning hole sensor 2602 is for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 . The second prize winning opening sensor 2602 is arranged with the detection hole facing up and down while the detection side and the connector side are aligned in the left-right direction. Specifically, the second prize winning opening sensor 2602 is arranged horizontally with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction so that the connector side is located on the right side of the detection side in a front view. Most of this second prize winning opening sensor 2602 is accommodated in the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620 . As a result, the movement of the second big prize opening sensor 2602 in the forward, vertical and horizontal directions is restricted by the attacker front plate 2620 (sensor holding portion 2623).

A portion (rear end) of the second prize winning opening sensor 2602 protruding rearward from the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620 is accommodated in the sensor holding recess 2613 of the attacker base plate 2610 . That is, the rear end of the second prize winning opening sensor 2602 is in contact with the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 , and the rearward movement thereof is restricted by the attacker base plate 2610 . Therefore, the second prize winning opening sensor 2602 is provided in front of the base plate main body 2611 of the attacker base plate 2610 and is mounted in a state sandwiched between the attacker base plate 2610 and the attacker front plate 2620 .

In the installation of this second big winning opening sensor 2602, since most of it is accommodated in the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620, compared to the case where two members hold each half, It is possible to make it difficult to be affected by each manufacturing error, assembly error, etc., and it is possible to easily position the second big winning hole sensor 2602 at a desired position. Therefore, since the position of the detection hole of the second big winning hole sensor 2602 can be made difficult to shift, the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 can be surely passed through the detection hole, and the game ball B stagnation, stagnation, ball clogging, etc. can be made difficult to occur.

Next, the attachment of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 of the attacker unit 2600 will be described. The V winning opening sensor 2603 is for detecting the game ball B accepted (distributed) in the V winning opening 2008, and the loss opening sensor 2604 detects the game ball B accepted in the losing opening 2009. It is for The V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are oriented so that the detection side is located forward from the center in the longitudinal direction in a horizontal state in which the detection holes are oriented vertically. The detection side of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 is housed in a sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620 which is open rearward. As a result, the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are restricted from moving forward, vertically, and horizontally by the attacker front plate 2620 .

In addition, the connector side of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 protrudes rearward of the base plate main body 2611 through the seventh opening 2611g of the attacker base plate 2610 from the front. The connector sides of the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 are sandwiched between the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660 and the center right ball path 2676 . The lower surface of the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660 is provided with a sensor contact portion 2665a capable of coming into contact with the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 . The center right ball path 2676 is provided with a sensor abutting portion 2676b which is open forward and upward and can abut (partially accommodate) the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604. .

More specifically, the connector side of the V prize opening sensor 2603 is in contact with the portion on the left side of the stepped portion of the sensor contact portion 2665a of the unit case 2665 of the V sorting unit 2660 . Also, the left side surface, the bottom surface, and the rear surface of the V winning hole sensor 2603 on the connector side are in contact with the sensor contact portion 2676 b of the center right ball path 2676 .
As a result, the connector side of the V winning hole sensor 2603 is restricted from moving upward by the sensor contact portion 2665a of the unit case 2665, and is moved leftward and downward by the sensor contact portion 2676b of the center right ball path 2676. , and backward movement are restricted. The V-winning opening sensor 2603 is not restricted from moving rightward on the connector side, but is restricted from moving rightward by the sensor holder 2623 on the detection side. can be positioned.

On the other hand, the connector side of the unsuccessful sensor 2604 has its upper surface in contact with the portion on the right side of the stepped portion of the sensor contact portion 2665a of the unit case 2665 of the V distribution unit 2660, and its left side surface. It is in contact with the stepped portion (vertically extending portion) of the sensor contact portion 2665a. In addition, the right side surface, the lower surface, and the rear surface of the failure opening sensor 2604 on the connector side are in contact with the sensor contact portion 2676 b of the center right lower ball path 2676 . As a result, the connector side of the failure opening sensor 2604 is restricted from moving upward and to the left by the sensor contact portion 2665a of the unit case 2665, and is moved to the right by the sensor contact portion 2676b of the center right ball path 2676. Forward, downward, and rearward movement is restricted.

In this way, when attaching the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604, it is sandwiched by three members: the attacker front plate 2620, the V distribution unit 2660 (unit case 2665), and the center right ball path 2676. The detection side of the front end is housed in the sensor holding portion 2623 of the attacker front plate 2620, so that the detection hole can be positioned at a desired position with high precision in the same manner as described above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

In addition, since an annular band holding portion 2676c is provided in the center right ball path 2676, the band holding portion 2676c and the binding band CT are used to connect to the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604. A plurality of wirings EC may be bundled and held.

[5-9d-2i. Second Embodiment of Door in Opening/Closing Unit]
Next, the guide piece 2636 of the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630, the first large winning opening door body 2641 of the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, and the second large winning opening door of the second large winning opening opening/closing unit 2650 A door 2720 of an embodiment different from the body 2651, the V prize opening door 2661 of the V sorting unit 2660, and the door 2701 of the opening/closing unit 2700 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 165(a) is an explanatory view showing a side sectional view of a door body of a different embodiment applied to the first grand prize opening opening/closing unit in the attacker unit of the center accessory, and (b) is a plan view of (a). It is an explanatory diagram shown in . Here, the door body 2701 is applied to the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 in the attacker unit 2600 (replaced with the first big winning opening door body 2641) and explained, and the parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. Also, detailed description is omitted.

The first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 as an opening/closing unit has a flat plate-like door body 2720 that penetrates through the attacker base plate 2610 and is provided so as to advance and retreat forward.
The door body 2720 is provided between the base plate main body 2611 of the attacker base plate 2610 and the front plate main body 2621 of the attacker front plate 2620. It can be closed by advancing and retreating. The door body 2720 is the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 or the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2005 and the second special First big prize by sliding backward according to the pattern (for example, "big win", "medium win", "small win", etc.) or according to the reception of the game ball B into the V winning opening 2008 It opens the mouth 2006 .

In the attacker unit 2600, below the first big winning hole 2006, there is provided a first big winning hole decoration substrate 2672 on which an LED capable of emitting light upward is mounted. With the LED of the first big prize winning opening decoration board 2672, the first big winning prize opening 2006 can be decorated with light.

The door 2720 is opaque and colored in a predetermined color (eg, red, black, blue, etc.), and configured to stand out. As shown in FIG. 165, the door 2720 has a plurality of openings 2721 penetrating vertically at a portion projecting forward from the front surface of the attacker base plate 2610 . The opening 2721 is provided at a portion away from the rolling area 2722 of the game ball B indicated by cross hatching in FIG. As a result, the plurality of openings 2721 do not come into contact with the game ball B, and the circulation of the game ball B is not hindered.

By the way, in a conventional pachinko machine provided with a door body that opens and closes by advancing and retreating the big prize winning opening and the accessory winning opening, since many game balls B circulate on the door body, wear resistance is required. Additives are added for reasons such as increasing Therefore, even if light is emitted from below while the big prize opening is closed, the light is blocked by the door body, and the game ball B rolling on the door body looks dark. There is On the other hand, it has been proposed to illuminate the game ball B on the door from behind by providing an LED for emitting light forward above and behind the door. However, when LEDs are provided above and behind the door, it is difficult to brightly illuminate the inside of the large prize winning opening below the door with the light from the LED. There is a problem that the cost of the pachinko machine increases because it is necessary to provide an LED to illuminate the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a flat plate-like door 2720 that can open and close the first grand prize opening 2006 by moving back and forth is provided with a plurality of openings 2721 penetrating vertically. Therefore, when the door body 2720 is moved forward to close the first large prize winning port 2006, the LED of the first large prize winning port decorative board 2672 provided below the first large prize winning port 2006 is illuminated. Then, the light emitted upward from the LED can light-embellish the interior of the first prize winning opening 2006, and illuminate the game ball B rolling on the door 2720 through the opening 2721 from below. be able to. As a result, the player can see a light emitting effect in which the game ball B rolling on the door 2720 is illuminated from below, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine so far. The interest of the player can be strongly attracted, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, the plurality of openings 2721 of the door body 2720 illuminate the game ball B on the door body 2720 with the light from the LED of the first big winning mouth decoration board 2672 provided below the first big winning mouth 2006. Unlike conventional pachinko machines, LEDs (decorative boards) need not be provided above and below the door body. , and the game ball B on the door 2720 can be decorated with light emission, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the light from the LED of the first big prize winning opening decoration board 2672 is illuminating the game ball B from below through the plurality of openings 2721 of the door body 2720, the game ball B can be played like a conventional pachinko machine. As compared with the case of illuminating the LED from behind, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the LED to directly reach the eyes of the player, and to reduce the glare.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from becoming difficult to see because the light from the LEDs directly reaches the player's eyes and makes the game ball B more visible.

Further, since a plurality of openings 2721 penetrating vertically through the door 2720 are provided, the dust and dirt falling on the door 2720 can be discharged downward through the openings 2721. It is possible to prevent dust, garbage, etc. on 2720 from interfering with the circulation of the game ball B and the movement of the door body 2720, for example.

In the above-described embodiment, the door body 2720 for opening and closing the first big prize opening 2006 is provided with a plurality of openings 2721. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Openings may be provided in door bodies for opening and closing the second prize winning opening 2007, the V winning opening 2008, and the like.

[5-9d-3. Binding pedestal]
Next, the binding pedestal 2550 in the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 166 to 171 and the like. FIG. 166(a) is a perspective view of the vicinity of the attacker unit in the center accessory as viewed from the rear with wiring omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the binding pedestal exploded in (a). FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the center base of the main unit and the attacker base plate of the attacker unit and the binding pedestal in the center accessory. FIG. 168 is a six-sided view of the binding pedestal. FIG. 169(a) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal seen from above, (b) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal seen from above and rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the binding pedestal seen from below. is. FIG. 170(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a main part of the center accessory in a state in which a plurality of wires are bundled on the binding pedestal with a binding band, and (b) shows the binding pedestal separated in (a). It is an exploded perspective view shown in a state. 171(a) is a perspective view showing a binding pedestal of an embodiment different from the binding pedestal of FIG. 168, and (b) is a perspective view showing a binding pedestal of a further different embodiment.

The binding pedestal 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is for holding (supporting) the center accessory 2500 in a state in which a plurality of wires EC are bundled by using a binding band CT. The binding pedestal 2550 includes a flat plate-like body portion 2551 attached to the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610, an annular band holding portion 2552 projecting from the body portion 2551, and an attachment hole 2553 penetrating the body portion 2551. and have

As shown in FIG. 168, the binding pedestal 2550 has a body portion 2551 formed in a shape in which the upper right corner of a vertically long rectangle is chamfered (C-chamfered) at an angle of 45 degrees when viewed from the front. A band holding portion 2552 is provided at the upper left portion of the body portion 2551 with respect to the center, and a mounting hole 2553 is provided below the band holding portion 2552 and at the center in the left-right direction. The ring-shaped band holding portion 2552 is provided such that the ring-shaped opening faces the left-right direction with respect to the body portion 2551 . The ring-shaped opening of the band holding portion 2552 is formed in a rectangular shape elongated vertically in a side view.

The binding pedestal 2550 has a peripheral wall portion 2554 protruding from the body portion 2551 in the direction opposite to the band holding portion 2552 . The peripheral wall portion 2554 includes a left wall portion 2554a that extends along the left side of the main body portion 2551, an upper wall portion 2554b that is continuous with the left wall portion 2554a and extends along the upper side of the main body portion 2551, A C-chamfered wall portion 2554c that is continuous with the upper wall portion 2554b and extends along the C-chamfered side of the body portion 2551, and a C-chamfered wall portion 2554c that is continuous with the C-chamfered wall portion 2554c and is constant The right wall portion 2554d extending along the right side at a distance from the main body portion 2551 is continuous with the right wall portion 2554d and the left wall portion 2554a. It has a protruding lower wall portion 2554e and a concave curved wall portion 2554f that is recessed in a semi-cylindrical shape around the axial center of the mounting hole 2553 in the lower wall portion 2554e.

A left wall portion 2554a of the peripheral wall portion 2554 is recessed such that the vicinity of the portion connected to the lower wall portion 2554e is separated from the left side of the main body portion 2551 by a certain width. The distance that the left wall portion 2554a is recessed from the left side of the main body portion 2551 is the distance that the right wall portion 2554d is separated from the right side of the main body portion 2551 by a certain width (the distance from the right side of the main body portion 2551 to the right wall portion 2554d). is the same as The distance of the lower wall portion 2554e from the lower side of the main body portion 2551 by a certain width is longer than the distance from the right side of the main body portion 2551 to the right wall portion 2554d. More specifically, the distance of the lower wall portion 2554e from the lower side of the main body portion 2551 by a certain width is equal to the distance from the lower side of the main body portion 2551 to the position where the mounting hole 2553 contacts the side closer to the lower side of the main body portion 2551. They are almost the same.

The recessed portion of the left wall portion 2554a of the binding base 2550, the right wall portion 2554d, and the lower wall portion 2554e can come into contact with the linearly extending wall-like or rib-like side surface. The binding pedestal 2550 can be non-rotatably attached by bringing the wall-like or rib-like side surfaces into contact with the concave portion of the left wall portion 2554a, the right wall portion 2554d, and the lower wall portion 2554e. In addition, a cylindrical or semi-cylindrical mounting boss is inserted into the space formed by the concave curved wall portion 2554f of the binding pedestal 2550. As shown in FIG.

The binding pedestal 2550 of this embodiment is attached to a mounting boss 2515 projecting cylindrically from the rear surface of the center base 2511 in the main unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 . A mounting boss 2515 to which the binding pedestal 2550 is mounted protrudes rearward from the center base 2511 and is provided so as to partially overlap with a rib 2516 linearly extending in the left-right direction. Accordingly, the binding pedestal 2550 is attached to the center base 2511 with the outer periphery of the attachment boss 2515 surrounded by the concavely curved wall portion 2554f and the lower wall portion 2554e along the upper side surfaces of the ribs 2516 . Although detailed illustration is omitted, since there is a certain amount of gap between the lower wall portion 2554e and the rib 2516, the binding pedestal 2550 can move around the axial center of the mounting hole 2553 within the range of the gap. can be rotated as
The mounting bosses 2515 of the center base 2511 are preliminarily provided at various locations. Therefore, the plurality of mounting bosses 2515 are used and unused depending on the model.

Also, in the attacker unit 2600 , it is attached to an attachment boss 2614 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface of the attacker base plate 2610 . A mounting boss 2614 to which the binding pedestal 2550 is mounted protrudes rearward from the attacker base plate 2610 and is provided so as to partially overlap with a rib 2618 linearly extending in the left-right direction. Therefore, the binding pedestal 2550 is attached to the attacker base plate 2610 in a state in which the outer circumference of the attachment boss 2614 is surrounded by the concave curved wall portion 2554f and the lower wall portion 2554e is in contact with the upper surface of the rib 2618. Mounting bosses 2614 of the attacker unit 2600 are preliminarily provided at various locations.
Therefore, the plurality of mounting bosses 2614 are mixed depending on the model and the like.

The two binding pedestals 2550 of the center accessory 2500 are provided near the inner circumference of the frame of the frame-shaped center base 2511 at the boundary between the main unit 2510 and the attacker unit 2600 . The two binding pedestals 2550 are provided relatively close to each other, and the respective band holding portions 2552 are attached with the annular openings directed in the left-right direction.

Also, the two binding pedestals 2550 of the center accessory 2500 are formed in the same color (here, transparent) as the center base 2511 of the main unit 2510 and the attacker base plate 2610 of the attacker unit 2600 . This makes the binding pedestal 2550 inconspicuous when assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 170, the binding pedestal 2550 of the present embodiment holds the plurality of wires EC by tightening them together with the plurality of wires EC in a state where the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is passed through the annular band holding portion 2552. It can be attached to the center accessory 2500 (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610) in a bundled state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the plurality of wires EC from being separated and protruding into the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the wires EC being seen from the player's side and becoming unattractive.

Further, according to the binding pedestal 2550 of the present embodiment, since the wiring EC bundled with the binding band CT is attached to the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610 of the center accessory 2500 via the binding pedestal 2550, the center base Compared to the case where the band holding part is directly provided on the 2511 or the attacker base plate 2610, it is possible to easily respond to model changes and design changes, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Also, when it is desired to move the wiring EC away from the center accessory 2500 for maintenance or the like, a plurality of wiring EC can be kept bundled together by removing the binding pedestal 2550 without cutting the binding band CT. Workability can be improved.

More specifically, by removing the binding pedestal 2550 while maintaining the binding state of the plurality of wirings EC by the binding band CT, the plurality of wirings EC can be removed from the fixed position (attachment position of the binding pedestal 2550) while the plurality of wirings EC are bundled. It is possible to shift. This can provide the following effects. That is, conventionally, when confirming the installation status of components behind a plurality of wirings EC, the plurality of wirings EC, which were bound with a binding band CT at a fixed position, are cut one by one by cutting the binding band CT. It was necessary to unbind the wires EC and to bind the unbound wires EC, which were separated one by one after confirmation, with a new binding band CT at the fixed position, but according to the present embodiment, , the trouble described above is eliminated only by attaching and detaching the bundling pedestal 2550, and confirmation of the installation status of the components behind the plurality of wirings EC can be facilitated.

Furthermore, when assembling the game board 5, by bundling a plurality of wires EC together with the band holding portion 2552 with the binding band CT in advance and holding them on the binding pedestal 2550, the wires EC can be prevented from interfering with the assembly. Therefore, the assembly work can be facilitated, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, since the plurality of binding pedestals 2550 are mounted relatively close to each other, and the respective band holding portions 2552 are provided so as not to be positioned on the axis perpendicular to the annular opening. , a plurality of wirings EC held by a plurality of (a series of) binding pedestals 2550 are bent in an S shape between two binding pedestals 2550 . As a result, compared to the case where the plurality of wirings EC are held in a straight line between the two binding pedestals 2550, the plurality of wirings EC is provided with a margin of length, so that the temperature, humidity, etc. Even if the wiring EC expands and contracts due to a change in the environment, the expansion and contraction of the wiring EC can be absorbed by the length allowance, and the occurrence of problems such as disconnection can be suppressed.

In addition, since the wiring EC is bent in an S shape between the two binding pedestals 2550, the length of the wiring EC can be given a margin. By removing one bundling pedestal 2550 without removing it, the member to which the wiring EC is connected can be kept away from the center accessory 2500 to some extent, and the labor required for maintenance etc. can be simplified. .

Furthermore, by attaching the binding pedestal 2550 so that the rib 2516 of the center base 2511 and the rib 2618 of the attacker base plate 2610 are in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2554, the binding pedestal 2550 rotates around the axis of the mounting hole 2553. In addition, it is possible to prevent the wire EC held by the binding band CT in the band holding portion 2552 from changing in the wiring direction, and to maintain the wire EC at a desired position. It can be continued, and the appearance can be improved by making the wiring EC hard to be seen from the player side.

In this embodiment, the binding pedestal 2550 is attached to the center accessory 2500. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The wiring EC may be held via the binding band CT.

[5-9d-3a. Another embodiment of the binding pedestal]
Next, a binding pedestal 2560 and a binding pedestal 2570 of an embodiment different from the binding pedestal 2550 described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, the binding pedestal 2560 shown in FIG. 171(a) includes a main body portion 2561 having a rectangular front shape elongated vertically, a plurality of band holding portions 2562 annularly protruding from the main body portion 2561, and a band holding portion 2562 extending through the main body portion 2561. and a mounting hole 2563 that is provided.

The body portion 2561 is formed in a block shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The plurality of band holding portions 2562 are provided two on the front surface of the main body portion 2561, which is the front surface, and are provided on both left and right side surfaces of the main body portion 2561 one by one. More specifically, two band holding portions 2562 on the front surface of the main body portion 2561 are provided, one of which has an annular opening directed in the vertical direction, and the other of which has an annular opening downward in the horizontal direction. is set towards. The centers of these two band holding portions 2562 are provided on an axis passing through the center of the front surface of the body portion 2561 in the left-right direction. The band holding portions 2562 on the left and right side surfaces are provided at the same height as the lower band holding portion 2562 on the front surface of the main body portion 2561, and have annular openings directed in the front-rear direction. The mounting hole 2563 is provided in the center of the front surface of the body portion 2561 in the left-right direction below the lower band holding portion 2562 on the front surface of the body portion 2561 .

Although not shown in detail, the binding pedestal 2560 has a lower surface of a block-shaped main body 2561 that is recessed upward at a constant height on the rear side leaving a predetermined distance rearward from the front surface. is recessed upward in a semi-cylindrical shape around the axial center of the mounting hole 2563 . That is, they are formed in the same shape as the lower wall portion 2554e and the concave curved wall portion 2554f of the binding base 2550 of the first embodiment.

This binding pedestal 2560 has a lower band holding portion 2562 on the front surface and band holding portions 2562 on both left and right side surfaces. The wiring EC can be held in a vertically extending state. On the other hand, when the band holding portion 2562 on the upper side of the front surface passes the band portion CTa of the binding band CT and bundles the wiring EC together with the band holding portion 2562, the wiring EC is held in a state of extending in the left-right direction. can be done.

According to the binding pedestal 2560 of the present embodiment, in addition to the same effect as the binding pedestal 2550 described above, since one main body 2561 has a plurality of band holding portions 2562 with different orientations and positions, wiring The band holding portion 2562 may be used according to the handling position and the handling direction of the EC, and the versatility of the binding base 2560 can be further enhanced, and it can be used in various situations.

Next, the binding pedestal 2570 shown in FIG. 171(b) includes a main body portion 2571 extending long in a predetermined direction and two band holding members annularly protruding in the same direction near both ends of the main body portion 2571 in the longitudinal direction. 2572 and two mounting holes 2573 penetrating through the body portion 2571 in the vicinity of both ends of the body portion 2571 in the longitudinal direction and outside the band holding portion 2572 in the longitudinal direction.

The binding pedestal 2570 is provided with two band holding portions 2572 such that the ring-shaped openings are oriented perpendicularly to the longitudinal direction of the body portion 2571 . As a result, the same wiring EC can be arranged along the body portion 2571 by fastening the same wiring EC to each of the band holding portions 2572 with the binding band CT.

The binding pedestal 2570 of the present embodiment also has the same effects as those of the binding pedestal 2550 and the binding pedestal 2560 described above. By hiding the wiring EC, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to see the wiring EC.

In the above-described embodiment, the band holding portions 2572 are provided near both longitudinal ends of the main body portion 2571. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the band holding portion 2572 may be provided at an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main body portion 2571 extending linearly is shown, but the main body portion 2571 is not limited to this, and the main body portion 2571 may be extended in an L shape or a curved shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiments, the band holding portions such as the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, the band holding portion 2572, the band holding portion 2635c, the band holding portion 2676c, the band holding portion 2706, and the like have a closed annular shape. However, the shape is not limited to this, and an open shape such as the wire locking portion 1603 may be used. When the band holding portion has a closed shape, it is necessary to fix it with a binding band CT or the like. On the other hand, when the band holding portion is formed in an open shape, the binding band CT can be easily inserted through the opened portion, and workability can be improved.

[5-9e. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 141 and the like. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in both the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG. In addition, a pinwheel that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

On the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed between the inner rail 1002 and the inner rail 1002 in a predetermined gauge arrangement. On the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, near the center in the vertical direction of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center base 2511, the entrance of the upper warp passage 2513 opens toward the upper left. Also, below and to the right of the entrance of the upper warp passage 2513, the entrance of the lower warp passage 2512 opens slightly upward from the left. A windmill is provided between the lower warp passage 2512 and the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 .

The game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the upper warp passage 2513 and the lower warp passage 2512 with a certain probability. The game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 is supplied to the crew 2530 of the center distribution unit 2520 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The game ball B supplied to the croon 2530 is released to the first guideway 2521 below after turning in the dish-shaped croon 2530, rolls to the right along the slope of the first guideway 2521, and reaches a predetermined By the center sorting piece 2523 advancing and retreating at the rhythm of , the ball is sorted to either the first upper starting port 2004 or the sorting ball discharge port 2526 . In the center distribution unit 2520, the game ball B that has circulated through the upper warp passage 2513 is distributed to the first upper starting port 2004 with a predetermined probability (eg, 1/2).

After being detected by the first upper starting hole sensor 2524 provided downstream, the game ball B received in the first upper starting hole 2004 is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back ball is played. It is discharged downward through the induction unit 3100 . When the game ball B is detected by the first upper starting opening sensor 2524, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the first special symbol In a state where the number of reservations is less than 4), a lottery for the first special symbol that enables the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is executed.

The game ball B that has entered the lower warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2514 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2514 in the left-right direction, and exits from the central release portion 2514a or the side release portion 2514b. is released so as to flow back into the game area 5a. Since the center release portion 2514a of the stage 2514 is provided directly above the first lower starting port 2003 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release portion 2514a has a high probability. It is received in the lower starting port 2003 . The game ball B released from the side release portions 2514b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2514a is received in the first lower starting port 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first lower starting port 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the first lower starting port sensor 2101 of the starting port unit 2100, and is guided to the back ball guiding unit of the back unit 3000. 3100 and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100 . When the game ball B is detected by the first lower starting opening sensor 2101, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given, and the state satisfying the predetermined condition (for example, the first special symbol In a state where the number of reservations is less than 4), a lottery for the first special symbol that enables the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is executed.

The game ball B released from the stage 2514 and not received in the first lower starting port 2003 is received in the out port 2020 (left out port 2020a and right out port 2020b) and discharged out of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. - 特許庁

A game ball B that has been hit to the left outside of the center role 2500 and has not entered the upper warp passage 2513 or the lower warp passage 2512 has a high probability when it circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill. It flows rightward along a plurality of obstacle nails arranged diagonally along the lower side of 2500 . A game ball B that has circulated on the right side of the center of the windmill may be received by the first lower starting opening 2003 or the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B that has not been received by the first lower starting port 2003 and the general prize winning port 2001 is received by the out port 2020 (left out port 2020a and right out port 2020b) and discharged out of the game area 5a.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and downward. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

On the other hand, when the water flows leftward from the center of the windmill, it flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down the shelf 2301 to the right. A game ball B that circulates on the left side of the center of the windmill may be received by the general winning hole 2001 and the left sub-out hole 2021a provided in the side unit 2200. - 特許庁The game ball B received in the left sub-out port 2021a is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. - 特許庁
The game ball B that has not been received by the general winning hole 2001 and the left sub-out hole 2021a is received by the left out hole 2020a and discharged out of the game area 5a.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, there are an upper right guide passage group 2541, a gate 2002, a lower right guide passage group 2542, a second start gate 2005, a second grand prize gate 2007, a general prize gate 2001, and a first grand prize. An opening 2006 and a right sub-out opening 2021b are provided in this order from the top. A plurality of obstacle nails are planted between the upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542, and between the second grand prize winning port 2007 and the first grand prize winning port 2006 on the left side of the general prize winning port 2001. It is

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed above the portion of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500 that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction with the strength that the game ball B enters. When struck, the game ball B circulates through either the upper right first guide passage 2541 a or the upper right second guide passage 2541 b of the upper right guide passage group 2541 .

The game ball B hit relatively strongly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 touches the impinging portion 1006 and enters the upper right first guide passage 2541 a of the upper right guide passage group 2541 . On the other hand, the game ball B, which is hit relatively weakly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, rolls rightward on the upper surface of the upper end portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500, and moves to the upper right guide passage group 2541. Enter the upper right second guide passage 2541b.

A game ball B that has circulated through the upper right guide passage group 2541 passes through the gate 2002 with a certain degree of probability. The gate 2002 is provided with a gate sensor 2501 for detecting the passage of the game ball B, and when the passage of the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2501, a lottery of normal symbols for opening and closing the second starting port 2005 is executed. be done.

The game ball B that has circulated through the upper right guide passage group 2541 circulates through either the lower right first guide passage 2542a or the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542 provided downstream thereof. The game ball B that has circulated through the lower right second guide passage 2542b flows down onto the attacker upper shelf portion 2612 of the attacker unit 2600, enters the attacker right guide passage 2625 from the attacker upper shelf portion 2612, and is guided by the attacker right guide passage 2625. It is guided downstream from the second starting port 2005 and the second big prize winning port 2007 . In other words, the game ball B that has circulated through the lower right second guide passage 2542b is not received by the second starting port 2005 or the second big prize winning port 2007 even if they are open.

It should be noted that the game ball B that has circulated through the lower right second guide passage 2542b may not flow down onto the attacker upper shelf portion 2612 . Conversely, the game ball B that has circulated through the lower right first guide passage 2542a may flow down onto the attacker upper shelf portion 2612 .

The game ball B that has circulated through the lower right first guide passage 2542a (the game ball B that has not flowed down onto the attacker upper shelf 2612) has a certain degree of probability. It enters the port 2605 and passes in front of the retracted guide piece 2636 in the second starting port opening/closing unit 2630 . Therefore, according to the normal pattern drawn by the passage of the game ball B in the gate 2002 (the normal pattern is "normal win"), the guide piece 2636 advances and the second starting port door body 2631 retreats. When the game ball B flows down on the guide piece 2636, it is guided to the left by the guide piece 2636 and is received by the second starting port 2005. - 特許庁

After being detected by the second starting hole sensor 2601 , the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2005 is guided backward by the attacker front plate 2620 and enters the center upper right ball path 2675 . Then, the game ball B that has entered the center right ball path 2675 is guided backward by the first gutter portion 2615 of the attacker base plate 2610, and after being delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, It is discharged downward from the sphere guiding unit 3100 . When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2601, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the second special symbol is held In a state where the number is less than 4), a lottery for the second special symbol that enables the generation of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is executed.

The game ball B that circulates through the lower right guide passage group 2542, enters the central opening 2605 and is not accepted by the second start opening 2005, and the game ball B that enters the right opening 2606 closes the second big winning opening 2007. It flows down on the second big winning a prize mouth door body 2651 which is doing. The game ball B that has flowed down onto the second big winning opening door 2651 rolls leftward due to its inclination and is released leftward from the left end. Therefore, the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004, the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005 Depending on the pattern (for example, when the drawn special pattern is a "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", etc.), the second big prize opening door body 2651 retreats and the second big prize is won. When the game ball B passes in front of the second big winning opening door body 2651 while the opening 2007 is open, the game ball B is received in the second big winning opening 2007 .

The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2602 provided downstream, and then guided downward to be guided downward by the V sorting unit 2660 to reach the V winning opening 2008 or lose. After being sorted to one of the openings 2009 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603 or the losing opening sensor 2604, it is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, transferred to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and downward. is discharged to

When the game balls B are detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2602, the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided. When the game ball B is detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603, the first big winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, thereby generating an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage. You will be given a privilege to When the game ball B is detected by the loss opening sensor 2604, a privilege such as the payout of the game ball B of a predetermined number is not provided. In addition, when the game ball B is detected by the loss opening sensor 2604, a different privilege from the case when the game ball B is detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603 may be given. In the present embodiment, the sum of the number of game balls B detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603 and the losing opening sensor 2604 matches the number of game balls B detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2602. It checks for integrity and monitors fraudulent activity.

A game ball B that flows down from the lower right guide passage group 2542 to the attacker upper shelf 2612 and circulates through the attacker right guide passage 2625, or enters the central opening 2605 or the right opening 2606 and from the second big winning opening door body 2651 The game ball B released to the left flows downward while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2600 . Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2600 or the right sub-out opening 2021b.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and downward. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided. In addition, the game ball B received in the right sub-out port 2021b is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. be.

The game ball B that has not been received by the general winning opening 2001 and the right sub-out opening 2021b of the attacker unit 2600 is closed by the first big winning opening door body 2641 closing the first big winning opening 2006 provided on the left side. It rolls on the upper surface to the left, is received by the right outlet 2020b provided on the left from the left end, and is discharged out of the game area 5a.

At this time, the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004, the second lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005 According to the two special symbols (for example, when the drawn special symbols are "big win", "medium win", "minor win", etc.), the first big winning port door body 2641 retreats to the first When the game ball B flows down onto the first big winning hole 2006 while the big winning hole 2006 is open, the game ball B is received in the first big winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加

The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then detected by the first big winning hole sensor 3002. and discharged downwards. When the game ball B is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 3002, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

In this embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in which an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs, the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004 are the game ball B while the second starting port 2005 receives the game ball B in a predetermined pattern only when the normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2002 is "ordinary hit". making it possible. As a result, the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004 are more likely than the second starting port 2005 to accept the game ball B.

For this reason, in a normal state, the game ball B is placed on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 for the player. The game ball B can be hit so as to flow down, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by the game ball B can be enjoyed by showing the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails. Along with being able to do so, it is possible to heighten expectations for acceptance of the game ball B to the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

In the game aiming at the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004, in the game aiming at the first upper starting port 2004 (upper warp passage 2513), the game ball B entering the upper warp passage 2513 is Since it is received in the first upper starting port 2004 via the cloon 2530 and the center distributing piece 2523 of the center distributing unit 2520, the movement of the game ball B in the croon 2530 can be enjoyed, and the center distributing piece 2523 The player can also be entertained by whether or not the game ball B is released from the croon 2530 at the timing when the game ball B is distributed to the first upper starting port 2004 by .

Then, by receiving the game ball B into the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004, the lottery result of the first special symbol is "hit" (for example, "small hit", "middle hit", " etc.) is drawn, the first big prize opening 2006 or the second big prize opening 2007 opens and closes, so that the game ball B is accepted in the first big prize opening 2006 or the second big prize opening 2007. In addition, it is possible to enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B aimed at the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right hitting"), and the game to the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 It is possible to heighten expectations for acceptance of the ball B.

When hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center role 2500, on the right side of the center role 2500, there is an upper right guide passage group 2541 consisting of an upper right first guide passage 2541a and an upper right second guide passage 2541b, and a gate 2002. and a lower right guide passage group 2542 consisting of a lower right first guide passage 2542a and a lower right second guide passage 2542b. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates, and the player can enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B.例文帳に追加

again. A gate 2002 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and a normal lottery lottery is performed so that the second start port 2005 can be accepted by passing through the gate 2002, so the game ball hit on the right side. The player can be entertained depending on whether or not B passes through the gate 2002, and it depends on whether or not the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2005 when the second starting port 2005 becomes acceptable. can also entertain players.

Furthermore, in the second big winning hole 2007, the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 is distributed to either the V winning hole 2008 or the losing hole 2009, so that the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 is V winning. Depending on whether or not it is sorted to the mouth 2008, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be more entertained.

[5-10. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143 and the like. The back unit 3000 includes a vibration sensor 1040 (see FIGS. 173 and 174, etc.) for detecting vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a general winning slot 2001 for guiding the game panel 1100 to the rear. A general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B that has been received, and a first big winning hole sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received by the first big winning hole 2006 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. I have it. The general winning hole sensor 3001 and the first big winning hole sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guiding unit 3100 .

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is open at the front. It has a lock slider 3020 which is slidable in the left-right direction for attaching and detaching the performance display device 1600, and a back substrate unit 3040 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 so as to be hinge-rotatable.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and is thin in the front and rear, and a panel relay board and effect drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer sides of the vertically extending L-shaped portion. Further, the circuit board box 3041 has locking claws 3041b that are locked to the locking portions 3010g of the back box 3010 at the ends of the L-shaped portions extending to the left and right.

In addition, the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) has a functional surface portion 3015 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The functional surface part 3015 is provided in the back box 3010, and the effect units to the back box 3010 (here, the back ball induction unit 3100, the back front upper effect unit 3200, the back front left effect unit 3300, the back right effect unit 3400 , etc.), placing the rear unit 3000 face down with the front side facing downward, placing the rear unit 3000 face down with the rear side facing upward, etc. is.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a plurality of attachment supports 3050 for attaching the back rear effect unit 3600 to the back box 3010, and an attachment supporter 3060 for attaching the back right effect unit 3400 to the back box 3010, although the details will be described later. , is equipped with

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back ball guide unit 3100, which is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010 and through which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulate, A back front upper effect unit 3200 provided along the upper side, a back front left effect unit 3300 provided along the left side near the front end in the back box 3010, and a slightly rearward from the front end in the back box 3010. , the back right effect unit 3400 provided along the right side, the back rear left effect unit 3500 provided in the upper left corner near the rear end in the back box 3010 behind the back front left effect unit 3300, and the back A rear rear effect unit 3600 is provided near the rear end in the back box 3010 to which the rear left effect unit 3500 is attached.

The back ball induction unit 3100 , the back front up effect unit 3200 and the back front left effect unit 3300 are directly attached to the back box 3010 . The back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the front surface of the back rear effect unit 3600 and partly attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060 . The back post effect unit 3600 is attached to the back box 3010 and partly attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050 .

The back front upper effect unit 3200, the back front left effect unit 3300, the back right effect unit 3400, the back rear left effect unit 3500, and the back rear effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 are movable in accordance with the progress of the game. It is possible to show a performance or a light-emitting performance to a player.

[5-10a. back box]
Next, the back case 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 172 to 174 and the like. FIG. 172 is an explanatory diagram showing a use state of the wire locking portion on the rear surface of the game board in a perspective view. Fig. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the game board disassembled into the effect unit, mounting supporter and back box seen from the front, and Fig. 174 is a disassembled view of the back unit of the game board into the effect unit, mounting supporter and back box. and is an exploded perspective view seen from behind.

The back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the effect unit is attached to the inside of the box shape, and the effect display device 1600 and the back board unit 3040 are attached to the rear surface. is. The back box 3010 is formed transparent. As a result, the inside can be visually recognized from the outside even when assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加

The back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a placement surface 3010b provided at the lower side of the opening 3010a on which the effect display device 1600 is placed. , two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and a lock slider 3020 provided below the center of the mounting surface 3010b in the left-right direction. and a lock mechanism portion 3010d slidably attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size in the left-right direction as the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. In addition, the opening 3010a is provided at a position that is vertically offset (eccentric) with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as the 19-inch liquid crystal display device (effect display device 1600).

The upper fixed pieces 1601 of the performance display device 1600 are inserted into the two fixed grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixed piece 1602 of the effect display device 1600 can be inserted from behind into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 while the lock slider 3020 is slid leftward in rear view. When the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in a rear view with the lower fixed piece 1602 of the effect display device 1600 inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d, the lock slider 3020 blocks the rearward movement of the lower fixed piece 1602. Effect display device 1600 can be attached.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG.

Further, the back box 3010 has a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 rotatably around the axis extending in the vertical direction on the rear surface, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and has an engaging portion 3010g to which the engaging claw 3041b of the rear substrate unit 3040 is engaged.

The back box 3010 can mount the back board unit 3040 on the rear side across the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) by means of a pair of shaft support portions 3010f and locking portions 3010g. When assembled to the game board 5, the vertically extending L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 is positioned to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the rear substrate unit 3040 extending to the left and right is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 .

In the state where the back box 3010 is assembled to the game board 5, the locking claws 3041b of the back board unit 3040 locked to the locking portion 3010g are released, and the locking claws 3041b are moved backward around the shaft portion 3041a. By rotating so as to move to , the rear of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back box 3010 can be opened, and the effect display device 1600 can be opened without removing the back board unit 3040 from the back box 3010. It can be put on and taken off.

In addition, the back box 3010 includes a plurality of wire locking portions 3011 provided on the rear surface for locking the wiring EC, and a through portion penetrating back and forth at the portion where the wire locking portion 3011 is provided. 3012 and . The through portion 3012 of the back box 3010 allows the wiring EC to pass between the inside and the outside of the back box 3010, and when the wire EC is locked between the wiring locking portion 3011 and the rear surface of the back box 3010, The wire EC bends into the through portion 3012 to release the pressure applied to the wire EC from the wire locking portion 3011 .

In addition, the back box 3010 is provided on the surface facing the front-rear direction except for the fixing piece portion 3010e, and has a plurality of function holes 3013, each of which is a set of two through-holes arranged vertically or horizontally. and a functional surface portion 3015 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The two through holes of the functional hole 3013 have the same diameter. The functional hole portion 3013 is for attaching the production unit to the back box 3010 directly or via the attachment supporter 3050 or the attachment supporter 3060 .

[5-10a-1. Wire locking part]
Next, the wire locking portion 3011 of the back case 3010 will be described in detail. A plurality of wire locking portions 3011 are provided on the rear surface of the back box 3010 . As shown in FIG. 174 and the like, the wire locking portion 3011 is of a straight line type having a gap in the front through which the wiring EC can pass and extending on the same plane as the rear surface of the back box 3010. L-shaped wire locking portion 3011B that protrudes short backward from the rear surface of the back box 3010 and then extends parallel to the surface of the back box 3010; A crank-type wiring locking part 3011C that extends parallel to the rear surface of the back box 3010 after protruding and bends in the middle in a direction approaching the back surface of the back box 3010, and a short rearward projection from the rear surface of the back box 3010. After that, an M-shaped wire locking portion 3011D extending parallel to the surface of the back box 3010 and bent so that the tip approaches and separates from the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an L-shaped wire locking portion are formed. There is an opposing type wiring locking portion 3011 provided so as to face each other, and the like.

The linear type wire locking portions 3011A are provided near the left and right ends of the portion above the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010 and at the portion below the opening 3010a and to the left of the lock mechanism portion 3010d in rear view. It is A wire locking portion 3011A above the opening 3010a is provided so that its tip extends toward the center in the left-right direction. Three wire locking portions 3011A below the opening 3010a are arranged side by side. is provided so as to extend downward.

The L-shaped wire locking portions 3011B are provided near the left and right ends below the opening 3010a, one on the left side and two on the right side in rear view. The wire locking portion 3011B on the left side in rear view is provided so that the tip thereof extends rightward. Of the two wire locking portions 3011B provided on the right side of the rear view, one wire locking portion 3011B has a tip extending rightward, and the other wire locking portion 3011B has a tip extending to the right. The tip is provided so as to extend downward on the left side of the wire locking portion 3011B extending to the right.

The crank-type wire locking portion 3011C is provided below the opening 3010a at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the back. The wire locking portion 3011C is provided so that the tip thereof extends downward.

A total of four M-shaped wire locking portions 3011D are provided below the opening 3010a, two on each of the left and right sides with a crank-type wire locking portion 3011C interposed therebetween. Each wire locking portion 3011D has the same height as the wire locking portion 3011C, and is provided so that the tip thereof extends downward. The four wire locking portions 3011D and one wire locking portion 3011C are provided at regular intervals in the horizontal direction.

The opposed-type wire locking portion 3011E is provided so that the gap between the tips facing each other is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction. The wire locking portion 3011E is provided below the linear type wire locking portion 3011A which is provided above the opening 3010a and near the left end in the rear view. The wire locking portion 3011E is provided so that its longitudinal direction extends in the left-right direction.

The wire locking portion 3011 has a claw-shaped hook portion 3011a protruding toward the rear surface side (forward) of the back case 3010 at the tip, and a ridge portion projecting short toward the rear surface side (forward) from each of the two sides in the longitudinal direction. 3011b and . The front end of the wiring locking portion 3011 is formed obliquely so that the surface (front face) facing the rear side of the back box 3010 including the hook portion 3011a is located rearward toward the front end. This makes it easy to insert the wire EC from the front end side of the wire locking portion 3011 into the space between the wire locking portion 3011 and the rear surface of the back box 3010 . In addition, the wire locking portion 3011 has a U-shaped cross section due to the two ridges 3011b, and has increased strength and rigidity.

The direction in which the ends of these wiring locking portions 3011 extend is different from the direction in which the wiring EC tends to move when the wiring EC is pulled in a state where the wiring EC is laid by locking the wiring EC. It is in the opposite direction. As a result, even if the wire EC is pulled or pulled during assembly or maintenance of the game board 5, the wire EC moves in the direction opposite to the leading end in the wire locking portion 3011, so that the wire locking can be performed. The wiring EC does not come off from the portion 3011 .

Next, an example of how to use the wire locking portion 3011 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the state assembled to the game board 5, a harness WH1 composed of a plurality of wirings EC connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) is provided on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. After being locked by the wire locking portion 1603 on the upper right in the rear view, it is locked by the wire locking portion 3011 on the right side in the rear view above the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010 and extends upward.

The wiring locking portion 3011 of the back box 3010 is provided to the left of the wiring locking portion 1603 of the effect display device 1600 in rear view. In addition, the tip of the wire locking portion 3011 of the back box 3010 extends leftward in rear view, while the wire locking portion 1603 of the effect display device 1600 extends rightward in rear view. procrastinating. Therefore, when both ends (connector sides) of the harness WH1 (plurality of wires EC) locked by the wire locking portion 3011 and the wire locking portion 1603 are pulled, the harness WH1 is pulled from the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 1603. Since the tip of the stop portion 3011 moves in the direction opposite to the extending direction, the harness WH1 does not come off from the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 .

As shown in FIG. 172, the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to a harness WH2 consisting of a small number of wirings EC (here, two wirings EC) so as to extend downward. This harness WH2 is locked by the wire locking portion 1603 on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 at the bottom right in the rear view, but passes through the harness WH1 that is bent upward between the two wire locking portions 1603. It is handled like this. As a result, the harness WH2 extending downward is prevented from sagging while providing a length allowance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 locked by the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are tightened together with the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 by the binding band CT. bundled together. At this time, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are fastened with such a strength that they can be slid together with the binding band CT in the longitudinal direction in which the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 extend. Incidentally, since the hook portion 1603a and the hook portion 3011a are provided at the ends of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011, the binding band CT is attached to the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring together with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. It does not come off from the tip of the locking portion 3011 .

Here, the binding band CT has a band portion CTa, which is strip-shaped and provided with a plurality of ridges or grooves at regular intervals in the longitudinal direction, and a proximal end of the band portion CTa, which is connected to a distal end of the band portion CTa. and a block-shaped lock portion CTb that allows the band portion CTa to be inserted through the side and prevents the band portion CTa from retreating by using a ridge. The banding band CT is formed by inserting the front end of the band portion CTa from the lower surface of the lock portion CTb near the portion where the base end of the band portion CTa is connected, thereby making the band portion CTa loop-shaped (annular). By pulling the end of the band portion CTa projecting from the upper surface of the lock portion CTb, the diameter of the loop formed by the band portion CTa can be reduced. At this time, although not shown, a lock mechanism is provided inside the lock portion CTb to prevent the band portion CTa from moving in a direction in which the band portion CTa is pulled out of the lock portion CTb. The part CTa never returns (retreats).

Therefore, by inserting the tip of the band part CTa into the lock part CTb and pulling it so that the band holding part 2706 and the wire EC are positioned inside the loop of the band part CTa, the band part CTa holds the band holding part 2706 and the wire EC. can be maintained in the state of being tightened and bundled. After tightening with the binding band CT, the portion of the band portion CTa protruding from the lock portion CTb is cut to an appropriate length (for example, 0.5 mm to 2 mm) from the lock portion CTb. As a result, even if the band portion CTa moves in the direction of coming out of the lock portion CTb for some reason, it is possible to prevent the band portion CTa from coming out of the lock portion CTa immediately, thereby suppressing the occurrence of problems.

The cable ties CT of the present embodiment are formed in a milky white color that is light transmissive. The color of the binding band CT may be changed according to the site where it is attached, the operator, and the like. For example, by changing the color of the cable tie CT for each worker or cooperating company, it is possible to easily discover work omissions in the post-process.

As the binding band CT, the band part CTa is not detachable from the lock part CTb, but it is not limited to this, and the band part CTa may be detachable. If the binding band CT is detachable, it can be reused even after it is removed, so the amount of waste can be reduced.

On the rear side of the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 172, the binding band CT is attached such that the lock portion CTb is in contact with the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. As shown in FIG. The lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with the portion of the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 or the harness WH2. In other words, the binding band CT is attached so that the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are positioned between the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 and the lock portion CTb. As a result, since the lock portion CTb faces rearward, it is possible to easily perform the binding work with the binding band CT, confirm the binding, and the like. Moreover, the work of cutting the binding band CT can be facilitated. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, since the contact of the lock portion CTb with the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 can be avoided, the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 bound by the binding band CT can be attached to the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire hook. It can be protected by the stop portion 3011 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, since the member (rear case) in which the wire locking portion 1603 of the effect display device 1600 is formed and the back box 3010 are formed transparent, the wire locking portion 1603 A portion of the wire locking portion 3011 supported by the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 can be visually recognized from the outside (rear side) through the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 . As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not all the wires EC constituting the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled with the binding band CT, and the binding work with the binding band CT is facilitated. can do.

Further, as shown in the figure, the binding band CT is attached to the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 so that (the band portion CTa of) the binding band CT is in oblique contact. As a result, compared to the case where the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, the contact area can be increased, and the frictional resistance is increased to make movement (sliding) difficult. can do.

Further, as shown in the figure, the binding band CT for bundling the harness WH1 with the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 is such that the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa is the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. It is attached so as to extend obliquely with respect to the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction. In other words, the binding band CT is attached crosswise. As a result, in a state in which the harness WH1 is bundled with the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 by the binding band CT, the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is aligned with the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion. By inclining the binding band CT so as to approach the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of 3011, the tightening by the band portion CTa can be loosened, and the harness WH1 can be attached to the wiring locking portion 1603 or the wiring locking portion together with the binding band CT. The portion 3011 can be easily slid in the longitudinal direction. Further, when the binding band CT is returned to the inclined state after being slid, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 can be tightened to return to the original state in which it is difficult to slide.

By the way, although detailed illustration is omitted, the rear surface of the peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 locks the binding band CT that binds the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 to the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. It protrudes rearward from the portion CTb. As a result, when the game board 5 is assembled, even if the game board 5 is placed on the workbench with its rear surface facing down, the peripheral control board box 1520 is in contact with the workbench. The workbench does not come into contact with CTb. Alternatively, even if a plurality of game boards 5 are stacked and transported during the transport operation of the game boards 5, the other game boards 5 come into contact with the peripheral control board box 1520, so that the other game boards 5 are locked in the lock part CTb. does not abut. As such, the existence of the peripheral control board box 1520 can prevent other members such as the workbench and the game board 5 from coming into contact with the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and being crushed. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being detached from the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 due to breakage of the lock portion CTb.

Also, although illustration is omitted, when the game board 5 of the present embodiment is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the rear side of the game board 5 is covered with the back cover 640 of the body frame 4 . As a result, in the island facility of the game hall, other members such as the wiring EC connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, the game ball B, and the like are connected to the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT. Contact (abutment) can be avoided by the back cover 640, and the tightening of the band portion CTa by the lock portion CTb is released by the contact of another member or the like, so that the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 becomes the wire locking portion. It is possible to prevent detachment from 1603 and wire locking portion 3011, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by the binding band CT. In addition, since the back cover 640 can prevent loosening and release of tightening due to contact of other members with the lock portion CTb, it is possible to use a binding band CT of a type in which the band portion CTa can be detached from the lock portion CTb. can be done.

In the above-described embodiment, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are made transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a material having a visible light transmittance. Alternatively, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 may be opaque and non-light transmissive.

Although illustration is omitted, a portion of the harness WH1 distant from the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 (for example, a portion between the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011) is bound by a specific binding method. You can bundle them with a band. As a result, since the harness WH1 is bundled with the specific binding band even at a portion between the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 in the harness WH1, the plurality of wirings EC constituting the harness WH1 can be connected. can be suppressed over the entire length of the harness WH1. Here, the specific cable tie is a different name from the cable tie CT described above, but it clarifies the difference in usage and has the same configuration (structure) as the cable tie CT.

Thus, according to the wire locking portion 1603, the wire locking portion 3011, and the binding band CT of this embodiment, the following excellent effects can be obtained. Specifically, first, in a conventional pachinko machine, a harness made up of a plurality of wires EC is exposed on the rear surface of the back box. Since there is a risk that the exposed harness may come into contact with other members and cause problems, a plurality of harness support portions are provided to support the harness so that the harness follows the rear surface of the back box. . The harness supporting portion of such a conventional pachinko machine has a rod-like or strip-like shape extending along the rear surface of the back box and having one end as a free end. and the harness support portion. However, in the conventional harness support portion, the harness or the wiring EC constituting the harness may come off, which may cause a problem.

In order to solve such a problem, in the present embodiment, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are bundled together with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 made up of a plurality of wires EC by tightening them with the binding band CT. , the wires EC are not separated one by one from the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 at the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011, and some of the loose wires EC are It is possible to prevent disconnection from the portion 3011 , and avoid disconnection of the wire EC from the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 .

In addition, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 made up of a plurality of wires EC can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 while being bundled with the binding band CT, the wiring is hidden by the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. When you want to check the members that are tied up, you have to move (slide) the wiring EC one by one from the harness in the conventional case where it is not bundled with the tying band CT. The harness WH2) can be slid, the confirmation work can be facilitated, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the ends of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 for supporting the harness WH1 are free ends, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are connected to the harness from the open free end side. WH1 and harness WH2 can be easily inserted, and workability can be improved. At this time, since hook portions 1603a and hook portions 3011a projecting toward the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 are provided at the ends of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011, the binding band CT When the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened and bundled together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the tying band CT together with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 is connected to the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion. 3011, it abuts against the hook 1603a and the hook 3011a to prevent further sliding. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the wire from slipping off from the tip of the wire locking portion 3011 and can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

In addition, since the binding band CT is composed of the band portion CTa and the lock portion CTb that cannot retract the band portion CTa, that is, can be inserted only in one direction, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire The wire locking portion 1603, the wire locking portion 3011, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened simply by inserting the locking portion 3011 and the tip of the band portion CTa wound around the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 into the locking portion CTb and pulling. It is possible to lock the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the folded state, and the workability of the binding operation of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be improved. At this time, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, for some reason, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are not moved around the axis of the binding band CT. Even if a rotating force acts, the locking portion CTb of the binding band CT abuts on the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, so that the binding band CT is aligned with the axis of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. It is possible to prevent it from rotating around, and it is possible to prevent the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and the tip of the band portion CTa extending from the lock portion CTb from coming into contact with other members. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, the following excellent Operation and effects can be achieved. More specifically, when the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the side of the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 that is in contact with the harness WH1 or the harness WH2, the lock portion CTb protrudes from the lock portion CTb. It is necessary to pull the end of the band part CTa toward the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010, and the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 become an obstacle, making it difficult to perform the binding work. On the other hand, since the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 on the side opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are connected by the binding band CT. When bundling, the lock part CTb faces the operator side, and if the tip of the band part CTa protruding from the lock part CTb is pulled in a direction away from the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010, the wire locking part 1603 and the back box 3010 are pulled. The wiring locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be tightened, and workability can be further improved.

Further, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with the portion of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, the lock portion CTb can be locked as described above. faces the operator side, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the front end of the band part CTa is inserted through the lock part CTb, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 which facilitates work check.

Furthermore, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 or the harness WH2, the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 and the lock portion CTb are brought into contact with each other. Since the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are interposed between the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011, the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT contacts the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. It can be a blocking wall that blocks the Thereby, there can exist the following outstanding effects. More specifically, when inserting the tip of the band portion CTa into the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and pulling the tip of the band portion CTa to bundle it, the wires EC of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 come into contact with the lock portion CTb. If this happens, part of the wire EC will be pulled into the lock part CTb together with the pulled band part CTa, and the insulating coating of the wire EC may be broken. On the other hand, the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 on the side opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. Since the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are interposed therebetween, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (wiring EC) are not in contact with the lock portion CTb. Even if the tip of CTa is pulled, a part of the wire EC is not pulled into the lock part CTb together with the band part CTa, so that the insulating coating of the wire EC can be prevented from being broken, and the wire EC can be bound with the binding band CT. It is possible to protect the harness WH1 and harness WH2.

In addition, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, maintenance and disassembly of the pachinko machine 1 are reduced. Therefore, when removing the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 from the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011, the binding band CT (band portion CTa) can be easily cut. More specifically, as described above, since the block-shaped lock portion CTb faces the operator, a cutting tool such as a nipper is guided along the lock portion CTb to prevent damage to other parts. The band portion CTa can be easily cut without cutting.

In addition, since the back cover 640 of the body frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 protruding rearward from the binding band CT are provided as protective portions for protecting the binding band CT, the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is provided. Therefore, under various circumstances such as after the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is assembled, transported, installed, installed in the game hall, etc., for some reason, other members will not hit the cable tie CT. It is possible to protect the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from coming into contact with each other, prevent the cable tie CT (lock part CTb) from being damaged, and prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from coming off the wiring locking part 1603 and the wiring locking part 3011. be able to. In addition, since the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 can protect other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, damage to other members due to contact with the binding band CT can be prevented. This can be avoided, and the occurrence of problems can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the back cover 640 of the body frame 4 can reliably prevent other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, the binding band CT (lock portion CTb) may not come into contact with another member for some reason. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being detached from the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 due to the breakage of the lock portion CTb. In addition, since the back cover 640 of the body frame 4 can prevent other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, damage to other members due to contact with the binding band CT can be avoided. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of defects.

In addition, when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear of the game board 5 is covered by the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4, so that other members, books, etc. To prevent other members such as a wiring EC and a game ball B connecting a pachinko machine 1 and a game hall from contacting (abutting) a lock part CTb of a binding band CT by a back cover 640.例文帳に追加This prevents the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from coming off the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 due to the release of the tightening of the band portion CTa by the lock portion CTb due to contact with other members. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by the binding band CT. In addition, since the back cover 640 can prevent loosening and release of tightening due to contact of other members with the lock portion CTb, it is possible to use a binding band CT of a type in which the band portion CTa can be detached from the lock portion CTb. can be done.

In addition, since the peripheral control board box 1520 protruding from the binding band CT is provided as a protective portion for protecting the binding band CT, the back box 3010 provided with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 is provided. When another member moves from the rear toward the tying band CT, the other member comes into contact with the peripheral control board box 1520 as a protection part before it contacts the tying band CT, and the other member moves further away from the tying band CT. can be prevented from moving toward the binding band CT, and other members can be prevented from coming into contact with the binding band CT. Therefore, it is possible to avoid contact (abutment) of other members with the binding band CT (lock portion CTb). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by the binding band CT without the restriction being lifted. In addition, since the peripheral control board box 1520 is provided as a protective portion for protecting the binding band CT, even if for some reason another member crosses the back cover 640 of the body frame 4 and approaches the game board 5 from behind, As described above, since the peripheral control board box 1520 that protects the cable ties CT is further present, the cable ties CT can be doubly protected.

In addition, as a protective portion for protecting the binding band CT, a peripheral control board box 1520 is provided on the rear surface of the game board 5 where the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 is provided, and projects backward beyond the binding band CT. Therefore, even if the game board 5 is placed on the workbench with the rear surface facing downward during the assembly work of the game board 5, the peripheral control board box 1520 abuts on the workbench. The workbench does not come into contact with CTb. Alternatively, even if a plurality of game boards 5 are stacked and transported during the transport operation of the game boards 5, the other game boards 5 come into contact with the peripheral control board box 1520. does not abut. As such, the presence of the peripheral control board box 1520 can prevent other members such as the workbench and the game board 5 from coming into contact with the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and being crushed. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being detached from the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 due to breakage of the lock portion CTb.

Furthermore, the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 are made transparent, and the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 support the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 so that they can be visually recognized. Since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 supported through the portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 can be visually recognized, all the wires EC constituting the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled by the binding band CT and cannot be moved. It is possible to easily check whether or not the wiring EC is regulated, and it is possible to prevent the shipment of defective products in which a part of the wiring EC has come off. can do.

In addition, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the binding work of binding the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be easily performed by the binding band CT. Workability can be improved.

In addition, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the transparent wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011, and the binding band CT is milky white with low light transmittance. are colored (e.g., gray, yellow, white, black, blue, red, green, etc.) from the plurality of wires EC constituting the harness WH1 through the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. When looking at the harness WH2 (a plurality of wires EC) and the band portion CTa of the binding band CT, it is possible to clearly visually recognize that the band portion CTa straddles the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. As a result, the binding of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT can be reliably confirmed, and the wiring locking portion 1603, the wiring locking portion 3011, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bound by the binding band CT. can be made easier.

Furthermore, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is made to contact obliquely with respect to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2, it is possible to make contact in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2. In comparison, the contact area can be widened, and the frictional resistance between the binding band CT (band portion CTa) and the harness WH1 or harness WH2 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently restrict the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT, and prevent the harness WH1, the harness WH2, and the wiring EC from coming off from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, thereby causing a problem. can be avoided.

In addition, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is in oblique contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, when the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened and bound by the binding band CT, a force acts on the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (wiring EC) from the band portion CTa of the binding band CT. Depending on the strength, the insulating coating film covering the wiring EC may deteriorate early, and problems such as electric leakage and short circuit may easily occur.
On the other hand, if the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 obliquely, the band portion CTa is wound in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 to bring it into contact. The contact area between the band portion CTa and the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 (wiring EC) can be increased as compared with the case where the wiring EC is formed. Therefore, even if they are tightened with the same strength by the binding band CT, by making them contact obliquely to widen the contact area, the force acting upon tightening can be widely dispersed and made relatively small, so that the insulation film is not affected by the insulation coating. Early deterioration can be suppressed, and problems such as electrical leakage and short circuits can be suppressed.

In addition, since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are extended in a strip shape, the harness WH1 and the harness can be secured together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by the binding band CT. When WH2 is bundled, the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is automatically in diagonal contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 because the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 have widths. As a result, it is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the effects described above.

Furthermore, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 made up of a plurality of wirings EC are individually bundled with a specific binding band at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be It is possible to suppress the plurality of wirings EC constituting the wiring EC from being separated one by one over the entire length of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, thereby avoiding the contact of the separated wirings EC with other members. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects.

In addition, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled with the specific binding band at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 may be moved in the longitudinal direction for some reason. When pulled, the lock portion of the specific binding band comes into contact with the wiring locking portion 1603, the wiring locking portion 3011, and the binding band CT as the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 move, and the specific binding band pulls the lock further. Movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 made up of a plurality of wiring ECs are bound by the specific binding band at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the outer circumference of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 is circular. , and the band portion of the specific binding band extends in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. As a result, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be compactly bundled at the portion of the specific binding band, so it is possible to easily check the parts provided behind the harness WH1 and the harness WH2.

In addition, at the portion of the specific binding band provided at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the band portion of the specific binding band is aligned in a direction orthogonal to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (longitudinal direction). extended to On the other hand, the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is obliquely brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 at the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. The direction in which the band portion CTa and the band portion extend with respect to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be made different between the portion of (1) and the portion of the binding portion. As a result, in the work of bundling the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, by checking the position and number of the band part CTa and the extending direction of the band part, it is easy to determine whether the work is being performed according to the work manual. can be verified. In this case, the color of the binding band CT of the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 and that of the specific binding band may be different so that the binding work can be easily confirmed. can.

In addition, since the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 extend in the shape of a flat plate or a band plate, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are formed in a rod shape. In comparison, since the contact area between the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 can be increased, the frictional resistance can be increased. As a result, the effect of the binding band CT as the movement restricting means can be exhibited more easily, and the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be reliably restricted to further avoid problems.

Furthermore, since the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are extended in the shape of a flat plate or a band plate, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be secured at the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. Since the plurality of wirings EC constituting the wiring EC can be easily spread along the surfaces of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, heat can be easily released from the wirings EC. At this time, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the plurality of wires EC constituting the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are connected to the wiring locking portion 1603. It is possible to easily check each wire through the wire locking portion 3011 .

Further, as shown in the enlarged cross-sectional view of the essential part in FIG. Since the ridge portion 3011b is provided, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are brought into contact with the ridge portion 1603b and the ridge portion 3011b. In other words, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are provided with recesses for avoiding contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. As a result, when the binding band CT is tightened and bundled, force is applied to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from the band portion CTa of the binding band CT over the entire width of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. Since it can be avoided, the force acting on the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be adjusted, and early deterioration of the insulating coating in the wiring EC can be suppressed.

In addition, since the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are provided with the ridge portion 1603b and the ridge portion 3011b, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are configured by tightening the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 with the binding band CT. The insulating coating of the wiring EC that is attached is likely to bite into the corners of the protruding portion 1603b and the protruding portion 3011b. Thereby, resistance can be applied to the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the longitudinal direction, and the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the longitudinal direction can be made difficult.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a penetrating portion 1604 penetrating through the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 facing the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 of the back box 3010 are provided. Penetrating portions 3012 penetrating back and forth are respectively provided in the portions where they are. In other words, the main body (here, the effect display device 1600, the back box, etc.) provided with a harness support portion for locking the wiring EC, the harness WH1, etc., such as the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 3010), a binding band CT for bundling the wiring EC, the harness WH1, etc. together with the harness support is provided at a portion of the main body that faces the portion of the harness support that extends along the surface of the main body. However, a contact avoiding portion (corresponding to the penetrating portion 1604 and the penetrating portion 3012 in this embodiment) is provided to avoid contact with the main body portion.

In this way, contact avoidance portions for avoiding contact with the binding band CT are provided in portions of the main body facing the harness support portion such as the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 . Therefore, it is possible to easily insert a plurality of wires EC, harnesses WH1, and binding bands CT between the main body portion and the harness support portion, and workability can be improved. In addition, the binding band CT that binds the harness WH1 and the like to the harness support portion is prevented from coming into contact with the surface of the main body. It is possible to reduce troubles with respect to the harness and the harness support.

More specifically, when the binding band CT comes into contact with the main body, a force is constantly applied to the harness supporting part through the wiring EC, the harness WH1, etc. and the binding band CT in a direction away from the main body. Therefore, the force acting on the harness support from the main body may prematurely fatigue and damage the harness support. In addition, since the force acting on the harness support portion from the main body portion also acts on the wiring EC, the harness WH1, etc., the force constantly acts on the insulation coating of the wiring EC, resulting in early deterioration of the insulation coating. Leakage or short circuit may occur.
In order to solve such a problem, in the present embodiment, since the main body is provided with the contact avoiding portion, force is applied from the main body to the harness supporting portion and the harness WH1 and the like bundled by the binding band CT. no. Therefore, it is possible to reduce problems such as early breakage of the harness support portion and occurrence of electrical leakage or short circuit in the harness WH1 or the like.

In this embodiment, as the contact avoidance part, the one that penetrates the surface of the main body (the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 and the rear surface of the back box 3010) is shown, but it is not limited to this. It may be recessed from the surface of the main body.

In the above-described embodiment, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bound together with the binding band CT at the wiring locking portion 1603 provided on the rear cover of the effect display device 1600 and the wiring locking portion 3011 of the back box 3010. However, it is not limited to this, and the wiring EC and the harness are bound together with the binding band CT at the wiring locking portion provided in the production unit having the decorative body and the movable decorative body. Also good.

In the above-described embodiment, the binding band CT is wrapped around and tightened (bound) together with the harnesses such as the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 around the harness supporting portions such as the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. Although the harness is prevented from being detached from the harness support portion by the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and a hook-and-loop type band, a vinyl tie, or the like may be used. A harness clip may be used, a spiral tube may be used, a high friction resistance portion may be provided on the harness support portion, or an adhesive portion may be provided on the harness support portion. good.

[5-10a-2. Functional side]
Next, the functional surface portion 3015 of the back case 3010 will be described in detail. The functional surface portion 3015 is also used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The functional surface portion 3015 is provided inside the outer peripheral edge of the back box 3010 and behind the fixing piece portion 3010e for attaching the back box 3010 to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The functional surface portion 3015 is formed so that the front side and the rear side are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100 . The functional surface portion 3015 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000 when viewed from the front.

Since a predetermined member can be brought into contact with the front side or the rear side of the functional surface portion 3015, for example, an intermediate member protruding from a predetermined member, such as a workbench or a mounting table, can be attached to the front side of the functional surface portion 3015. You may make it contact|abut the upper end of . At this time, the intermediate member is longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3015 to the front surface of the back unit 3000 (here, the back ball guiding unit 3100, the back front upper effect unit 3200, and the back front left effect unit 3300). Protruding. As a result, when the back unit 3000 is to be placed (face down) on a predetermined member with the front side facing downward when assembling the game board 5, the back unit 3000 is placed with the front side facing downward. By bringing the upper end of the intermediate member protruding from the predetermined member into contact with the front surface of the functional surface portion 3015, the rear unit 3000 is placed on the predetermined member while the front surface of the rear unit 3000 is separated from the predetermined member. can be placed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the rear unit 3000 from being damaged due to the contact of a predetermined member, thereby maintaining the rear unit 3000 in a good condition and preventing the occurrence of defective products (defective products) due to scratches. This can be prevented, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Note that the intermediate member may be a separate member separated from the predetermined member.

In addition, as described above, the functional surface portion 3015 can avoid contact between the front surface of the back unit 3000 and a predetermined member, so that the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) holding the effect unit is placed face down. Then, the mounting work and wiring work of other members such as the effect display device 1600 and the back substrate unit 3040 can be performed on the rear side of the back box 3010 .

In addition, since the back box 3010 is provided with the functional surface portion 3015, the effect is reduced compared to the case where the functional surface portion 3015 is provided in the effect unit such as the back front upper effect unit 3200 and the back front left effect unit 3300. The back box 3010 can be placed face down even when the unit is not held. Therefore, the back box 3010 (back unit 3000) can be placed face down even during assembly, and various work conditions (work modes) can be accommodated.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3015 can be brought into contact with a predetermined member on the front surface side or the rear surface side, for example, an intermediate member protruding from a predetermined member such as a workbench or a mounting table can be provided on the rear surface side of the functional surface portion 3015 . You may make it contact|abut the upper end of a member. At this time, the intermediate member protrudes longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3015 to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 . As a result, when the back unit 3000 is to be placed on a predetermined member with the back side facing downward when assembling the game board 5, the back unit 3000 is placed with the back side facing downward. By bringing the upper end of the intermediate member protruding from the predetermined member into contact with the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3015, the rear unit 3000 is placed on the predetermined member while the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 is separated from the predetermined member. can be placed.

Therefore, the rear unit 3000 is placed face up on a predetermined member in a state in which the predetermined member is prevented from contacting the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 by bringing the upper surface of the intermediate member into contact with the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3015. Therefore, the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) can be stabilized in a supine state during assembly, etc., and the assembly work, etc., from the front end side of the back box 3010 can be facilitated. can.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3015 is provided in a portion that is recessed rearward from the front surface of the back box 3010, at least a part of the peripheral edge of the functional surface portion 3015 is provided with a portion that protrudes forward or backward (for example, the back box 3010), relative movement of the functional surface portion 3015 and the intermediate member or the upper surface of the intermediate member in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member can be restricted by this portion. This makes it difficult for the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) to move when placed face down or on one's back via the functional surface portion 3015, making assembly work easier.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3015 is provided with a part of the plurality of functional hole portions 3013, the intermediate member is provided with a positioning pin that can be inserted into the through hole of the functional hole portion 3013. The back unit 3000 (back box 3010) placed face down or face up can be restricted from moving in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member by means of the pin, and the same effect as described above can be achieved. be able to.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3015 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit 3000 when viewed from the front, the rear unit 3000 can be placed face down or face up on a predetermined member such as a workbench or a mounting table via an intermediate member. When this is done, the back unit 3000 can be kept in a stable state, and it is possible to prevent the back unit 3000 from tilting and the front face of the performance unit or the like coming into contact with a predetermined member.

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3015 is provided behind the front surface of the back box 3010, the functional surface portion 3015 hits the game panel 1100 when the back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The back box 3010 (back unit 3000) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 without any problem.

In the above-described embodiment, the functional surface portion 3015 has a planar shape parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100, but is not limited to this. Curved surface portion recessed in a truncated cone shape”, “polyhedral portion recessed backward in the shape of a polygonal pyramid or a truncated polygonal pyramid”, “curved surface portion protruding forward in the shape of a cone or a truncated cone”, “forward Polyhedral portions that protrude in the shape of a polygonal pyramid or a truncated polygonal pyramid. When the functional surface portion is a curved surface portion or a multi-surface portion as described above, it is desirable that the upper end surface of the intermediate member has a shape that follows the functional surface portion. Thereby, the relative movement of the functional surface portion (back box 3010) and the intermediate member in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member can be restricted.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the back box 3010 is provided with the functional surface portion 3015, but the present invention is not limited to this. etc. may be provided. For example, the drive motor of the effect unit, the end surface of the solenoid, the tip surface of the ball guiding member, and the like may be used as the functional surface portion.

[5-10b. Mounting supporter]
Next, the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 173 to 177. FIG. FIG. 175(a) is a six-sided view of the mounting supporter in the back unit, (b) is a perspective view of the mounting supporter in (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is the mounting supporter in (a) viewed from the rear. 1 is a perspective view seen from . 176, (a) is a perspective view showing a mounting supporter of an embodiment different from the mounting supporter of FIG. 175, and (b) is a main part of the mounting supporter having a different body shape from the mounting supporter of (a). (c) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view from behind of a main part of a mounting supporter of an embodiment different from the mounting supporter of (a). 177(a) is a perspective view of a mounting supporter having a different form from the mounting supporter of FIG. 175 as viewed from the front left, (b) is a front view of the mounting supporter of (a), and (c) is a front view of the mounting supporter of (a). ) is a perspective view of the mounting supporter of (a) as seen from the front right, and (d) is a perspective view of the mounting supporter of (a) as seen from the back.

FIG. 178 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back, showing an enlarged portion of the mounting supporter as a main part with the back box made transparent. FIG. 179(a) is a rearward photograph of the mounting supporter portion of FIG. 175 in the rear unit, and FIG. 179(b) is a rearward photograph of the mounting supporter portion of FIG. 177 in the rear unit. In FIG. 178, the back box 3010 is indicated by broken lines, and the attachment supporters 3050 and 3060 are shaded in the enlargement of the main part.

In this embodiment, the back rear effect unit 3600 is attached to the back box 3010 by the mounting supporter 3050 , and the back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the back box 3010 by the mounting supporter 3060 .

First, the mounting supporter 3050 will be described. As shown in FIG. 175 and the like, the mounting supporter 3050 includes a block-shaped main body portion 3051, a first mounting hole 3052 penetrating the main body portion 3051, and the first mounting hole 3052. A projecting pin 3053 projecting rearward in a columnar shape from the portion 3051 , a boss portion 3054 projecting forward in a columnar shape from the main body portion 3051 , and a second mounting hole 3055 passing through the boss portion 3054 . are doing. This mounting supporter 3050 is colored in a different color (here, black) from the back box 3010 .

A main body portion 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 is formed in a shape of a semi-circular arc in which the left side of a horizontally long rectangle is in contact with the upper side and the lower side when viewed from the front. The main body portion 3051 is formed such that the right side of the center in the left-right direction is shorter than the left side in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 3051 has a flat rear surface, and a front surface formed in a stepped shape so that the right side thereof is recessed rearward from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. The body portion 3051 has a piece portion 3051a on the right side of the center in the left-right direction, the thickness of which is thinner than that on the left side. Further, the base portion of the protruding pin 3053 in the main body portion 3051 is recessed so as to surround the outer periphery of the protruding pin 3053 (having an annular groove).

The first mounting hole 3052 is provided coaxially with the center of the semicircular arc on the left side of the body portion 3051 in a front view, and penetrates the body portion 3051 in the front-rear direction. This first attachment hole 3052 is provided with a diameter slightly smaller than the diameter of the hole of the functional hole portion 3013 in the back case 3010 .

The protruding pin 3053 protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from a portion of the body portion 3051 that is behind the piece portion 3051a. The projecting pin 3053 has a hemispherical tip.
The protruding pin 3053 has the same distance between its axis and the axis of the first mounting hole 3052 as the distance between the axes of the two through holes in the back case 3010 . The protruding pin 3053 has the same diameter as the hole of the functional hole 3013 in the back box 3010 and can be inserted (or press-fitted) into the functional hole 3013 .

The boss portion 3054 protrudes (extends) forward in a columnar shape from a portion of the main body portion 3051 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction (a portion closer to the protruding pin 3053 side). The front surface of the boss portion 3054 is shorter than the diameter of the boss portion 3054 and protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body portion 3051 . The diameter of the cylinder of boss portion 3054 is the same as the distance from the upper side to the lower side of main body portion 3051 . Therefore, the boss portion 3054 is in contact with the upper side and the lower side of the body portion 3051 .

The second mounting hole 3055 extends through the boss portion 3054 and the body portion 3051 in the front-rear direction at the center of the cylinder of the boss portion 3054 . The diameter of the second mounting hole 3055 is the same as the diameter of the first mounting hole 3052 .

This mounting supporter 3050 inserts a protruding pin 3053 from the front into one of the two through holes forming the functional hole 3013 of the back box 3010, and the first mounting hole 3052 is coaxial with the remaining through holes. In the state of being positioned at , it is attached to the back case 3010 by screwing the attachment screw into the first attachment hole 3052 through the through hole from the rear of the back case 3010 and tightening. In addition, since the body portion 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 has a flat piece portion 3051a in front of the protruding pin 3053, when the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 is inserted into the functional hole portion 3013, The protruding pin 3053 can be easily inserted into the functional hole 3013 by pressing the piece 3051a with a finger or the like.

Then, the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the back box 3010 by bringing the base of the production unit into contact with the tip of the boss portion 3054 of the mounting supporter 3050 and screwing the mounting screw into the second mounting hole 3055 through the base from the front. A production unit can be attached in the back box 3010 via.

Specifically, the back box 3010 is provided with a plurality of functional holes 3013 each having two through holes. The back effect unit 3600 mounted in the back box 3010 has a square frame-shaped unit base 3601, and the frame-shaped unit base 3601 is provided with mounting holes at the upper and lower sides thereof. Then, the attachment supporter 3050 is attached from the front to the functional holes 3013 at positions corresponding to the attachment holes of the unit base 3601 among the plurality of functional holes 3013 provided in the back case 3010 .

After the attachment supporter 3050 is attached to the back box 3010, the back effect unit 3600 is inserted into the back box 3010, and the attachment hole of the unit base 3601 and the second attachment hole 3055 of the attachment supporter 3050 are aligned. In this embodiment, a concave portion into which the tip of the boss portion 3054 of the mounting supporter 3050 can be inserted is formed in the portion of the mounting hole to which the mounting supporter 3050 is attached in the unit base 3601, and the tip of the boss portion 3054 is inserted into the concave portion. By inserting it, the mounting hole of the unit base 3601 and the second mounting hole 3055 of the mounting supporter 3050 can be easily aligned.

After aligning the mounting hole of the unit base 3601 of the back effect unit 3600 with the second mounting hole 3055 of the mounting supporter 3050, the mounting screw is screwed into the second mounting hole 3055 from the front of the unit base 3601 and tightened. As a result, the back post effect unit 3600 can be attached inside the back box 3010. - 特許庁

In the above description, an example is shown in which the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the back box 3010 and then the back effect unit 3600 is attached to the mounting supporter 3050. However, the unit base of the back effect unit 3600 is not limited to this. The mounting supporter 3050 may be mounted on the back box 3010 after mounting the mounting supporter 3050 on 3601 .

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the functional hole 3013 provided in advance in the back box 3010 is shown. Alternatively, two through holes for mounting the mounting supporters 3050 may be drilled at predetermined positions of the back box 3010, and the mounting supporters 3050 may be mounted to the through holes.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the boss portion 3054 of the mounting supporter 3050 protrudes from the front surface of the main body portion 3051 shorter than the diameter of the boss portion 3054, but the present invention is not limited to this. The boss portion 3054 may protrude (extend) forward as long as the mounting supporter 3050 shown in FIG. Accordingly, by preparing mounting supporters 3050 having boss portions 3054 of various lengths in advance, it is possible to cope with various design changes and model changes. A performance unit or the like can also be attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050 .

Further, as the mounting supporter 3050, as shown in FIG. 176(b), the body portion 3051 may be enlarged to increase the contact area with the back case 3010 (function hole portion 3013). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 176(c), one more first mounting hole 3052 is added instead of the protruding pin 3053, and the two first mounting holes 3052 are used to attach the back box 3010 (functional hole portion 3013). You may attach it to . According to these, by attaching a heavy production unit or the like or protruding the boss portion 3054 long, even if the force acting on the attachment portion of the attachment supporter 3050 to the back box 3010 (functional hole portion 3013) increases. , production units, etc. can be installed in good condition. That is, it is possible to deal with a heavy effect unit or the like, or a effect unit or the like that requires a long boss portion 3054 by being provided at a position away from the functional hole portion 3013 .

In the above embodiment, the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the back box 3010, but it is not limited to this, and may be attached to the game panel 1100, front unit 2000, or the like.

Thus, according to the mounting supporter 3050 of this embodiment, even if the back box 3010 is not provided with a mounting boss for mounting a production unit such as the back-side production unit 3600, just by mounting the mounting supporter 3050, A mounting boss for mounting a production unit or the like can be provided at a desired position of the back box 3010 . In other words, the back box 3010 is provided with a plurality of functional holes 3013 consisting of two through holes in advance, and attached to the functional holes 3013 corresponding to the attachment holes of the production unit such as the rear rear production unit 3600. By attaching the supporter 3050, the back box 3010 can be provided with an attachment boss for attaching the effect unit. Therefore, even if the parts of the back box 3010 where the production unit etc. are attached change due to design changes or model changes, the production unit etc. can be installed simply by changing the position where the mounting supporter 3050 is installed without remaking the back box 3010. Since it can be attached, it is possible to easily cope with design changes and model changes, and the back box 3010 can be diverted, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the mounting supporter 3050 of the present embodiment is colored in a different color from the back box 3010, it becomes conspicuous when attached to the back box 3010. The operator can easily recognize the position of the mounting supporter 3050 at the rear side, and the position of the mounting supporter 3050 (mounting boss) can be easily recognized, so that the mounting work of the effect unit such as the back side effect unit 3600 can be easily performed. It can be made easy. In this embodiment, since the back box 3010 is transparent, the attachment supporter 3050 can be seen from the outside of the back box 3010 (see FIGS. 178 and 179(a)).

In addition, since a production unit such as the rear rear production unit 3600 is mounted in the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050, a certain amount of clearance is formed between the production unit and the back box 3010. , and heat and the like can be easily released by the gap. In addition, since the effect unit etc. are attached to the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050, the mounting supporter 3050 can reduce the transmission of vibration between the effect unit etc. side and the back box 3010 side. Become.

Furthermore, since the effect unit such as the back effect unit 3600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050 having the boss portion 3054, the unit base of the effect unit etc. is attached to the back box 3010. Since there is no need to provide a mounting boss projecting rearward, the thickness of the unit base in the front-rear direction can be made relatively thin, and the depth of engraving of the mold for forming the unit base can be made shallow. It is possible to reduce the cost of the unit base.

By the way, if the mounting supporter 3050 of this embodiment is formed by injection molding or the like, the base of the protruding pin 3053 is likely to be rounded, and the base of the protruding pin 3053 is thickened by the R. Then, when an attempt is made to insert the projecting pin 3053 with the R at the base thereof into the functional hole 3013 of the back box 3010, the thickened portion at the base cannot enter the functional hole 3013 and protrudes. The insertion of the pin 3053 may stop halfway, and the mounting supporter 3050 may be attached to the back case 3010 in a state in which the protruding pin 3053 is incompletely inserted.
If the insertion of the protruding pin 3053 is incomplete, the positioning effect of the back-side effect unit 3600 attached by the attachment supporter 3050 cannot be fully exhibited, and the above-described effects cannot be obtained. There is fear.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the groove is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the protruding pin 3053 in the main body 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050, the base of the protruding pin 3053 is located in the groove ahead of the rear surface of the main body 3051. Even if the protruding pin 3053 has an R at the base of the protruding pin 3053, the portion of the protruding pin 3053 behind the rear surface of the main body portion 3051 does not become thicker, and the thickness (diameter) of the effective range of the protruding pin 3053 is not increased. The protruding pin 3053 can be fully inserted into the functional hole 3013 until the front surface of the back box 3010 abuts the rear surface of the body portion 3051 . Also, even if a burr occurs at the front edge of the functional hole portion 3013 of the back box 3010, the burr will be caught between the back box 3010 and the main body portion 3051 by being accommodated in the groove. can be avoided, and the protruding pin 3053 can be completely inserted into the functional hole 3013 . As described above, the positioning effect of the protruding pin 3053 when the back effect unit 3600 is attached can be reliably exhibited, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be provided.

In addition, even if the base of the protruding pin 3053 is rounded, the portion thickened by the rounded radius can be moved forward from the rear surface of the main body 3051 due to the existence of the groove. A gap is not generated between the back box 3010 and the main body portion 3051 due to imperfect insertion into the functional hole portion 3013 due to the portion that is formed. In addition, since the burr generated at the front edge of the functional hole portion 3013 can be accommodated in the groove portion, the burr is formed between the back box 3010 and the main body portion 3051 at the portion of the first mounting hole 3052 of the main body portion 3051 . There is no gap between them. Therefore, the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050 without being attached to the back box 3010 with a gap between the back box 3010 and the main body 3051. The effect units such as the back effect unit 3600 do not rattle.

Further, since a groove is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the protruding pin 3053 on the rear surface of the main body 3051, during the injection molding of the mounting supporter 3050, the difference in plate thickness due to the presence of the protruding pin 3053 in the main body 3051 causes the molten resin It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sink mark that dents the front side of the main body portion 3051 when the resin hardens.

Next, the attachment supporter 3060 will be described. As shown in FIG. 177 and the like, the mounting supporter 3060 includes a main body portion 3061 having a predetermined length, first mounting holes 3062 penetrating back and forth near both ends of the main body portion 3061 in the longitudinal direction, and Two protruding pins 3063 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the main body 3061 in a cylindrical shape spaced apart in the direction, and second mounting holes 3064 penetrating back and forth near both ends of the main body 3061 in the longitudinal direction. have. This mounting supporter 3060 is colored in a different color (here, black) from the back box 3010 .

The main body portion 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 includes two block-shaped head portions 3061a provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a strip-shaped back connecting piece 3061b connecting the rear ends of the two head portions 3061a. a strip-shaped side connecting piece 3061c extending forward along one long side of the back connecting piece 3061b and connecting the two head portions 3061a together; the back connecting piece 3061b and the side connecting piece; 3061c and a plurality of (here, four) triangular rib pieces 3061d provided at intervals in the longitudinal direction. The side connecting piece 3061c is provided along the left side of the back connecting piece 3061b in front view. The body portion 3061 has an L-shaped cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction formed by the back connecting piece 3061b and the side connecting piece 3061c, and has a plurality of triangular rib pieces 3061d. Therefore, the strength and rigidity are enhanced, making it difficult to bend.

The two first mounting holes 3062 are formed near the ends of the head portion 3061a provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 3061 on the side of the back connecting piece 3061b, and the side connecting pieces 3061c with respect to the center in the left-right direction in front view. It is provided in the part nearer (toward the right). The two first mounting holes 3062 are provided on the same straight line parallel to the longitudinal axis of the body portion 3061 . The first attachment hole 3062 is provided with a diameter slightly smaller than the diameter of the hole of the functional hole portion 3013 in the back case 3010 . The distance between the two first attachment holes 3062 is the same as that of the four functional holes 3013 arranged in a row at equal intervals in the direction in which the main body 3061 straddles the two through-holes in the back case 3010. , is the same as the interval between the through holes on the side closer to each other in the two functional holes 3013 on both outer sides.

The two protruding pins 3063 protrude rearward in a columnar shape from the rear surface of the back connecting piece 3061b of the body portion 3061 . The projecting pin 3063 has a truncated conical tip. The protruding pin 3063 has the same diameter as the hole of the functional hole 3013 in the back box 3010 and can be inserted (or press-fitted) into the functional hole 3013 . The two projecting pins 3063 are provided on the same straight line connecting the two first mounting holes 3062 . The interval between the two protruding pins 3063 is the same as the interval between the through-holes on the far side of the two functional holes 3013 near the center of the four functional holes 3013 that the main body 3061 of the back box 3010 straddles. be.

The two second mounting holes 3064 are provided outside the first mounting holes 3062 at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body 3061, and are provided in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The second attachment hole 3064 extends through the head portion 3061a of the body portion 3061 in the front-rear direction. The diameter of second mounting hole 3064 is the same as the diameter of first mounting hole 3062 .

This mounting supporter 3060 is a functional hole in a portion of a plurality of functional holes 3013 provided in the back case 3010, in which four or more are arranged in a row at equal intervals in the direction in which two through holes are spaced apart. 3013.

The mounting supporter 3060 has two protruding pins from the front in two through-holes on the side apart from each other in the two functional holes 3013 near the center of the four functional holes 3013 arranged in a row in the back box 3010. 3063 are inserted respectively. At this time, since the main body portion 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 has a flat back connecting piece 3061b in front of the protruding pin 3063, the protruding pin 3063 of the mounting supporter 3060 is inserted into the functional hole portion 3013. At this time, the worker can easily insert the projecting pin 3063 into the functional hole 3013 by pressing the back connecting piece 3061b with a finger or the like.

In this mounting supporter 3060, when two projecting pins 3063 are inserted into the through holes of the two function hole portions 3013, the two first mounting holes 3062 become the through holes of the function hole portions 3013 at both ends of the four function hole portions 3013. is consistent with Therefore, the attachment supporter 3060 can be attached to the back box 3010 by screwing the attachment screw into the first attachment hole 3062 matching the through hole from the rear of the back box 3010 and tightening.

Then, the base of the production unit is brought into contact with the front end of the head portion 3061a of the main body portion 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 attached to the back box 3010, and the mounting screw is screwed into the second mounting hole 3064 through the base from the front. , the production unit can be attached in the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060.

Specifically, the back box 3010 is provided with a plurality of functional hole portions 3013 consisting of two through holes. A plurality of (here, four or more) functional holes 3013 are provided at equal intervals in the direction in which the holes are spaced apart (vertical direction). In addition, the back-right effect unit 3400 has a unit base 3401 made of a metal plate. The unit base 3401 has a flange portion 3401a that bends forward from the left side and then bends rightward at the front end side, and a mounting hole penetrating back and forth is provided in the flange portion 3401a. . Attachment supporters 3060 are attached from the front to the four functional holes 3013 vertically arranged along the right side of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front.

After the attachment supporter 3060 is attached to the back box 3010, the flange portion 3401a of the unit base 3401 of the back right effect unit 3400 is brought into contact with the front surface of the attachment supporter 3060 (body portion 3061) from the front. Then, with the mounting hole of the flange portion 3401a aligned with the second mounting hole 3064 of the mounting supporter 3060, the mounting screw is screwed into the second mounting hole 3064 through the mounting hole from the front and tightened. As a result, the flange portion 3401 a of the unit base 3401 in the back right effect unit 3400 can be attached to the back box 3010 .

In the above description, an example is shown in which the mounting supporter 3060 is attached to the back box 3010 and then the flange portion 3401a of the unit base 3401 of the back-right effect unit 3400 is attached to the mounting supporter 3060. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After attaching the attachment supporter 3060 to the flange portion 3401 a of the unit base 3401 of the back right effect unit 3400 , the attachment supporter 3060 may be attached to the back box 3010 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the mounting supporter 3060 is attached to the function hole 3013 provided in advance in the back box 3010 and used is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game board 5 is assembled, Alternatively, a through hole for mounting the mounting supporter 3060 may be drilled at a predetermined position of the back box 3010, and the mounting supporter 3060 may be mounted to the through hole.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the mounting supporter 3060 has the main body portion 3061 extending linearly, but the main body portion 3061 is not limited to this, and the main body portion 3061 may be L-shaped, frame-shaped, or circular. It is good also as what has extended in shape, such as arc shape and curvilinear shape.

In this embodiment, the mounting supporter 3060 is attached to the back case 3010 using a plurality of functional holes 3013 each having two through holes, and each functional hole 3013 used has two holes. Only one of the through holes is used. That is, one through-hole is not used in the functional hole portion 3013 consisting of two through-holes. For this reason, in the above-described embodiment, the functional hole portion 3013 has two through holes. However, the functional hole portion 3013 may have one through hole. .

Thus, according to the mounting supporter 3060 of this embodiment, even if the back box 3010 is not provided with a mounting boss for mounting a production unit such as the back-right production unit 3400, just by installing the mounting supporter 3060, A mounting boss for mounting a production unit or the like can be provided at a desired position of the back box 3010 . In other words, a plurality of functional holes 3013 consisting of two through holes are provided in advance in the back box 3010, and the plurality of functional holes 3013 at portions corresponding to the attachment holes of the production unit such as the rear right production unit 3400 are provided. By attaching the attachment supporter 3060 to the back box 3010, an attachment boss for attaching the effect unit can be provided. Therefore, even if the parts of the back box 3010 where the effect unit etc. are attached change due to design changes or model changes, the effect unit etc. can be replaced by simply changing the position where the attachment supporter 3060 is attached without remaking the back box 3010. Since it can be attached, it is possible to easily cope with design changes and model changes, and the back box 3010 can be diverted, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the mounting supporter 3060 of this embodiment is colored in a different color from the back box 3010, it becomes conspicuous when attached to the back box 3010. The operator can easily recognize the position of the mounting supporter 3060 at the bottom, and the position of the mounting supporter 3060 (mounting boss) can be easily understood, so that the installation work of the production unit such as the back right production unit 3400 can be easily performed. It can be made easy. In this embodiment, since the back box 3010 is transparent, the mounting supporter 3060 can be visually recognized from the outside of the back box 3010 (see FIGS. 178 and 179(b)).

In addition, since the effect unit such as the back right effect unit 3400 is mounted inside the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060, a certain amount of gap is formed between the effect unit etc. and the back box 3010. , and heat and the like can be easily released by the gap. In addition, since the effect unit etc. are attached to the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060, the mounting supporter 3060 can reduce the transmission of vibration between the effect unit etc. side and the back box 3010 side. Become.

Furthermore, since the attachment supporter 3060 is attached to the back box 3010 so as to straddle the plurality of functional holes 3013, the attachment supporter 3060 can reinforce the back box 3010 (or the unit base 3401 of the back right effect unit 3400). .

In addition, the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 are provided with a band holding portion protruding in an annular shape and a wire locking portion extending in a rod-like or strip-like shape for holding the wiring EC. can be In this case, as described above, since a certain amount of gap is formed between the production unit and the back box 3010 by the attachment supporter 3050 and the attachment supporter 3060, the wiring EC can be arranged in the gap to improve the wiring EC. It becomes possible to handle it.

Moreover, in the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 of the above embodiment, the first mounting hole 3052 and the second mounting hole 3055, and the first mounting hole 3062 and the second mounting hole 3064 are provided at different positions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first mounting hole 3052 and the second mounting hole 3055, and the first mounting hole 3062 and the second mounting hole 3064 may be provided coaxially. Accordingly, the attachment supporter 3050 and the attachment supporter 3060 can be made smaller and simpler.

Further, in the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 of the above embodiment, the axis of the first mounting hole 3052 and the axis of the second mounting hole 3055, the axis of the first mounting hole 3062 and the axis of the second mounting hole 3064 Although the cores and cores are shown extending in the same direction (parallel), it is not limited to this, and the direction in which the axis of the second mounting hole differs from the axis of the first mounting hole is shown. It can be whatever suits you. This makes it possible to attach the performance unit to the attachment supporter from various directions.

[5-10c. Back front performance unit]
Next, the back front effect effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181 and the like. FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the game board disassembled for each unit and viewed from the front. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the game board disassembled for each unit and viewed from the rear. be. The back front up effect unit 3200 is provided along the top side near the front end inside the back box 3010 . The back front upper effect unit 3200 includes three transparent upper back front upper first decorative plates 3201, back front upper second decorative plates 3202, and back front upper third decorative plates 3203, which are arranged at intervals in the front-rear direction. It has a decorative plate (see Figure 144).
The three decorative plates are provided in front of the rear upper decorative body 3650 at the retracted position in the rear rear effect unit 3600 described later, and the upper rear decorative body 3650 is visible from the front through the respective decorative plates.

The three decorative plates, a back front upper first decorative plate 3201, a back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and a back front upper third decorative plate 3203, are flat plates elongated in the left and right direction, and are provided with their plate surfaces facing forward and backward. It is The same logo along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is carved on the rear surface of each decorative plate. The logo is also provided on the back rear upper decoration of the back rear effect unit 3600, and the logo of the same size as the logo of the back rear upper decoration 3650 is applied to the back front upper third decoration plate 3203. ing. The back front upper second decorative plate 3202 has a logo that is larger than the logo of the back front upper third decorative plate 3203 . Further, the back front upper first decorative plate 3201 is provided with a logo that is larger than the logo of the back front upper second decorative plate 3202 . As a result, the player can see a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of perspective such that the characters of the logo become larger from the rear to the front (see FIG. 197).

The back front upper effect unit 3200 supports a back front upper first decoration plate 3201, a back front upper second decoration plate 3202, and a back front upper third decoration plate 3203, and has a unit base 3204 attached to the back box 3010. , which are provided on the unit base 3204, and irradiate light toward the upper end surfaces of each of the back front upper first decoration plate 3201, the back front upper second decoration plate 3202, and the back front upper third decoration plate 3203. and a back front top decorative substrate 3205 on which a possible plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The back front upper effect unit 3200 appropriately emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front upper decorative substrate 3205, so that the back front upper first decoration plate 3201, the back front upper second decoration plate 3202, and the back front upper decoration plate 3202 are displayed. The light incident inside from the upper end surface of each of the upper third decorative plates 3203 is diffusely reflected at the portions of the engraved logos, so that the logos can be illuminated.

Although illustration is omitted, specific characters among the logos applied to the back front upper first decorative plate 3201, the back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the back front upper third decorative plate 3203, respectively The formed streaks are colored from the back by an inkjet printer, and the light from the LEDs of the back front upper decorative substrate 3205 can give off a lustrous shine.

[5-10d. Back front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184 and the like. Figure 182(a) is a front view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear front left effect unit. (d) is a cross-sectional view of the back front left effect unit cut along the sacer line in (a). FIG. 183 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 184 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit and viewed from the back. be. The back front left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is provided along the left side near the front end inside the back box 3010 .

A back front left effect unit 3300 includes a back front left decoration body 3301 and a back front left decoration body 3301 which are three-dimensionally formed of a sheet-like material having a predetermined character pattern according to the concept of the game board 5.例文帳に追加and a transparent decorative body cover 3302 formed along the surface of the back front left decorative body 3301 provided in front of and formed behind the back front left decorative body 3301 and formed behind the back front left decorative body 3301. A unit base 3304 that supports the transparent inner lens 3303 formed along the surface of the back front left decorative body 3301, the decorative body cover 3302, and the inner lens 3303 and is attached to the back box 3010, and the unit It is provided between the base 3304 and the inner lens 3303 and is provided on the left side of the back front left main decorative board 3305 and the decorative body cover 3302 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted. A back front left sub-decorative board 3306 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted on the left side of the decorative body cover 3302; It has a sheet-like back front left back decoration sheet 3308 attached to the back surface of the unit base 3304 and having a predetermined character on the back surface, and a magnetic sensor 1030 attached to the unit base 3304. there is The magnetic sensor 1030 of the back front left effect unit 3300 is for detecting an illegal magnetism acting near the entrances of the lower warp passage 2512 and the upper warp passage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 .

The back front left decorative body 3301 has translucency. The back front left decorative body 3301 is made of polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact resistant polystyrene resin, polyvinyl chloride. A colored pattern consisting of a predetermined character is printed on a thermoplastic resin sheet by silk printing, offset printing, ink jet printing, etc., and is three-dimensionally formed by pressure molding or vacuum molding.

The decorative body cover 3302 has a groove 3302a formed along the contour of the character on the back front left decorative body 3301 on the rear surface. When the light from the plurality of LEDs of the back front left sub-decorative substrate 3306 is irradiated to the left side of the decorative body cover 3302 and enters the interior, the light guided inside is irregularly reflected forward or the like at the portion of the groove 3302a. , and the groove 3302a can be illuminated. As a result, the player can see a light emitting effect in which the contour portion of the predetermined character in the back front left decorative body 3301 emits light. This decorative body cover 3302 is thicker than the material (sheet) of the back front left decorative body 3301 and is formed by injection molding a transparent synthetic resin.

The inner lens 3303 is formed along the three-dimensional shape of the back front left decorative body 3301 with a predetermined thickness. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front left main decorative substrate 3305 provided at the rear can be refracted in an appropriate direction according to the shape thereof. It is possible to irradiate the back surface of the character with light having a density (shading) corresponding to the character. As a result, when the back front left decoration body 3301 is illuminated by the plurality of LEDs of the rear back front left main decoration substrate 3305, the inner lens 3303 emits shaded light. The three-dimensional effect of the pattern (character) of the decorative body 3301 can be further enhanced. In addition, it is possible to increase the gap in the appearance of the back front left decoration body 3301 depending on whether or not the LED of the back front left main decoration board 3305 emits light. The interest can be strongly attracted, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. The inner lens 3303 is formed by injection molding a transparent synthetic resin, like the decorative body cover 3302 .

The unit base 3304 has a flat rear surface and an opening 3304a penetrating in the front-rear direction. This opening 3304a is used to press the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 backward from the front with a finger or the like of an operator through the opening 3304a when peeling off the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 attached to the rear surface. , making it easy to peel off the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 without using a tool. In addition, the opening 3304a allows heat from the front-left main decorative substrate 3305 to escape rearward when the front-left rear decorative sheet 3308 is not attached due to the difference in model. The unit base 3304 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

The back front left main decorative board 3305 is composed of two boards, a first board 3305a and a second board 3305b. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of each of the first substrate 3305a and the second substrate 3305b. When a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front left main decoration substrate 3305 are caused to emit light, the back front left decoration body 3301 can be decorated with light emission through the inner lens 3303 .

The back front left sub-decorative substrate 3306 is composed of three substrates, an upper substrate 3306a, a middle substrate 3306b, and a lower substrate 3306c. A plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting rightward light are mounted on each of the upper substrate 3306a, middle substrate 3306b, and lower substrate 3306c. When a plurality of LEDs of the back front left sub-decorative substrate 3306 are illuminated, the groove 3302a of the decoration cover 3302 can be illuminated, and the outline of the character in the back front left decoration 3301 corresponding to the groove 3302a is illuminated. can be made

The back front left back decoration sheet 3308 has a pattern different from the back front left decoration body 3301 printed on the rear surface. In other words, the pattern of the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 is provided toward the rear, and is provided so as not to be visually recognized within the projection range of the back front left effect unit 3300 in a front view.

The back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308) of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, and the rear surface is separated forward by a predetermined distance near the left end of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It is located at the site (see FIGS. 145 and 197, etc.). Therefore, when viewed from the front, the pattern on the rear surface of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and appears (the reflected pattern 3310 is visible), but the effect is displayed. When a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen of the device 1600 and the display screen is bright, the reflection of the pattern is canceled by the brightness, and the reflected pattern 3310 is hardly seen. When the display screen of the production display device 1600 is darkened to some extent like blackout, the pattern on the rear surface of the front-back-left-back decoration sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen of the production display device 1600, and the reflection pattern 3310 becomes visible. (See Figure 197). As a result, during execution of the effect using the effect image by the effect display device 1600, by turning the display screen dark or intentionally darkening the display screen, the pattern on the rear surface of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 appears on the display screen. Since it is possible to show the player the effect in which the reflected pattern 3310 is reflected, the player can be surprised by the faintly visible reflected pattern 3310, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and there is something good. It is possible to make the player think that there is something happening, to increase the expectation for the game, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, since the pattern on the rear surface of the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 is different from the pattern on the back front left decoration body 3301, the following effect can be exhibited. More specifically, in a normal state in which an effect image is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, only the character (picture) with a predetermined facial expression on the back front left ornament 3301 is visible. A reflected pattern 3310 in which characters (pictures) with different facial expressions on the back front and left back decorative sheets 3308 are reflected on the display screen on the right side is not visible. When the display screen is darkened by blackout or the like, a character on the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 with an expression different from that of the back front left decoration 3301 is reflected on the right side of the back front left decoration 3301 to form a reflected pattern. Since 3310 can be seen, it is possible to present to the player an effect in which the character's back face can be seen, and the gap between the character's facial expressions can be enjoyed by the player. For example, if this effect is performed before a big win game is executed, the effect can strongly make the player think that it may be a "losing", and after that, a "big win" will occur. can surprise you and make you more interested.

Furthermore, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided behind the game panel 1100, the display screen (front) of the effect display device 1600 is illuminated from between the back front left effect unit 3300 and the effect display device 1600. When the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 can be sufficiently darkened, and the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 of the back front left effect unit 3300 can be made difficult to enter. to make it easier to reflect the pattern of the back, and to make the reflected pattern (reflected pattern 3310) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 easy to see from the player's side, and to surely exhibit the above-mentioned effects. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of

Further, as described above, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the reflected pattern 3310 of the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 of the back front left effect unit 3300 reflected on the display screen is faintly visible. By shortening the time for which the display screen is darkened, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the design of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen. In other words, some players can notice the reflective design 3310 of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen. As a result, the player notices that the pattern of the front-left-back decoration sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen, so that the player can be made to grin or startle, thereby making the player feel good. to entertain the player.

Furthermore, as described above, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the pattern of the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen, thereby realizing pachinko. Since the reflected pattern 3310 (decoration) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 can be seen from the front of the machine 1, the positional relationship between the effect display device 1600 and the back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308). Depending on the situation, it is difficult for the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the back front left rear decorative sheet 3308 reflected therefrom, so that the player seated in front of the adjacent pachinko machine or the pachinko machine can be made difficult to see. It is possible for a player near 1 to easily see the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the players can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 can be selected as the pachinko machine to be played. The pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided at a position away from the center of the effect display device 1600 to the left, only the right eye out of the left and right eyes of the player seated in front is reflected on the display screen. It is possible to make the pattern of the intricate back front left back decorative sheet 3308 invisible. As a result, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the pattern of the front-left-back decoration sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can only be seen with the right eye, so the pattern of the front-left-back decoration sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can be seen only with the right eye. can be shown in an uncertain state, the player can be presented with an illusionary effect, and the eerie feeling due to the effect can be amplified to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. can be made

In addition, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided near the front end of the back box 3000 and the effect display device 1600 is provided behind the back box 3000, the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308) and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be made as long as possible, the back front left back decoration sheet reflected on the display screen from the front of the pachinko machine 1 The pattern of 3308 can be made easy to see. Therefore, the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can be sufficiently entertained with the above-described effects, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. can.

In the above-described embodiment, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 shows the pattern of the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 in the back front left effect unit 3300 to be shown to the player in front. For example, a reflector made of a transparent sheet, a transparent plate, a magic mirror, or the like may be provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 . As a result, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened in the same manner as described above, the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 can be easily reflected on the reflector. It is possible to make it easier to achieve the effects described above. In this case, the reflector may be inclined or curved so that the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can easily see the back front left rear decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the reflector. .

Further, in the above embodiment, the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 is shown as it is on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, but this is the case. Alternatively, a light emitting means 3320 such as an LED capable of irradiating light from behind may be provided to the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300. Good (see Figure 197(b)). As a result, when the display screen of the production display device 1600 is darkened, the light emitting means 3320 is caused to emit light to brighten the front-left-back decorative sheet 3308, thereby making the front-left-back decorative sheet 3308 brighter than the display screen. Since it can be reflected, the front-back left-back decoration sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can be made more visible, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting the above-described effects can be provided. .

Note that when the liquid crystal display device 1600 is used as the effect display means as in the present embodiment, glossy liquid crystal is preferable to non-glare liquid crystal. By using glossy liquid crystal, it is possible to make the reflective pattern 3310 more visible, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily exhibit the above-described effects.

[5-10e. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181 and the like. The back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the front surface of the back rear effect unit 3600 and partly attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060 . The back right effect unit 3400 includes a unit base 3401 made of a vertically long metal plate, three back upper right decorations 3402 imitating lanterns attached to the unit base 3401, a back right middle decoration 3403, and a back right bottom. It has a decoration body 3404 and a back right drive motor 3405 for moving the back upper right decoration body 3402, the back right middle decoration body 3403, and the back lower right decoration body 3404 attached near the upper end of the unit base 3401. are doing.

The unit base 3401 has a flange portion 3401a extending forward at the center portion in the vertical direction of the right side and then bent rightward at the tip. The unit base 3401 has its upper end and lower end attached to the front surface of the back effecting unit 3600 , and the flange portion 3401 a is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060 .

The back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back lower right decorative body 3404 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, are three-dimensionally formed to imitate a lantern, and are the same size. is formed in The back-right center decoration 3403 is composed of two back-right-center-left decorations 3403a and back-right-center-right decorations 3403b with the center in the left-right direction as a boundary. A plurality of front LEDs are mounted behind each of the back upper right decoration 3402, the back right center left decoration 3403a, the back right middle right decoration 3403b, and the back right middle decoration 3404. A decorative substrate is provided.

Although not shown in detail, the back right effect unit 3400 has an upper right arm that is supported at its lower end near the center of the unit base 3401 in the vertical direction so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction and that extends upward. an upper connecting base which is supported at the upper end of the upper right arm so as to be rotatable about the longitudinal axis; and an upper end of the upper connecting base located to the left of the upper end of the upper right arm, the upper end of which rotates about the longitudinal axis. an upper left arm that is rotatably supported by the upper arm and extends downward; an arm, a lower connection base supported at the lower end of the lower right arm so as to be rotatable about a longitudinal axis, and a portion of the lower connection base to the left of the lower end of the lower right arm, the lower end of which is the longitudinal axis A lower left arm that is rotatably supported around and extends upward, and a lower end of the upper left arm and a lower end of the lower left arm are vertically separated from each other, and each is rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction. and a middle connecting base pivotally supporting the body.

The upper right arm has an upper right lower gear provided at the lower end and an upper right gear provided at the upper end. The upper left arm has an upper left gear provided at the upper end and meshing with the upper right gear of the upper right arm, and an upper left lower gear provided at the lower end. The lower right arm has a lower right gear provided at its upper end and meshing with the upper right gear of the upper right arm, and a lower right gear provided at its lower end. The lower left arm has a lower left lower gear provided at the lower end and meshing with the lower right gear of the lower right arm, and a lower left gear provided at the upper end and meshing with the upper left lower gear of the upper left arm. and have Thus, the unit base 3401, the upper right arm, the upper left arm, the lower right arm, the lower left arm, the upper connection base, the lower connection base, and the middle connection base form a pantograph-like link.

The back upper right decorative body 3402 is attached to the front surface of the upper connecting base, and the back lower right decorative body 3404 is attached to the front surface of the lower connecting base. The back right middle left decoration 3403a of the back right middle decoration 3403 is attached to the front surface of the middle connecting base, and the back right middle right decoration 3403b covers the upper right gear and the lower right gear from the front. It is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3401 .

In the normal state of the back right effect unit 3400, in front of the unit base 3401, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a and the back right middle right decorative body 3403b are in contact with each other. The middle right decorative body 3403 and the lower right back decorative body 3404 are aligned vertically in a straight line.

In the back right effect unit 3400, when the back right driving motor 3405 rotates the upper end side of the lower right arm clockwise in a front view from the normal state, the middle connecting base moves leftward and moves upward. The connecting base and the lower connecting base move leftward and vertically so as to approach each other. As a result, the back-right-center-left decoration 3403a of the back-right-middle decoration 3403 moves leftward away from the back-right-center-right decoration 3403b, and the back-upper-right decoration 3402 is shorter than the back-right-center-left decoration 3403a. As it moves leftward, it moves slightly downward, and the back lower right decorative body 3404 moves leftward and slightly upward like the back right upper decorative body 3402 .

In this state, the upper right arm, the upper left arm, the lower right arm, and the lower left arm take the form of a rhombus with each side forming a rhombus. A body 3404 is positioned, and a back-right-center-left decorative body 3403a and a back-right-center-right decorative body 3403b are positioned at the left and right vertices of the rhombus. As a result, the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 are brought into a state of appearing positions approaching the center side of the game area 5a (effect display device 1600) (FIG. 198). ).

According to this back right effect unit 3400, when the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back lower right decorative body 3404 are moved from the normal retracted position to the appearing position, these decorative bodies are moved to the vicinity of the center. Move (appear) to At this time, the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back right lower decorative body 3404, which were arranged in a straight line in the vertical direction, are replaced by the back right middle decorative body 3403 and the back right middle left decorative body 3403a. and the back right middle right decoration 3403b. Since it transforms into a form placed at the top of the decoration, it can surprise the player, attract the player's attention to the decoration, and at the same time, the appearance of the decoration can bring about something good. It is possible to make the player think that the player is not interested in the game, thereby raising expectations for the game and suppressing a decline in interest.

[5-10f. Back left production unit]
Next, the back-left effect unit 3500 of the back-side effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 180 to 181 and the like. The back-left effect unit 3500 is attached near the upper part of the left side of the frame-shaped unit base 3601 of the back-back effect unit 3600 . The rear-left effect unit 3500 is attached to a back-left decorative body 3501 having translucency imitating the cutting edge of a machete and a frame-shaped unit base 3601 of the rear-back effect unit 3600, and the rear-left decorative body 3501 is attached to the unit base 3601. It has a back rear left base 3502 that supports it, and a back rear left driving motor 3503 attached to the back rear left base 3502 and for moving the back rear left decorative body 3501 .

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back rear left effect unit 3500 has a rotation base attached to the back rear left base so that the base end side can rotate about an axis in the front-rear direction, and the rotation base. a link arm having a proximal end attached to a rotating base at different positions so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction and a distal end attached to the rotating base so as to be slidable in the longitudinal direction; It is slidably attached to the rotation base so as to protrude outward from the tip of the rotation base by sliding the tip, and the back rear left decoration on the tip is the second shaft parallel to the rotation surface of the rotation base. A slide base attached rotatably about the surroundings, a base end side attached to the rotation base rotatably about an axis parallel to the second axis, and a tip side attached to the back rear left ornament 3501 It has an inclined arm rotatably mounted around an axis parallel to the second axis, and a return spring urging the back rear left decorative body 3501 in a direction to approach the rotation base. .

The rotation base is bent in a V-shape, and the base end side thereof is rotated by a rear rear left driving motor 3503 . The rotating base has a bending slit bent in a V-shape along its shape. A tip side of the link arm is slidably inserted into the bending slit.
The slide base has a straight slit extending parallel to the straight portion of the bending slit near the proximal end. The tip side of the link arm is slidably inserted into the linear slit. The slide base attaches the end (near the right end in front view) of the back rear left decoration body 3501 imitating the cutting edge of a hatchet on the opposite side to the cutting edge so as to be rotatable around the second axis. The inclined arm is provided so that the distal end side extends in a direction away from the distal end of the slide base with the proximal end side in between, and extends toward the proximal end side of the rotating arm. The return spring is a coil spring, and the base end side is attached to the base end side of the portion of the rotating arm where the tilt arm is rotatably attached, and the tip end side extends to the tip side of the rotating arm. It is attached to the rear left decoration body 3501 on the rear side.

In a normal state, the back left effect unit 3500 is positioned so that the rotation base extends upward, and the back rear left decorative body 3501 attached to the tip side of the rotation base is attached to the back left decoration. The cutting edge is pointing downwards. In this normal state (retracted position state), the back left decoration 3501 is the back front left decoration 3301 of the back front left effect unit 3300 and the back rear top decoration 3650 of the back rear effect unit 3600 at the retracted position. , and is invisible from the front. In addition, the front surface of the back rear left decorative body 3501 is parallel to the display screen of the effect display device 1600 .

In a normal state, when the back left drive motor 3503 rotates the rotating base clockwise around the proximal side, the back left ornament 3501 on the tip side moves rightward and downward. Rotate so that Further, by rotating the rotating base in the clockwise direction, the tip of the link arm slides toward the tip side of the bending slit and the linear slit to the bent portion of the bending slit. In this state (the state of the first appearance position), substantially the entire rear left decorative body 3501 is positioned to the right of the left front rear decorative body 3301 and below the upper rear rear decorative body 3650 and is visible to the player. However, part of the simulated cutting edge is located behind the back front left decoration 3301 and below the back rear upper decoration 3650, and the overall shape is unclear. (see Figure 199). In other words, it is difficult to recognize that the back rear left decoration 3501 is the cutting edge of the hatchet. Even in this state of the first appearance position, the back left decoration 3501 has a front surface parallel to the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and is positioned behind the back top decoration 3650 as a whole.

When the rotation base is further rotated clockwise, the tip of the link arm enters the bent tip side of the bending slit. Since the straight slit is not bent, the tip of the link arm presses the slide base through the straight slit in the direction in which the bent tip side of the bent slit extends. As a result, the slide base slides with respect to the rotation base so that its tip protrudes outward.

When this slide base moves so as to protrude outward from the tip of the rotating base, since the back rear left decorative body 3501 is attached to the slide base so as to be rotatable around the second axis, it moves together with the slide base. The back rear left decorative body 3501 moves outward (to the right in this case) from the tip of the rotating base. At this time, since the back left ornament 3501 is connected to the rotating base by the inclined arm, when the back left ornament 3501 moves rightward together with the slide base, the back left ornament 3501 moves to the right. Since the right end side (second axis) of the body 3501 moves away from the base end side of the tilting arm, the tip side of the tilting arm and the left end side of the back rear left decorative body 3501 move forward against the biasing force of the return spring. , the rear left decorative body 3501 rotates about the second axis. As a result, the left end side of the back rear left decoration 3501 protrudes forward to substantially the same position as the back front left decoration 3301 ahead of the back rear upper decoration 3650, and the whole thereof is visible from the player side. It will be in the state of the second appearance position (see Figure 200).

In this state of the second appearance position, the front surface of the rear left ornament 3501 is slanted with respect to the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the cutting edge of the machete that the rear left ornament 3501 imitates is slanted. .

According to the rear left effect unit 3500, the rear left decorative body 3501, which is invisible in a normal state, becomes visible in two stages. The player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained. Then, when it moves to the second appearance position, the back left ornament 3501 that has moved (rotated) in parallel with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 moves forward so that the tip (left end) of its cutting edge protrudes forward. Because it moves, it is possible to show the player a moving effect that has never been seen before in a pachinko machine, and it can give a strong impact to the player, and at the same time, it is thought that something good will happen. It is possible to make the player think strongly, heighten expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest.

[5-10 g. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 185 to 196 and the like. FIG. 185 is a front view of a back effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 186(a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 186(b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit seen from the back. Fig. 187 is an exploded perspective view showing the unit base side, the upper rear decoration body and the lower rear decoration body in the rear rear effect unit from the front, and Fig. 188 is an exploded perspective view showing the unit base side and the rear rear production unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing the rear upper decoration body and the rear lower decoration body from behind. FIG. 189(a) is an exploded perspective view of the locking mechanism of the back upper decoration in the back rear effect unit and viewed from the front. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from above; FIG. FIG. 190(a) is a perspective view of the lock mechanism in the locked position of the back upper decoration, and (b) is a perspective view of the lock mechanism in the unlocked position of the back upper decoration. It is an explanatory diagram shown in .

FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear lower decoration of the back-back effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a diagram.
FIG. 193 is an explanatory diagram showing the routing of wiring on the rear surface of the back-back lower decorative body of the back-back effect unit. Fig. 194 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the first rotary decoration in the back rear lower decoration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded view of the first rotary decoration in the back rear lower decoration. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 195 is a front view of the back-back effect unit shown in a state in which the back-back upper decorative body is moved to the drop position. FIG. 196 is a front view of the back-back effect unit showing a state in which the back-upper decorative body and the back-back lower decorative body are moved to the center position.

The back effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end inside the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050 . The rear back effect unit 3600 includes a square frame-shaped unit base 3601 slightly smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the back box 3010, and a pair of vertically elongated columnar units provided near the left and right ends in front of the unit base 3601. A guide shaft 3602, a back upper decoration 3650 whose left and right ends are supported by a pair of guide shafts 3602 so that they can be raised and lowered respectively, and a pair of guide shafts 3602 below the back upper decoration 3650 that raises and lowers both left and right ends. and a back and bottom ornament 3700 that is releasably supported.

In addition, the back rear effect unit 3600 has a lock groove 3603 in which the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is engaged near the right end of the upper side of the square frame-shaped unit base 3601. have. The lock groove 3603 has a quadrangular shape when viewed from the front and is recessed rearward from the front surface. The lock groove 3603 is provided to the left of the right guide shaft 3602 (right side of the unit base 3601). Furthermore, the back effect unit 3600 has a vibration sensor 1040 for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 . The vibration sensor 1040 is provided on the upper side of the unit base 3601 at a portion to the right of the center in the left-right direction.

Further, the back effect unit 3600 has a rotation slit 3604 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending long in the left-right direction near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side of the rectangular frame-shaped unit base 3601 . The other end side of the unit arm 3788 of the back/rear lower decorative body 3700 to be described later is slidably inserted into the rotation slit 3604 .

In addition, the back rear effect unit 3600 is provided on the right end side of the unit base 3601 and is provided with a right lifting mechanism 3610 for lifting and lowering the back rear upper decorative body 3650, and is provided on the left end side of the unit base 3601. and a left elevating mechanism 3630 for elevating the lower decorative body 3700 .

The right elevating mechanism 3610 includes a right spiral shaft 3611 extending vertically over substantially the entire height of the unit base 3601 and formed with a spiral groove, and a right spiral shaft 3611 screwed to the right spiral shaft 3611 . a right elevation slider 3612 that moves up and down by the rotation of the unit base 3601; a rear bottom right drive motor 3613 that is provided at the bottom right corner of the unit base 3601 and rotates the right spiral shaft 3611 around its axis; an auxiliary upper slider 3614 provided slidably within a predetermined range in the vertical direction; an auxiliary lower slider 3615 provided slidably in the vertical direction by the unit base 3601 below the auxiliary upper slider 3614; The upper and lower ends of the slider 3614 and the auxiliary lower slider 3615 are engaged with the auxiliary spring 3616 that biases the auxiliary upper slider 3614 and the auxiliary lower slider 3615 in the direction of approaching each other, and the unit base 3601 is vertically separated from the unit base 3601. A right elevation first sensor 3617 and a right elevation second sensor 3618 are provided to detect the elevation position of the right elevation slider 3612 .

The right elevating slider 3612 of the right elevating mechanism 3610 can contact the right slide support portion 3652c of the decoration base 3652 of the back upper decoration 3650 from below, and can contact the auxiliary lower slider 3615 from above. is accessible. The right elevating slider 3612 can move (elevate) the rear upper decorative body 3650 in the vertical direction. The auxiliary upper slider 3614 can abut against the right slide support portion 3652c of the back upper decoration 3650 from above. The auxiliary lower slider 3615 can contact the lower end of the auxiliary upper slider 3614 and can contact the right slide support portion 3652c of the back upper decoration 3650 from below. The auxiliary lower slider 3615 is provided so as to be movable below the lower moving end of the right slide support portion 3652c of the back upper decoration 3650 . The auxiliary spring 3616 can urge the right sliding support portion 3652c of the back upper decoration 3650 downward via the auxiliary upper slider 3614, and the right slide of the back upper decoration 3650 via the auxiliary lower slider 3615. The support portion 3652c can be biased upward.

The right elevation first sensor 3617 of the right elevation mechanism 3610 is for detecting that the back rear upper decoration 3650 has moved to the retracted position via the right elevation slider 3612, and the right elevation second sensor 3618 is This is for detecting that the rear upper decorative body 3650 has moved to the central position via the right elevating slider 3612 .

The left elevating mechanism 3630 includes a left spiral shaft 3631 extending vertically from the vicinity of the lower end of the unit base 3601 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction and having a spiral groove formed thereon,
A left lifting slider 3632 that is screwed to the left spiral shaft 3631 and moves up and down by the rotation of the left spiral shaft 3631, and a rear rear that is provided at the lower left corner of the unit base 3601 and rotates the left spiral shaft 3631 around its axis. A lower left drive motor 3633, a left elevation sensor 3634 provided on the unit base 3601 for detecting the elevation position of the left elevation slider 3632, and a left spiral shaft 3631 provided on the unit base 3601 extending vertically along the left spiral shaft 3631. and a left rack gear 3635.

The left lifting slider 3632 of the left lifting mechanism 3630 has the rear surface of the left slide base 3761 of the left unit 3760 of the rear lower decoration 3700 attached to its front surface. The left elevating slider 3632 can move (elevate) the back rear lower decoration body 3700 in the vertical direction. The left elevating sensor 3634 is for detecting that the back rear lower decoration body 3700 has moved to the retracted position via the left elevating slider 3632 . The left rack gear 3635 is provided with the tip of its gear teeth directed rightward, and the pinion gear 3768 of the left unit 3760 in the rear lower decoration body 3700 meshes. The left rack gear 3635 can rotate the first rotating decorative body 3710 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 via the pinion gear 3768 .

[5-10g-1. Back back upper decoration]
Next, the back-back upper decorative body 3650 of the back-back effect unit 3600 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190 and the like. The back-upper decoration 3650 of the back-back effect unit 3600 is supported above the back-back lower decoration 3700 by a pair of guide shafts 3602 so as to be vertically movable. In addition, the rear upper decorative body 3650 can be vertically moved by a right elevating mechanism 3610 . By moving (falling) downward, the back upper decoration 3650 can be combined with the back lower decoration 3700 to form one large decoration.

The rear upper decorative body 3650 includes a rear upper decorative lens 3651 extending in the left-right direction, a decorative body base 3652 attached to the rear side of the rear upper decorative lens 3651, and a rear upper decorative lens 3651. A rear upper decoration substrate 3653 provided between the decoration body base 3652 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs, and a rear upper decoration substrate 3653 provided between the rear upper decorative lens 3651 and the rear upper decoration substrate 3653. A transparent plate-shaped diffuser lens (not shown) that diffuses the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear upper decorative substrate 3653 and irradiates it forward, and is provided on the rear surface of the decoration base 3652. and a locking mechanism 3660 .

The rear upper decorative lens 3651 extends in the left-right direction with a length slightly shorter than the interval between the pair of guide shafts 3602, and has translucency. The back rear upper decorative lens 3651 is formed in a shape that imitates a machete, and a predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the game board 5 is provided in relief.

The decorative body base 3652 includes a transparent plate-like base body 3652a that covers the rear side of the rear upper decorative lens 3651 and whose lower edge extends below the rear upper decorative lens 3651, and both left and right ends of the base main body 3652a. It has a left slide support portion 3652b and a right slide support portion 3652c that protrude outward in the horizontal direction from the rear upper decorative lens 3651 and into which the guide shaft 3602 is slidably inserted. The right slide support portion 3652c of the decoration base 3652 can be contacted by the auxiliary upper slider 3614 from above and can be contacted by the right elevating slider 3612 from below.

The decorative body base 3652 includes a receiving portion 3652d extending rearward in a flat plate shape from a portion of a predetermined length in the left-right direction near the center of the lower edge in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 3652e connecting to the rear surface, and a lock mechanism attachment portion 3652f provided adjacent to the right slide support portion 3652c on the rear surface and to which the lock mechanism 3660 is attached. The receiving portion 3652d abuts on a shock absorbing portion 3781f provided on the upper surface of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 of the back lower decoration 3700 when the back upper decoration 3650 falls from the retracted position.

In addition, the decoration base 3652 has a plurality of light guide openings 3652g which pass through the base body 3652a in the front and rear direction and into which the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear upper decoration substrate 3653 are inserted. . The light guide port 3652g has an arcuate inner surface on the side closer to the outer edge of the base body 3652a in the inner peripheral surface. The light guide port 3652g is formed so that light is emitted from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the rear upper decoration substrate 3653 to the arcuate inner peripheral surface when the rear upper decoration body 3650 is assembled. light enters the base body 3652a from the inner peripheral surface. The light that has entered the base body 3652a is reflected forward at the outer edge of the base body 3652a and emitted forward from the front surface of the base body 3652a. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear upper decorative substrate 3653 emit light, the outer peripheral edge of the rear upper decorative body 3650 (back upper decorative lens 3651) can be illuminated.

Furthermore, the decoration base 3652 has a plurality of openings 3652h that penetrate the base body 3652a in the front-rear direction. The plurality of openings 3652h are arranged in rows in the horizontal direction near the center of the decoration base 3652 in the vertical direction. The opening 3652h is formed in a rectangular shape larger than the light guide port 3652g, and can release heat from the rear upper decoration substrate 3653 to the rear.

A plurality of side-view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the rear upper decorative substrate 3653 . The rear upper decorative substrate 3653 has white solder resist applied to the front and rear surfaces thereof, and the name of the element and the identification number of the substrate are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, the rear upper decorative lens 3651 can be decorated brighter by reflecting light, and the rear upper decorative substrate 3653 is difficult to see from the front. The diffuser lens consists of a plurality of light guide openings into which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the rear upper decorative substrate 3653, and a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped diffusion portions formed over substantially the entire rear surface. and have
When light enters the interior from the inner peripheral surface of the light guide port, this diffuser lens can diffusely reflect the light by the plurality of diffusion parts and radiate it forward from the front. The lens 3651 can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

The lock mechanism 3660 of the rear upper ornamental body 3650 includes a lock latch 3661 provided so as to be able to move back and forth in the lock mechanism mounting portion 3652f of the ornamental body base 3652, and a lock spring biasing the lock latch 3661 rearward. 3662, a lock release solenoid 3663 attached to the lock mechanism attachment portion 3652f of the decorative body base 3652 and for releasing the lock by the lock latch 3661 against the biasing force of the lock spring 3662, and the lock release solenoid 3663 from behind. The rear cover 3664 is attached to the lock mechanism attachment portion 3652f of the decorative body base 3652 so as to cover it. It has a lock link 3665 in contact therewith, and a plunger head 3666 attached to the tip of a plunger 3663a of an unlocking solenoid 3663 and rotating the lock link 3665 by advancing and retreating the plunger 3663a.

A lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 is provided adjacent to the left side of the right slide support portion 3652c. The lock latch 3661 has a body portion 3661a extending vertically, and an upper locking claw 3661b and a lower locking claw 3661c extending rearward from both upper and lower ends of the body portion 3661a. The lock latch 3661 is inclined so that the upper surface of the upper lock claw 3661b becomes lower toward the rear, and the lower surface of the lower lock claw 3661c becomes higher toward the rear. The upper lock claw 3661b can be inserted into the lock groove 3603 of the unit base 3601, and the lower lock claw 3661c can be inserted into the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 of the rear lower decoration 3700. It is

The lock release solenoid 3663 is provided to the left of the lock latch 3661 so that a retractable plunger 3663a projects rightward (toward the lock latch 3661). The lock link 3665 has a shaft portion 3665a supported by the rear cover 3664 so as to be rotatable around a vertical axis, and extends forward from the shaft portion 3665a, and the tip thereof is slidably connected to the plunger head 3666. It has a transmission portion 3665b and a pressing portion 3665c extending rightward from the shaft portion 3665a and capable of coming into contact with the rear surface of the body portion 3661a of the lock latch 3661 . The lock link 3665 is L-shaped in plan view.

In the lock mechanism 3660, when the lock release solenoid 3663 is not energized in a normal state, a plunger 3663a that advances and retreats so as to protrude to the right of the lock release solenoid 3663 protrudes to the rightward movement end. In this state, the transmission portion 3665b of the lock link 3665 extends longitudinally through the plunger head 3666 attached to the tip of the plunger 3663a, and the pressing portion 3665c extends laterally.
The pressing portion 3665c of the lock link 3665 is in contact with the body portion 3661a of the lock latch 3661 from the front due to the biasing force of the lock spring 3662 . As a result, the upper lock claw 3661b and the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 protrude rearward and are in a lockable state (see FIG. 190(a)).

In the lockable state, when the unit base 3601 abuts the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 from above, the upper lock claw 3661b is pushed forward by the inclined upper surface of the unit base 3601, thereby locking. The latch 3661 moves forward against the biasing force of the lock spring 3662 . Then, when the upper lock claw 3661b reaches the lock groove 3603 of the unit base 3601, the forward pressure is released and the lock latch 3661 is moved backward by the biasing force of the lock spring 3662. FIG. As a result, the upper lock claw 3661b is inserted into the lock groove 3603, and downward movement of the upper lock claw 3661b (back upper decoration 3650) is restricted.

In the lockable state, on the other hand, when the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 contacts the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 relatively from below, the inclined lower surface The lower lock claw 3661c is pushed forward, and the lock latch 3661 moves forward against the biasing force of the lock spring 3662. As shown in FIG. Then, when the lower lock claw 3661c reaches the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the back rear lower decoration 3700, the forward pressure is released and the lock latch 3661 is moved rearward by the biasing force of the lock spring 3662. do. As a result, the lower lock claw 3661c is inserted into the lock groove 3781e, and the upward movement of the lower lock claw 3661c (the upper rear decoration 3650) from the rear lower decoration 3700 is restricted. .

In this state, when the unlocking solenoid 3663 is energized, the plunger 3663a moves leftward so as to retract, and the plunger head 3666 attached to the tip of the plunger 3663a moves leftward. When the plunger head 3666 moves to the left, the lock link 3665 rotates clockwise around the shaft portion 3665a via the transmission portion 3665b connected to the plunger head 3666. . When the lock link 3665 rotates clockwise, the tip of the pressing portion 3665c of the lock link 3665 rotates to move forward. 3661 moves forward against the biasing force of the lock spring 3662 . As a result, the upper lock claw 3661b and the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 are retracted (retracted) forward, and the lock is released (see FIG. 190(b)). In this unlocked state, the upper lock claw 3661b and the lower lock claw 3661c are separated forward from the lock groove 3603 of the unit base 3601 and the lock groove 3781e of the back rear lower decoration 3700. The back upper decorative body 3650 becomes movable in the vertical direction relative to the lock groove 3603 and the lock groove 3781e.

Since the back upper decoration 3650 is provided with a lock mechanism 3660 having an unlocking solenoid 3663, the back upper decoration 3650 is correspondingly heavier. As a result, when the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is dropped from the retracted position, the player can be shown a heavy falling performance (movable performance), and a strong impact can be given to the player.

[5-10g-2. Back rear lower decoration]
Next, the back-back lower decorative body 3700 in the back-back effect unit 3600 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 191 to 194 and the like. The back-back lower decoration 3700 of the back-back effect unit 3600 is supported below the back-back upper decoration 3650 by a pair of guide shafts 3602 so as to be vertically movable. In addition, the back rear lower decoration body 3700 can be vertically moved by a left elevating mechanism 3630 . The lower rear decoration body 3700 can receive the upper rear decoration body 3650 that has fallen from above, and can combine with the upper rear decoration body 3650 that has fallen to form one large decoration body. It is possible.

The back and bottom decorations 3700 are provided rotatably about an axis in the front-rear direction. Left and right provided behind the rotary decoration 3730, the fourth rotary decoration 3740, the first rotary decoration 3710, the second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration 3730, and the fourth rotary decoration 3740 and a long rear decoration 3750 .

In addition, the back rear lower decoration 3700 supports the first rotary decoration 3710, and the left unit 3760 moves vertically along the left guide shaft 3602 by the left lifting mechanism 3630, and the second rotary decoration 3720. , a third rotary decoration 3730, a fourth rotary decoration 3740, and a rear decoration 3750. A right unit 3780, a left unit 3760, and a right unit 3760 are vertically movable along a right guide shaft 3602. and a connecting guide 3790 connecting with the unit 3780 .

The first rotating decorative body 3710 of the back rear lower decorative body 3700 includes a translucent first decorative lens 3711 that imitates a predetermined character (for example, the character of “miserable”), and the rear side of the first decorative lens 3711. a first base 3712 attached to the first decorative lens 3711 and the first base 3712; Provided between the lens 3711 and the first rotary decorative body decoration substrate 3713, a transparent flat plate-shaped light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first rotary decorative body decoration substrate 3713 is diffused forward and irradiated. and a diffusing lens (not shown).

The first base 3712 of the first rotating decorative body 3710 has a cylindrical axial tube portion 3712a protruding rearward. The shaft tube portion 3712a is inserted into the shaft support portion 3761c of the left slide base 3761 of the left unit 3760, and is rotatably supported around the longitudinal axis. A first decoration gear 3762 of the left unit 3760 is attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3712a. A wiring EC is connected to the first rotary ornament decoration substrate 3713 from behind through the inside of the shaft tube portion 3712a. The shaft tube portion 3712a of the first base 3712 is provided substantially in the center of the character "severe" on the first decorative lens 3711. As shown in FIG.

A plurality of side-view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the first rotary ornament decoration board 3713 . The surface of the first rotary ornament decoration board 3713 is applied with a white solder resist, and the name of the element and the identification number of the board are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, the first decorative lens 3711 can be decorated brighter by reflecting light, and the first rotary decorative body decoration substrate 3713 is difficult to see from the front. The diffuser lens has a plurality of light guide openings into which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first rotary ornament decoration substrate 3713 are inserted, and a plurality of quadrangular pyramid shaped lenses formed over substantially the entire rear surface. and a diffusing portion. When light is incident on the interior from the inner peripheral surface of the light guide port, this diffuser lens can diffusely reflect the light by the plurality of diffusers and radiate forward from the front surface. 3711 can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

The second rotating decorative body 3720 includes a translucent second decorative lens 3721 imitating a predetermined character (for example, the character “drama”), and a second decorative lens 3721 attached to the rear side of the second decorative lens 3721. A base 3722, a second rotary decorative body decoration substrate 3723 provided between the second decorative lens 3721 and the second base 3722 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon, the second decorative lens 3721 and the second rotary decoration A transparent plate-shaped diffuser lens (not shown) that is provided between the body decoration board 3723 and diffuses forward the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the second rotary decoration body decoration board 3723 for irradiation. and have

The second base 3722 of the second rotating decorative body 3720 has a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3722a that protrudes long rearward. The shaft tube portion 3722a penetrates the rear decoration 3750 and is inserted into the left side shaft support tube 3781d of the three shaft support tubes 3781d of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780, so that it rotates around the longitudinal axis. It is rotatably supported. A second decoration gear 3784 of the right unit 3780 is attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3722a. A wiring EC is connected to the second rotary ornament decoration substrate 3723 from the rear through the inside of the shaft tube portion 3722a. The shaft tube portion 3722a of the second base 3722 is provided below the center of the characters “drama” on the second decorative lens 3721 .

A plurality of side-view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the second rotary ornament decoration board 3723 . The surface of the second rotary ornament decoration board 3723 is applied with white solder resist, and the name of the element and the identification number of the board are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, the second decorative lens 3721 can be decorated brighter by reflecting light, and the second rotary decorative body decorative substrate 3723 is difficult to see from the front. The diffuser lens has a plurality of light guide openings into which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the second rotary decorative body decoration substrate 3723 are inserted, and a plurality of quadrangular pyramid shaped lenses formed over substantially the entire rear surface. and a diffusing portion. When light is incident on the interior from the inner peripheral surface of the light guide port, the diffuser lens diffusely reflects the light by the plurality of diffusers and radiates the light forward from the front surface. 3721 can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

The third rotating decorative body 3730 includes a translucent third decorative lens 3731 that imitates a predetermined character (for example, the character “回”) and a third decorative lens 3731 attached to the rear side of the third decorative lens 3731. A base 3732, a third rotary decorative body decoration substrate 3733 provided between the third decorative lens 3731 and the third base 3732 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon, the third decorative lens 3731 and the third rotary decoration A transparent plate-like diffuser lens (not shown) that is provided between the body decoration board 3733 and diffuses and irradiates the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the third rotary decoration body decoration board 3733 forward. and have

The third base 3732 of the third rotating decorative body 3730 has a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3732a protruding rearward. The shaft tube portion 3732a penetrates the rear decoration 3750 and is inserted into the central shaft support tube 3781d of the three shaft support tubes 3781d of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780, thereby rotating around the longitudinal axis. It is rotatably supported. A third decoration gear 3785 of the right unit 3780 is attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3732a. A wiring EC is connected to the third rotary ornament decoration substrate 3733 from the rear through the inside of the shaft tube portion 3732a. The shaft tube portion 3732a of the third base 3732 is provided below the center of the letter "turn" on the third decorative lens 3731. As shown in FIG.

A plurality of side-view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the third rotary ornament decoration board 3733 . The surface of the third rotary ornament decoration board 3733 is applied with white solder resist, and the name of the element and the identification number of the board are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, the third decorative lens 3731 can be decorated brighter by reflecting light, and the third rotary decorative body decorative substrate 3733 is difficult to see from the front. The diffuser lens has a plurality of light guide openings into which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the third rotary decorative body decoration substrate 3733 are inserted, and a plurality of light guide openings formed over substantially the entire rear surface. and a quadrangular pyramid-shaped diffusing portion. When light is incident on the interior from the inner peripheral surface of the light guide port, the diffuser lens diffusely reflects the light by the plurality of diffusers and radiates the light forward from the front surface. 3731 can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

The fourth rotating decorative body 3740 includes a translucent fourth decorative lens 3741 imitating a predetermined character (for example, the character “avoid”) and a fourth decorative lens 3741 attached to the rear side of the fourth decorative lens 3741 . A base 3742, a fourth rotary decorative body decoration substrate 3743 provided between the fourth decorative lens 3741 and the fourth base 3742 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon, the fourth decorative lens 3741 and the fourth rotary decoration A transparent plate-shaped diffuser lens (not shown) that is provided between the body decoration board 3743 and diffuses and irradiates the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the fourth rotary decoration body decoration board 3743 forward. and have

The fourth base 3742 of the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 has a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3742a protruding rearward. The shaft tube portion 3742a passes through the rear decoration 3750 and is inserted into the right shaft support tube 3781d of the three shaft support tubes 3781d of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780, thereby rotating around the longitudinal axis. It is rotatably supported. A fourth decoration gear 3786 of the right unit 3780 is attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3732a. A wiring EC is connected to the fourth rotary ornament decoration substrate 3743 from the rear through the inside of the shaft tube portion 3732a. The shaft tube portion 3742a of the fourth base 3742 is provided below the center of the letter "Avoid" on the fourth decorative lens 3741. As shown in FIG.

A plurality of side-view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the fourth rotary ornament decoration board 3743 . The surface of the fourth rotary ornament decoration substrate 3743 is applied with a white solder resist, and the name of the element and the identification number of the substrate are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, the fourth decorative lens 3741 can be decorated brighter by reflecting light, and the fourth rotary decorative body decorative substrate 3743 is difficult to see from the front. The diffuser lens has a plurality of light guide openings into which a plurality of LEDs are inserted mounted on the front surface of the fourth rotary decorative body decoration substrate 3743, and a plurality of light guide openings formed over substantially the entire rear surface. and a quadrangular pyramid-shaped diffusing portion. When light enters the inside from the inner peripheral surface of the light guide port, this diffuser lens can diffusely reflect the light by the plurality of diffusion parts and radiate it forward from the front surface. 3741 can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

The rear decorative body 3750 has three circular passage openings 3750a penetrating in the front-rear direction at intervals in the left-right direction. A shaft support cylinder 3781d of a right slide base 3781 in a right unit 3780, which will be described later, is inserted from behind into these passage openings 3750a. The rear decorative body 3750 includes a rear decorative lens 3751 extending in the horizontal direction, a rear base 3752 attached to the rear side of the rear decorative lens 3751, and provided between the rear decorative lens 3751 and the rear base 3752. and a rear decoration decoration board 3753 having a rear surface on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

A rear decorative lens 3751 (rear decorative body 3750) of the rear decorative body 3750 is formed in a shape imitating a hatchet that is long in the left and right direction. The rear decorative lens 3751 has substantially the same length in the horizontal direction as the rear upper decorative lens 3651 of the rear upper decorative body 3650, and the shape of the upper edge conforms to the shape of the lower edge of the rear upper decorative lens 3651. is formed as As a result, when the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear lower decorative body 3700 are combined, a slight gap is formed between the rear upper decorative lens 3651 and the rear decorative lens 3751, and the rear upper decorative body is formed. The lens 3651 and the rear decorative lens 3751 can form one large hatchet decoration.

The rear base 3752 is formed to have the same size as the rear decorative lens 3751 . The rear base 3752 has a plurality of light guide openings through which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative body decoration board 3753 are inserted, and a lower front surface lower than the plurality of light guide openings. and a plurality of diffusing portions recessed in a quadrangular pyramid shape within a predetermined range above the edge. A plurality of light guide openings are provided in two rows vertically with a horizontal line passing above the center of the rear base 3752 in the vertical direction between them. The peripheral surfaces, and in the lower row the inner peripheral surface near the lower edge, are each formed in the shape of a circular arc. This light guide port is formed so that light is emitted from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative body decoration substrate 3753 to the arc-shaped inner peripheral surface, and the light is emitted from the inner peripheral surface to the rear base 3752. is injected into the The light incident on the rear base 3752 is forwardly reflected by the upper edge of the rear base 3752 and the plurality of diffusers and emitted forward from the front surface of the rear base 3752 . As a result, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear decorative body decoration substrate 3753 are caused to emit light, the upper edge and the lower edge of the rear decorative body 3750 (rear decorative lens 3751) and a predetermined width range upward from the light emitting decoration. can be made

A plurality of side-view type full-color LEDs are mounted on the rear surface of the rear decoration decoration board 3753 . A white solder resist is applied to the surface of the post-decorative body decoration substrate 3753, and the name of the element and the identification number of the substrate are printed by yellow silk printing. As a result, the rear decorative lens 3751 can be decorated brighter by reflecting light, and the rear decorative body decoration substrate 3753 is difficult to see from the front. The rear decorative body decoration substrate 3753 can light-embellish the rear decorative lens 3751 by causing a plurality of mounted LEDs to emit light.

The left unit 3760 is vertically slidably supported by the left guide shaft 3602 and rotatably supports the first rotary decoration 3710 . In addition, the left unit 3760 rotates the first rotating decorative body 3710 around the longitudinal axis in cooperation with the left rack gear 3635 of the left elevating mechanism 3630 as it slides in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the left unit 3760 enables the left end side of the right unit 3780 to be lifted upward via the connection guide 3790 .

As shown in FIG. 194, the left unit 3760 is vertically slidably supported by the left guide shaft 3602, and is a left slide that rotatably supports the shaft tube portion 3712a of the first base 3712 of the first rotary ornament 3710. a base 3761, a spur-gear-shaped first ornamental gear 3762 attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3712a of the first base 3712 that is provided behind the left slide base 3761 and passes through the left slide base 3761; A first transmission gear 3763 that meshes with the decoration gear 3762 from the left and is rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761, and a small diameter spur gear that meshes with the first transmission gear 3763 from the left A gear 3764a and a large-diameter gear 3764b in the form of a spur gear that rotates integrally with the small-diameter gear 3764a. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3765 meshed from the left and rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761, and a second transmission gear 3765 meshed from the left and rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761. a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3766, a spur gear-shaped fourth transmission gear 3767 that meshes with the third transmission gear 3766 from the left side and is rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761; a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3768 that meshes with the fourth transmission gear 3767 from the left side, meshes with the left rack gear 3635 of the left lifting mechanism 3630 from the right side, and is rotatably supported by the left slide base 3761; have.

In addition, the left unit 3760 moves behind the first decoration gear 3762, the first transmission gear 3763, the transmission gear 3764, the second transmission gear 3765, the third transmission gear 3766, the fourth transmission gear 3767, and the pinion gear 3768. A gear cover 3769 attached to the rear side of the left slide base 3761 so as to cover it, and a gear cover 3769 attached to the rear side of the gear cover 3769 and connected to the first rotary ornament decoration base plate 3713 of the first rotary ornament 3710. and a wiring cover 3770 that covers part of the wiring EC from the rear.

The left slide base 3761 includes a base body 3761a formed in a box-like shape with an open rear end and a shallow front-rear direction, and a left side of the base body 3761a through which the left guide shaft 3602 is slidably inserted. It has a left slide support portion 3761b and a shaft support portion 3761c that penetrates the base main body 3761a in the front-rear direction and rotatably supports the shaft tube portion 3712a of the first base 3712 of the first rotary decoration 3710. The left slide base 3761 can support the first rotating decorative body 3710 rotatably about the longitudinal axis by inserting the shaft tube portion 3712a of the first base 3712 into the shaft support portion 3761c. The left slide base 3761 is attached to the left elevating slider 3632 of the left elevating mechanism 3630 at the rear side of the left slide support portion 3761b.

The first decoration gear 3762 is attached to the rear end of the cylindrical shaft tube portion 3712a of the first base 3712 of the first rotary decoration 3710, and has a through hole extending back and forth at the center. ing. A plurality of wirings EC can be connected to the first rotary ornament decoration substrate 3713 of the first rotary ornament 3710 through the through hole of the first ornament gear 3762 and the cylindrical shaft tube portion 3712a. The pinion gear 3768 is provided such that its left side protrudes leftward beyond the left end of the left slide base 3761 so as to mesh with the left rack gear 3635 .

The gear cover 3769 has a left unit pin 3769a projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the left end. The left unit pin 3769a is slidably inserted into the connecting slit 3791 of the connecting guide 3790. As shown in FIG.

This left unit 3760 is assembled on the game board 5, and the left slide base 3761 is attached to the left elevating slider 3632 of the left elevating mechanism 3630, and the left spiral shaft 3631 is moved in an appropriate direction by the rear rear left lower driving motor 3633. When rotated, it slides vertically together with the left elevation slider 3632 . In the left unit 3760, a pinion gear 3768 projecting outward from the left end of the left slide base 3761 meshes with the left rack gear 3635, so that when the left unit 3760 slides vertically, the pinion gear 3768 rotates. When this pinion gear 3768 rotates, the rotation is transmitted through the fourth transmission gear 3767, the third transmission gear 3766, the second transmission gear 3765, the transmission gear 3764, and the first transmission gear 3763 to the first decoration gear 3762. , and the first rotary ornament 3710 rotates together with the first ornament gear 3762 . In this embodiment, when the left unit 3760 slides from the lower movement end to the upper movement end, the first rotary decoration 3710 rotates 360 degrees.

In addition, since the left unit pin 3769a of the left unit 3760 is slidably inserted into the connecting slit 3791 of the connecting guide 3790, when the left unit 3760 is slid vertically, the left unit pin 3769a moves toward the connecting slit 3791. , the connecting guide 3790 can be slid in the same direction via the left unit pin 3769a.

In the left unit 3760 , a plurality of wirings EC are connected to the first rotary ornament decoration substrate 3713 of the first rotary ornament 3710 through through holes of the first ornament gear 3762 . As described above, the first rotary decoration 3710 rotates 360 degrees about the axis in the front-rear direction, so the plurality of wires EC passing through the through-holes of the first decoration gear 3762 are arranged in advance in the direction opposite to the rotation direction. It is twisted 180 degrees in the direction. This prevents the plurality of wires EC from being twisted more than necessary even when the first rotary decoration 3710 is rotated (pivoted).

The right unit 3780 is vertically slidably supported by the right guide shaft 3602, and rotatably supports the second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration 3730, and the fourth rotary decoration 3740. It is a thing. In addition, the right unit 3780 can rotate the second rotating decorative body 3720, the third rotating decorative body 3730, and the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 around the axis in the front-rear direction as it slides in the vertical direction. can.

As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, the right unit 3780 includes a right slide base 3781 which is elongated in the left and right direction and whose right end is supported by a right guide shaft 3602 so as to be vertically slidable. A slide rack 3782 is supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction within a predetermined range, and both left and right ends are attached to a right slide base 3781 and the slide rack 3782, respectively, and urge the slide rack 3782 leftward. and a rack spring 3783 .

In addition, the right unit 3780 includes a spur gear-shaped second decoration gear 3784 that is attached to the rear end of the shaft cylinder portion 3722a of the second base 3722 in the second rotary decoration 3720 and that rotates when the slide rack 3782 slides; A spur-gear-shaped third decoration gear 3785 that is attached to the rear end of the shaft cylinder portion 3732a of the third base 3732 in the three-rotation decoration 3730 and rotates by sliding the slide rack 3782, and the fourth decoration in the fourth rotation decoration 3740. and a spur-gear-shaped fourth decoration gear 3786 that is attached to the rear end of the shaft tube portion 3742a of the base 3742 and rotates when the slide rack 3782 slides.

Further, the right unit 3780 includes a gear cover 3787 attached to the rear side of the right slide base 3781 so as to cover the slide rack 3782 from behind, and one end side is rotatably supported by the gear cover 3787, and the other end side is A unit arm 3788 that extends outward from the gear cover 3787 and is slidably supported in the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, and one end side of the unit arm 3788 that is rotatably supported by the gear cover 3787. and a transmission gear 3789 that transmits the rotation about to slide the slide rack 3782 in the left-right direction.

The right slide base 3781 includes a box-shaped base body 3781a that is long in the left and right direction and that opens rearward, and a right slide support portion 3781b that is provided at the right end of the base body 3781a and through which the right guide shaft 3602 is slidably inserted. and a pair of right unit slits 3781c extending vertically through the left end of the base main body 3781a and into which the connecting pin 3792 of the connecting guide 3790 is slidably inserted; and three shaft support cylinders 3781d projecting forward and through which the inside of the cylinder extends forward and backward.

The right slide base 3781 has a rear decoration 3750 attached to the front surface of the base body 3781a. Each of the three shaft support cylinders 3781d of the base body 3781a is inserted into the passage opening 3750a of the rear decoration 3750 from behind. In addition, in the three shaft support cylinders 3781d, there are the shaft tube portion 3722a of the second base 3722 of the second rotary decoration 3720, the shaft tube portion 3732a of the third base 3732 of the third rotary decoration 3730, and the fourth rotary The shaft tube portions 3742a of the fourth base 3742 of the decorative body 3740 are inserted, respectively, and can rotatably support the shaft tube portions 3722a, 3732a, and 3742a.

In addition, the right slide base 3781 is provided so as to protrude upward from the vicinity of the left side of the right slide support portion 3781b in the base main body 3781a. It has a locking groove 3781e in which the 3661c is locked. The lock groove 3781e has a quadrangular shape when viewed from the front and is recessed rearward from the front surface.

Furthermore, the right slide base 3781 has a plurality of shock absorbing portions 3781f provided on the upper surface of the base main body 3781a and capable of coming into contact with the lower surface of the receiving portion 3652d of the decoration base 3652 of the rear upper decoration 3650. ing. The impact absorbing portion 3781f is made of a highly viscous elastomer.

The slide rack 3782 includes a left rack gear 3782a provided near the left end with its tooth tip directed upward, a middle rack gear 3782b provided to the right and above the left rack gear 3782a with its tooth tip directed downward, and a middle rack gear 3782b with its tooth tip directed downward. A right rack gear 3782c, which is provided to the right and below the rack gear 3782b and has an upward tooth tip, and a right rack gear 3782c, which is provided rearward and downward between the middle rack gear 3782b and the right rack gear 3782c and has an upward tooth tip. and a rear rack gear 3782d. The left rack gear 3782a, the middle rack gear 3782b, and the right rack gear 3782c of the slide rack 3782 are provided at the same position in the front-back direction and extend in the left-right direction with the same length.

A second decoration gear 3784 is engaged with the left rack gear 3782a of the slide rack 3782 from above. A third ornamental gear 3785 meshes with the middle rack gear 3782b from below. A fourth decoration gear 3786 is engaged with the right rack gear 3782c from above. A large-diameter gear 3789b of a transmission gear 3789 meshes with the rear rack gear 3782d from above. Thus, when the slide rack 3782 slides in the horizontal direction, the second decoration gear 3784, the fourth decoration gear 3786, and the transmission gear 3789 rotate in the same direction, and the third decoration gear 3785 rotates in the opposite direction. rotate in the direction

The second decoration gear 3784, the third decoration gear 3785, and the fourth decoration gear 3786 each have a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. Through this through hole, from the right unit 3780 side, the second rotary decoration decoration substrate 3723 of the second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration decoration substrate 3733 of the third rotary decoration 3730, and the fourth rotary decoration 3740 A plurality of wirings EC can be connected to the fourth rotary ornament decoration substrate 3743 .

The gear cover 3787 has, on the rear surface thereof, a plurality of facing type wiring locking portions 3787a for supporting a plurality of wirings EC connected to the first rotary decoration base plate 3713 of the first rotary decoration 3710, and a linear type. and a plurality of L-shaped wire locking portions 3787c. A plurality of opposed-type wire locking portions 3787a are provided in the vicinity of the upper edge of the gear cover 3787 at intervals in the left-right direction. The linear type wire locking portion 3787b is provided to the left of the portion that rotatably supports one end of the unit arm 3788, and is provided with the free end (tip) facing upward. ing. A plurality of L-shaped wire locking portions 3787c are provided on the left side of the straight wire locking portion 3787b at intervals in the left-right direction while extending upward and then forward. there is

The unit arm 3788 has a fan-shaped gear portion 3788a provided coaxially with the rotation axis on one end side that is rotatably supported by the gear cover 3787 . A small-diameter gear 3789a of the transmission gear 3789 meshes with the gear portion 3788a. The other end of the unit arm 3788 extends leftward from the one end, and is slidably inserted into a horizontally elongated rotation slit 3604 provided on the lower side of the unit base 3601 . Also, the unit arm 3788 has a cylindrical portion between one end and the other end, and a plurality of wirings EC are inserted therein.

The transmission gear 3789 has a spur-shaped small-diameter gear 3789a that meshes with the gear portion 3788a of the unit arm 3788, and a spur-shaped large-diameter gear 3789b that rotates integrally in front of the small-diameter gear 3789a. A large-diameter gear 3789b of the transmission gear 3789 meshes with a rear rack gear 3782d of the slide rack 3782 from above.

The right unit 3780 is integrated with the rear upper decoration 3650 by engaging the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 of the rear upper decoration 3650 with the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781. and can slide upward together so as to be lifted by the back upper ornament 3650 .

In the normal state, the right unit 3780 has a unit arm 3788 extending leftward in parallel with the right slide base 3781 . In this state, when the right unit 3780 slides upward, since the other end of the unit arm 3788 is inserted into the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, the other end of the unit arm 3788 slides along the rotation slit 3604. As it moves to the right, it rotates counterclockwise about the one end as viewed from the front. When the gear portion 3788a of the unit arm 3788 rotates counterclockwise, the transmission gear 3789 rotates clockwise through the small-diameter gear 3789a that meshes with the gear portion 3788a. The slide rack 3782 slides to the left through the rear rack gear 3782d that meshes with the large diameter gear 3789b of the 3789. At this time, since the slide rack 3782 is biased leftward by the rack spring 3783, the slide rack 3782 slides lightly leftward without resistance.

When the slide rack 3782 slides leftward, the second decoration gear 3784 meshing with the left rack gear 3782a and the fourth decoration gear 3786 meshing with the right rack gear 3782c move clockwise. As it rotates, the third decoration gear 3785 meshing with the middle rack gear 3782b rotates counterclockwise. When the right unit 3780 is slid upward, the second rotary decoration 3720 and the fourth rotary decoration 3740 are rotated clockwise, and the third rotary decoration 3730 is rotated counterclockwise. Each can be moved upwards. When the slide rack 3782 slides from the right movement end to the left movement end, the second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration 3730, and the fourth rotary decoration 3740 rotate 180 degrees.

Since the other end of the unit arm 3788 of the right unit 3780 is slidably connected to the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, the right unit 3780 has the first rotary decorative body decoration base plate 3713 of the back rear lower decoration body 3700, the second A plurality of wirings EC connecting the rotary decoration decoration board 3723, the third rotary decoration decoration board 3733, the fourth rotary decoration decoration board 3743, the rear decoration decoration board 3753, and the peripheral control board 1510, It is provided along the rear side of the unit arm 3788 . This makes it difficult to see from the front a plurality of wirings EC connected to the right unit 3780 (back lower decoration 3700).

In this right unit 3780, the wiring EC passes through the through-holes of the second decoration gear 3784, the third decoration gear 3785, and the fourth decoration gear 3786. It extends to the body 3730 and the fourth rotary ornamental body 3740 . As described above, the second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration 3730, and the fourth rotary decoration 3740 rotate 180 degrees around the axis in the front-rear direction. The wiring EC passing through the through-holes of the decoration gear 3785 and the fourth decoration gear 3786 is pre-twisted 90 degrees in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation. As a result, even if the second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration 3730, and the fourth rotary decoration 3740 are rotated (turned), the wires EC are prevented from being twisted more than necessary.

In the right unit 3780, as shown in FIG. 193, a plurality of wirings EC (harnesses WH3) arranged from the other end side of the unit arm 3788 toward the one end side are connected to the right side (when viewed from the front) near the one end side. left) and extends rightward along the gear cover 3787 . The harness WH3 is inserted between the straight wire locking portion 3787b or the L-shaped wire locking portion 3787c and the rear surface of the gear cover 3787. As shown in FIG. In the right unit 3780, the harness WH3 is bound together with the wire locking portion 3787b at the wire locking portion 3787b provided closest to the turning shaft of the unit arm 3788 (the portion where the harness WH3 is bent). It is tightened and bundled by a band CT. At this time, the harness WH3 is fastened with such a strength that it can slide together with the binding band CT in the longitudinal direction in which the wire locking portion 3787b extends. In addition, since a hook portion (not shown) projecting forward is provided at the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b, the binding band CT will not come off from the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b together with the harness WH3. .

In this way, since the wire locking portion 3787b closest to the turning shaft of the unit arm 3788 (the bent portion of the harness WH3) in the harness WH3 is tightened together with the wiring locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT, When the unit arm 3788 rotates due to the vertical sliding of the right unit 3780 (rear lower decorative body 3700), even if a force to move the harness WH3 is applied via the unit arm 3788, the binding will not occur. The band CT prevents the harness WH3 from slipping out of the wire locking portion 3787b, thereby reliably preventing problems caused by the slipping of the harness WH3.

In the right unit 3780, at the portion where the harness WH3 and the wire locking portion 3787b are bound by the binding band CT, the locking portion CTb of the binding band CT is provided in the same manner as the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 described above. is attached in contact with the wire locking portion 3787b. The lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with a portion of the wire locking portion 3787b opposite to the harness WH3. In other words, the binding band CT is attached so that the wire locking portion 3787b is positioned between the harness WH3 and the lock portion CTb. As a result, since the lock portion CTb faces rearward, it is possible to easily perform the binding work with the binding band CT, confirm the binding, and the like. Moreover, the work of cutting the binding band CT can be facilitated. Furthermore, since contact of the lock portion CTb with the harness WH3 can be avoided, the harness WH3 bound with the binding band CT can be protected by the wire locking portion 3787b.

Further, since the gear cover 3787 in which the wiring locking portion 3787b is formed is transparent, the portion of the harness WH3 supported by the wiring locking portion 3787b can be visually recognized from the outside (rear) through the wiring locking portion 3787b. be able to. As a result, it is possible to easily check whether or not all the wires EC constituting the harness WH3 are bundled with the binding band CT, and the binding work with the binding band CT can be facilitated. can.

Further, as shown in the figure, the binding band CT is attached to the harness WH3 so that (the band portion CTa of) the binding band CT is in oblique contact. As a result, compared with the case where the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH3 in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, the contact area can be increased, and the frictional resistance can be increased to make movement (sliding) difficult. can.

In addition, as shown in the figure, the binding band CT that binds the harness WH3 to the wire locking portion 3787b has the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa extending obliquely to the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the wire locking portion 3787b. installed to eject. In other words, the binding band CT is attached crosswise. As a result, in a state in which the harness WH3 is bundled with the wire locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT, the longitudinal direction of the band portion CTa of the binding band CT approaches the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the wire locking portion 3787b. When the binding band CT is inclined, the tightening by the band portion CTa can be loosened, and the harness WH3 can be easily slid in the longitudinal direction of the wire locking portion 3787b together with the binding band CT. Further, when the binding band CT is returned to the inclined state after being slid, the wire locking portion 3787b can be tightened to return to the original state in which it is difficult to slide.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 193, since the portion of the harness WH3 that is bent from the horizontal direction along the unit arm 3788 is twisted as a whole, the right unit 3780 (rear rear lower decoration 3700) is vertically bent. Since the unit arm 3788 rotates due to the sliding in the direction, even if a force acts on the harness WH3 via the unit arm 3788, the plurality of wirings EC constituting the harness WH3 will not come apart.

The connection guide 3790 connects the left unit 3760 and the right unit 3780 so as to be relatively movable in the vertical direction. The connection guide 3790 penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends vertically. and a connecting pin 3792 that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is slidably inserted into the right unit slit 3781c of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 .

[5-10g-3. Operation of back-stage production unit]
Next, the operation (movable effect) of the back effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 185, 195, 196 and the like. As described above, the back rear effect unit 3600 has the back upper upper decorative body 3650 and the back lower lower decorative body 3700 which are slidably supported in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 3602 separated in the left and right directions. are doing. In the normal state of the rear back effect unit 3600, as shown in FIG. 185, the back rear upper decorative body 3650 is positioned at the retracted position which is the end of upward movement. When the back upper decoration 3650 is in the retracted position, the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 in the lock mechanism 3660 is inserted into the lock groove 3603 of the unit base 3601, and the rear upper decoration 3650 moves downward. is restricted (locked). A right elevating slider 3612 screwed onto the right spiral shaft 3611 from below is in contact with the right slide support portion 3652c of the decoration base 3652 of the back upper decoration 3650. The back upper decoration 3650 is restricted from moving downward. In other words, the lock mechanism 3660 and the right elevating slider 3612 prevent the rear upper decorative body 3650 from falling.

In addition, in the rear upper decoration 3650, the auxiliary upper slider 3614 is in contact with the right slide support portion 3652c of the decoration base 3652 from above, and the auxiliary upper slider 3614 and the auxiliary lower slider 3615 are moved by the biasing force of the auxiliary spring 3616. abuts. Also, in the right elevating mechanism 3610 , the right elevating first sensor 3617 detects the right elevating slider 3612 .

On the other hand, in a normal state, the rear lower decoration body 3700 is positioned at the retracted position, which is the end of downward movement, as shown in FIG. When the back and bottom decorations 3700 are in the retracted position, the character "miserable" on the first rotating decoration 3710 is tilted to the left, and the character "drama" on the second rotating decoration 3720 is at the third rotation. The character "turn" of the decoration 3730 and the character "avoid" of the fourth rotation decoration 3740 are each rotated 180 degrees. The first rotary decoration 3710 and the third rotary decoration 3730 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The second rotary decoration 3720, the fourth rotary decoration 3740, and the left unit 3760 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction, and are provided behind the first rotary decoration 3710 and the third rotary decoration 3730. there is Furthermore, behind the second rotary decoration 3720, the fourth rotary decoration 3740, and the left unit 3760, a rear decoration 3750 and a right unit 3780 are provided. A rear upper decoration 3650 is provided above the rear decoration 3750 and the right unit 3780 .

When the back rear lower decoration 3700 is in the retracted position, the left unit pin 3769a of the gear cover 3769 of the left unit 3760 is positioned at the downward movement end (lower end) of the connection slit 3791 of the connection guide 3790 . Also, the connecting pin 3792 of the connecting guide 3790 is positioned at the downward movement end (lower end) of the right unit slit 3781c in the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 .

Further, when the back rear lower decoration body 3700 is in the retracted position, a pinion gear 3768 partly protruding leftward from the left unit 3760 meshes with the left rack gear 3635 of the left elevating mechanism 3630 . Further, the slide rack 3782 of the right unit 3780 is positioned at the rightward movement end, and the unit arm 3788 extends substantially horizontally in the left-right direction. The slide rack 3782 is biased leftward by a rack spring 3783 . Also, in the left elevation mechanism 3630 , the left elevation sensor 3634 detects the left elevation slider 3632 .

In the case of performing the movable effect of dropping the rear upper decorative body 3650 from this normal state, first, in the right lifting mechanism 3610, the right spiral shaft 3611 is rotated by the rear lower right driving motor 3613 to move the right lifting slider 3612. It is moved to the lower movement end (the position near the right slide support portion 3781b of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 in the back rear lower decoration 3700). When the right elevating slider 3612 moves downward, it abuts on the auxiliary lower slider 3615 in the middle, resists the biasing force of the auxiliary spring 3616, and moves together with the auxiliary lower slider 3615 to the lower movement end. As a result, the auxiliary spring 3616 is elongated and its urging force increases, and a strong urging force acts downward on the right slide support portion 3652c of the decoration base 3652 via the auxiliary upper slider 3614 . Even in this state (droppable state), the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 is inserted and locked into the lock groove 3603 of the unit base 3601, so the back upper decoration 3650 falls. never.

When the lock release solenoid 3663 of the lock mechanism 3660 is energized, the lock latch 3661 moves forward against the biasing force of the lock spring 3662, and the upper lock claw 3661b comes out of the lock groove 3603 to release the lock. As a result, the back rear upper decoration body 3650 falls from the retracted position. At this time, the biasing force of the auxiliary spring 3616, which strongly biases the right slide support portion 3652c of the decoration base 3652 downward via the auxiliary upper slider 3614, acts on the rear upper decoration 3650. Therefore, the rear upper decorative body 3650 falls at an initial speed faster than the free fall. After pressing the right slide support portion 3652c downward by the biasing force of the auxiliary spring 3616, the auxiliary upper slider 3614 stops moving at a certain downward position. Therefore, the auxiliary lower slider 3615 is biased upward by the auxiliary spring 3616 .

When the back upper decoration 3650 drops onto the right unit 3780 of the back lower decoration 3700 provided below (moves to the appearing position), the lower surface of the receiving portion 3652d of the decoration base 3652 slides onto the right slide base. A plurality of impact absorbing portions 3781f on the upper surface of the 3781 abut to absorb the impact of the drop, and the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 is engaged with the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781, The upper surface of the right slide base 3781 does not bounce upward.

As a result, the rear upper decorative body 3650 falls at a speed faster than the free fall, and does not bounce upward after falling, so that a movable effect with a heavy feeling like falling (falling effect) ) can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

195, when the upper back decoration body 3650 is dropped and moved to the appearance position, the upper back decoration body 3650 and the rear decoration body 3750 of the lower back decoration body 3700 are in contact with each other, as shown in FIG. It is positioned and forms a decoration that imitates one large hatchet. Also, in this state, only a part of the first rotary decoration 3710 is located in front of the back and top decoration 3650, and the second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration 3730, and the fourth rotary decoration The decorative body 3740 is not located in front of the back upper decorative body 3650 .

In the state where the rear upper decoration body 3650 is dropped from the retracted position and moved to the appearing position, the left spiral shaft 3631 is rotated by the rear rear lower left driving motor 3633 in the left lifting mechanism 3630, and the left spiral shaft 3631 is screwed. When the combined left elevating slider 3632 is slid upward, the left unit 3760 rotates for the first time via the left slide base 3761 of the left unit 3760 of the back rear lower decoration 3700 attached to the left elevating slider 3632. It slides upward together with the decoration 3710 . At this time, since the pinion gear 3768 of the left unit 3760 is in mesh with the left rack gear 3635, the pinion gear 3768 rotates as the left unit 3760 rises, and the first rotary decorative body 3710 rotates counterclockwise. It will rotate. Also, the left unit pin 3769a of the gear cover 3769 slides upward in the connecting slit 3791 of the connecting guide 3790. As shown in FIG.

At the beginning when the left unit 3760 is lifted via the left lifting slider 3632, only the left unit 3760 (first rotary decoration 3710) is lifted, and the right unit 3780 (second rotary decoration 3720, third rotary decoration 3730 , fourth rotary ornament 3740, and rear ornament 3750) do not rise.

When the left unit pin 3769a of the gear cover 3769 reaches the upward moving end (upper end) of the connecting slit 3791 of the connecting guide 3790, the left unit pin 3769a moves through the connecting slit 3791. The connection guide 3790 is lifted upward, and the connection guide 3790 starts to rise. Even at this time, since the pinion gear 3768 is meshing with the left rack gear 3635, the first rotary decorative body 3710 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction. When the left unit pin 3769 a of the left unit 3760 starts to lift the connection guide 3790 , the connection pin 3792 of the connection guide 3790 slides upward inside the right unit slit 3781 c of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 .

As a result, when the connecting guide 3790 starts to rise due to the left unit pin 3769a of the rising left unit 3760, only the left unit 3760 (first rotary decorative body 3710) and the connecting guide 3790 rise, and the right unit 3780 (second The second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration 3730, the fourth rotary decoration 3740, and the rear decoration 3750) do not rise.

The left unit 3760 further rises while lifting the connection guide 3790 by the left elevating slider 3632, and the connection pin 3792 of the connection guide 3790 moves to the upper end (upper end) of the right unit slit 3781c of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780. , a force acts to lift the left end of the right unit 3780 upward via the connecting pin 3792 and the right unit slit 3781c. Even at this time, since the pinion gear 3768 is meshing with the left rack gear 3635, the first rotary decorative body 3710 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction.

At the same time, in the right elevating mechanism 3610 , the right spiral shaft 3611 is rotated by the rear lower right driving motor 3613 to raise the engaged right elevating slider 3612 , and the right elevating slider 3612 is moved to the rear upper decoration body 3650 . The right slide support portion 3652c of the decoration base 3652 is brought into contact from below, and the right slide support portion 3652c is moved upward.
At this time, the upward biasing force of the auxiliary spring 3616 is applied to the right elevation slider 3612 via the auxiliary lower slider 3615 that is in contact with the right elevation slider 3612 from below, so that the lifting load is reduced.

When the decoration base 3652 (upper rear decoration 3650) is lifted by the right elevating slider 3612 via the right slide support portion 3652c, the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock mechanism 3660 of the upper rear decoration 3650 is engaged with the lower rear decoration. Since it is engaged with the lock groove 3781e of the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the body 3700, a force to lift the right end of the right unit 3780 upward is applied via the lower lock claw 3661c and the lock groove 3781e. do.

In this way, the left end side of the right unit 3780 is lifted upward from the connecting pin 3792 of the connecting guide 3790, and the right end side of the right unit 3780 is lifted upward from the lower locking claw 3661c of the locking mechanism 3660 of the rear upper decorative body 3650. Since the force acting on the right unit 3780 acts, the right unit 3780 starts to rise for the first time here. In this state, the right unit 3780 is lifted by the upper back decoration 3650, and the upper back decoration 3650 and the lower back decoration 3700 are lifted together.

When the right unit 3780 starts to rise, the second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration 3730, the fourth rotary decoration 3740, and the rear decoration 3750 supported by the right unit 3780 rise together. At this time, since the other end side of the unit arm 3788 extending leftward from the lower portion of the right unit 3780 is slidably inserted into the rotation slit 3604 of the unit base 3601, the unit arm 3788 side, and the other end side slides to the right in the slit 3604 for rotation.

When the unit arm 3788 of the right unit 3780 rotates counterclockwise, the slide rack 3782 slides leftward from the right movement end. The quadruple rotary decoration 3740 rotates clockwise, and the third rotary decoration 3730 rotates counterclockwise. Also at this time, since the left unit 3760 is raised, the engagement between the pinion gear 3768 and the left rack gear 3635 further rotates the first rotary decorative body 3710 in the counterclockwise direction.

At this time, since the slide rack 3782 is biased leftward by the rack spring 3783, the load applied to the counterclockwise rotation of the unit arm 3788 is reduced, and the second rotating decorative body 3720 , the third rotating decoration 3730 and the fourth rotating decoration 3740 are reduced.

In the right elevating mechanism 3610, when the right elevating second sensor 3618 detects the right elevating slider 3612, the right spiral shaft 3611 and the left spiral shaft 3631 are rotated by the back rear lower right driving motor 3613 and the rear rear lower left driving motor 3633. It stops, and the right elevation slider 3612 and the left elevation slider 3632 stop rising. In this state, the back top upper decorative body 3650 and the back back lower decorative body 3700 are positioned at substantially the center position in the vertical direction. Also, the left elevating slider 3632 (left unit 3760) of the left elevating mechanism 3630 is positioned at the end of upward movement.

In this central position, as shown in FIG. 196, the character "savage" on the first rotating decorative body 3710 is rotated 360 degrees and tilted to the left in the same way as in the retracted position. The above are raised so as to be positioned in front of the back upper decoration body 3650 . In addition, the character "drama" of the second rotary decoration 3720, the character "kai" of the third rotary decoration 3730, and the character "avoid" of the fourth rotary decoration are each rotated by 180 degrees in the vertical direction. are correct, and nearly half of them in the vertical direction are located in front of the back upper decoration body 3650 . As a result, a decorative body is formed in which the characters "Avoid Tragedy" are provided at the center in the vertical direction of a large hatchet which is long in the left and right direction and which is composed of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear decorative body 3750.例文帳に追加

From this central position, the lock release solenoid 3663 in the lock mechanism 3660 of the back upper decoration 3650 is energized to slide the lock latch 3661 forward, and the lower lock claw 3661c is moved to the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780. It is pulled out from the lock groove 3781e to release the lock. Then, the right spiral shaft 3611 is rotated so that the right elevating slider 3612 is lifted by the rear lower right drive motor 3613 of the right elevating mechanism 3610, and the rear upper decoration body 3650 is moved upward via the right elevating slider 3612. . By moving the upper back decoration body 3650 upward while the locking mechanism 3660 is unlocked, the upper back decoration body 3650 is separated from the lower back decoration body 3700, and only the upper back decoration body 3650 is separated. will rise.

At this time, the right elevating slider 3612 is urged upward by the auxiliary spring 3616 via the auxiliary lower slider 3615 in contact with it from below, so that the load applied to the upward movement is reduced. In addition, in the back rear upper decoration 3650, since the lock mechanism 3660 (unlocking solenoid 3663) is provided in the vicinity of the right slide support portion 3652c supported by the right guide shaft 3602, the right slide support portion 3652c is connected to the guide shaft. The rotational moment applied to 3602 is suppressed, and the rear upper decorative body 3650 can rise smoothly.

When the rear upper decorative body 3650 is lifted by the right elevating slider 3612 and the right elevating slider 3612 is detected by the right elevating first sensor 3617, the rotation of the right spiral shaft 3611 by the rear lower right drive motor 3613 stops. As a result, the right elevating slider 3612 (back upper decorative body 3650) stops rising. As a result, the rear upper decorative body 3650 returns to the retracted position, which is the normal state.

On the other hand, since the left lifting slider 3632 of the left lifting mechanism 3630 does not rise any further in the back rear lower decoration body 3700 at the central position which has been lifted from the retracted position, when the lock by the locking mechanism 3660 is released, the left lifting mechanism At 3630, the left spiral shaft 3631 reversely rotates so that the left elevating slider 3632 descends, and the back rear lower decoration body 3700 descends.
At this time, the first rotary decoration 3710, the second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration 3730, and the fourth rotary decoration 3740 descend while rotating in the opposite direction to the upward movement.

When the left elevating slider 3632 is detected by the left elevating sensor 3634, the rotation of the left spiral shaft 3631 by the rear rear lower left driving motor 3633 is stopped, and the left elevating slider 3632 (back rear lower decoration 3700) descends. stops. As a result, the back rear lower decoration body 3700 returns to the retracted position, which is the normal state.

[5-11. Production with a game board]
Next, the effects of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 197 to 202 and the like. Figure 197(a) is a front view of the game board showing the display screen of the effect display device in a blacked out state, and (b) is the display screen of the effect display device and the back front of the back front left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship with the left back decorative sheet; FIG. 198 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back upper right decoration, the back right middle decoration, and the back lower right decoration of the back right effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position. Figure 199 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back left ornament of the back left effect unit in the back unit is moved to the first appearance position, and Figure 200 is the back of the back left effect unit in the back unit. It is a front view of a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the rear left ornament is moved to the second appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the upper back decorative body of the back rear effect unit in the back unit is dropped from the retracted position to the appearing position, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper decoration and the rear lower decoration are moved to the center position;

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 137 and the like, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in front is transparent, but the panel plate 1110 has a predetermined pattern behind it. Since the rear cell 1130 (see FIG. 146) is provided, the back unit 3000 provided behind and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized mainly through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible.

In a normal state, the game board 5 has a front upper first decoration plate 3201 and a rear upper second decoration plate of the rear front upper production unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 near the upper side in the frame of the center accessory 2500. 3203, the back front upper third decoration plate 3203, and the back rear upper decoration body 3650 at the retracted position in the back rear effect unit 3600 are provided so as to be visible. The back front upper first decoration plate 3201, the back front upper second decoration plate 3202, the back front upper third decoration plate 3203, and the back rear upper decoration body 3650 are spaced apart in the front-rear direction. It has the same logo as the game board 5 concept. The logos applied to the back front upper first decorative plate 3201, the back front upper second decorative plate 3202, and the back front upper third decorative plate 3203 are streak-carved so that the letter becomes smaller toward the rear decorative plate. The logo on the back front upper third decoration plate 3203 and the logo on the back rear upper decoration body 3650 are provided in the same size. As a result, the player can see a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of perspective such that the characters of the logo become larger from the rear to the front (see FIG. 197).

In this normal state, in front of the back upper upper decoration body 3650 at the retracted position in the back rear effect unit 3600, there are the upper front upper first decoration plate 3201, the second upper front upper decoration plate 3202, and the third upper front back decoration plate. 3203. Since the three decorative plates are provided, although the rear upper decorative body 3650 can be visually recognized through them, the illusion that the rear upper decorative body 3650 is a decoration applied to the three decorative plates may be given. This makes it difficult for the user to recognize that the rear upper decorative body 3650 is movable.

In addition, in a normal state, along the left side in the frame of the center role 2500, the back front left decorative body 3301 of the back front left effect unit 3300 is visible, and the frame of the center role 2500 is visible. Along the right side in the inside, the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle decorative body 3403, and the back lower right decorative body 3404 of the back right effect unit 3400 can be seen to be aligned vertically.

In a normal state, the back left decorative body 3501 of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is the back front left decorative body 3301 of the back front left effect unit 3300 and the back rear upper decoration of the retracted position of the back rear effect unit 3600. , and are not visible from the front.

Furthermore, in a normal state, a center sorting unit 2520 can be seen on the lower side of the frame of the center accessory 2500 . Behind the center distribution unit 2520, the rear lower decoration body 3700 at the retracted position in the rear rear effect unit 3600 is positioned, and the lower rear decoration body 3700 is hardly visible from the front.

Using the back front left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the effect shown in FIG. 197 can be executed. In the back front left effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 197(b), a certain distance is provided between the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 of the back front left effect unit 3300 and the effect display device 1600. For example, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out from the normal state, the pattern on the rear surface of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the reflective pattern 3310 can be seen. becomes (see FIG. 197(a)). As a result, during execution of the effect using the effect image by the effect display device 1600, by turning the display screen dark or intentionally darkening the display screen, the pattern on the rear surface of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 appears on the display screen. Since it is possible to show the player the effect in which the reflected pattern 3310 is reflected, the player can be surprised by the faintly visible reflected pattern 3310, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and there is something good. It is possible to make the player think that there is something happening, to increase the expectation for the game, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, since the pattern on the rear surface of the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 is different from the pattern on the back front left decoration body 3301, the following effect can be exhibited. More specifically, in a normal state in which an effect image is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, only the character (picture) with a predetermined facial expression on the back front left ornament 3301 is visible. A reflected pattern 3310 in which characters (pictures) with different facial expressions on the back front and left back decorative sheets 3308 are reflected on the display screen on the right side is not visible. When the display screen is darkened by blackout or the like, a character on the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 with an expression different from that of the back front left decoration 3301 is reflected on the right side of the back front left decoration 3301 to form a reflected pattern. Since 3310 can be seen, it is possible to present to the player an effect in which the character's back face can be seen, and the gap between the character's facial expressions can be enjoyed by the player. For example, if this effect is performed before a big win game is executed, the effect can strongly make the player think that it may be a "losing", and after that, a "big win" will occur. can surprise you and make you more interested.

197(b), a light emitting means 3320 such as an LED capable of emitting light from the back toward the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 may be provided as indicated by the dashed line. As a result, when the display screen of the production display device 1600 is darkened due to a blackout or the like, the pattern of the back front left rear decorative sheet 3308 is brightened by causing the light emitting means 3320 to emit light. It can be made easier to be reflected on the display screen, and the reflected pattern 3310 can be made easier to see.

Alternatively, although not shown, an LED capable of emitting light backward is mounted on the rear surface of the back front left main decorative board 3305, and when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened by blackout or the like, the back front By causing the LED on the rear surface of the left main decorative board 3305 to emit light, the design of the back front left rear decorative sheet 3308 becomes brighter, so that the design can be more easily reflected on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

Next, using the back right effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the effect shown in FIG. 198 can be executed. In the back-right effect unit 3400, the back-right driving motor 3405 drives the back-right driving motor 3405 from the normal state in which the back-right upper decorative body 3402, the back-right middle decorative body 3403, and the back-right lower decorative body 3404 are vertically aligned to the appearing position. When moved, the back right center decoration 3403 splits into two left and right back right center left decorations 3403a and back right center right decorations 3403b. The back-right middle-right decoration 3403b and the back-right lower-right decoration 3403b are transformed into a form arranged at the vertex of the rhombus. As a result, the back upper right decorative body 3402, the back right middle left decorative body 3403a, and the back right lower decorative body 3404 are brought closer to the center side of the game area 5a (the effect display device 1600), thereby surprising the player. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player to the decorations, and to make the player think that the appearance of the decorations may bring about something good, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Next, using the back-left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, effects as shown in FIGS. 199 and 200 can be executed. In the back-left effect unit 3500, the back-left decoration 3501 is driven in the right and downward direction by driving the back-left driving motor 3503 from the normal state in which the back-left decoration 3501 is invisible from the front. When it is rotated (clockwise) and moved to the first appearance position, substantially the entire rear left ornament 3501 is positioned to the right and rear of the front left ornament 3301, as shown in FIG. Although it is positioned below the upper decoration 3650 and is visible to the player, part of the simulated cutting edge is behind the back front left decoration 3301 and below the back rear upper decoration 3650. It is located, and the overall shape is unclear.

As a result, when the back-left decoration 3501 moves from the retracted position to the first appearing position, the back-left decoration 3501 becomes visible, so that the player's attention is attracted to the back-left decoration 3501.例文帳に追加can be done. At this time, since a part of the back left decoration 3301 is hidden and the overall shape is unclear, it is difficult to recognize that the back left decoration 3501 is the cutting edge of the hatchet. , back left decorative body 3501 can make the player's heart beat faster depending on whether or not it moves to a position where the whole can be seen. Then, when the back left decorative body 3501 is further rotated clockwise by the back left driving motor 3503 to move to the second appearance position, as shown in FIG. 200, the back left decorative body 3501 is The whole can be seen, and the left end side is inclined so as to protrude forward. As a result, the front surface of the back left ornament 3501 is slanted with respect to the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the cutting edge of the machete that the back left ornament 3501 imitates resembles the effect display device 1600. Since it looks like it is projected diagonally forward from the display screen, it can have a strong impact on the player, making them think that something good is happening and increasing their expectations for the game. can.

In this way, according to the rear-left effect unit 3500, the rear-left decorative body 3501, which is invisible in a normal state, becomes visible in two stages. Depending on whether or not the game is played, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained. Then, when it moves to the second appearance position, the back left ornament 3501 that has moved (rotated) parallel to the display screen of the effect display device 1600 moves forward so that the tip (left end) of its cutting edge protrudes forward. Because it moves, it is possible to show the player a moving effect that has never been seen before in a pachinko machine, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to make the player think strongly, heighten expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest.

201 and 202 can be executed by using the back effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5. FIG. In the rear rear effect unit 3600, after the right lifting slider 3612 is moved to the lower movement end by driving the rear lower right driving motor 3613 of the right lifting mechanism 3610, the locking mechanism 3660 of the rear rear upper decorative body 3650 is unlocked. When the solenoid 3663 is energized, the lock by the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 is released, and the rear upper decoration 3650 drops and contacts the lower rear decoration 3700 provided below from above (Fig. 201). At this time, since the back top decoration 3650 is biased downward by the auxiliary spring 3616, the back top decoration 3650 falls at an initial speed faster than the free fall. Further, when the back upper decoration 3650 falls and contacts the back lower decoration 3700 at the retracted position, the impact is absorbed by the impact absorbing portion 3781f, and the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 is locked. It is locked in the groove 3781e and prevented from rebounding upward.

As a result, the rear upper decorative body 3650 falls at a speed faster than the free fall, and does not bounce upward after falling, so that a movable effect with a heavy feeling of falling (falling effect) ) can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

After the back top decoration 3650 falls and moves to the appearance position, the right lift slider 3612 is driven by the back bottom right drive motor 3613 of the right lift mechanism 3610, and the back rear left bottom drive motor 3633 of the left lift mechanism 3630 is driven. When the left elevating slider 3632 is lifted, the rear upper decorative body 3650 and the rear lower decorative body 3700 are vertically combined and lifted together to the central position. At this time, the first rotary decoration 3710, the second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration 3730, and the fourth rotary decoration 3740 of the back and rear lower decoration 3700 rotate about the axis in the front-rear direction. When it reaches the central position, as shown in FIG. The letters "miserable" by the decorative body 3710, "play" by the second rotating decorative body 3720, "kai" by the third rotating decorative body 3730, and "avoidance" by the fourth rotating decorative body 3740 are arranged side by side. A large decorative body will appear in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 .

As a result, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the tragedy avoidance by the first rotary decoration 3710, the second rotary decoration 3720, the third rotary decoration 3730, and the fourth rotary decoration 3740 can be achieved. ' can strongly make the player think that an advantageous game state such as 'jackpot' will occur in which the player is advantageous, and the expectation for the game can be heightened to suppress the decline in interest.

As an effect using the back rear effect unit 3600, after the back rear upper decoration 3650 is dropped to the appearance position, the locking mechanism 3660 releases the lock of the back rear lower decoration 3700 from the lock groove 3781e, and the left side is moved. Only the rear lower right driving motor 3613 of the right lifting mechanism 3610 may be driven without driving the rear lower left driving motor 3633 of the lifting mechanism 3630 to lift only the upper rear decorative body 3650 . As a result, after the back upper decoration body 3650 falls, the player can feel nervous and excited depending on whether or not the back upper decoration body 3650 rises in a combined state with the back rear lower decoration body 3700, and the game is played. As well as being able to entertain players, it is possible to present various combinations of performances to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and to suppress the loss of interest.

[6. control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 203 and the like. FIG. 203 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195. FIG.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU, a setting display for displaying set values and errors, and partitioning on the game board 5 and a base monitor for displaying the number of game balls B collected by an out port 2020 and a sub-out port 2021 provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU to identify the individual (there is only one code in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU can retrieve the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power failure processing described later, and the main control side power ON processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). In addition, even if the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in a started state.

In addition, the main control MPU is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in hardware Random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received in the first lower start opening sensor 2101 and the first upper start opening 2004 that detect the game ball B received in the first lower start opening 2003. First upper starting hole sensor 2524, second starting hole sensor 2601 for detecting game ball B received in second starting hole 2005, general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting game ball B received in general winning hole 2001, A gate sensor 2501 for detecting the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002, a first big prize winning hole sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006, and a game received in the second big winning hole 2007 A second big winning hole sensor 2602 for detecting the ball B, a V winning hole sensor 2603 for detecting the game ball B received in the V winning hole 2008, and a losing hole sensor 2604 for detecting the game ball B received in the losing hole 2009. , the out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B discharged from the game board 5, the magnetic sensor 1030 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor 1040 that detects vibration acting on the game board 5, etc. A detection signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

Further, respective detection signals from the setting key switches and setting switching buttons provided on the setting change board are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame open switch and the detection signal from the main body frame open switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (i.e., through the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When input to the main control board 1310 as they are), they are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

It should be noted that detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first lower starting port sensor 2101, the first upper starting port sensor 2524, and the second starting port sensor 2601 are directly transmitted to the main It is input to the control board 1310 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2501, the first big winning opening sensor 3002, the second big winning opening sensor 2602, the V winning opening sensor 2603, the losing opening sensor 2604, the magnetic sensor 1030, and the vibration sensor 1040 Each detection signal from is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit. there is

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the main control solenoid drive circuit to output the starting solenoid 2632 and the first attacker. Each drive signal to the solenoid 2642, the second attacker solenoid 2652, the V distribution solenoid 2662, and the center distribution drive motor 2525 is output via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or its predetermined output From the output terminal of the port to the function display unit 1400 status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal pending indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special pending number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special pending Drive signals to the number indicator and the round indicator are directly output without going through other substrates. Further, the main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp of the setting change board by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU outputs various information (game information) about the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633 . The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverts the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. is set to As for the logic of the firing permission signal, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), firing permission signal setting processing in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is started. Until then, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is set by inverting the firing permission logic.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first lower starting opening sensor 2101, the first upper starting opening sensor 2524, the second starting opening sensor 2601, the gate sensor 2501, the first big winning opening sensor 3002, the second big winning opening sensor 2602, Non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the V winning opening sensor 2603, the losing opening sensor 2604, and the out sensor 664, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation. A mechanical switch of the type is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first lower starting port 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, and the gate 2002, so that the first lower starting port sensor 2101, the second The detection of the game ball B by the two start sensor 2601 and the gate sensor 2501 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first lower starter sensor 2101, the second starter sensor 2601, the first upper starter sensor 2524, and the gate sensor 2501. FIG.

Also, when an advantageous gaming state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently, so that the first big winning hole sensor Detection of game ball B by 3002 also occurs frequently. For this reason, the proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the first prize winning opening sensor 3002 . In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the game balls B are frequently detected by the out sensor 664. occurs in For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 . It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently, a proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. In addition, the main control MPU, which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This blackout warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball A ball extracting switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extracting operation. , is equipped with

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM as well as functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310. A power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and an error cancellation signal from the error cancellation switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a signal indicating the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display section 226 of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , to generate a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and output it to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the will of the player. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 for permitting launch of the game ball B is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing timing control circuit satisfies the firing condition 1 that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and based on the CR connection signal, connects the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate. is electrically connected to the game ball B, and if the launch condition 3 that the game ball B is permitted to be shot based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B , for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 195. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with a discharge control section 633b that controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145 as well as the firing control by the firing solenoid 542. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511, which controls the effects in the peripheral control board 1510, has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. on one semiconductor chip, although detailed illustration is omitted. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality sound performance, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects that the sound source IC refers to. and a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip. The CPU of the control IC transmits game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 through the serial I/O for the lamp drive board. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 and for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is provided for the game board decoration drive board. It is transmitted from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or the drive signal to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 are sent to the display control unit serial In addition to transmitting from the I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 to inform that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the performance display control unit 1512 activity is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound information to the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. , the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By transmitting a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. Kilo (k) bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side, are multiple serial input/output signals different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. The "line buffer method" is to hold one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively, to pixels for one line.

[6-3c. Vibration alarm processing]
Vibration alarm processing by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a flowchart of vibration alarm processing on the game board. In the "vibration alarm processing", when the game ball B enters the center distribution unit 2520 through the upper warp passage 2513 of the center role 2500 as a role and satisfies a predetermined condition, the vibration sensor 1040 detects an illegal error. This is a process of issuing an alarm to notify that an illegal act is being carried out when an unacceptable vibration is detected.

More specifically, in the "vibration alarm process", the "flag inside the game ball role" in step S101 is another omitted flow chart, and the center distribution unit 2520 as the role is distributed to the IN side. A flag is set by judging the consistency between the detection of the game ball B by the entering ball sensor 2527 and the detection of the game ball B by the first upper start opening sensor 2524 and the sorting ball discharge sensor 2528 on the OUT side. . in particular,
Number on the IN side > Number on the OUT side・・・Flag ON
Number on the IN side = Number on the OUT side...flag OFF
Number of IN side < Number of OUT side . . . .

In step S101, when the inside-accessory item flag is not ON (flag OFF), step S101 is repeated. If the internal accessory flag is ON in step S101, then in the next step S102, ON/OFF of the "back rear upper decorative body operating flag" is determined. When the rear upper decorative body 3650 moves (drops), the operating flag is turned ON. When the operating flag is ON in step S102, the process returns to step S101. In step S102, when the operating flag is OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S103.

In step S103, ON/OFF of the "pressing operation rendering flag" is determined. During the production by the pressing operation of the pressing operation part 303 in the production operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the production flag is turned ON. In step S103, when the effecting flag is ON, the process returns to step S101, and when the effecting flag is OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S104.

In step S104, ON/OFF of the "vibration alerting flag" is determined. The in-warning flag is turned ON when the vibration warning is executed. In step S104, when the in-reporting flag is ON, the process returns to step S101, and when the in-reporting flag is OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S105.

In step S105, it is determined whether or not there is a "vibration detection command from the main control board". When the vibration sensor 1040 detects vibration, the main control board 1310 transmits a vibration detection command to the peripheral control board 1510 . In this step S105, when there is no vibration detection command, the process returns to step S101, and when there is a vibration detection command, the process proceeds to the next step S106.

In step S106, after the "alarm processing" is executed for a predetermined period, the normal state is restored. The “notification processing” of step S106 is executed in the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Specifically, for example, the characters "Vibration Detected" are displayed in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes). In addition, the notification sound effect (siren) and the voice of "vibration detected" are repeated for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). The sound is output from the body frame speaker 622 or the like provided in the frame 4 . At this time, maximize the volume. Furthermore, in the door frame 3, the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is illuminated in red, and the door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 430 are displayed. The body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are caused to blink in red and white. Then, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses or reset by the game hall staff, the normal state is restored.

Thus, in the center distribution unit 2520 in the center accessory 2500, when the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause vibration so that the game ball B is distributed to the first upper starting port 2004, vibration is generated. Since the alarm is issued by the information processing, it is possible to make the player hesitate to commit fraud, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

At this time, since the operation flag of the back upper decoration 3650 is seen in step S102 and the effect flag using the pressing operation unit 303 is seen in step S103, the back upper decoration 3650 falls. It is possible to avoid erroneously detecting the vibration caused by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 and issuing a warning. You can prevent it from happening.

In addition, in the center distribution unit 2520, as described above, the passage opening 2532 of the croon 2530 is formed in a non-circular shape, and the rolling surface portion 2531 is provided with a peripheral edge surface portion 2531b having a different angle so that the game ball B is placed on the peripheral wall portion 2533. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibration, the abnormal vibration changes the rolling direction of the game ball B and makes it enter the passage opening 2532 illegally. Since this is prevented, it is possible to doublely defend against fraudulent activity in combination with vibration alarm processing. A pachinko machine 1 with high power can be provided.

[7. Game content]
Game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 141 and the like.
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are played. is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more the handle 195 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions. The flowing speed is suppressed, and various motions are given to the game ball B so that the motions can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, the left side of the center role 2500, that is, the inner side. It flows between the rail 1002 and the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstructing nails. On the left side of the center accessory 2500, the entrance of the upper warp passage 2513 and the entrance of the lower warp passage 2512 are always open so that the game ball B can be received.

The game ball B that has entered the upper warp passage 2513 is supplied to the crew 2530 of the center distribution unit 2520 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The game ball B supplied to the croon 2530 is released to the first guideway 2521 below after turning in the dish-shaped croon 2530, rolls to the right along the slope of the first guideway 2521, and reaches a predetermined The center sorting piece 2523 advances and retreats at the rhythm of . The game ball B distributed to the first upper starting port 2004 is received by the first upper starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the lower warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2514 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2514 in the left-right direction, and is discharged from the central release portion 2514a or the side release. It is released so as to flow back into the game area 5a from any of the portions 2514b. Since the center release portion 2514a of the stage 2514 is provided directly above the first lower starting port 2003 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release portion 2514a has a high probability. It is received in the lower starting port 2003 . The game ball B released from the side release portions 2514b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2514a may be received in the first lower starting port 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

When the game ball B is received in the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is paid out to the upper tray 201, and on the main control board 1310, the first special symbols (for example, "loss", "minor win", "2R big win", "5R big win", "15R big win", "probability variable (Probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second big hit", etc.) lottery is performed. If the lottery result of the lottered first special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time ), when the game ball B is accepted in the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol, so the first lottery The start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the one special symbol is completed. The number of pending lottery results of the first special symbol to be held is up to four for each of the first lower start port 2003 and the first upper start port 2004, and for more than that, the first lower start Even if the game ball B is accepted in the opening 2003 or the first upper starting opening 2004, the lottery result of the first special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the upper warp passage 2513 or the lower warp passage 2512, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, the sub-out opening 2021 (left sub-out opening 2021a), or the first lower starting opening 2003 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall 2511a of the center role 2500, the upper right of the center role 2500 It passes through either the upper right first guide passage 2541 a or the upper right second guide passage 2541 b of the guide passage group 2541 . The game ball B that has circulated through the upper right guide passage group 2541 circulates through either the lower right first guide passage 2542a or the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542 provided with an interval downward. and released above the attacker unit 2600 .

A plurality of obstacle nails are implanted between the upper right guide passage group 2541 and the lower right guide passage group 2542 . A lower right first guide passage 2542a of the lower right guide passage group 2542 has a large entrance, and a gate 2002 is provided at a part of the entrance. Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed through the upper right guide path group 2541 passes through the gate 2002 with a certain probability after coming into contact with a plurality of obstructing nails. Also, the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002 flows through the lower right first guide passage 2542a.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2501, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the lottery normal symbol is "normal win", the second start. The second starting port 2005 closed by the door body 2631 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 becomes possible. .

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2005 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 during the period from when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 to when the normal symbol lottery result is suggested, the normal symbol lottery result cannot be suggested. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous normal symbol ends. In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results of normal symbols is up to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

The game ball B that has circulated through the lower right guide passage group 2542 flows down to any of the attacker upper shelf 2612 , the central opening 2605 and the right opening 2606 in the attacker unit 2600 . The game ball B that has flowed down to the attacker upper shelf 2612 is guided to the left, passes through the attacker right guide passage 2625, and is released to the left of the second big winning hole 2007. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the attacker's upper shelf 2612 will not be accepted by the second starting hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2007 .

A second large winning opening 2007 is provided downstream (below) of the central opening 2605 of the attacker unit 2600, and a guide piece 2636 of the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 is provided between the second large winning opening 2007 and the second large winning opening 2007. It is provided so that it can advance and retreat. That is, downstream of the central opening 2605, the second starting opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2007 are provided. On the other hand, downstream of the right opening 2606 merges with the central opening 2605 side at a portion below the second starting opening 2005, and only the second big winning opening 2007 is provided. Accordingly, there is a possibility that the game ball B flowing down to the central opening 2605 is accepted in the second start opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2007, and the game ball B flowing down to the right opening 2606 is the second big winning. It may be received in mouth 2007 .

Further, of the lower right first guide passage 2542a and the lower right second guide passage 2542b of the lower right guide passage group 2542, the central opening 2605 of the attacker unit 2600 is provided below the lower right first guide passage 2542a. , the lower right first guide passage 2542a is more likely to be accepted by the central port 2605, that is, the second starting port 2005, than the lower right second guide passage 2542b.

When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005 of the attacker unit 2600, a predetermined number (for example, one) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the upper tray 201, and in the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) A lottery of "hit", "time saving (time reduction) hit", "probable variable time short hit", "probable variable time short hit", "second big hit", etc.) will be held. If the lottery result of the lottered second special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol takes a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special variation time) longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. suggested.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2005 until the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time), the second start When the game ball B is received in the mouth 2005, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. The start of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of retained lottery results of the second special symbol to be retained is up to 4 for each of the second start ports 2005, and for more than that, the game balls B are accepted by the second start ports 2005. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

The special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005 is the acceptance of the game ball B to the first lower start port 2003 or the first upper start port 2004 It is set longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the lottery first special symbol. As a result, since the second special symbol lottery result takes more time to consume the number of reservations, the game ball B per unit time for the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 Even if the number of acceptances is the same, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol to be executed in the second start port 2005 is smaller. Therefore, in the normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that only the second starting port 2005 will be accepted, and the frequency with which the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed is low. , the player can be made to positively perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As described above, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 or the lottery of the second special symbol As a result, the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 are opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the game ball B can be received.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the central opening 2605 or the right opening 2606 of the attacker unit 2600 and has not been received by the second starting opening 2005 is placed on the second large winning opening door body 2651 that closes the second large winning opening 2007. It flows down, is guided to the left by the second big winning opening door body 2651, and is discharged to the downstream area of the attacker's right guiding passage 2625. - 特許庁

Then, when the game ball B flows down at the timing when the second big prize opening 2007 can be received according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, the game ball B is dropped. It is accepted in the second grand prize opening 2007 . When the game ball B is received in the second big winning hole 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game balls B from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, is placed on the upper tray. 201 is paid out.

Also, the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 is distributed to either the V winning opening 2008 or the losing opening 2009 by the V distribution unit 2660 provided downstream. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2008, a "jackpot" game is executed in which the first big winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern.

The game ball B that flows down to the attacker unit 2600 and circulates through the attacker's right guide passage 2625, and the game ball B that is not accepted in either the second starting port 2005 or the second big winning port 2007, has a high probability. It flows down onto the first big prize winning opening door body 2641 that closes the first big winning opening 2006 . A general prize winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2600 is provided in the middle of the path, and there is a possibility that the general prize winning port 2001 is accepted. In addition, a sub-out port 2021 (right sub-out port 2021b) is provided on the right side of the first major prize-winning port 2006. The game ball B that did not flow down onto the door 2641) is accepted. Further, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the first big winning gate door 2641 is released from the left end side of the first big winning gate door 2641 and is received by the out port 2020 (right out port 2020b).

Then, when the game ball B flows down at the timing when the first big winning hole 2006 can be received according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, the game ball B is dropped. It is accepted in the first grand prize opening 2006 . When the game ball B is received in the second big winning hole 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game balls B from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, is placed on the upper tray. 201 is paid out.

When the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit", or when the game ball B is accepted in the V winning opening 2008, the first big winning opening 2006 is the game. A predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) has elapsed after the ball B is opened to be accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are received into the first big winning hole 2006. , is satisfied, the opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) in which the game ball B is in a closed state that cannot be received is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" and the second special symbol will be drawn is changed ("probability hit"), or the lottery result of the first special symbol And there is a "hit" that changes the display time of the effect image that suggests the lottery result of the second special pattern ("time saving hit").

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is the "second big hit", the first big winning port 2006 or the second big winning port 2007 After making it possible to accept game balls B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this way, when the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 can accept the game ball B, the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 are made to accept the game ball B. Since a large number of game balls B can be paid out, the player can be entertained and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). Suggestion of the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs and blinking for a predetermined time, and thereafter suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern by the combination of the lit LEDs. .

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The performance image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern in the performance display device 1600 is displayed by changing each pattern row in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed. The pattern rows are successively stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern. When the lottery result of the special pattern is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁, an advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbols.

It should be noted that the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (special fluctuation time)) and the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the time until the finalized image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 in 300 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player-participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301 .

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, an effect display device 1600, a start opening display section 2110, and a back front upper effect unit 3200 , the back front left effect unit 3300, the back right effect unit 3400, the back rear left effect unit 3500, the back rear effect unit 3600, etc. can be used as appropriate to perform light emitting effect, display effect, etc., and various effects can be performed. Also, the player can be entertained, and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type performance in which the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. to notify the player to that effect.

[8. Second Embodiment of Door Frame]
Next, a second embodiment of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 205 to 213 and the like. 205 is a front view of the door frame of the second embodiment, FIG. 206 is a rear view of the door frame of the second embodiment, and FIG. 207 is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment seen from the front right. 208 is a front left perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment, and FIG. 209 is a rear perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment. Fig. 210(a) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment disassembled into a door frame top add unit and others, viewed from the front, and Fig. 210(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. FIG. 211(a) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 211(b) is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top add unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 212(a) is a side sectional view of the upper portion of the door frame of the second embodiment, and (b) is an exploded side sectional view showing the door frame top add unit and others in (a). FIG. 213(a) is an exploded perspective view of the essential parts of the door frame of the second embodiment, which is viewed from behind by disassembling the right side panel and the right side decorative sheet from the right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the main part. It is the perspective view which looked at the side panel from the left back.

In the door frame 3 of the second embodiment, a door frame top add unit 490 is newly provided in the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 of the first embodiment. In addition, the door frame 3 of the second embodiment has the door frame right side base 431 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 changed in shape, and the right side right lens 441 is eliminated. , a right side panel 442 and a right side decorative sheet 443 are newly added. In addition, the door frame 3 of the second embodiment newly adds a lock lever 444 to the door frame base unit 100 to enable the right side panel 442 to be detachable. Other parts are the same as those of the door frame 3 of the first embodiment.

The door frame 3 of the second embodiment includes a door frame top add unit 490 that can change the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 by attaching the door frame top unit 450 so as to cover the door frame top unit 450 without removing the door frame top unit 450, A transparent right side panel 442 detachably provided on the right side of the door frame right side base 431 of the door frame right side unit 430, and a transparent right side panel 442 provided between the right side panel 442 and the door frame right side base 431. It has a right side decorative sheet 443 on which a cage is applied with a predetermined pattern, and a lock lever 444 which is provided on the door frame base unit 100 and can lock the right side panel 442 in an unremovable manner.

[8-1. Door frame top ad unit]
The door frame top add unit 490 in the door frame 3 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 210 to 212. FIG. The door frame top add unit 490 makes it possible to change the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 without removing the door frame top unit 450 . The door frame top add unit 490 includes a door frame top add decoration 491 formed to cover the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 from the front and above, and the top and bottom of the door frame top add decoration 491. A flat plate-shaped top plate support plate 492 capable of closing an opening 491d penetrating in the direction of the door frame and the top plate support plate 492 are provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the rear end is detachable from the door frame base unit 100. two mounting screws 494 that slidably attach the top add top plate 493 to the top plate support plate 492; and a plurality of hand screws 495 for attachment to the .

The top ad decoration 491 is formed so as to be able to cover the door frame top decoration 453 from the front. A semi-tube-shaped decoration main body 491a that is curved so as to bulge forward and is open to the rear, and a predetermined shape (here, A central decorative body 491b formed in a shape resembling a hatchet), a lid portion 491c extending rearward from the upper end side of the decorative body main body 491a in a flat plate shape, and vertically penetrating near the center of the lid portion 491c. and locked portions 491e provided on both left and right outer sides of the opening 491d in the lid portion 491c and capable of being locked with the locking claws 493c of the top add top plate 493. .

A decorative body main body 491a of the top ad decorative body 491 has a three-dimensional decoration that protrudes forward as if the glass is broken on the front side, and has translucency. The central ornamental body 491b is formed in a shape that imitates a hatchet, and is formed such that the blade is stuck into the ornamental body main body 491a in a state in which the handle extends obliquely to the upper right. The opening 491d is provided in a rectangular shape elongated in the left and right direction.

The top support plate 492 is formed so as to be able to close the opening 491d of the top ad decoration 491 from above. The top support plate 492 is formed so as not to fall downward when the opening 491d is closed. The top plate support plate 492 has a pair of boss portions (not shown) projecting downward from the bottom surface in a cylindrical shape and spaced apart from each other to the left and right. By inserting this boss portion into the slit 493b of the top add table 493, the top add table 493 can be slidably supported in the front-rear direction. A mounting screw 494 is screwed into the lower end of this boss portion, and the mounting screw 494 prevents the top plate 493 from falling from the top plate support plate 492 .

The top add top plate 493 is formed to have the same size as the door frame top top plate 468 of the door frame top unit 450, and is a flat top plate body capable of closing the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452. 493a, a pair of slits 493b penetrating in the top plate main body 493a in the vertical direction and extending in the front-rear direction, into which the boss portions of the top plate support plate 492 are slidably inserted, and the pair of slits 493b. are provided outside in the left-right direction, and an engaging claw 493c that can be engaged with the engaged portion 491e of the top ad decoration 491 protrudes rearward from the rear side of the top plate main body 493a and is spaced in the left-right direction. and a plurality (here, three) of mounting pieces 493d provided with a gap between them.

The three mounting pieces 493d of the top add table 493 are inserted from above into grooves 464a provided on the rear surface of the speaker box 464 in the door frame top unit 450. As shown in FIG. The speaker box 464 is provided between the door frame top base 451 and the door frame top decorative body 453 and attached to the front surface of the door frame top base 451 . A pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers are attached to the speaker box so as to face obliquely downward and forward, and the inside of the speaker box serves as an enclosure capable of amplifying sound. The groove portion 464a of the speaker box 464 is recessed from the rear surface so as to open upward and rearward, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, a space is provided between the door frame base unit 100 and the mounting piece portion 493d into which the mounting piece portion 493d can be inserted. Form.

The top add plate 493 is attached to the opening 452 a of the top cover 452 in such a manner as to replace the existing door frame top plate 468 when attaching the door frame top add unit 490 to the door frame 3 . A screw portion 495b of a hand screw 495 is screwed into the mounting piece portion 493d from the rear of the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG.

The top add table 493 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the rear edge of the top plate main body 493a, and further has a concave portion 493e that is curved forward. The concave portion 493e serves as a finger hook when the door frame top add unit 490 (top add top plate 493) is attached to and detached from the door frame 3, thereby improving the workability of attachment and detachment.

The hand screw 495 has a head 495a that can be picked up by the operator's fingers, and a threaded portion 495b protruding from the head 495a. The head 495a of the hand screw 495 is provided with a cross-shaped groove and can be turned by a + screwdriver.

In the door frame top add unit 490 of the present embodiment, the top add table 493 is positioned below the lid portion 491c of the top add decorative body 491 . In other words, the lid portion 491 c of the top add decoration 491 is positioned between the top plate support plate 492 and the top add top plate 493 . The door frame top add unit 490 is provided so that the rear end of the top add top plate 493 is located behind the rear end of the lid portion 491 c of the top add decoration 491 . The state where the boss portion of the top plate support plate 492 is located at the rear end of the slit 493b of the top add top plate 493 (the state where the top add top plate 493 is positioned at the forward movement end with respect to the top plate support plate 492) ), the engaging portion 491e of the top ad decorative body 491 is engaged with the engaging claw 493c of the top plate 493. As shown in FIG. As a result, relative forward movement of the top add table 493 is restricted by the boss portion and the slit 493b, and rearward movement of the top add table 493 is made possible by the locked portion 491e and the locking claw 493c. relative movement is regulated. Therefore, when the engagement between the engaged portion 491e and the engagement claw 493c is released, the top add table 493 can be pulled out rearward within the range of the length of the slit 493b.

Next, the attachment of the door frame top add unit 490 will be described. First, the door frame top plate 468 (see FIG. 210(a)) of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 protrudes rearward from the rear edge and is spaced in the left-right direction. It has two mounting pieces (not shown). The three mounting pieces of the door frame top plate 468 are provided at the same positions as the three mounting pieces 493 d of the top add table 493 . The front end of the door frame top plate 468 is engaged with the front end of the opening 452a of the top cover 452, and the mounting piece at the rear end is inserted into the groove 464a on the rear surface of the speaker box 464. The screw portion 495b of the hand screw 495 passing through the frame base unit 100 from the rear is screwed in to attach.

Therefore, the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 has a plurality of door frame top plates 468 that close the opening 452a of the top cover 452 and are screwed from behind on the upper part of the door frame base unit 100. Only the door frame top plate 468 can be easily removed by removing the hand screw 495 . By removing the door frame top plate 468, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top left decorative board 456 provided inside the door frame top unit 450 can be passed through the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452. The door frame top right decorative board 457, the pair of top center speakers, the pair of top side speakers, the door frame top relay board, and the wiring EC and connectors connected to them can be confirmed. In other words, the door frame top plate 468 is the lid of the inspection door. In FIG. 210 and the like, the speaker box 464 and the like provided inside are illustrated as opaque, but they are actually transparent and the inside can be visually recognized well.

To install the door frame top add unit 490 , first remove the hand screw 495 from the rear of the door frame 3 , then lift the rear end side upward to remove it above the door frame top plate 468 . At this time, a concave portion 101k curved backward is formed near the center in the left-right direction of the portion of the door-frame base unit 100 facing the rear end side of the door-frame top plate 468 of the door-frame base 101. Therefore, the door frame top plate 468 can be easily removed by using the concave portion 101k as a finger rest.

After the door frame top plate 468 is removed, the door frame top add unit 490 is positioned in front of the door frame top unit 450, and the top add decoration body 491 is decorated in a state in which the rear end side is tilted upward. After covering the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 with the main body 491a from the front, the rear end side is moved downward, and the three mounting pieces 493d are fitted into the grooves 464a on the rear surface of the speaker box 464. insert. As a result, the top add table 493 closes the opening 452 a of the top cover 452 . Then, from the rear of the door frame base unit 100, the screw portion 495b of the hand screw 495 is passed forward and screwed into the attachment piece portion 493d of the top add top plate 493 and tightened. As a result, the door frame top add unit 490 is attached to the door frame 3 .

With the door frame top add unit 490 attached, the LEDs mounted on the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are made to emit light, and the door is opened. The decorative body of the top ad decorative body 491 is translucent by the light emitted from the frame top decorative body 453 or by radiating light forward from the light guide shaft portion 469 (see FIG. 212). 491a can be decorated with light emission, and a predetermined light emission effect can be shown to the player.

Also, the decoration main body 491a of the top ad decoration 491 covers the semi-tubular door frame top decoration 453, but does not cover the top lower cover 465. The sound from the top central speaker and the top side speaker attached to the device can be output to the outside without being attenuated.

According to the door frame top add unit 490 of this embodiment, the door frame top plate 468, which is a cover for maintenance of the door frame top unit 450, is removed and replaced with the door frame top plate 468. Since the top add unit 490 can be attached, the door frame top add unit 490 can be attached without removing the door frame top unit 450 . At this time, since the door frame top add unit 490 has the top add decoration 491 covering the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 from the front, the door frame top decoration 453 is decorated. can be hidden and the decoration of the top ad decoration body 491 can be newly shown to the player. Therefore, the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 can be changed by attaching the door frame top add unit 490 without removing the door frame top unit 450 from the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Therefore, the cost for changing the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 can be reduced. That is, the door frame top add unit 490 can change the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 at low cost.

Further, as described above, by attaching the door frame top add unit 490, the decoration of the upper part of the door frame 3 can be easily changed. When exchanging, the door frame top add unit 490 corresponding to the decoration (concept) of the game board 5 can be attached. As a result, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be greatly changed at low cost, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players can be provided.

Furthermore, since the door frame top add unit 490 and the door frame top plate 468 are attached by hand screws 495, the door frame top add unit 490 and the door frame top plate 468 can be attached without tools such as a screwdriver. Easy to remove. Therefore, even in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the door frame top add unit 490 can be easily attached, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Further, since the door frame top add unit 490 does not have an electronic component such as a decorative board, it is not necessary to connect the wiring EC when installing it to the door frame 3, which makes the installation easy. can be Further, since the door frame top ad unit 490 has no electronic parts, even if the top ad decoration 491 or the like is removed due to damage for some reason, the wiring EC or the top ad decoration 491 or the like hangs down. never.

In the door frame top ad unit 490, the top ad decoration 491 covering the door frame top adornment 453 from the front is translucent. The advertisement decoration body 491 can be decorated with light emission. Therefore, the light emission effect of the door frame top unit 450 before the door frame top ad unit 490 is installed can be used as it is, and the player can enjoy the same light effect as before the installation.
In addition, there is no need to change the program for emitting light, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame top add unit 490 is attached from the rear side of the door frame 3 with the hand screw 495, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the hand screw 495 is operated from the outside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the door frame top add unit 490 from being illegally removed. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front face of the main body frame base 501 is positioned behind the hand screw 495, so that the hand screw 495 may be disengaged due to vibration or the like acting on the pachinko machine 1. Even if the door frame top add unit 490 is loosened, it does not fall off backward, and the attachment of the door frame top add unit 490 can be maintained.

Although not shown, the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 is formed with a recess into which the hand screw 495 is inserted when the door frame 3 is closed. The concave portion of the body frame base 501 may be brought into contact with the outer circumference of the head portion 495 a of the hand screw 495 . As a result, resistance can be applied to the hand screw 495 in the rotational direction, making it difficult for the hand screw 495 to loosen.

Although not shown, the door frame top add unit 490 may be provided with a through hole penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the light guide shaft portion 469 . As a result, the tip of the light guide shaft portion 469 is directly exposed forward through the through hole, so even if the door frame top add unit 490 is attached, the light emission effect with high luminance using the light guide shaft portion 469 can be achieved. can show people. Further, the door frame top add unit 490 is provided with a light guide portion that guides the light from the light guide shaft portion 469 or the like, and the light guide portion allows the door frame top add unit 490 to be placed at an arbitrary position (for example, like a hatchet). The center decoration body 491b) may be made to be luminous decoration.

Also, although not shown, the center decoration 491b of the top add decoration 491 in the door frame top add unit 490 has a shape that imitates a hatchet. When a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 looks into the central decorative body 491b (machete) from below, the mirror-like portion of the central decorative body 491b (imitation of the blade of a machete) is displayed. The game board 5 may be reflected in the portion where the game board 5 is shown. Specifically, for example, the pattern of the light guide plate such as the back front upper first decorative body 3201 in the back front upper effect unit 3200, the effect image displayed in a specific part on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. may be reflected and visible. When the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is reflected, mirrored characters may be displayed on the display screen so that they can be read correctly by being reflected in the machete blade portion of the central decoration 491b. As a result, the player can be surprised, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest can be suppressed. In addition, in order to make the player look into the central decorative body 491b from below, it is possible to display or inform the player of guidance to make the player look into it from below.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, in the central decorative body 491b of the top ad decorative body 491 in the door frame top ad unit 490, on the lower surface of the part imitating the blade of a machete, a predetermined shape is printed or pasted with a sticker. A pattern may be applied. Specifically, for example, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate of the back front upper first decorative body 3201 or the like is reflected and reflected on the part of the central decorative body 491b imitating a machete blade. A pattern may be applied. As a result, even though the pattern is not displayed on the light guide plate of the game board 5, when looking up at the central decorative body 491b, it is possible to make it appear as if the pattern of the light guide plate is reflected in the part imitating the blade. , can surprise and wonder the player, and entertain the player.

In addition, on the lower surface of the part of the central decorative body 491b imitating the blade of a machete, a pattern of the eyes (face) of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the game board 5 may be applied. As a result, when the player playing the pachinko machine 1 notices the pattern of the eyes provided on the lower surface of the central decorative body 491b, the player can always feel as if he or she is being watched by a predetermined character. can.

Also, although illustration is omitted, light from an LED mounted on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450 is guided, and a portion of the central decorative body 491b imitating a machete blade is provided. The pattern on the bottom surface of the can be made to emit light.

Furthermore, a predetermined pattern (or moving image) is projected like a projector from the game board 5 side or the door frame right side unit 430 side on the lower surface of the part of the central decorative body 491b imitating the blade of a machete. You can do it. At this time, the part imitating the blade of the machete in the central decoration 491b is used like a mirror to reflect the pattern projected on the central decoration 491b, thereby reflecting the player's hands, feet, upper plate 201, and so on. You may make it project on the production|presentation operation parts 301 grade|etc.,.

In addition, in the door frame top ad unit 490 of the present embodiment, the central decoration 491c of the top ad decoration 491 protrudes greatly forward, so that the player can be visually recognized at a portion visible to the player. It is desirable to provide a guide display (for example, a sticker) or provide a cautionary note (for example, a sticker) not to touch the central decorative body 491c imitating a machete blade.

[8-2. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 213 and the like. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200 in the same manner as in the above (first embodiment). It is for decoration. In the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 of the second embodiment, the right side surface of the door frame right side base 431 is formed as a flat surface without the reflector portion 431a. Although not shown, the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431 is provided with a reflector portion 431a that is recessed so as to open forward and leftward. The door frame right side right side decoration 440, which is decorated with polka dots by two-color molding or the like, is provided only in the vicinity of the lower part of the door frame right side unit 430 from the lower end to a predetermined height.

This door frame right side unit 430 includes a transparent right side panel 442 detachably provided on the right side of a door frame right side base 431 behind a tubular door frame right side decorative body 435, and a right side panel. A right side decorative sheet 443 provided between 442 and a door frame right side base 431 with a predetermined pattern and a right side panel 442 provided in the door frame base unit 100 are locked so as not to be detachable. and a lock lever 444 that

The door-frame right-side base 431 of the door-frame right-side unit 430 has a plurality of locking grooves 431b provided at intervals in the vertical direction on the front edge and the rear edge. and two protruding pieces 431c. The locking piece 442b and the locking piece 442c of the right side panel 442 are inserted into the locking groove 431b of the right side base 431 of the door frame. Also, the projecting piece 431 c of the door frame right side base 431 is inserted into the slit 442 e of the right side panel 442 .

The right side panel 442 includes a flat panel main body 442a, a lock piece 442b extending leftward from the top of the rear edge of the panel main body 442a, and a lock piece 442b on the rear edge of the panel main body 442a. A locking piece 442c extending leftward in a flat plate shape shorter than the locking piece 442b and the upper end side of the panel main body 442a It has an upper wall portion 442d extending leftward in a flat plate shape and two slits 442e penetrating through the upper wall portion 442d.

A panel body 442a of the right side panel 442 is formed to be elongated vertically. The front edge of the panel main body 442a is formed along the rear edge of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the rear edge of the panel main body 442a is vertically straightened along the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. formed. The locking piece 442b and the plurality of locking pieces 442c are provided at portions corresponding to the locking grooves 431b of the right side base 431 of the door frame. The plurality of locking pieces 442c are formed in an inverted L shape with their ends bent downward.

The right side panel 442 is arranged such that the upper wall portion 442d is positioned slightly above the projecting piece 431c of the door frame right side base 431, and the plurality of locking pieces 442c are inserted into the locking groove 431b of the door frame right side base 431. After the panel body 442a is brought into contact with the right side surface of the door frame right side base 431 via the right side decorative sheet 443, slide it downward so that the projecting piece 431c is inserted into the slit 442e. Thus, the plurality of locking pieces 442c can be locked to the locking grooves 431b.

The right side decorative sheet 443 is a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and is printed with a predetermined pattern. The materials of the right side decorative sheet 443 include "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", " polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "impact-resistant polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

The lock lever 444 is provided at the upper right corner (upper left corner in the rear view) on the rear surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and the lower end side is supported so as to be rotatable about the horizontal axis. As shown in FIG. 213(a), the lock lever 444 has its rear face upright in the locked state, and can be unlocked by rotating the upper end to move rearward. Although not shown, the lock lever 444 has a lock projection projecting forward from near its upper end. The upward sliding of 442b (right side panel 442) is restricted, and attachment and detachment of the right side panel 442 can be disabled (locked).

When the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment is assembled to the door frame 3, the locking pieces 442c of the right side panel 442 are locked to the locking grooves 431b of the door frame right side base 431. In addition, the projecting piece 431c of the right side base 431 of the door frame is inserted into the slit 442e to restrict its rightward movement. Further, the lock protrusion of the lock lever 444 in the lock position is in contact with the lock piece 442b of the right side panel 442 from above, thereby restricting upward movement. As a result, the right side panel 442 is in a non-detachable state.

When removing the right side panel 442, on the rear side of the door frame 3, the upper end of the lock lever 444 is pulled rearward so that the lock lever 444 is tilted. As a result, the lock protrusion (not shown) moves away from above the lock piece 442b of the right side panel 442, and the restriction (lock) of upward movement of the right side panel 442 is released. In this state, the right side panel 442 is slid upward to pull out the projecting piece 431c of the door frame right side base 431 from the slit 442e of the upper wall portion 442d. Release the lock. Then, when the right side panel 442 is moved rightward, the locking piece 442c and the locking piece 442b are removed from the locking groove 431b, and the right side panel 442 is removed from the door frame right side base 431. By removing the right side panel 442, the right side decorative sheet 443 can also be removed.

Thus, according to this embodiment, by operating the lock lever 444 on the rear side of the door frame 3, the right side panel 442 and the right side decorative sheet 443 of the door frame right side unit 430 can be removed. When the game board 5 is replaced due to a specification change or a model change in the pachinko machine 1, the right side panel 442 decorated with a decoration (concept) corresponding to the decoration (concept) of the game board 5 or a pattern is applied. To provide a pachinko machine 1 which is highly appealing to players, by replacing the right side decoration sheet 443 with the right side decorative sheet 443 which is installed in the door frame 3, so that the right side unit 430 of the door frame 3 can be easily changed. can be made easier.

In addition, since the right side panel 442 and the right side decorative sheet 443, which constitute most of the right side surface of the door frame right side unit 430, can be easily replaced, the entire door frame right side unit 430 does not have to be replaced. Also, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be greatly changed only by replacing it with a right side decorative sheet 443 having a different pattern, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal at a low cost can be provided.

Further, the right side panel 442 and the right side decorative sheet 443 can be easily removed simply by opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and operating the lock lever 444 on the rear side of the door frame 3. The workability on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be improved, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the lock lever 444 is provided at the upper right corner on the rear side of the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the front surface of the body frame base 501 is positioned behind the lock lever 444. It is positioned so that the lock lever 444 cannot rotate. As a result, the locking by the lock lever 444 is not arbitrarily released due to vibration or the like acting on the pachinko machine 1, and the lock is not released due to illegal operation of the lock lever 444.例文帳に追加

[9. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The unit base 3601 of the rear rear effect unit 3600 in the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is the fixed base of the present invention, and the rear rear lower decorative body 3700 of the present embodiment is the movable decorative body of the present embodiment. The first rotary decoration decoration substrate 3713, the second rotary decoration decoration substrate 3723, the third rotation decoration decoration substrate 3733, the fourth rotation decoration decoration substrate 3743, and the post-decoration decoration substrate 3753 in the form are the electronic components of the present invention. The gear cover 3787 attached to the right slide base 3781 in the right unit 3780 of the present embodiment is the movable base of the present invention, the wire locking portion 3787b of the present embodiment is the harness support portion of the present invention, and the The unit arm 3788 in the embodiment corresponds to the arm of the invention, the binding band CT in the embodiment corresponds to the movement restricting means of the invention, and the harness WH3 in the embodiment corresponds to the harness of the invention.

[10. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the back rear effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the back rear lower decoration 3700 that moves according to the progress of the game is provided in the back rear lower decoration 3700. A harness WH3 composed of a plurality of wirings EC connected to the rear decorative body decoration board 3753 and the like is supported by the wiring locking portion 3787b provided on the rear surface of the gear cover 3787 of the right unit 3780. Then, along the unit arm 3788 whose one end side is connected to the gear cover 3787 so as to extend outward from the gear cover 3787, the other end side of the unit arm 3788 is guided toward the unit base 3601 side. there is When the rear lower decoration 3700 is moved as the game progresses, the unit arm 3788 is relatively displaced (rotated) due to the movement of the lower rear decoration 3700. Therefore, the unit arm 3788 of the harness WH3 is moved. A portion near one end side moves the most due to the movement of the rear lower decoration body 3700, and the harness WH3 is easily detached at the wire locking portion 3787b near the one end side of the unit arm 3788. At this time, since the movement of the harness WH3 is restricted by bundling it with the binding band CT at the wire locking portion 3787b, the tension on the harness WH3 is increased by moving the back rear lower decoration body 3700 according to the progress of the game. Even if the harness WH3 tries to move in the direction of being detached from the wire locking portion 3787b due to the action of the above elements, the binding band CT can suppress the movement of the harness WH3 along the wire locking portion 3787b. It is possible to prevent the harness WH3 from coming off the stop portion 3787b. Further, since the harness WH3 made up of a plurality of wires EC is restricted from moving within the wire locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT, the wires EC are separated one by one from the harness WH3 at the wire locking portion 3787b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent some of the loose wires EC from coming off the wire locking portion 3787b, and to avoid disconnection of the wires EC from the wire locking portion 3787b. can be made Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the trouble caused by the harness WH3 being detached from the back rear lower decoration body 3700, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. The performance (movable performance) by the back rear lower decoration body 3700 can be surely enjoyed, and the decrease in interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the movement of the harness WH3 is regulated by the binding band CT at the wiring locking portion 3787b near one end of the unit arm 3788 where the harness WH3 is most likely to move due to the movement of the back rear lower decoration 3700. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the harness WH3 from coming off from the wire locking portion 3787b due to the movement of the back rear lower decoration body 3700. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

In addition, at the wiring locking portion 3787b near one end side of the unit arm 3788 where the harness WH3 is most likely to move due to the movement of the back rear lower decoration body 3700, the binding band CT restricts the movement of the harness WH3. Even if a force acting to move the harness WH3 due to the movement of the decoration 3700 acts, the force is interrupted at the wire locking portion 3787b where the binding band CT is provided, and the rear decoration decoration substrate 3753 is formed. It is possible to avoid acting on the isolateral side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the harness WH3 from coming off the back-rear decorative body decoration board 3753 or the like when the back-rear lower decoration body 3700 is moved, so that the back-rear decorative body decoration board 3753 or the like can be securely attached. It can be operated, and the player can be entertained in a good state with the performance by the rear-back and lower decorative body 3700, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, the binding band CT at the wire locking portion 3787b near one end side of the unit arm 3788 can cut off the force to move the harness WH3. A portion between the portion 3787b and the rear decoration body decoration substrate 3753 or the like can be made difficult to move. As a result, in the wiring locking portion 3787c provided between the wiring locking portion 3787b in which the binding band CT is provided and the rear decorative body decoration substrate 3753 or the like, the binding band CT can be omitted. is possible, the labor involved in manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, in the back rear lower decorative body 3700, a wire locking portion 3787b is provided on the rear surface of the gear cover 3787 so that the harness WH3 can be routed along, and the harness WH3 extending outward from the gear cover 3787 can be connected as a unit. Since it is guided along the arm 3788 to the unit base 3601 side, the harness WH3 connected to the back rear decoration body decoration board 3753 of the back rear bottom decoration body 3700 and the like is connected to the gear cover 3787 from the front side of the player. , the unit arm 3788 or the like to make it difficult to see, and the appearance of the back and bottom decorative body 3700 can be improved to entertain the player.

In addition, since the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b for supporting the harness WH3 is a free end, the harness WH3 can be easily inserted from the open free end side of the wiring locking portion 3787b. can be improved. At this time, since a hook (not shown) protruding toward the gear cover 3787 is provided at the tip of the wiring locking portion 3787b, the harness WH3 is attached together with the wiring locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT. When the binding band CT is tightened and bundled, even if the binding band CT slides together with the harness WH3 in the direction of the free end of the wiring locking portion 3787b, the binding band CT abuts on the hook portion to prevent further sliding. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the harness WH3 from slipping off from the tip of the wire locking portion 3787b together with the CT, and can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

Furthermore, the harness WH3 made up of a plurality of wires EC is fastened together with the wire locking portion 3787b to the wire locking portion 3787b extending from the rear surface of the gear cover 3787 in the back rear lower decorative body 3700 with a binding band CT. Therefore, the sliding resistance between the harness WH3 and the wiring locking portion 3787b can be increased by tightening with the binding band CT, and the harness WH3 can be made difficult to come off from the wiring locking portion 3787b. In addition, since the harness WH3 made up of a plurality of wires EC is bundled together with the wire locking portion 3787b by tightening with the binding band CT, the wires EC are separated one by one from the harness WH3 at the wire locking portion 3787b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a part of the loose wiring EC from coming off the wiring locking portion 3787b, and to avoid disconnection of the wiring EC from the wiring locking portion 3787b. be able to.

In addition, since the harness WH3 made up of a plurality of wires EC is bundled together with the wire locking portion 3787b by being tightened by the binding band CT, depending on the tightening force of the binding band CT, the wiring of the harness WH3 while being bound by the binding band CT may occur. The locking portion 3787b can be slid in the longitudinal direction. As a result, when it is desired to check the gear cover 3787 hidden by the harness WH3 and the members in front of the gear cover 3787 during maintenance of the back rear lower decoration body 3700 or the like, the harness is not bundled with the binding band CT in the prior art. Whereas the wiring EC was moved (slid) one by one from WH3, in the present embodiment, a plurality of wiring ECs (harnesses WH3) can be slid at once, which facilitates the confirmation work. As a result, the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, since the binding band CT is composed of the band portion CTa for binding the harness WH3 and the lock portion CTb that cannot retract the band portion CTa, that is, the band portion CTa can be inserted only in one direction, the wire locking portion 3787b and the harness WH3, the end of the band portion CTa wound around the harness WH3 is inserted into the lock portion CTb and simply pulled to lock the wire locking portion 3787b and the harness WH3 in a tightened state, thereby binding the harness WH3. can enhance sexuality. At this time, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the wiring locking portion 3787b, for some reason, a force is applied to the binding band CT to rotate it about the axis of the harness WH3. Also, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with the wire locking portion 3787b, it is possible to prevent the binding band CT from rotating around the axis of the harness WH3. It is possible to prevent the lock portion CTb and the tip of the band portion CTa extending from the lock portion CTb from coming into contact with other members, thereby preventing troubles.

Furthermore, since the harness WH3 supported through the wire locking portion 3787b can be visually recognized from behind the back rear lower decoration body 3700, all the wires EC constituting the harness WH3 can be prevented from moving by the binding band CT. To easily confirm whether or not a regulation is imposed, to prevent shipment of a defective product in which a part of wiring EC is disconnected, and to facilitate confirmation work of a binding band CT in maintenance or the like.例文帳に追加be able to.

In addition, since the harness WH3 can be visually recognized through the wire locking portion 3787b, it is possible to easily perform the work of restricting the movement of the harness WH3 with the binding band CT (the work of binding with the binding band CT). can be improved.

Furthermore, since the harness WH3 is visible through the wiring locking portion 3787b, for example, the binding band CT is made to have low light transmittance and a color different from that of the plurality of wirings EC constituting the harness WH3. Then, when the harness WH3 (a plurality of wires EC) and the band portion CTa are seen through the wire locking portion 3787b, it is possible to clearly visually recognize that the band portion CTa straddles the harness WH3. The bundling of the harness WH3 can be reliably confirmed, and the work of bundling the wire locking portion 3787b and the harness WH3 with the bundling band CT can be facilitated.

In addition, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is made to contact the harness WH3 obliquely, the contact area can be widened compared to the case of contact in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH3. , and the frictional resistance between the band portion CTa and the harness WH3 can be increased. Therefore, the movement of the harness WH3 can be sufficiently restricted by the binding band CT, and it is possible to prevent the harness WH3 and the wiring EC from being detached from the wiring locking portion 3787b, thereby avoiding problems.

In addition, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is obliquely contacted with the harness WH3, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, when the harness WH3 is tightened and bound by the binding band CT, a force acts on the harness WH3 (wiring EC) from the band portion CTa of the binding band CT. There is a risk that the insulating coating film that covers the will deteriorate in an early stage, and problems such as electric leakage and short circuits will easily occur. On the other hand, when the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH3 obliquely, it is compared with the case where the band portion CTa is wound in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH3. Thus, the contact area between the band portion CTa and the harness WH3 (wiring EC) can be widened. Therefore, even if they are tightened with the same strength by the binding band CT, by making them contact obliquely to widen the contact area, the force acting upon tightening can be widely dispersed and made relatively small, so that the insulation film is not affected by the insulation coating. Early deterioration can be suppressed, and problems such as electrical leakage and short circuits can be suppressed.

Also, the wire locking portion 3787b is made to extend from the gear cover 3787 in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the harness WH3 in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the harness WH3 when tension is applied to the harness WH3. Therefore, even if the harness WH3 is pulled or the harness WH3 is pulled during the movement of the back rear lower decoration body 3700 according to the progress of the game, the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, maintenance, etc., the wire locking portion At 3787b, the harness WH3 moves in the direction opposite to the tip, so that the harness WH3 does not come off from the wire locking portion 3787b, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects. can.

Furthermore, if a plurality of wirings EC (insulating coating) connected to the back-rear decoration decoration substrate 3753 of the back-rear bottom decoration 3700 and the like are made of a bright but inconspicuous color such as white or gray, the back-rear bottom decoration can be used. Even if the portion of the harness WH3 that is not supported by the wiring locking portion 3787b protrudes outward from the front projection range of the back rear lower decoration 3700 when the movable effect by the body 3700 is executed, the wiring is not provided to the player. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the EC (harness WH3), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the movable performance by the back rear lower decoration body 3700.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the wire locking portion 3787b extends in the shape of a flat plate or a band plate, the wire locking portion 3787b and the harness WH3 are more easily separated than when the wire locking portion 3787b is in the shape of a rod. Since the contact area can be widened, the frictional resistance can be increased. As a result, the action and effect of the binding band CT can be exhibited more easily, and the movement of the harness WH3 can be reliably restricted to further avoid problems.

In addition, since the wire locking portion 3787b extends in a flat plate shape or a band plate shape, the plurality of wires EC constituting the harness WH3 in the wire locking portion 3787b are arranged along the surface of the wire locking portion 3787b. It becomes easier to spread so that it lines up. This makes it easier to radiate heat from the wiring EC. Further, in this case, since the harness WH3 can be visually recognized through the wire locking portion 3787b, it is possible to easily check the plurality of wires EC constituting the harness WH3 one by one through the wire locking portion 3787b.

Furthermore, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wire locking portion 3787b opposite to the harness WH3 (the portion far from the gear cover 3787), the following advantages can be obtained. It is possible to obtain the function and effect. More specifically, when the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the side of the wire locking portion 3787b that is in contact with the harness WH3, the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the lock portion CTb is attached to the gear cover 3787. Since the gear cover 3787 becomes an obstacle, it becomes difficult to perform the binding work. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the wire locking portion 3787b on the side opposite to the harness WH3, when the harness WH3 is bundled with the binding band CT, the lock portion CTb faces the operator side, the wire locking portion 3787b and the harness WH3 can be tightened by pulling the tip of the band portion CTa protruding from the lock portion CTb in a direction away from the gear cover 3787, thereby improving workability. can be further improved.

In addition, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wire locking portion 3787b opposite to the harness WH3, the lock portion CTb faces the operator side as described above. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the front end of the band portion CTa is inserted through the lock portion CTb, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which facilitates operation check.

Furthermore, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wire lock portion 3787b opposite to the harness WH3, the wire lock portion 3787b is formed between the harness WH3 and the lock portion CTb. Since the wire locking portion 3787b is interposed, the wire locking portion 3787b can be used as a blocking wall for blocking the contact of the locking portion CTb of the binding band CT with the harness WH3. Thereby, there can exist the following outstanding effects. More specifically, when the tip of the band portion CTa is inserted into the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and the tip of the band portion CTa is pulled to bundle, if the wire EC of the harness WH3 is in contact with the lock portion CTb, A part of the wire EC may be pulled into the lock portion CTb together with the pulled band portion CTa, and the insulating coating of the wire EC may be broken. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the wire locking portion 3787b on the side opposite to the harness WH3. is interposed, and the harness WH3 (wiring EC) is not in contact with the lock portion CTb. is not pulled into the lock portion CTb, the insulation coating of the wiring EC can be prevented from being broken, and the harness WH3 bound with the binding band CT can be protected.

In addition, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 3787b opposite to the harness WH3, the wiring locking portion 3787b can be removed from the wiring locking portion 3787b for maintenance or disassembly of the pachinko machine 1. When removing the WH3, the work of cutting the binding band CT (band portion CTa) can be facilitated. More specifically, as described above, since the block-shaped lock portion CTb faces the operator, a cutting tool such as a nipper is guided along the lock portion CTb to prevent damage to other parts. The band portion CTa can be easily cut without cutting.

In addition, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is in contact with the harness WH3 obliquely, the flat plate-like or band plate-like wiring locking portion 3787b is connected with the wiring locking portion 3787b by the binding band CT. When the harness WH3 is bundled, since the wiring locking portion 3787b has a width, the band portion CTa of the binding band CT can be automatically brought into oblique contact with the harness WH3, as described above. It is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits a wide range of functions and effects.

In addition, since the hook is provided at the tip of the wire locking portion 3787b, if the tip of the wire locking portion 3787b including the hook is formed obliquely so as to move away from the gear cover 3787 toward the tip, the wire can be locked. The harness WH3 and the binding band CT can be easily inserted between the wire locking portion 3787b and the gear cover 3787 from the distal end side of the portion 3787b, and workability can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the beginning when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the door frame top provided on the upper part of the outer periphery of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 The unit 450 is used in a state where the whole can be seen. In other words, it is used without the door frame top add unit 490 attached. In this initial state, when a plurality of LEDs respectively mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are appropriately lighted, the door frame top unit 450 The door frame top decoration 453 can be decorated with light emission, and the player can be entertained by the light emission performance of the door frame top unit 450.例文帳に追加Then, for example, a change (model change) of the game board 5 provided in the main body frame 4, a full model change or a minor change, a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, an event in the game hall, etc. Then, the door frame top add unit 490 is attached to the door frame top unit 450 . Specifically, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the hand screw 495 is rotated from the rear of the door frame 3 to remove the door frame top plate 468 of the door frame top unit 450 and remove the top upper cover. The opening 452a of 452 is made visible. Next, after the top add top plate 493 of the door frame top add unit 490 is fitted into the opening 452a, the hand screw 495 is rotated from the rear of the door frame 3, and the mounting piece of the top add top plate 493 is attached. The top plate 493 is attached (fixed) by screwing it into the portion 493d. After that, by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 to which the door frame top add unit 490 is attached can be obtained. When removing the top add table 493, the original state can be restored by attaching the door frame top table 468 to the opening 452a after removing the top plate 493 in reverse order. When the door frame top add unit 490 is attached to the door frame top unit 450 in this way, the decoration of the part where the door frame top add unit 490 is attached can be changed, so that the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be greatly changed. The changed appearance can strongly attract the interest of the player and enhance the appeal to the player.
In addition, with the door frame top add unit 490 attached, they are mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top unit 450, respectively. When a plurality of LEDs are appropriately illuminated, the door frame top ad unit 490 can be decorated with light emission through the door frame top unit 450, and the light emitting performance of the door frame top ad unit 490 amuses the player and reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 can be installed by simply attaching the door frame top add unit 490 so as to cover the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 from the front while keeping the door frame 3 and the door frame top unit 450 as they are. Since the appearance can be greatly changed, it is not necessary to remove the door frame 3 and the door frame top unit 450 and replace them with other ones, and the cost required for changing the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Therefore, by attaching the door frame top add unit 490, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of increasing the appeal to the players at a low cost.

Further, the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452 in the door frame top unit 450 is provided on the side opposite to the central side of the door window 101a on the peripheral surface of the door frame top unit 450, that is, on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450. As a result, the opening 452a of the door frame top unit 450 (the door frame top plate 468 and the top ad plate 493) can be made difficult to see from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the door frame top plate 468 and the top add top plate 493 are not decorated, deterioration of appearance can be prevented, and the decorative effect of the door frame top add unit 490 can be exhibited. In addition, an inexpensive door frame top plate 468 and a top add plate 493 with no decoration can be used, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, after the door frame top plate 468 is removed from the opening 452a of the top cover 452 of the door frame top unit 450, the top add plate 493 is fitted into the opening 452a. The rear end of the door frame top add unit 490 is prevented from protruding from the outer periphery of the door frame 3, compared to the case where the frame top unit 450 and the door frame 3 are sandwiched from the front and back and the door frame top add unit 490 is attached. Therefore, the door frame top add unit 490 can be made to look like it was attached to the pachinko machine 1 from the beginning rather than being attached later, which makes the player feel disappointed. can be avoided, the appearance of the mounting state of the door frame top add unit 490 can be improved, and the decorative effect of the door frame top add unit 490 can be fully exhibited to enhance the appeal to a player. can be done.

In addition, the door frame top add unit 490 is attached so as to cover the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame top add unit 490 is decorated with light through the door frame top unit 450. Since the door frame top add unit 490 is not provided with an LED (decoration board) for decorating the door frame top add unit 490, there is no need to connect the wiring EC to the door frame top add unit 490. Even if the frame top add unit 490 is detached from the door frame top unit 450, the wiring EC prevents the door frame top add unit 490 from hanging down. Only the decoration of the covered door frame top decoration body 453 becomes visible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 does not deteriorate, and the use of the pachinko machine 1 can be continued without problems.

Furthermore, since the door frame top add unit 490 can be attached and detached by rotating the hand screw 495 from the rear of the door frame 3, the door frame 3 can be attached to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in the closed state, the door frame top plate 468 and the door frame top add unit 490 of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be removed, and the door frame top plate 468 and the door frame top add unit 490 cannot be removed. It is possible to avoid mischief such as being removed, and fraudulent acts through the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452 that appear when the door frame top plate 468 and the door frame top add unit 490 are removed.

Further, the door frame top plate 468 and the top add plate 493 can be removed by rotating the hand screw 495 from behind the door frame 3. Since the top plate 468 and the top add top plate 493 cannot be removed, even if some force acts on the top add top plate 493, it can be made difficult to come off from the door frame top unit 450.例文帳に追加In addition, since the door frame top plate 468 and the top add top plate 493 are attached with the hand screw 495, the attachment strength of the door frame top add unit 490 is increased compared to the case where the door frame top add unit 490 is attached by locking. be able to. Therefore, even if some force is applied to the top add panel 493, it is possible to make it difficult for the door frame top panel 468 or the door frame top add unit 490 to come off. To surely prevent the game from being interrupted and the interest of the player to be lowered, and to allow the player to enjoy the game on the pachinko machine 1 in a good condition and suppress the decline of the interest. can be done.

Further, since the door frame top ad unit 490 is designed to be decorated with light emission through the door frame top unit 450, the program for effecting the light emission effect by the door frame top unit 450 is provided in the door frame top ad unit. The pachinko machine 1 can be used as it is even when the 490 is attached, and an increase in cost required for changing the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame top add unit 490 is decorated with light through the door frame top unit 450, an LED (decoration board) for decorating the door frame top add unit 490 with light is not provided. Therefore, the cost of the door frame top add unit 490 can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of increasing the appeal to the players can be provided at a low cost. In addition, since the door frame top add unit 490 is not provided with an LED (decorative board), it is not necessary to connect the wiring EC when attaching the door frame top add unit 490, and it takes time and effort to attach and detach the door frame top add unit 490. can be made easier.

In addition, since the door frame top plate 468 and the top add plate 493 are attached by the hand screws 495, the door frame top plate 468 and the top add plate 468 can be installed without using tools such as screwdrivers and wrenches. Since the top plate 493 can be easily attached and detached, it is possible to reduce the labor required for attaching the door frame top add unit 490 and reduce the cost for changing the decoration of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加can.

Furthermore, the hand screw 495 is used to attach the door frame top plate 468 and the top add top plate 493, and the body frame 4 accommodates the head 495a of the hand screw 495 when the door frame 3 is closed. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is used with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire may enter from the outside to rotate the hand screw 495. Even if an attempt is made to turn the hand screw 495, since the head of the hand screw 495 is accommodated in the groove portion of the main body frame 4, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from reaching the head of the hand screw 495. It is possible to prevent the door frame top plate 468 and the top add plate 493 from being removed by being turned, and the opening 452a from which the door frame top plate 468 and the top add plate 493 are removed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities through

It is desirable that the hand screw 495 does not come off the door frame 3 when the door frame top plate 468 or the top add plate 493 is attached or detached. As a result, when the door frame top plate 468 or the top add plate 493 is attached or detached, the hand screw 495 detached from the door frame 3 may be lost, or it may enter the body frame 4 and cause a problem. and can be avoided.

Moreover, it is desirable to provide the body frame 4 with a contact portion that contacts the head portion 495a of the hand screw 495 when the door frame 3 is closed. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is in use with the door frame 3 closed to the main body frame 4, the hand screw 495 may be rotated due to vibration acting on the pachinko machine 1 or contact with an unauthorized tool. Even if a force acts, the contact portion is in contact with the head portion 495a so that resistance can be applied to the rotation of the hand screw 495, thereby preventing the hand screw 495 from rotating. It can be restrained and the hand screw 495 can be unintentionally dislodged or tampered with trying to turn the hand screw 495 can be resisted.

In the door frame top add unit 490, the light through the door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457, respectively. A top add decoration in front of a portion of the door frame top add unit 490 where the door frame top unit 450 is decorated with light emission by providing a light guide means capable of guiding the direct light from a plurality of LEDs. A part of the body 491 different from the decoration main body 491a (for example, the central decoration 491b) may be made to be luminous decoration. As a result, even if the door frame top add unit 490 is not provided with an LED for decorating the door frame 490, the light from the door frame top unit 450 can be guided by the light guide means to enhance the decorative effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a light-emitting effect that can more amuse the player and strongly attracting the interest of the player. .

In addition, since the door frame top plate 468 of the door frame top unit 450 can be removed from the rear of the door frame 3 by rotating the hand screw 495, for example, different decorations can be applied. By preparing another door frame top plate 468 and replacing it with the door frame top plate 468, the decoration of the portion of the door frame top plate 468 in the door frame top unit 450 can be easily changed. . This also makes it possible to change the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 at a low cost, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the players by changing the appearance.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the rear cell 1130 provided behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) on the game board 5 When the cell fixing piece 1140 is attached through the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 provided in the rear part of the center accessory 2500 etc., the rear cell 1130 is connected to the game panel 1100 and the flat plate-like body piece 1141 of the cell fixing piece 1140 , and the body piece 1141 restricts the rearward movement. At this time, since the outer shape of the protrusion 1142 protruding forward from the body piece 1141 is smaller than the inner shape of the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130, the inner circumference of the support hole 1131 and the protrusion 1142 Since a gap is formed between the outer circumference and the rear cell 1130, it is possible to move the rear cell 1130 in the direction along the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (vertical direction and horizontal direction) within the range of the gap. The relative shrinkage difference of the rear cell 1130 with respect to the game panel 1100 due to the environment can be absorbed. In addition, since the protrusion 1142 protruding forward from the main body piece 1141 protrudes longer than the thickness of the rear cell 1130, the space between the game panel 1100 and the main body piece 1141 is larger than the thickness of the rear cell 1130. Since the gap is formed, the rear cell 1130 can be moved in the front-rear direction within the range of the gap. It can absorb the waves. For this reason, even if the sheet-like rear cell 1130 provided behind the transparent game panel 1100 expands or contracts more than the game panel 1100 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the rear cell 1130 does not move. is supported by a cell fixing piece 1140 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 through a support hole 1131 so as to be movable within a certain range in the vertical, horizontal, and longitudinal directions. Since it is supported in a stretchable state with respect to 1100, the rear cell 1130 can freely stretch and contract. Therefore, even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes, wrinkles and cracks do not occur in the rear cell 1130, and the decorative effect of the rear cell 1130 can be maintained. The pattern of 1130 can improve the appearance of the game area 5a, and can entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, since the support hole 1131 (cell fixing piece 1140) in the rear cell 1130 is provided behind the center accessory 2500 or the like provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, a predetermined pattern is removed. The support hole 1131 can be made difficult to see by the front center accessory 2500 or the like, and deterioration of the appearance due to the view of the support hole 1131 (cell fixing piece 1140) can be suppressed. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can improve its appearance and enhance its appeal to players.

In addition, since the rear cell 1130 is provided on the game panel 1100 in a stretchable state using the cell fixing piece 1140 and is not attached to the game panel 1100 as in the prior art, the transparent game panel 1100 can be decorated. It is possible to simplify the labor for the pachinko machine 1 and suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加More specifically, in the game panel 1100 to be cut, the rear cells 1130 can be attached using the cell fixing pieces 1140 after cutting, so the rear cells 1130 are not damaged during the cutting of the game panel 1100. do not have. In addition, the machined surface is not roughened due to the difference in material between the game panel 1100 and the rear cell 1130, and a finishing process after the machined process can be omitted. On the other hand, in the game panel 1100 formed by cutting or injection molding so as to have the opening 1112, since the rear cell 1130 is not attached, the labor required for attachment can be eliminated. Therefore, the rear cell 1130 can be provided behind the transparent game panel 1100 more easily than in the prior art, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the rear cells 1130 are provided behind a part of the game panel 1100, the usage of the rear cells 1130 can be reduced compared to the case where the rear cells 1130 are provided on the entire surface of the game panel 1100. can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

By the way, if the game panel 1100 is transparent, the game panel 1100 is difficult for the player to see. Therefore, depending on the player, it becomes difficult for the player to focus on the game ball B flowing in front of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B becomes difficult to see, thereby reducing interest in the game. There is a risk that it will be lost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a rear cell 1130 having a predetermined pattern is provided behind a part of the transparent game panel 1100, so that the player can move inside the game area 5a. Since the pattern of the rear cell 1130 is easily focused when viewed, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is naturally focused just by looking at the game panel 1100, and the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is focused. The circulating game balls B can be easily visually recognized, and the movement of the game balls B can be enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, since the rear cell 1130 having a predetermined pattern is provided in a part of the rear of the transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the rear cell 1130 is provided in the rear due to the pattern of the rear cell 1130. The ornament can be hidden from the player side. Therefore, if a decoration capable of emitting light is provided behind the rear cell 1130, the pattern of the rear cell 1130 prevents the player from noticing the existence of the decoration when the decoration is not decorated with light. can be made Then, when the decoration body is decorated with light emission according to the progress of the game, the rear cell 1130 is decorated with light emission from the light from the rear decoration body. To make a player aware of the presence of a body, greatly startle the player, make the player strongly think that a chance has arrived, and show the player a luminous performance with a higher performance effect. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, as described above, since the rear cell 1130 can hide the decorative body provided in the rear so that it cannot be seen from the player side, the decorative body can be hidden from the game panel by the rear cell 1130. When the movable ornament is moved in accordance with the progress of the game to a state where it can be visually recognized through the opening 1112 penetrating in the front and rear of the 1100, a movable effect is produced in which the movable ornament appears in accordance with the progress of the game. I can show you. Therefore, by the appearance of the movable decoration, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, so that an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage over the player (for example, a "big win" game state). ) is likely to occur, heightening the sense of anticipation for the game and suppressing the loss of interest.

Further, since the rear cell 1130 is supported on the rear surface of the game panel 1100 by the cell fixing piece 1140, the rear cell 1130 can be easily attached and detached from the game panel 1100 by removing the cell fixing piece 1140 from the game panel 1100. can be made As a result, by removing the cell fixing piece 1140 from the game panel 1100, the rear cell 1130 with a different pattern can be attached or replaced with respect to the game panel 1100, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be changed in specification or model. can be easily dealt with, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Also, since the game panel 1100 and the rear cell 1130 are separated, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, when a decorative film is attached to a game panel as in the prior art, if an opening is provided in the game panel, the portion of the decorative film corresponding to the opening is cut off. I couldn't decorate it. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the game panel 1100 and the rear cell 1130 are separated, even if the game panel 1100 is provided with the opening 1112, a part of the rear cell 1130 is replaced by the opening 1112. To easily provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to a player by making it possible to decorate the inside of the opening 1112 by extending it inward, to make it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 different in appearance from the conventional ones. can be done. At this time, in the center accessory 2500 or the like attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, a part of the rear surface cell 1130 extends behind the portion closer to the center than the peripheral edge of the opening 1112. The corresponding portion of the center accessory 2500 can be decorated from behind with the pattern of the rear cell 1130, and the appearance within the game area 5a can be improved.

Furthermore, since the cell fixing piece 1140 is made transparent, the cell fixing piece 1140 can be made difficult to see from the front through the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130, thereby suppressing deterioration of the appearance in the game area 5a. can be done.

In addition, since the cell fixing piece 1140 is provided with a positioning pin 1144 that protrudes forward from a position different from the protrusion 1142 on the body piece 1141 and is inserted into the positioning hole 1110b of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. A mounting screw screwed into a mounting hole 1110a of a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through a mounting hole 1143 and a positioning pin 1144 can make the cell fixing piece 1140 non-rotatable about the longitudinal axis. Therefore, if the cell fixing piece 1140 rotates for some reason, the cell fixing piece 1140 may come into contact with another member, causing a problem, or the cell fixing piece 1140 may become easily visible to the player, causing damage to the game area 5a. You can prevent it from looking bad or doing it.

In addition, since the support hole 1131 of the rear cell 1130 is provided behind the peripheral wall portion 2511a projecting forward like a wall in the center base 2511 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 is formed transparent. Also, the peripheral wall portion 2511a protruding forward like a wall refracts light irregularly, making the rear support hole 1131 more difficult to see. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing deterioration, improving the appearance of the game area 5a, and enhancing the appeal to players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first grand winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 provided in the attacker unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5 have a flat plate shape. The guide piece 2636 and the first big prize opening door 2641 are provided so that at least a part overlaps with the starting opening solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the opening and closing link 2637, and the opening and closing link 2647 in plan view. , the dimensions of the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction can be reduced. In addition, since the plate-like guide piece 2636 and the first grand prize opening door body 2641 are provided so as to intersect with the opening/closing link 2637 and the opening/closing link 2647 when viewed from the front, It is possible to reduce the vertical dimension of the winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 . In addition, since the flat plate-shaped guide piece 2636 and the first big prize opening door body 2641 are provided above or below the starting solenoid 2632 and the first attacker solenoid 2642, the guide piece 2636 and the first big prize in plan view The opening door body 2641, the starting opening solenoid 2632, and the first attacker solenoid 2642 can be provided so as to overlap each other, and the dimensions of the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 in the front-rear direction are reduced. becomes possible. Furthermore, since the flat guide piece 2636 and the first big prize door 2641 are provided with cutouts 2636b and 2641b for avoiding contact with the opening/closing links 2637 and 2647, the opening/closing links 2637 and opening/closing link 2647 can be brought as close as possible to guide piece 2636 and first big prize winning opening door body 2641 . Since the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be made smaller than before, the space for arranging other members (decorations) in the pachinko machine 1 can be relatively widened. The space can be used to enlarge the decoration or provide a new decoration. Further, as described above, since the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be made smaller than before, the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be arranged more freely, and the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be provided at positions different from those of the conventional pachinko machine. As such, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with an unprecedented appearance, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players can be provided.

In addition, since the guide piece 2636 and the first big prize opening door body 2641 are provided with a notch portion 2636b and a notch portion 2641b for avoiding contact with the opening and closing link 2637 and the opening and closing link 2647, the second starting opening opening and closing unit 2630 Also, in order to downsize the first big prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, the starter solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the opening/closing link 2637, the opening/closing link 2647, the guide piece 2636, and the first big prize winning opening door body 2641 are tightly packed. , opening and closing link 2637 and opening and closing link 2647 can be avoided from contacting the guide piece 2636 and the first big winning opening door body 2641 by the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b, so that the starting opening solenoid 2632 and The guide piece 2636 and the first big prize opening door body 2641 can be advanced and retreated by the first attacker solenoid 2642 without any problem, and the functions of the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big prize opening opening/closing unit 2640 are exhibited reliably. be able to.

Furthermore, in the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, a container-shaped unit case consisting of a first case portion 2633, a first case portion 2643, a second case portion 2634, and a second case portion 2644 2635 and unit case 2645 accommodate and support the starting solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the opening/closing link 2637, the opening/closing link 2647, the guide piece 2636, and the first prize winning opening door body 2641. It does not have a built-in decoration board on which a sensor for detecting the ball B or a light emitting means such as an LED is mounted, and the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 are made smaller. can be In addition, since no sensor, decoration board, etc. are built in, the sensor and the decoration board can be arranged independently of the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640. The degree of freedom in designing the distribution route can be increased, and design man-hours associated with changing the distribution route (flow path) can be saved, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced and the delivery time can be shortened.

By the way, in order to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the unit, the sensor is removed from the case and the unit without the built-in sensor is used depending on the model used. It is conceivable to use However, in this case, if you try to obtain a mass production effect by using the same unit in multiple models, you will have to manufacture both a unit with the sensor attached and a unit with the sensor removed from the same unit. This complicates the production of the unit and makes it difficult to achieve a sufficient effect of mass production. Also, if there are units without sensors in the same unit, there is a risk of erroneously assembling units without sensors when assembling the pachinko machine, causing problems. At the same time, it is necessary to check the unit when assembling it, which is troublesome and increases the cost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second starting opening opening and closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening and closing unit 2640 are not provided with sensors or the like (not built in). Regardless, the same second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be used, so if only the same second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 are manufactured Good and sufficient mass production effect can be obtained. In addition, since there is no identical second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 or first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 with different functions, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 or the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2630 or the first large winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be It is not necessary to check the prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects due to erroneous assembly, simplify the labor required for assembly, and reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, the guide piece 2636 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 advance and retreat the starting opening solenoid 2632 and the first attacker solenoid 2642 because they are solenoids. , Compared to the case where the starter solenoid 2632 and the first attacker solenoid 2642 are used as drive motors, the response of the guide piece 2636 and the first big prize winning opening door body 2641 to advance and retreat can be made faster. In addition, since the plungers of the solenoids as the starting opening solenoid 2632 and the first attacker solenoid 2642 are arranged to move in and out in the left and right direction, the front and rear direction of the second starting opening opening and closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening and closing unit 2640 The size can be reduced, and the space behind the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to increase the size of the accessories and decorations behind the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, or to arrange new accessories and decorations behind them. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by them, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the accessories in the back, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the second starting opening opening and closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening and closing unit 2640, the game ball B cannot be contacted with respect to the guide piece 2636 and the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b of the first big winning opening door body 2641 When the guide piece 2636 and the first big prize winning opening door body 2641 are protruding forward by the starter solenoid 2632 and the first attacker solenoid 2642, the game ball B does not move through the guide piece 2636 or the first large Even if the game ball B circulates on the winning opening door 2641, the game ball B does not come into contact with the notch 2636b or the notch 2641b penetrating the guide piece 2636 or the first big winning opening door 2641 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the direction of circulation of the game ball B circulating on the guide piece 2636 or the first big prize gate door 2641 changes, or the game ball B stops on the guide piece 2636 or the first big prize gate door 2641. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles such as unintentionally playing games, and to prevent the players from losing their interest due to distrust caused by the occurrence of troubles.

Furthermore, in the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640, the notch 2636b and the notch 2641b of the guide piece 2636 and the first big winning opening door body 2641 are moved forward from the rear end side. Since it is provided in a notch shape so as to be recessed, the rear end side of the guide piece 2636 and the notch portion 2636b and the notch portion 2641b of the first big prize opening door body 2641 is opened backward. It is possible to easily insert the opening/closing link 2637 or the opening/closing link 2647 into the cutout portion 2636b or the cutout portion 2641b from the rear end side of the first grand prize opening door body 2641, and the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 or the first The labor involved in assembling the big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the guide piece 2636 and the notch portion 2636b and the notch portion 2641b of the first big prize opening door body 2641 are formed in a notch shape that is opened rearward, the guide piece 2636 and the first big prize win When the opening door body 2641 is projected forward, the opening/closing link 2637 or part of the opening/closing link 2647 can be made to project backward beyond the guide piece 2636 or the rear end side of the first prize winning opening door body 2641. It becomes possible. That is, it is possible to position the rear end sides of the guide piece 2636 and the first big prize gate door body 2641 forward of the rear ends of the opening/closing links 2637 and 2647 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the guide piece 2636 and the first big prize opening door body 2641 in the front-rear direction, so that the size of the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big prize opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects.

In addition, in the second starting opening opening and closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening and closing unit 2640, the starting opening solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the opening and closing link 2637 and the opening and closing link 2647, and the guide piece 2636 and the first big winning opening door A container-like unit case 2635 or unit case 2645 that accommodates and supports the body 2641 is composed of a first case portion 2633 or a first case portion 2643 and a second case portion 2634 or a second case portion 2644. Therefore, an increase in the number of parts of the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the first big winning opening opening/closing unit 2640 can be suppressed, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Further, in this case, since the unit case 2635 and the unit case 2645 are composed of the first case portion 2633 and the first case portion 2643 and the second case portion 2634 and the second case portion 2644, the starting port Solenoid 2632, first attacker solenoid 2642, opening/closing link 2637, opening/closing link 2647, guide piece 2636, first grand prize opening door 2641, first case portion 2633, first case portion 2643, second case portion 2634, and second case It can be sandwiched with the portion 2644, and the labor required for assembly can be simplified.

Furthermore, in the second starting opening opening and closing unit 2630, since the part (detection part) that detects the passing game ball B in the second starting opening sensor 2601 is provided in front of the unit case 2635, the second starting opening sensor 2601 is positioned in front, the distance from the guide piece 2636 (second starting port 2005) to the second starting port sensor 2601 can be shortened as much as possible, and the winning game ball B can be quickly released. In addition, the detection of the game ball B by the second starting opening sensor 2601 can be easily seen from the player side, and by making the detection of the game ball B visible, the player's expectation for the game can be increased. It can elevate and entertain.

In addition, a first big prize winning opening decorative substrate 2672 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward is mounted is provided below the first big winning opening door body 2641 protruding forward, and the first big winning opening The light from the LED of the decoration board 2672 is made to irradiate the game ball B on the first big prize winning port door 2641 from below through the notch 2641b of the first big prize winning port door 2641 . As a result, the light from the LED of the first large winning opening decorative substrate 2672 can be irradiated to the game ball B circulating on the first large winning opening door body 2641 through the notch portion 2641b. The player can see the performance that the game ball B circulating on the first big winning port door body 2641 is illuminated from below, which has never been seen in the pachinko machine, and the player's interest is strongly enhanced. As well as being able to attract the player, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rear rear effect unit 3600 in the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 has the rear rear upper decorative lens 3651 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface. When the body 3650 is in the upper retracted position, the rear upper decorative body 3650 is located in the upper front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 so as to straddle the left and right direction, and is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to entertain the player by showing the effect image in good condition to the player. In this state, when the lock release solenoid 3663 of the lock mechanism 3660 is operated in accordance with the progress of the game to release the restriction of the fall by the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661, the back rear upper ornament 3650 moves to the lower appearing position. Fall. The rear upper decorative body 3650 is provided with a lock mechanism 3660 having an unlocking solenoid 3663, and has a rear upper decorative lens 3651 and a rear upper decorative substrate 3653 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect display device 1600 is formed in a size that straddles the left and right sides, the weight of the back rear upper decoration body 3650 is larger than that of the lifting decoration body provided in the conventional pachinko machine, An auxiliary spring 3616 urges the rear upper decorative body 3650 downward. Therefore, when the regulation of the fall by the upper lock claw 3661b of the lock latch 3661 of the lock mechanism 3660 is released according to the progress of the game, the urging force of the auxiliary spring 3616 causes the rear upper ornament 3650 to fall at a speed faster than the free fall. Then, the player can see the back-upper decorative body 3650 falling at a faster speed than before. At this time, since the left and right large back and upper decorations 3650 fall while blocking the effect image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, the player who is watching the effect image can see the back side. The dropping of the upper rear decoration 3650 (movable presentation) can be surely noticed, and the movable presentation of the upper rear decoration 3650 can be enjoyed.

Then, when the rear upper decoration body 3650 dropped from the retracted position contacts the shock absorbing portion 3781f of the right slide base 3781 of the right unit 3780 in the rear lower decoration body 3700 provided at the appearing position, the shock absorbing portion 3781f. , the back-upper decoration 3650 that has fallen to the emergence position is less likely to rebound upward. In addition, when the back upper decoration 3650 reaches the appearing position and the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 restricts the upward movement, the falling back upper ornament 3650 can be prevented from rebounding upward at the appearing position. can be prevented. For this reason, when the back upper decorative body 3650 is dropped from the retracted position, the upper back decorative body 3650 stops at the appearing position without rebounding. It is possible to make it look as if the ball is falling with a thud, so that the player can see a powerful falling performance with a sense of weight, and a strong impact can be given to the player. In addition, since the back upper decorative body 3650 can show the player a powerful and high-impact falling effect with a sense of weight, the falling effect of the back upper decorative body 3650 is good for the player. It is possible to make the player strongly think that there is something to be expected, to increase the expectation for the game, to entertain the player, and to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear upper decorative substrate 3653 to emit light according to the progress of the game, the rear upper decorative lens 3651 on the front surface of the rear upper decorative body 3650 can be brightly decorated with light emission. It is possible to make the player's attention strongly attracted to the rear upper decorative body 3650 .

Furthermore, by appropriately combining the falling effect (movable effect) of the rear upper decorative body 3650, the light emitting effect by the light emitting decoration, and the effect image by the effect display device 1600, various effects can be presented to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the loss of interest.

In addition, since the shock absorbing portion 3781f can absorb the shock caused by the fall of the upper back decoration 3650, the shock caused by the drop can be applied to the upper back decoration 3650 and the lower back decoration 3700 provided at the appearing position. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to the breakage of the back upper decoration body 3650, etc., and the back rear upper decoration body. A player can be entertained in a good state with the falling effect (movable effect) by the 3650, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the lock latch 3661 is configured to restrict the fall and rise of the back rear upper decorative body 3650 by protruding with the biasing force of the lock spring 3662, and the lower surface of the upper lock claw 3661b that restricts the lift of the lock latch 3661 , and the upper surface of the lower lock claw 3661c, which regulates the fall, is inclined lower toward the edge, so that the rear upper decorative body 3650 can be moved from the retracted position. When dropped, the lock latch 3661 automatically retracts against the biasing force of the lock spring 3662 due to the inclination of the lower surface of the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661, and when the rear upper decoration body 3650 reaches the appearing position. , the retracted lock latch 3661 protrudes by the urging force of the lock spring 3662, the lower lock claw 3661c is inserted into the lock groove 3781e to immediately restrict the upward movement, and the back upper decoration 3650 rebounds upward at the appearing position. can be prevented. On the other hand, when the rear upper decorative body 3650 is raised from the appearance position to the retracted position, the protruding lock latch 3661 is retracted against the biasing force of the lock spring 3662 by the inclined upper surface of the upper lock claw 3661b. When the back upper ornament 3650 reaches the retracted position, the retracted lock latch 3661 projects by the biasing force of the lock spring 3662, and the upper lock claw 3661b is inserted into the lock groove 3603 to restrict the fall. In this way, even without driving the lock release solenoid 3663, the fall and rise can be automatically restricted (locked) by lifting and lowering the rear upper decorative body 3650, and the pachinko machine having the above-described effects. 1 can be realized with certainty.

In addition, the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 can regulate the upward movement from the appearance position, and the rear lower decoration body 3700 which contacts the rear upper decoration body 3650 at the appearance position and can move upward is provided. Therefore, after the back upper decoration 3650 is dropped to the appearance position, if the upper rear decoration 3650 is lifted while its upward movement is restricted by the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661, Since the lower lock claw 3661c of the lock latch 3661 exerts a force to lift the back lower decoration 3700 upward, the upper back decoration 3650 and the lower back decoration 3700 are lifted together. It will happen. Therefore, when the back top decoration 3650 is dropped and then lifted, it rises together with the back bottom bottom decoration 3700, and the back top top decoration 3650 and the back bottom bottom decoration 3700 seem to be united. Since the large decorative body rises, it can greatly surprise the player and give an extremely strong impact, and at the same time, make the player strongly think that something good will happen and expect the game. It is possible to enhance the feeling of the game, entertain the player, and prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, when the back top decoration 3650 is lifted from the appearance position, the auxiliary spring 3616 urges the back top decoration 3650 upward. can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 is provided with an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image behind the game panel 1100, that is, behind the game area 5a where the game is played. Therefore, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the performance display device 1600 can be similar to that of the conventional pachinko machine, so that it is difficult for the player familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to hesitate. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. In addition, since the back front left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is provided at the left position away from the center of the effect display device 1600 behind the game panel 1100, the back front left effect unit 3300 is placed on the effect display device 1600. The effect image displayed on the display screen can be made difficult to be disturbed, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with the effect image. Since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided with the back front left ornament 3301 on the front surface, the back front left ornament 3301 can decorate the front of the effect display device 1600 and the inside of the game area 5a. , the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided with a back front left back decorative sheet 3308 facing backward on the rear surface, but the back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left decoration body) is provided from the front player side. 3301), the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is not visible. On the other hand, since the effect display device 1600 is provided behind the back front left effect unit 3300, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be used to display the back front left back decoration provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300. The decoration of sheet 3308 can be reflected forward. That is, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can reflect the back-front-left-back decoration sheet 3308 of the back-front-left effect unit 3300 . However, in the state where the effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (normal state), the display screen is bright, and the brightness cancels out the reflection of the pattern on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308. Therefore, the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen is hardly visible.

In this state, if the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is intentionally darkened (for example, blacked out), the reflection of the pattern on the front-back left-back decorative sheet 3308 becomes relatively bright with respect to the display screen. , the pattern of the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 can be seen on the display screen. That is, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the design of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen. Compared with the image, the design (reflected design 3310) of the back-front-left-back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen is faintly visible (see FIG. 197). At this time, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided at a position away from the center of the effect display device 1600 to the left, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the back side is reflected on the display screen. The front left back decoration sheet 3308 can be easily seen by the player. For this reason, during the execution of the effect using the effect image by the effect display device 1600, by turning the display screen dark or intentionally darkening the display screen, the rear front left effect unit 3300 can be displayed. Since the pattern (decoration) of the back decoration sheet 3308 can be seen on the display screen, the player can see the effect, so even if the appearance is similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine, the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 can be displayed on the display screen. It is possible to show the player a performance that has never been seen in a pachinko machine until now, such as the pattern of the image being reflected. It is possible to make the player think that there is something wrong with the game, increase the expectation for the game, and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the design of the back front left decoration sheet 3308 of the back front left effect unit 3300 is different from the pattern of the back front left decorative body 3301, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened. When the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected is made visible, a decoration clearly different from the back front left decorative body 3301 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308) appears on the display screen which is dark for the player. It is possible to make the player recognize that the image is reflected, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player. More specifically, in a normal state in which an effect image is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, the back front left decorative body 3301 provided on the front surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 has a predetermined facial expression. Only the characters are visible, and the characters with different facial expressions on the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 are not reflected on the display screen. When the display screen is darkened by blackout or the like, a character on the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 with an expression different from that of the back front left decoration body 3301 appears on the display screen so as to be adjacent to the back front left effect unit 3300 . Since it is reflected, it is possible to present the player with an effect in which the character's back (another) face can be seen, and the player can enjoy the gap between the character's facial expressions. If this performance is executed before the occurrence of an advantageous game state such as a jackpot game in which the player is advantageous, the performance strongly makes the player think that the advantageous game state may not occur. After that, an advantageous game state (“jackpot”) can be achieved, thereby surprising the player and making him/her more interested.

Furthermore, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided behind the game panel 1100, the display screen (front) of the effect display device 1600 is illuminated from between the back front left effect unit 3300 and the effect display device 1600. When the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 can be sufficiently darkened, and the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 of the back front left effect unit 3300 can be made difficult to enter. to make it easier to reflect the pattern of the back, and to make the reflected pattern (reflected pattern 3310) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 easy to see from the player's side, and to surely exhibit the above-mentioned effects. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of

Further, as described above, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the reflected pattern 3310 of the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 of the back front left effect unit 3300 reflected on the display screen is faintly visible. By shortening the time for which the display screen is darkened, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the design of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen. In other words, some players can notice the reflective design 3310 of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen. As a result, the player notices that the pattern of the front-left-back decoration sheet 3308 is reflected on the display screen, so that the player can be made to grin or startle, thereby making the player feel good. to entertain the player.

Furthermore, as described above, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the pattern of the back front left back decoration sheet 3308 provided on the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 is reflected on the display screen, thereby realizing pachinko. Since the reflected pattern 3310 (decoration) of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 can be seen from the front of the machine 1, the positional relationship between the effect display device 1600 and the back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308). Depending on the situation, it is difficult for the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the back front left rear decorative sheet 3308 reflected therefrom, so that the player seated in front of the adjacent pachinko machine or the pachinko machine can be made difficult to see. It is possible for a player near 1 to easily see the pattern of the back front left back decorative sheet 3308 reflected. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the players can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 can be selected as the pachinko machine to be played. The pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided at a position away from the center of the effect display device 1600 to the left, only the right eye out of the left and right eyes of the player seated in front is reflected on the display screen. It is possible to make the pattern of the intricate back front left back decorative sheet 3308 invisible. As a result, when the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened, the pattern of the front-left-back decoration sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can only be seen with the right eye, so the pattern of the front-left-back decoration sheet 3308 reflected on the display screen can be seen only with the right eye. can be shown in an uncertain state, the player can be presented with an illusionary effect, and the eerie feeling due to the effect can be amplified to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. can be made

In addition, since the back front left effect unit 3300 is provided near the front end of the back box 3000 and the effect display device 1600 is provided behind the back box 3000, the rear surface of the back front left effect unit 3300 (back front left back decorative sheet 3308) and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be made as long as possible, the back front left back decoration sheet reflected on the display screen from the front of the pachinko machine 1 The pattern of 3308 can be made easy to see. Therefore, the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can be sufficiently entertained with the above-described effect, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the center allocation unit 2520 in the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5, the upper warp passage 2513 passes through the peripheral wall portion higher than the radius of the game ball B on the outer peripheral edge. The game ball B supplied to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 of the croon 2530 provided with 2533 is suppressed from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2533 by the inclination of the peripheral edge surface portion 2531b. to enter the passage opening 2532 . At this time, the passage opening 2532 provided in the rolling contact surface portion 2531 is shaped so that the longest opposing line connecting two portions facing each other through the center extends in the front-rear direction. Since it is circular (square in this case), the game ball B is prevented from turning round and round at the edge of the passage opening 2532, and the game ball B is prevented from being kicked by the passage opening 2532. , and the game ball B can enter the passage opening 2532 quickly. Therefore, since the player can see that the center distribution piece 2523 provided downstream of the croon 2530 is moving back and forth, the pachinko machine 1 can be hit or shaken to cause the center distribution piece 2523 to move forward and backward. Even if you try to enter the game ball B into the passage port 2532 at a desired timing that can distribute the game ball B to the first upper start port 2004, the game ball B will enter the passage port 2532 while measuring the timing. Therefore, the achievement of fraud can be prevented, and the burden on the game hall side due to fraud can be reduced.

In addition, since the passage opening 2532 has a non-circular shape, it is possible to suppress (or prevent) the game ball B from being kicked by the passage opening 2532 and entering another passage opening 2532. The entry probability (acceptance probability) of the game ball B to the 2532 can be stabilized, and the pachinko machine 1 having the same performance as the acceptance probability to the passage opening 2532 can be reliably provided.

Specifically, in the croon 2530 , the rolling surface portion 2531 is shaped like a dish whose center is low, and one passage opening 2532 is provided at the center of the rolling surface portion 2531 . In this croon 2530, the game ball B supplied to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 is suppressed from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2533 by the peripheral edge surface portion 2531b having a steeper angle than the central surface portion 2531a. It rolls circularly while gradually decreasing its turning radius from the vicinity and enters the central passage opening 2532 . At this time, when the game ball B starts turning, it rolls so as not to come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533 by the peripheral surface portion 2531b. Acting on the game ball B can be avoided, and the rolling direction of the game ball B is directed to the direction of the passage port 2532 due to the abnormal vibration, thereby preventing the fraudulent act of illegally entering the passage port 2532.例文帳に追加can do. In addition, while the game ball B rolls in a circular shape, the passage opening 2532 has a non-circular square shape. The game ball B comes into contact with any of the four corners outside the inscribed circle and quickly enters (falls) toward the passage opening 2532, and the game ball B circles around the edge of the passage opening 2532. never do. Therefore, by hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1, the game ball B is distributed to the first upper starting port 2004 by the center distribution piece 2523 that can be seen to move back and forth, so that the game is played from the cloon 2530. Even if an attempt is made to control the timing at which the ball B falls, the game ball B will enter the passage opening 2532 while the timing is being measured, so that the achievement of the fraudulent act can be prevented and the game by the fraudulent act can be prevented. The burden on the hall side can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 151(b), the rolling surface portion 2531 has a dish shape with a low center, and a plurality of passages including a specific passage opening 2532 to which a predetermined privilege is given near the center of the rolling surface portion 2531. When the mouth 2532 is provided, the game ball B supplied to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 is suppressed from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2533 by the peripheral surface portion 2531b, and the turning radius is gradually increased from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531. It rolls circularly while being made smaller, and enters one of a plurality of passage holes 2532 provided near the center, and when the game ball B enters the specific passage hole 2532, a predetermined privilege is given. It will happen. At this time, when the game ball B starts turning, it rolls so as not to come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533 by the peripheral surface portion 2531b. Acting on the game ball B can be avoided, and the rolling direction of the game ball B is directed to the direction of the passage port 2532 due to the abnormal vibration, thereby preventing the fraudulent act of illegally entering the passage port 2532.例文帳に追加can do. In addition, even if a plurality of passage holes 2532 are arranged on the same circumference, since each passage hole 2532 is non-circular, the turning radius of the game ball B rotating in a circular shape gradually becomes smaller. Then, soon, it comes into contact with any part of each of the passage openings 2532 located outside the circumscribed circle that contacts the inscribed circle of each of the plurality of passage openings 2532, and the game ball B quickly contacts and passes through. The game ball B will enter (fall) toward the opening 2532, and the game ball B will turn round and round on the edge of the passage opening 2532, or the game ball B will be kicked by the passage opening 2532 and enter another passage opening 2532. There is nothing to do. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to enter the desired passage opening 2532 (the specific passage opening 2532), the game ball B will enter another passage opening 2532 before approaching the desired passage opening 2532. If it touches, it will enter the passage 2532, and thus the achievement of fraud can be prevented. Also, when the game ball B contacts the passage opening 2532, it enters the passage opening 2532, and since the game ball B is not kicked by the passage opening 2532, the entry probability (acceptance probability) of the game ball B to the passage opening 2532 is can be stabilized, and the pachinko machine 1 having the same performance as the acceptance probability to the passage port 2532 can be reliably provided. In addition, as described above, the game ball B is not kicked at the specific passage opening 2532, and the game ball B that has come into contact with the specific passage opening 2532 can enter the specific passage opening 2532. It is possible to avoid making the player feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as in a sorting unit 2800 shown in FIG. 151(c), the rolling surface portion 2803 is formed in a flat plate shape inclined so as to be lowered in a predetermined direction, and a passage opening is provided near the downstream end of the rolling surface portion 2803. When the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 are provided, the game ball B that rolls on the rolling surface portion 2803 from the upstream side toward the downstream side while being suppressed from contacting the peripheral wall portion 2809 by the weir portion 2808, There is a possibility of entering the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802 .
Since the dam 2808 suppresses the contact of the game ball B with the peripheral wall 2809, the game ball B may cross the dam 2808 and come into contact with the peripheral wall 2809. 2808 is a low height that the game ball B can climb over. As a result, while the game ball B is in contact with the dam 2808, the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibration, and the dam 2808 changes the rolling direction of the game ball B to the winning opening. Even if an attempt is made to change the direction of 2801, the weir portion 2808 will relatively move so as to slip under the game ball B, and the force acting on the game ball B in the direction of the winning opening 2801 can be prevented as much as possible. can be reduced to 2801, and a fraudulent act in which the game ball B is illegally entered into the prize winning opening 2801 can be prevented. When the game ball B tries to enter the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, the winning opening 2801 and the losing opening 2802 are formed in a non-circular shape, so that the game ball B does not reach the edge of the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802. Upon contact, the game ball B quickly enters (falls) toward the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, and the game ball B circles around the edges of the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, The ball B is not kicked by a winning opening 2801 or a losing opening 2802 and enters another losing opening 2802 or winning opening 2801. - 特許庁Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is hit or shaken to cause the game ball B to enter the winning hole 2801 at a desired timing, if the game ball B contacts the winning hole 2801 or the losing hole 2802, the winning hole 2801 Since it will enter the wrong opening 2802, it is possible to prevent the achievement of the fraudulent act. Further, when the game ball B contacts the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, it enters the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, and the game ball B is not kicked by the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802. The entry probability (acceptance probability) of the game ball B to the 2801 can be stabilized, and the pachinko machine 1 having the same performance as the acceptance probability to the winning opening 2801 can be reliably provided. In addition, since the winning opening 2801 to which a predetermined privilege is given is provided, the game ball B is not kicked at the winning opening 2801 as described above, and the game ball B that touches the winning opening 2801 wins the prize as it is. Since it can be made to enter the mouth 2801, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed, and to entertain the player and suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to prevent the achievement of a fraudulent act, so that it is possible to make the person recognize that the fraudulent act is useless, and the deterrence against the fraudulent act is high. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided. At this time, the vibration sensor 1040 is provided in the pachinko machine 1, and an alarm can be issued against abnormal vibration by the vibration alarm processing, so that deterrence against fraud can be further enhanced.

In addition, as described above, the shape of the passage opening 2532 can prevent the achievement of fraud due to abnormal vibrations such as hitting or shaking the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the vibration sensor 1040 for detecting abnormal vibrations is used to detect abnormal vibrations. can be omitted, and the load on the control of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the passage opening 2532 of the rolling contact surface portion 2531 is formed in a non-circular shape, the following excellent effects can be obtained. Specifically, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the through hole of the croon as the rolling surface portion is circular, many players recognize that the through hole (passage opening) is circular. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage opening 2532 of the rolling surface portion 2531 in the croon 2530 is non-circular, it is possible for a player who is familiar with the shape of the through hole in the conventional pachinko machine to The passage opening 2532 having a shape that has never been seen in a pachinko machine can give a strong impact, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the passage opening 2532 of the rolling surface portion 2531 . Therefore, since it is possible to make the player strongly think that something good will happen if the game ball B enters the passage port 2532 of the croon 2530, the game ball is placed on the rolling surface portion 2531 (croon 2530). When B is supplied, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B enters the desired passage opening 2532, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. .

In addition, in the croon 2530, the passage opening 2532 is provided so that the extending direction of the longest opposing line (diagonal line) in the non-circular passage opening 2532 faces the front-rear direction. It is possible to eliminate or reduce the portion extending linearly or curvedly with a small curvature. In other words, each side portion forming the peripheral edge of the passage opening 2532 extends in a direction (diagonal direction) intersecting the left-right direction. In this way, since the edges (sides forming) of the passage opening 2532 extend obliquely, compared to the case where the edges (sides) of the passage opening 2532 extend in the left-right direction. , the relative movement distance between the game ball B and the edge (side) of the passage opening 2532 due to abnormal vibration in the front-rear direction can be shortened, and the influence of the abnormal vibration can be reduced. Therefore, when the game ball B is about to enter the passage opening 2532, the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to apply abnormal vibration or impact in the front-rear direction, and the game ball B enters the passage opening 2532. Even if an attempt is made to control the game ball B by delaying or advancing the timing, the effect of the abnormal vibration or shock given to the game ball B can be reduced, and the game ball B can be immediately entered into the passage port 2532 to complete the cheating. can be reliably prevented.

In addition, since the extending direction of the diagonal line of the passage opening 2532 is oriented in the front-rear direction, the shape of the passage opening 2532 can be seen more clearly when viewed from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加can be done. Therefore, since the rolling surface portion 2531 having the non-circular passage opening 2532, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine so far, can be shown to the player, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players, to make it easier for players to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play, to entertain the game on the pachinko machine 1, and to suppress the decline in interest. can be made

Furthermore, as described above, since the peripheral edge surface portion 2531b of the rolling surface portion 2531 in the croon 2530 and the weir portion 2808 of the distribution unit 2800 are set to a low height that the game ball B can get over, the game ball B can pass through the peripheral edge surface portion 2531b and the dam 2808, the pachinko machine 1 is struck or shaken to cause abnormal vibration, and the peripheral surface 2531b and the dam 2808 move the game ball B in the rolling direction to the passage opening 2532. , the peripheral surface portion 2531b and the weir portion 2808 move relative to the game ball B so as to slip under the game ball B, and a force is applied to the game ball B in the direction of the passage port 2532 and the prize winning port 2801. can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rolling direction of the game ball B from being directed toward the passage port 2532 or the prize winning port 2801 due to illegal abnormal vibration, and the game ball B illegally enters the passing port 2532 or the prize winning port 2801. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that allow intrusion into the

In addition, since the peripheral wall portion 2533 extending upward from the outer peripheral edge of the rolling surface portion 2531 is higher than the radius of the game ball B, the peripheral wall portion 2533 causes the game ball B to fall outward from the rolling surface portion 2531. The movement of the game ball B by the rolling surface portion 2531 and the passage opening 2532 can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the peripheral wall portion 2533 is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the rolling surface portion 2531, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the rolling surface portion 2531 and the passage opening 2532 from the outside to commit fraud, the peripheral wall portion 2533 can be The portion 2533 can prevent unauthorized tools from entering, and can further enhance the deterrence against unauthorized actions.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral wall portion 2533 is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the rolling surface portion 2531, the peripheral edge surface portion 2531b can suppress the game ball B from coming into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2533, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be hit or shaken. It is possible to avoid the abnormal vibration that has occurred acting on the game ball B through the peripheral wall part 2533, and the abnormal vibration causes the rolling direction of the game ball B to be directed to the direction of the passage opening 2532. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that allow intrusion into the

In addition, since the game ball B is supplied to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531 and the rolling surface portion 2803, the game ball B is supplied to the rolling surface portion 2531 and the rolling surface portion 2803, and then the passage opening 2532 Since it is possible to easily increase the rolling distance until it enters the winning opening 2801 or the losing opening 2802, the movement of the game ball B rolling on the rolling surface portion 2531 and the rolling surface portion 2803 can be further increased. The player can be entertained for a long time, and the decline of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, the game ball B is supplied to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rolling surface portion 2531, and as described above, it is possible to lengthen the rolling time of the game ball B on the rolling surface portion 2531. Therefore, for example, The timing of the circulation of the game ball B on the downstream side of the passage port 2532 by the rolling time on the rolling surface portion 2531 is combined with the execution timing of executing a predetermined effect by the effect device such as the movable decorative body and the effect display device. can be made easier. Therefore, the effect of the joint performance by the distribution of the game balls B and the performance device can be fully exhibited, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5, the mounting boss 2515 of the center base 2511 of the main unit 2510 as a predetermined member and the attacker are attached to the concave curved wall portion 2554f of the binding pedestal 2550. A part of the mounting boss 2614 of the attacker base plate 2610 in the unit 2600 is accommodated, and the peripheral wall portion 2554 of the binding base 2550 is brought into contact with the rib 2516 of the center base 2511 and the rib 2618 of the attacker base plate 2610, thereby forming a binding base. 2550 can be non-rotatably positioned at a predetermined position of the center base 2511 or the attacker base plate 2610, and in this state, the mounting screws are inserted through the mounting holes 2553 penetrating the body portion 2551 of the binding pedestal 2550 and the mounting bosses 2515 and 2550. The binding pedestal 2550 can be attached to the center base 2511 or the attacker base plate 2610 by screwing it into the attachment boss 2614 . On the other hand, the binding pedestal 2560 and the binding pedestal 2570 can be attached to a predetermined member by screwing the mounting screw into the predetermined member through the mounting hole 2563 and the mounting hole 2573, respectively.

Then, the binding band CT is inserted through the ring-shaped band holding portions 2552, 2562, and 2572 of the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570, and the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, By tightening the wiring EC connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the like together with the band holding portion 2572, the wiring EC can be bound and held in a bundled state. At this time, since the binding band CT is inserted through the ring-shaped band holding portions 2552, 2562, and 2572, the binding band CT passes through the ring-shaped band holding portions 2552, 2562, and 2572. A plurality of wires EC can be reliably bound without coming off from the holding portion 2572 . For this reason, the binding pedestals 2550, 2560, and 2570 can be mounted at desired positions (positions where the mounting bosses 2515 and 2614 are provided) on predetermined members (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610). By attaching , a band holding portion 2552, a band holding portion 2562, and a band holding portion 2572 for holding the wiring EC at the desired position can be provided. That is, by attaching the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570, the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 2572 can be placed at arbitrary positions of the predetermined members (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610). can be provided.

More specifically, in the path (on the route) of a plurality of wirings EC on a predetermined member (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610), the harness support portion for holding the wiring EC on the predetermined member itself due to reasons such as size and shape. (corresponding to the band holding portion), it is easy to secure a space for mounting bosses for mounting the binding bases 2550, 2560, and 2570 with mounting screws. Therefore, the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 can be attached. Then, a plurality of binding pedestals 2550, 2560, and 2570 are attached on the path (on the route) of the wiring EC in a predetermined member (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610), and the binding pedestals 2550 and 2570 are attached. 2560 and the band holding portions 2552, 2562, and 2572 of the binding pedestal 2570 to hold the wiring EC, the wiring EC can be held on a desired route. Therefore, even if the wiring EC moves for some reason such as maintenance or vibration, the wiring EC can be maintained (held) on a desired route via the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570. Therefore, the wiring EC does not deviate from the desired route, and it is possible to prevent the wiring EC from coming into contact with other members and breaking the wiring. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be reliably held on the route of the ball and which can be improved in appearance.

Also, by attaching the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570, it is possible to provide the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 2572 on predetermined members (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610). Therefore, compared with the case where the band holding part is formed in the predetermined member itself, the cost of the predetermined member can be reduced, and design change and model change can be easily handled, and the pachinko machine 1 can be equipped with the device. This cost increase can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by screwing mounting screws into predetermined members (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610) through the mounting holes, the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 are mounted to the predetermined members. Since the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 are detachably attached, the band holding portions 2552, the band holding portions 2562, and the band holding portions 2572 of the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 By removing the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 from the predetermined member while holding the plurality of wires EC, the plurality of wires EC can be separated from the desired route while being bundled. For this reason, for example, when checking the installation status of parts provided in the back of a plurality of wiring ECs (on the route) in maintenance etc., in the conventional technology, multiple After removing the wires EC one by one from the gaps, the wires EC are inserted into the gaps one by one and returned to the original position, which is time-consuming. , and by simply removing the bundling pedestal 2570, the plurality of wiring ECs can be moved away at once, eliminating the above-mentioned trouble and facilitating confirmation of the installation status of components behind the plurality of wiring ECs. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, as described above, since the wiring EC is attached to predetermined members (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610) via the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, , the band holding portions 2552, the band holding portions 2562, and the band holding portions 2572 of the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the band holding portion 2570 are held in advance, and then the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, And the binding pedestal 2570 can also be attached to a predetermined member. Thus, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of wires EC are held and bundled by the band holding portions 2552, 2562, and 2572 of the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the band holding portion 2572 of the binding pedestal 2570. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the plurality of wirings EC from interfering with the assembly, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed by facilitating the assembly work.

Also, the wiring EC can be connected to the predetermined member by simply attaching the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 to the mounting boss (mounting boss 2515 and mounting boss 2614) of the predetermined member (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610). Since the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 2572 can be provided for holding the band holding portion 2552, the band holding portion 2562, and the band holding portion 2572 can be provided. Since the structure of the pachinko machine 1 can be formed without complicating the structure, the structure of the molding die (mold) for molding the predetermined member can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. can be made

Further, the mounting bosses 2515 and 2614 of the predetermined members (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610) are accommodated in the recessed curved wall portion 2554f of the binding pedestal 2550, and the peripheral wall portion 2554 of the binding pedestal 2550 is brought into contact with the predetermined members. Since the rotation of the binding pedestal 2550 can be restricted by the contact, the binding pedestal 2550 can be positioned with respect to a predetermined member, so that the workability of mounting the binding pedestal 2550 can be improved.

Further, by bringing the peripheral wall portion 2554 of the binding pedestal 2550 into contact with a predetermined member (the center base 2511 or the attacker base plate 2610), the rotation of the binding pedestal 2550 can be restricted. After the wire EC is held by the band holding portion 2552 by using the band holding portion 2552, even if the wire EC is pulled due to maintenance or the like, the binding base 2550 does not rotate and is held by the band holding portion 2552 due to the rotation of the binding base 2550. It is possible to prevent the direction (routing direction) of the wiring EC from changing, to keep the wiring EC at a desired position, and to make the wiring EC difficult to see from the player's side, thereby improving the appearance. A good pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, since the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 are formed in the same color (transparent in this embodiment) as the predetermined member (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610), the binding pedestal can be attached to the predetermined member. 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 are attached, the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 can be made inconspicuous, and deterioration of appearance can be prevented.

In addition, since the binding bases 2550, 2560, and 2570 are attached to the mounting bosses 2515 and 2614 of the predetermined members (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610), a plurality of attachments to the predetermined members can be performed in advance. By providing a boss, even if the path (route) along which the wiring EC passes is changed due to design change, model change, etc., the binding pedestal 2550, By attaching the binding pedestal 2560 and the binding pedestal 2570, it is possible to easily respond to design changes, etc., and to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Further, as described above, a plurality of mounting bosses are provided in advance on predetermined members (the center base 2511 and the attacker base plate 2610), and the binding bases 2550, 2560, and binding bases are attached to the mounting bosses on desired routes. By attaching the 2570, it is possible to easily respond to design changes, etc., so that the versatility of the predetermined members can be enhanced, and the common use of the predetermined members (parts) can be promoted. Furthermore, if the binding pedestal 2550, the binding pedestal 2560, and the binding pedestal 2570 of the present embodiment are used, an extra portion for holding the wiring EC is provided in advance on a predetermined member (the center base 2511 or the attacker base plate 2610). Rather than placing an additional mounting boss on the predetermined member, the mold for molding the predetermined member can be simplified.

In addition, a plurality of band holding portions 2562 are provided on one binding pedestal 2560 in different directions, and when the binding pedestal 2560 is attached to a predetermined member (the center base 2511 or the attacker base plate 2610), the binding pedestal 2560 is attached. Since the wiring EC can be held by using the band holding portion 2562 having a direction corresponding to the direction of the wiring EC passing through the relevant portion without changing the orientation, the versatility of the binding pedestal 2560 is enhanced. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5, the harness WH1 made up of a plurality of wires EC is connected to the wire locking portion 1603 extending from the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 and the wire locking portion 1603 extending from the back box 3010. Since the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are bundled together with the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 by tightening with the binding band CT, the harness WH1, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are bundled by tightening with the binding band CT. It is possible to increase the sliding resistance between the wiring harness WH1 and the wire locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, thereby making it difficult for the harness WH1 to come off. In addition, since the harness WH1 composed of a plurality of wires EC is bundled together with the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 by tightening with the binding band CT, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are bundled together. The wires EC are not separated from WH1 one by one, and it is possible to prevent some of the separated wires EC from being detached from the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. It is possible to avoid disconnection of the wiring EC from the stopping portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 .

In addition, since the harness WH1 composed of a plurality of wires EC is bundled together with the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 by tightening with the binding band CT, depending on the tightening force of the binding band CT, The harness WH1 can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 while the harness WH1 is held. As a result, when it is desired to check the members hidden by the harness WH1 during maintenance or the like, in the conventional technology that is not bundled with the binding band CT, the wiring EC is moved (slid) one by one from the harness WH1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of wiring EC (harness WH1) can be slid at once, confirmation work can be facilitated, and this pachinko machine 1 is installed. The burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the ends of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 for supporting the harness WH1 are free ends, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are connected to the harness from the open free end side. WH1 can be easily inserted, and workability can be improved. At this time, since hook portions 1603a and hook portions 3011a projecting toward the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 are provided at the ends of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011, the binding band CT When the harness WH1 is tightened and bundled together with the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011, the binding band CT moves together with the harness WH1 in the direction of the free ends of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. Even if it slides to the right, further sliding is prevented by contacting the hook 1603a and the hook 3011a, and the harness WH1 together with the binding band CT comes off from the tip of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the game from being lost and can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

In addition, since the binding band CT is composed of the band portion CTa and the lock portion CTb that cannot retract the band portion CTa, that is, allows the band portion CTa to be inserted only in one direction, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire The wire locking portion 1603, the wire locking portion 3011, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened simply by inserting the locking portion 3011 and the tip of the band portion CTa wound around the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 into the locking portion CTb and pulling. It is possible to lock the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 in the folded state, and the workability of the binding operation of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be improved. At this time, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, for some reason, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are not moved around the axis of the binding band CT. Even if a rotating force acts, the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT abuts on the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, so that the binding band CT is aligned with the axis of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. It is possible to prevent it from rotating around, and it is possible to prevent the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and the tip of the band portion CTa extending from the lock portion CTb from contacting other members, thereby preventing problems. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, the following excellent Operation and effects can be achieved. More specifically, when the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the side of the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 that is in contact with the harness WH1 or the harness WH2, the lock portion CTb protrudes from the lock portion CTb. It is necessary to pull the end of the band part CTa toward the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010, and the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 become an obstacle, making it difficult to perform the binding work. On the other hand, since the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 on the side opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are connected by the binding band CT. When bundling, the lock part CTb faces the operator side, and if the tip of the band part CTa protruding from the lock part CTb is pulled in a direction away from the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010, the wire locking part 1603 and the back box 3010 are pulled. The wiring locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 and harness WH2 can be tightened, and workability can be further improved.

In addition, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is in contact with the portion of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, as described above, the lock portion CTb faces the operator side, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the front end of the band part CTa is inserted into the lock part CTb, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 which facilitates work check.

Furthermore, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 or the harness WH2, the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 and the lock portion CTb are brought into contact with each other. Since the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are interposed between the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011, the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT contacts the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. It can be a blocking wall that blocks the possibility of Thereby, there can exist the following outstanding effects. More specifically, when inserting the tip of the band portion CTa into the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and pulling the tip of the band portion CTa to bundle it, the wires EC of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 come into contact with the lock portion CTb. If this happens, part of the wire EC will be pulled into the lock part CTb together with the pulled band part CTa, and the insulating coating of the wire EC may be broken. On the other hand, the lock portion CTb is brought into contact with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 on the side opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. Since the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are interposed therebetween, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (wiring EC) are not in contact with the lock portion CTb. Even if the tip of CTa is pulled, a part of the wire EC is not pulled into the lock part CTb together with the band part CTa, so that the insulating coating of the wire EC can be prevented from being broken, and the wire EC can be bound with the binding band CT. It is possible to protect the harness WH1 and harness WH2.

In addition, since the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the portion of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 opposite to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, maintenance and disassembly of the pachinko machine 1 are reduced. Therefore, when removing the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 from the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011, the work of cutting the binding band CT (band portion CTa) can be facilitated. More specifically, as described above, since the block-shaped lock portion CTb faces the operator, a cutting tool such as a nipper can be guided along the lock portion CTb to prevent damage to other parts. The band portion CTa can be easily cut without cutting.

In addition, since the back cover 640 of the body frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 protruding rearward from the binding band CT are provided as protective portions for protecting the binding band CT, the locking portion CTb of the binding band CT is provided. Therefore, under various circumstances such as after the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is assembled, transported, installed, installed in the game hall, etc., for some reason, other members will not hit the binding band CT. It is possible to protect the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from coming into contact with each other, prevent the cable tie CT (lock part CTb) from being damaged, and prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from coming off the wire locking part 1603 and the wire locking part 3011. be able to. In addition, since the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 and the peripheral control board box 1520 can protect other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, damage to other members due to contact with the binding band CT can be prevented. can be avoided, and the occurrence of defects can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the rear cover 640 of the body frame 4 can reliably prevent other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, the binding band CT (lock portion CTb) may not come into contact with another member for some reason. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being detached from the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 due to the breakage of the lock portion CTb. In addition, since the back cover 640 of the body frame 4 can prevent other members from coming into contact with the binding band CT, damage to other members due to contact with the binding band CT can be avoided. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of defects.

In addition, when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear of the game board 5 is covered by the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4, so that other members, books, etc. To prevent other members such as a wiring EC and a game ball B connecting a pachinko machine 1 and a game hall from contacting (abutting) a lock part CTb of a binding band CT by a back cover 640.例文帳に追加This prevents the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from coming off the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 due to the release of the tightening of the band portion CTa by the lock portion CTb due to contact with other members. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by the binding band CT. In addition, since the back cover 640 can prevent loosening and release of tightening due to contact of other members with the lock portion CTb, it is possible to use a binding band CT of a type in which the band portion CTa can be detached from the lock portion CTb. can be done.

In addition, since the peripheral control board box 1520 protruding from the binding band CT is provided as a protective portion for protecting the binding band CT, the back box 3010 provided with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 is provided. When another member moves from the rear toward the tying band CT, the other member comes into contact with the peripheral control board box 1520 as a protection part before the other member contacts the tying band CT, and the other member moves further away from the tying band CT. can be prevented from moving toward the binding band CT, and other members can be prevented from coming into contact with the binding band CT. Therefore, it is possible to avoid contact (abutment) of other members with the binding band CT (lock portion CTb). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by the binding band CT without the restriction being lifted. In addition, since the peripheral control board box 1520 is provided as a protection part for protecting the binding band CT, even if for some reason other members go over the back cover 640 of the body frame 4 and approach the game board 5 from behind, , As described above, since the peripheral control board box 1520 that protects the cable ties CT is further present, the cable ties CT can be doubly protected.

In addition, as a protective portion for protecting the binding band CT, a peripheral control board box 1520 is provided on the rear surface of the game board 5 where the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 is provided, and projects backward beyond the binding band CT. Therefore, even if the game board 5 is placed on the workbench with its rear surface facing downward during the assembly work of the game board 5, the peripheral control board box 1520 abuts on the workbench. The workbench does not come into contact with CTb. Alternatively, even if a plurality of game boards 5 are stacked and transported during the transport operation of the game boards 5, the other game boards 5 come into contact with the peripheral control board box 1520, so that the other game boards 5 are locked in the lock part CTb. does not abut. As such, the existence of the peripheral control board box 1520 can prevent other members such as the workbench and the game board 5 from coming into contact with the lock portion CTb of the binding band CT and being crushed. It is possible to prevent the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 from being detached from the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 due to breakage of the lock portion CTb.

Furthermore, since the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 are made transparent, and the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 support the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 so as to be visible, the wiring can be locked from the outside. Since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 supported through the portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 can be visually recognized, all the wires EC constituting the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled by the binding band CT and cannot be moved. It is possible to easily check whether or not the wiring EC is regulated, and it is possible to prevent the shipment of defective products in which a part of the wiring EC is disconnected. can do.

In addition, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the binding work of binding the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be easily performed by the binding band CT. Workability can be improved.

In addition, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the transparent wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, and the binding band CT is milky white with low light transmittance. are colored (e.g., gray, yellow, white, black, blue, red, green, etc.) from the plurality of wires EC constituting the harness WH1 through the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. When looking at the harness WH2 (a plurality of wires EC) and the band portion CTa of the binding band CT, it is possible to clearly visually recognize that the band portion CTa straddles the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. As a result, the binding of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT can be reliably confirmed, and the wiring locking portion 1603, the wiring locking portion 3011, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bound by the binding band CT. can be made easier.

Furthermore, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is made to contact obliquely with respect to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2, it is possible to make contact in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2. In comparison, the contact area can be widened, and the frictional resistance between the binding band CT (band portion CTa) and the harness WH1 or harness WH2 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently restrict the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 by the binding band CT, thereby preventing the harness WH1, the harness WH2, and the wiring EC from coming off from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011. can be avoided.

In addition, since the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is in oblique contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, when the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are tightened and bound by the binding band CT, a force acts on the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (wiring EC) from the band portion CTa of the binding band CT. Depending on the strength, the insulating coating film covering the wiring EC may deteriorate early, and problems such as electric leakage and short circuit may easily occur.
On the other hand, if the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is brought into contact with the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 obliquely, the band portion CTa is wound in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 to bring it into contact. The contact area between the band portion CTa and the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 (wiring EC) can be increased as compared with the case where the wiring EC is formed. Therefore, even if they are tightened with the same strength by the binding band CT, by making them contact obliquely to widen the contact area, the force acting upon tightening can be widely dispersed and made relatively small, so that the insulation film is not affected by the insulation coating. Early deterioration can be suppressed, and problems such as electrical leakage and short circuits can be suppressed.

In addition, since the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 extend like a band plate, the harness WH1 and the harness can be secured together with the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 by the binding band CT. When WH2 is bundled, the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is automatically in diagonal contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 because the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 have widths. As a result, it is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the effects described above.

Furthermore, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 made up of a plurality of wirings EC are individually bundled with a specific binding band at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be It is possible to suppress the plurality of wirings EC constituting the wiring EC from being separated one by one over the entire length of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, thereby avoiding the contact of the separated wirings EC with other members. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects.

In addition, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are bundled with the specific binding band at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 may be moved in the longitudinal direction for some reason. When pulled, the lock portion of the specific binding band comes into contact with the wiring locking portion 1603, the wiring locking portion 3011, and the binding band CT as the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 move, and the specific binding band pulls the lock further. Movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 made up of a plurality of wiring ECs are bound by the specific binding band at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the outer circumferences of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are circular. , and the band portion of the specific binding band extends in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2. As a result, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be compactly bundled at the portion of the specific binding band, so that it is possible to easily check the parts provided behind the harness WH1 and the harness WH2.

In addition, at the portion of the specific binding band provided at a portion away from the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the band portion of the specific binding band is aligned in a direction orthogonal to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 (longitudinal direction). extended to On the other hand, the band portion CTa of the binding band CT is obliquely brought into contact with the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 at the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. The direction in which the band portion CTa and the band portion extend with respect to the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be made different between the portion of (1) and the portion of the binding portion. As a result, in the work of bundling the harness WH1 and the harness WH2, by checking the position and number of the band part CTa and the extending direction of the band part, it is easy to determine whether the work is being performed according to the work manual. can be verified. In this case, the color of the binding band CT of the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 and the specific binding band may be different so that the binding work can be easily confirmed. can.

In addition, since the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 extend in the shape of a flat plate or a band plate, the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are formed in a rod shape. In comparison, since the contact area between the wire locking portion 1603 or the wire locking portion 3011 and the harness WH1 or the harness WH2 can be increased, the frictional resistance can be increased. As a result, the effect of the binding band CT as the movement restricting means can be exhibited more easily, and the movement of the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be reliably restricted to further avoid problems.

Furthermore, since the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 are extended in the shape of a flat plate or a band plate, the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be secured at the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. Since the plurality of wirings EC constituting the wiring EC can be easily spread along the surfaces of the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, heat can be easily released from the wirings EC. At this time, since the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 can be visually recognized through the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011, the plurality of wires EC constituting the harness WH1 and the harness WH2 are connected to the wiring locking portion 1603. It is possible to easily check each wire through the wire locking portion 3011 .

In addition, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 3011 are moved in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the harness WH1 in the direction crossing the longitudinal direction of the harness WH1 when tension is applied to the harness WH1. 1600 and the back box 3010, so that even if the harness WH1 is pulled or the harness WH1 is pulled during assembly or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1, the wiring locking portion 1603 and the wiring locking portion 1603 are extended. Since the harness WH1 moves in the direction opposite to the distal end at the stopping portion 3011, the harness WH1 does not come off from the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the ends of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 including the hook portion 1603a and the hook portion 3011a are formed obliquely so as to move away from the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 toward the tip. , the harness WH1 can be easily inserted between the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011 and the effect display device 1600 and the back box 3010 from the tip side of the wire locking portion 1603 and the wire locking portion 3011. and workability can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the protruding pins 3063 of the mounting supporter 3060 are arranged in a plurality of functional holes provided at positions where the body portion 3061 of the back box 3010 straddles. After inserting it into the through hole of the portion 3013, it is inserted into the through hole of the functional hole portion 3013 corresponding to the plurality of first mounting holes 3062 among the plurality of functional hole portions 3013 provided at the position where the main body portion 3061 straddles. The mounting supporter 3060 can be attached to the back box 3010 by inserting the mounting screw from the opposite side of the back box 3010 to the mounting supporter 3060 and screwing it into the first mounting hole 3062 and tightening. In this state, the mounting supporter 3060 is non-rotatably mounted on the back case 3010 because the projecting pin 3063 is inserted into the through hole of the functional hole portion 3013 . Then, by attaching the back right effect unit 3400 to the mounting supporter 3060 using a plurality of second mounting holes 3064 provided in the main body portion 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 attached to the back box 3010, the back right effect Unit 3400 can be fixed (attached) to back box 3010 via attachment supporter 3060 . Note that the attachment supporter 3060 may be attached to the back box 3010 after the attachment supporter 3060 is attached to the back right effect unit 3400 . At this time, as described above, the protruding pin 3063 of the mounting supporter 3060 is inserted into the through hole, and the positioning accuracy of the back-right effect unit 3400 attached to the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060 can be increased. Therefore, the back right effect unit 3400 can be securely mounted at a desired position, and the effect of the back right effect unit 3400 can be easily exhibited.

Since the back box 3010 is provided with a plurality of functional holes 3013, by attaching the mounting supporter 3060 to the plurality of functional holes 3013 provided at desired positions where the back right effect unit 3400 is to be mounted, The back right effect unit 3400 can be attached at a desired position. Therefore, when it is desired to change the position of the back right effect unit 3400 due to design change, model change, etc., the attachment supporter 3060 can be attached to a plurality of functional holes 3013 provided at desired positions without remaking the back box 3010. Since the position of the back-right effect unit 3400 can be easily changed with just a touch, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back-right effect unit 3400 can be increased, and design change, model change, etc. can be easily dealt with. is possible, the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, by attaching the mounting supporter 3060 to a plurality of functional holes 3013 at desired positions among the plurality of functional holes 3013 in the back box 3010, the back right effect unit 3400 can be mounted at a desired position. Since the rear right effect unit 3400 can be placed at a more effective position, the rear right effect unit 3400 can be placed at a position that has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1. By attaching the back right effect unit 3400, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player can be provided.

In addition, since the mounting supporter 3060 (main body portion 3061) is sized to span the plurality of functional holes 3013 in the back box 3010, a plurality of production units such as the back right production unit 3400 are attached to one mounting supporter 3060. Therefore, by attaching a plurality of effect units to one attachment supporter 3060, the attachment supporter 3060 can collectively unitize the plurality of effect units. Therefore, by attaching a plurality of effect units to the mounting supporter 3060 and then mounting the mounting supporter 3060 to the back box 3010, the plurality of effect units can be attached to the back box 3010 at once, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to simplify the time and effort required for assembling and suppress an increase in cost.

Furthermore, since the mounting supporter 3060 is attached to the back box 3010 across a plurality of functional holes 3013, the mounting supporter 3060 can reinforce the back box 3010, thereby increasing the durability of the back box 3010. can be made difficult to break. In addition, since the back box 3010 can be reinforced by the mounting supporter 3060, the back box 3010 can be made difficult to deform even when the load from the back right effect unit 3400 or the vibration or inertial force due to the movable effect acts. , the back right effect unit 3400 can be fixed in a fixed position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the back right effect unit 3400 from swinging or moving unnecessarily, so that the decoration effect and the effect of the back right effect unit 3400 can be surely exerted, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060, a gap having the same thickness as the main body portion 3061 of the attachment supporter 3060 is provided between the back right effect unit 3400 and the back box 3010. Through the gap, heat from the back-right effect unit 3400, the back box 3010, and the like can be easily released. In addition, since the plurality of functional holes 3013 provided in the back box 3010 each have a through hole and the mounting position of the mounting supporter 3060 can be appropriately selected as described above, Since there is a functional hole 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3060 is not attached, the heat from the back right effect unit 3400 side is ventilated and escaped through the through hole of the functional hole 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3060 is not attached. can be done. For this reason, the configuration of the plurality of functional holes 3013 of the back box 3010 and the mounting supporter 3060 can reduce the influence of heat on the back right effect unit 3400, the back box 3010, etc., and the back right effect unit The decorative effect and presentation effect of the 3400 or the like can be exhibited without fail.

Furthermore, since the back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060, the attachment supporter 3060 can reduce the transmission of vibration between the back box 3010 and the back right effect unit 3400. . As a result, the back box 3010 and the back right direction unit 3400 can be prevented from swinging or moving unnecessarily, so that the decoration effect and the direction effect by the back box 3010 and the back right direction unit 3400 can be surely exhibited. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining a player and suppressing a decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, by appropriately selecting a plurality of functional holes 3013 for attaching the mounting supporter 3060 to the plurality of functional holes 3013 provided in the back box 3010, the back box 3010 does not have to be remade. Since the position of the back right performance unit 3400 can be easily changed, the same back box 3010 can be used regardless of the model, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the back right effect unit 3400 is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3060, by preparing in advance a plurality of mounting supporters 3060 having different sizes and shapes of the main body part 3061, the back box 3010 In addition to the positional change in the direction along the surface on which the plurality of functional holes 3013 are provided, the positional change in the direction perpendicular to the surface can be easily handled, and the back right effect unit 3400 can be arranged more freely.

In addition, since the back right effect unit 3400 is provided on the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3060, there is no need to provide a mounting boss for mounting the effect unit on the back box 3010 as in the prior art, and the mounting supporter 3060 is provided. Since through holes are provided in a plurality of functional holes 3013 for attaching the 3060, the back box 3010 can be made lighter than before, and handling (transportation) of the back box 3010 in the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, etc. ) and handling can be made easier.

Further, as described above, by inserting the protruding pin 3063 of the mounting supporter 3060 into the through hole of the functional hole portion 3013, the mounting supporter 3060 can be positioned. can be made difficult to move. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back right effect unit 3400 from moving or swinging unnecessarily during the movable effect, so that the player can surely see the movable effect with the desired movement, and the desired effect can be achieved. The effect can be reliably exhibited, the player can be entertained, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, the body portion 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 is composed of a plurality of block-shaped head portions 3061a provided with a first mounting hole 3062 and a second mounting hole 3064, and a plate-shaped head portion connecting the plurality of head portions 3061a. The back connecting piece 3061b and the side connecting piece 3061c are configured, and compared to the case where the main body portion 3061 of the mounting supporter 3060 is formed with a constant thickness over the entire length, the back connecting piece 3061b and the side connecting piece 3061c Since the material for the portion of the side connecting piece 3061c can be reduced, the cost and weight of the attachment supporter 3060 can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to one of the two through holes of the functional hole portion 3013 in the box-frame-shaped back box 3010. , and with the first mounting holes 3052 aligned with the remaining through holes in the functional hole portion 3013, the mounting screws are inserted through the through holes from the rear of the back box 3010 on the side opposite to the mounting supporter 3050. The attachment supporter 3050 can be attached to the back box 3010 by screwing it into one attachment hole 3052 and tightening it. In this state, the mounting supporter 3050 is non-rotatably mounted on the back case 3010 because the protruding pin 3053 is inserted into one of the two through holes. By attaching the back effect unit 3500 to the mounting supporter 3050 using the second mounting hole 3055 at the tip of the boss portion 3054 protruding from the main body portion 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 attached to the back box 3010, The back post effect unit 3500 can be fixed (attached) to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050 . Note that the attachment supporter 3050 may be attached to the back box 3010 after the attachment supporter 3050 is attached to the back effect unit 3500 . At this time, as described above, the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 is inserted into one of the two through holes in the functional hole portion 3013, and the mounting supporter 3050 is attached to the back box 3010. Since the positioning accuracy of the unit 3500 can be improved, the after-behind effect unit 3500 can be reliably mounted at a desired position, and the effect of the after-behind effect unit 3500 can be easily exhibited.

Since the back box 3010 is provided with a plurality of functional holes 3013, by attaching the mounting supporter 3050 to the functional hole 3013 provided at the desired position where the back effect unit 3500 is to be mounted, the desired A rear effect unit 3500 can be attached to the position. In addition, in the mounting supporter 3050, the boss portion 3054 having the second mounting hole 3055 at the tip extends (protrudes) from the main body portion 3051 in a predetermined direction (forward). By preparing a plurality of mounting supporters 3050 having different lengths in advance, the mounting supporters 3050 having a desired length for the boss portion 3054 can be used for the surface of the back box 3010 on which the functional hole portion 3013 is provided. By doing so, the back effect unit 3500 can be attached at a desired distance from the surface. For this reason, when it is desired to change the position of the back effecting unit 3500 due to design change, model change, etc., the mounting supporter 3050 can be attached to the desired position without remaking the back box 3010. or mounting the mounting supporter 3050 with the desired length of the boss portion 3054, the back effect unit can be moved in the direction along the surface on which the functional hole portion 3013 is provided or in the direction perpendicular to the surface. Since the position of 3500 can be easily changed, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the behind-the-scenes effect unit 3500. An increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, the mounting supporter 3050 can be attached to the function hole 3013 at a desired position among the plurality of function holes 3013 of the back box 3010, or the mounting supporter 3050 having the desired length of the boss portion 3054 can be attached. By doing so, the rear back effect unit 3500 can be mounted at a desired position, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back rear effect unit 3500 can be increased, so that the rear back effect unit 3500 can be arranged at a more effective position. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting a player's interest and having a high appealing power to the player by mounting a rear back performance unit 3500 at a position not seen in the past pachinko machines. be able to.

In addition, as described above, the functional holes 3013 for mounting the mounting supporters 3050 and the mounting supporters 3050 having different lengths of the boss portions 3054 are appropriately selected from the plurality of functional holes 3013 provided in the back box 3010. By doing so, the position of the back effect unit 3500 can be easily changed without remaking the back box 3010, so that the back box 3010 can be used as the same regardless of the model, and the pachinko machine 1. cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, since a boss portion 3054 having a second mounting hole 3055 provided at the tip of the mounting supporter 3050 is provided between the first mounting hole 3052 and the protruding pin 3053, the mounting supporter 3050 can be attached to the second mounting hole 3055. The load from the back effecting unit 3500 can be applied to the back box 3010 evenly from the first mounting hole 3052 (mounting screw) and the protruding pin 3053, and the mounting supporter 3050 can be hardly damaged. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of maintaining the attachment of the rear effect unit 3500 in a good condition and reliably achieving the above-described effects.

In addition, since a flat piece portion 3051a is provided on the surface of the main body portion 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 opposite to the surface from which the protruding pin 3053 protrudes, the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 can be attached to the rear box 3010. When pressing the body portion 3051 toward the back case 3010 in order to insert it into the through hole of the functional hole portion 3013, the piece portion 3051a is pressed to make it easier to press the body portion 3051 toward the back case 3010. and the projecting pin 3053 can be reliably inserted into the through hole. In addition, since the piece 3051a is flat, it is easy to press with a finger or the like. .

Further, as described above, by inserting the protruding pin 3053 of the mounting supporter 3050 into one of the two fixing holes in the functional hole portion 3013, the mounting supporter 3050 can be positioned. It is possible to make it difficult to move the behind-the-scenes effect unit 3500.例文帳に追加Therefore, even if the back-side production unit 3500 is used as a production device (movable decorative body) capable of executing a movable production, it is possible to prevent the back-side production unit 3500 from moving or swinging unnecessarily during the movable production. To make it possible to surely show a player a movable performance of desired movement, to surely exhibit a desired performance effect, to amuse the player, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

In addition, since the rear back effect unit 3500 is attached to the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050, a gap having the same thickness as the main body portion 3051 of the mounting supporter 3050 is provided between the back rear effect unit 3500 and the back box 3010. Through the gap, heat from the back effect unit 3500, the back box 3010 and the like can be easily released. In addition, since the plurality of functional holes 3013 provided in the back case 3010 each have a through hole and the mounting position of the mounting supporter 3050 can be appropriately selected as described above, Since there is a functional hole 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3050 is not attached, the heat from the rear effect unit 3500 side is ventilated and escaped through the through hole of the functional hole 3013 to which the mounting supporter 3050 is not attached. can be done. For this reason, the configuration of the plurality of functional holes 3013 of the back box 3010 and the mounting supporter 3050 can reduce the influence of heat in the back back effect unit 3500, the back box 3010, etc., and the back back effect unit It is possible to reliably exhibit the decorative effect and presentation effect of the 3500 or the like.

Furthermore, since the back post effect unit 3500 is attached to the back box 3010 via the attachment supporter 3050, the attachment supporter 3050 can reduce transmission of vibration between the back box 3010 and the back post effect unit 3500. . As a result, the back box 3010 and the rear rear effect unit 3500 can be prevented from swinging or moving unnecessarily, so that the decorative effect and the performance effect of the back box 3010 and the rear rear effect unit 3500 can be surely exhibited. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining a player and suppressing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the back-side effect unit 3500 is provided in the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter 3050, there is no need to provide a mounting boss for mounting the back-side effect unit 3500 on the back box 3010 unlike the conventional art. Since through holes are provided in a plurality of functional holes 3013 for mounting the mounting supporter 3050, the back box 3010 can be made lighter than before, and the back box 3010 can be handled in the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, etc. (transportation) and handling can be facilitated.

In addition, since the color of the mounting supporters 3050 and 3060 is made different from the color of the back box 3010, when the mounting supporters 3050 and 3060 are attached to the back box 3010, the mounting supports 3050 and 3060 are different colors. Since the 3060 can be easily identified, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled or disassembled, the positions of the mounting supporter 3050 and the mounting supporter 3060 can be easily recognized, and the work can proceed smoothly. By facilitating such labor, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the attacker unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500, the case (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705) of the door unit (second start opening opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) ) for supporting the wiring EC extending from the driving means (starting port solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) and the wiring EC extending from the sensor (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) Since a plurality of wiring support portions (the band holding portion 2635c, the wiring locking portion 2635d, and the band holding portion 2706) are provided, the plurality of wiring ECs can be collected by supporting the wiring ECs on the wiring support portion. , and the wiring EC can be prevented from extending in different directions from the door unit. At this time, since the wiring EC is supported by being fastened to the wiring supporting portion by the binding band CT, the wiring EC is not separated between the wiring supporting portion extending like a bar or strip having a free end and the case. As compared with the case of inserting and supporting the wiring EC, it is possible to prevent the wiring EC from being loosened or coming off from the wiring supporting portion. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the wiring EC extending from the case of the door unit can be prevented from interfering with the assembly or being caught by other members, thereby improving workability. It is possible to suppress the increase in cost by reducing the complexity of the work. In addition, by collecting a plurality of wirings EC by the wiring supporting portion, it is possible to prevent the wirings EC extending from the case from being caught by other members. It is possible to prevent the wiring EC from being assembled in a state where the wiring EC is detached from the wiring EC.

In addition, the wiring EC connected to the driving means (starting opening solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) held in the case (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705), the door unit (second starting opening door body 2631, and the wiring EC connected to the sensor (the second starting opening sensor 2601 and the ball sensor 2711) provided near the door 2701) of the opening/closing unit 2700 and detecting the game ball B whose circulation is changed by the door unit; are supported together by the wire support portion (the band holding portion 2635c, the wire locking portion 2635d, and the band holding portion 2706). 2nd starting gate 2005, first big prize gate 2006, second big prize gate 2007, V prize gate 2008, etc.) are set in advance via wiring EC and wiring support part. As a result, it is possible to reliably assemble a sensor of a type corresponding to the door unit, and to prevent assembling a different type of sensor.
In addition, when the door unit and the sensor are removed for maintenance and then reassembled, the sensor can be prevented from being lost, and a sensor of a different type can be prevented from being installed.

Further, the wiring supporting portions (the band holding portion 2635c and the wiring locking portion 2635d) that support the wiring EC to the case (the unit case 2635 and the unit case 2705) of the door unit (the second opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the opening/closing unit 2700) , and band holding portion 2706) are provided, the wiring EC extending from the drive means (starting opening solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) and sensor (second starting opening sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) is supported by wiring. By supporting the wiring EC on the part, the wiring EC can be made to run along the case, and the wiring EC can be hard to be seen from the player's side, and the appearance can be improved.

In addition, the case (unit case 2635 and unit case 2705) of the door unit (second start opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) allows sensors (second start opening sensor 2601, and ball sensor 2711). Since the movement of the sensor can be regulated by the door unit, the sensor can be attached by the door unit, the labor required for assembly can be simplified, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the movement of the sensor (the second starting opening sensor 2601 and the ball sensor 2711) is regulated by the door unit (the second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the opening/closing unit 2700), the door can be opened during maintenance or the like. The sensor can also be removed only by removing the unit, and the labor required for removal can be simplified, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, the length of the wiring EC from the sensor (second start opening sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) provided outside the door unit (second start opening opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) Since the wire support portions (the band holding portion 2635c, the wire locking portion 2635d, and the band holding portion 2706) are supported with a margin, the sensor can be positioned relative to the door unit within the margin of the length. can be separated. Therefore, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, the wiring EC connected to the sensor is supported by the wiring supporting portion of the door unit in advance, and then the sensor is mounted after the door unit is mounted, or the door unit is mounted after the sensor is mounted. is attached, the wiring EC from the sensor is not unnecessarily pulled, and the attachment work (assembly work) can be performed smoothly.

Furthermore, the wiring EC connected to the sensor (second starting opening sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) is routed from the sensor to the wiring support portion (band holding portion 2635c, wire locking portion 2635d, and band holding portion 2706). Since it is supported by a length longer than the shortest length, the door unit (second start opening opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) can be removed from predetermined members (attacker base plate 2610 and base plate 2710) due to maintenance or the like. Since there is a margin in the length of the wiring EC from the sensor when removing, the door unit can be separated from the predetermined member to some extent, maintenance can be performed satisfactorily, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, since a plurality of wiring support portions (band holding portion 2635c, wire locking portion 2635d, and band holding portion 2706) are provided in the door unit (second start port opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700), design changes and When the direction in which the wiring EC is routed is changed due to model change or the like, the wiring EC can be supported by selecting the wiring support portion provided at the optimum position through which the wiring EC passes. Therefore, design changes and model changes can be handled without changing the cases (the unit case 2635 and the unit case 2705), and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door unit (the second opening opening/closing unit 2630 and the opening/closing unit 2700) is provided with a plurality of wiring support portions (the band holding portion 2635c, the wiring locking portion 2635d, and the band holding portion 2706), the door unit After assembling, the wiring EC from the drive means (starting port solenoid 2632 and solenoid 2702) and sensor (second starting port sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) , the wiring EC from other members can be supported and bundled, and the routing of the wiring EC in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, the wiring EC is tightened and supported by the binding band CT, and the door unit (second start opening opening/closing unit 2630 and opening/closing unit 2700) and sensor (second start opening sensor 2601 and ball sensor 2711) To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of making a player hesitate to commit fraud and having a high deterrence power against fraud because it is necessary to cut a tying band CT when trying to commit fraud, and traces of the fraud tend to remain. can be done.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the attacker unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500, solenoids (starting opening solenoid 2632, second attacker solenoid 2652, V distribution solenoid 2662, and solenoid 2702), the door body (second starting door body 2631, second big winning mouth door body 2651, V winning mouth door body 2661, and door body 2701) advances and retreats, and the game ball B passes. Sensors (second starting opening sensor 2601, second big winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, losing opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711) for detecting the game ball B are connected to the door unit (second starting opening Provided outside the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) of the opening/closing unit 2630, the second grand prize opening opening/closing unit 2650, the V sorting unit 2660, and the opening/closing unit 2700) Therefore, since no sensor is provided in the case, the unit having the door body (door unit) can be made relatively smaller than the conventional technology, and the size of the door unit can be reduced. Therefore, since the door unit can be miniaturized, the degree of freedom in arranging the door unit can be increased. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, at least a part of the sensors (second starting opening sensor 2601, second big winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, losing opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711) is replaced with a door unit (second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 , Second big winning opening opening and closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, opening and closing unit 2700) case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) Because it is provided in front, conventional Compared to the case where the sensor is provided in the case as in the technique of (1), it is possible to reduce the dimension in the front-rear direction required for detecting the game ball B, and it is possible to easily secure the rear space. . Therefore, as described above, the door unit can be made smaller, and the rear space can be easily secured. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by arranging the ornaments, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be more entertained by the accessories in the back. , it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the sensor for detecting the game ball B (the second starting opening sensor 2601, the second big winning opening sensor 2602, the V winning opening sensor 2603, the losing opening sensor 2604, and the ball sensor 2711) is connected to the door unit (the opening and closing of the second starting opening). Since it is provided outside the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) of the unit 2630, the second big winning opening opening/closing unit 2650, the V sorting unit 2660, and the opening/closing unit 2700, The same door unit can be used regardless of the model used, and by manufacturing only the same door unit, a sufficient mass production effect can be obtained. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects, simplify the labor required for assembly, and reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In detail, for example, in a conventional unit with a built-in sensor inside a case, in order to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the unit, depending on the model used, the sensor is removed from the inside of the case and the sensor is built in. It is conceivable to use a unit that does not have However, in this case, if you try to obtain the effect of mass production by using the same unit for multiple models, you will have to manufacture both a unit with the sensor attached and a unit with the sensor removed from the same unit. Therefore, the time and effort required for manufacturing the unit becomes complicated, and it becomes difficult to obtain a sufficient effect of mass production. In addition, if there is a unit with the sensor removed from the same unit, there is a risk of erroneously assembling a unit without the sensor when assembling the pachinko machine, which can cause problems. At the same time, it is necessary to check the unit when assembling it, which is troublesome and increases the cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the sensor (second 2 starting opening sensor 2601, second winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, losing opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711) are not provided (not built in), so the position of the sensor in multiple models Since the same door unit can be used irrespective of the model to be used even if the .DELTA. In addition, since there are no door units with different functions in the same door unit, it is not necessary to check the door unit when assembling the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles due to assembling errors, and to assemble the pachinko machine 1. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced by simplifying the labor involved in the above.

Furthermore, at least a part of the sensors (second starting opening sensor 2601, second big winning opening sensor 2602, V winning opening sensor 2603, losing opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711) is replaced with a door unit (second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630 , second prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2650, V distribution unit 2660, and opening/closing unit 2700) case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, unit case 2705). By providing the part (detection hole) where the game ball B passes and is detected in front of the case, the detection hole of the sensor is positioned in front, and the detection of the game ball B by the sensor is visible from the player side. By visually observing the detection of the game ball B, the player's expectations for the game can be heightened and the player can be entertained.

In addition, through the plate-shaped attacker base plate 2610 and the base plate 2710, the door body (second start gate door body 2631, second prize winning gate door body 2651, V winning gate door body 2661, and door body 2701) Since it is made to advance and retreat forward, the receiving port for receiving the game ball B on the attacker base plate 2610 and the attacker front plate 2620 (second starting port 2005, second big winning port 2007, V winning port 2008, loss port 2009, etc.) and passages for game balls B are provided. Therefore, when changing the model, design, etc., it is possible to easily change the mode of the reception port and the passage only by changing the side of the attacker base plate 2610, so it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest. A pachinko machine 1 with high power can be easily provided, and a door unit (a second starting opening opening/closing unit 2630, a second prize winning opening opening/closing unit 2650, a V sorting unit 2660, and an opening/closing unit 2700) can be changed. Therefore, the increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit Since the case 2705) is attached behind the attacker base plate 2610, it is possible to make the case difficult to see from the player side by the attacker base plate 2610, and the case (driving means (starting opening solenoid 2632, second attacker solenoid 2652, the V distribution solenoid 2662, and the solenoid 2702)) can be suppressed, and the pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance can be provided.

Furthermore, driving means (starting opening solenoid 2632, second attacker solenoid 2652, V distribution solenoid 2662, and solenoid 2702) and door body (second starting opening door body 2631, second big winning opening door body 2651, V winning opening The cases (unit case 2635, unit case 2655, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) holding the door 2661 and door 2701) are separated into a first case portion and a second case portion (first case portion 2633). and second case portion 2634, first case portion 2653 and second case portion 2654, first case portion 2663 and second case portion 2664, and first case portion 2703 and second case portion 2704). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in the number of parts of the door unit (the second start opening opening and closing unit 2630, the second big winning opening opening and closing unit 2650, the V distribution unit 2660, and the opening and closing unit 2700), and the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Moreover, the case is divided into the first case portion and the second case portion (the first case portion 2633 and the second case portion 2634, the first case portion 2653 and the second case portion 2654, the first case portion 2663 and the second case portion 2664). , and the first case portion 2703 and the second case portion 2704). It is possible to hold the doors (the second start door door 2631, the second grand prize door door 2651, the V prize door door 2661, and the door 2701) sandwiched between the first case and the second case. , the labor required for assembly can be simplified.

Furthermore, at least a part of the sensors (second starting opening sensor 2601, second big winning opening sensor 2602, V Since the attacker front plate 2620 provided in front of the case (attacker base plate 2610, base plate 2710) is in contact with the winning opening sensor 2603, the losing opening sensor 2604, and the ball sensor 2711), The plate 2620 can restrict movement of the sensor in a predetermined direction, and can position the sensor at a predetermined position.

In addition, the outer surface of the case (unit case 2635, unit case 2665, and unit case 2705) is in contact with the sensors (second starting opening sensor 2601, V winning opening sensor 2603, losing opening sensor 2604, and ball sensor 2711). Therefore, the movement of the sensor in a predetermined direction can be restricted by the case, and the sensor can be positioned at a predetermined position. In addition, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, the sensor can be guided by the contacting case, and the assembling work can be facilitated.

[11. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 203 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 216. FIG. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 214, and FIG. 216 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[11-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big win game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination for use in determining the initial value of this special random number A decision random number, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot gaming state, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A variable display pattern random number for use in determining a variable display pattern of special symbols to be variably displayed on the symbol display device, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number for use in determining the jackpot symbol or small winning symbol derived and displayed on the symbol display (determination of the hit type), and a symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this symbol random number, etc. prepared.
Also, in addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the acceptance of the game ball of the second start port 2005, and this normal symbol hit determination An initial value determination random number for determination of a normal symbol hit for use in determining the initial value of the random number, and a normal symbol for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs a high-speed preselection based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU.
Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, various kinds of data stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the processing when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the information regarding the information as numerical values is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match, the initial value determination random number for normal pattern per determination is the main control MPU. Based on the ID code, an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed value range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol per determination is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. there is That is, the initial value determination random number for determining a normal per symbol is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU. The first security measure is to prevent the ID code from being rewritten using an external device once the ID code is stored. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the second security measure is taken to prevent analysis by taking two steps of security measures.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the taken out ID code as the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally acquires game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at every predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the normal prize winning opening 2003 at each predetermined interval, the game ball can be received into the second starting opening 2005 by opening and closing the movable piece. It is not possible to generate a game state that becomes

[11-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU is circuit-configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 214 and 215, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main-control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer set value is set in the WDT control register) to activate the main control built-in WDT and start counting time until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built into the main control MPU ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the clocked time reaches the time set by the timer set value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S12, the main control MPU performs power failure clear processing (step S14). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is

Following step S14, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed and the RAM clear switch is operated.

When the main control MPU determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). In other words, the main control MPU is in a state capable of executing RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, game information related to games such as unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination The flag indicates whether or not to erase various types of information including information indicating the value of a data counter, etc.). The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, it returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared to restart the clocking. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on process again. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when various information is not erased. In step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase various information, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

In the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, the main control built-in RAM is stored as when power is restored. A work area is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the term “recovery of power” refers to the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous A high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is irradiated to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU itself resets and then returns.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various types of information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of subsequent various processing, so that the main control side power failure processing described later is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- is set. If FLG is not set to 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when determining to erase various information, or in the determination of step S30, the main control MPU When the control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, when the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) That is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the main-control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU does this by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Note that the main control MPU may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch instructs RAM clear and erases various information, when the sum value does not match, or when the main control side power supply When the shutdown processing is not normally completed, a counter that retrieves a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU and updates the random number for judging a normal pattern based on the retrieved ID code. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range is performed, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number described above. Normal per symbol determination initial value determination Set to random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.
As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is stored in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU in order to update the hardware. Along with making settings such as latching and acquiring, settings such as activation of the hard random number circuit incorporated in the main control are set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and the predetermined When all the values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. successively extract the other values in the , without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. A random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets this acquired random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). Create a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and use it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. memorize to
In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. be. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S54, when the main control MPU judges that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU performs non-hit-or-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, symbol initial value determination random numbers, small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the win/lose determination (hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers, normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing for starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear processing of step S14 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU, for example, stops outputting drive signals to various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the second attacker solenoid 2652, etc. ( step S62).

After step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power failure processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored because the main control side power failure processing is not executed. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power failure processing is executed at the time of power failure, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when restarting after forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. There is no way that the value (sum value) will match, and a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control internal RAM, and the contents of the main control internal RAM will be completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, this main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, in the case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22, and subsequent processing is performed. I will explain the problems in

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. DC +5 V is applied for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V, and the island of the game hall The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the waiting time (boot timer) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). 2.5 seconds is set.), and just before reaching the standby time, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. is applied as DC +5V, within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control-side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a game hall clerk or other attendant, and even if the game hall clerk or other attendant does not express his/her intention to clear the RAM, the memory is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the game backup information described above is erased (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared to restart the clocking. is disabled, the main control MPU can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), it returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. It is possible to prevent various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize number information) from being updated, and checksum calculation results It is designed so that there is no change in As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, supplies game information and other information (e.g., the number of main prize balls) according to the progress of the game. Information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), which is a backup process for storing various information including the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process when the main control side power is turned off, which is composed of an infinite loop, is performed by the main control board. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, the main control MPU of the main control MPU, when it restarts, receives the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT causes the main control MPU to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on processing is performed at the time of power restoration, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is performed. is repeated to set the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, clear the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, and restart the clocking. By not being able to start, the main control built-in WDT can force the main control MPU to reset.

By forcibly resetting the main control MPU by the main control built-in WDT by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then step S52 By preventing the progress to the control flow of setting interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls A mechanism is adopted in which updating of various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) can be avoided. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output judgment (Information indicating the value of the counter for use, etc.)) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and Other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls) and other information are not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls)) are reliably prevented from being changed. can be done.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to communicate, create a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and incorporate the main control as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting solenoid 2632 and information instructing the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652. . Here, first, the main control return destination command at power-on includes information instructing the driving state of the starter solenoid 2632 and information instructing the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652. Problems in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on is not reserved for the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 controls the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second When the second attacker solenoid 2652 is driven and the first big prize winning port 2006 and the second big winning prize port 2007 are opened by the opening and closing member, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. As a result, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 is started, and the state in which the first large prize winning port 2006 and the second large prize winning port 2007 are closed by the opening and closing member shifts to the state in which they are opened. It will happen.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the game state (whether it is a time saving state, etc.) indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. . However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the game state indicated by the state command at the time of power-on received from, even if it is possible to display the screen in the big win game state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return, in any round of the big win game state or cannot be displayed at all. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 and is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 3002 or the second big winning hole sensor 2602, the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole sensor 2602 detects the ball. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives a large winning hole 1 count display command that conveys the number of game balls that entered the second large winning hole 2007, the peripheral control The substrate 1510 can display the number of game balls entering the first big prize hole 2006 or the second big prize hole 2007 on the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the game state. It is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 and stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 when, for example, the four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game state are finished. The fact that the winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 shift from the state opened by the opening and closing member to the closed state (that is, the opening of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 of the attacker unit 2100 The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a large winning opening 1 closing display command instructing the start of closing between rounds, and the main control board 1310 starts 5 rounds (fifth round) of the jackpot game state. Occasionally, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 is started, and the state in which the first large prize winning port 2006 and the second large prize winning port 2007 are closed by the opening/closing member shifts to the state in which they are opened. Main control board 1310 transmits to peripheral control board 1510 a large winning gate opening fifth time display command instructing that effect (that is, start opening of fifth round of first big winning gate 2006 and second big winning gate 2007). . As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the above-described screen corresponding to the game state to display the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2005 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that tells the player that the movable piece is open) When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2632 to open the movable piece and open the second starting opening 2005 is in the open state, and when power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 resets the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, so that the start opening solenoid 2632 is started to drive and the movable piece is closed. A transition is made to a state in which the second start port 2005 is closed.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2005 as a game state and a game state is generated that is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen during the jackpot game state based on the game state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. 2005, the game ball can be received into the second start port 2005, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The control board 1510 cannot display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the occurrence of the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2005 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2005 as the game state at the time of power restoration. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2005) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. There is also a problem that the player does not understand what kind of game should be played.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and a command to return to main control at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a state command at power-on classified as power-on, a command to return to main control at power-on, and a command at power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 are started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big prize opening are started. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the prize winning port 2007 is to be shifted from the closed state to the open state by the opening/closing member, the peripheral control board 1510 can inform that there are 4 rounds in the jackpot game state. Although the specified screen (that is, the screen indicating how many rounds it is) cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is in the jackpot game state and the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 is started to drive, and a screen notifying that the first big prize opening 2006 and the second big prize opening 2007 are opened by the opening/closing member (for example, "It's a big win. The big prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning hole." is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player seated in front of the pachinko machine is displayed. After the power is restored, it is possible to instruct a game in which the game ball is entered into the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007, and for example, in the above-described example, the game ball enters the second starting hole 2005 is acceptable, and the game state is advantageous to the player. 2632 is started to open the movable piece to open the second starting port 2005 (for example, "The movable piece is open. A game ball is in the second starting port. Please play the game so as to enter the ball.”) is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510 and returned to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine. A game in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 2005 after powering can be instructed.

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the power supply of the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off processing even once, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the state command at power-on classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize ball when power is turned on. Only three commands, namely, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands first transmit a power-on state command, then transmit a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then transmit the number of main prize balls when power is turned on. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure) when the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is cleared. When the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), the above-mentioned time-saving It consists of information indicating which game state to return to, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times ), it is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which probability fluctuations occur in the state of being played.

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, that state is continued until the next big win game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. With 1310 mixed, it is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 . For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, in order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[11-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 214 and 215 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 216 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input or not. . Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2501, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first lower starting opening sensor 2101 and the first upper starting opening sensor 2524, A detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2601, a detection signal from the first big winning opening sensor 3002 and the second big winning opening sensor 2602, a detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 2603, a detection signal from the losing opening sensor 2604, The payout control board 633 normally receives the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1030, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which conveys the effect, is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first lower starting opening sensor 2101, the first upper starting opening sensor 2524, and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2601 are read, the corresponding starting opening winning command classified into other is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signals from the first lower starting opening sensor 2101 and the first upper starting opening sensor 2524, the corresponding starting opening winning command is transmitted as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , and when there is a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2601, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. .

In the present embodiment, the state in which all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) is changed when this switch input processing is started. , are read first, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same.
If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) is checked for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2501, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first lower starting opening sensor 2101 and the first upper starting opening sensor 2524, the second starting opening A detection signal from the sensor 2601, a detection signal from the first big prize opening sensor 3002 and the second big prize opening sensor 2602, a detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 2603, a detection signal from the losing opening sensor 2604, and an out sensor 664. , the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1030, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone idle terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of the various input ports. based on When the main control MPU judges that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is divided into a notification display to inform that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win-loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the symbol initial value determination random number and the small The random number for determining the initial value for winning symbols is also updated. These symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to win/lose determination (win/lose determination), each counter counts up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win-lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the initial value determination random number for the symbol and the random number for determination of the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non-hitting random number The update process and the win/loss random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated, respectively. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is randomized by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the timer is generated, the initial value determination random number for the symbol and the small win The random number for determining the symbol initial value may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first big prize hole 2006 or the second big prize hole 2007, a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls is created, and the game scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is generated. Since the number of balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is issued to the payout control board. 633, or when the payout control board 633 does not receive a payout ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has received the prize command normally within a predetermined time, the board between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A self-check command for checking the connection state is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633 .

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information. , a main award number information output command classified as other is created to convey that effect, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the above-described input information storage area. 2003, the first upper starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, and various winning openings such as the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5") ) Based on the game balls entered, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted. It is designed to be stored and updated in the storage area. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. is read from the input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of 10. (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize number information output command is created to notify that effect, and as transmission information In addition to storing in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output judgment counter value. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding prize balls is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation counter is incremented by one. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time radio wave irradiation is determined in the fraudulent act detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraud detection processing. ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and detection signals from the first big winning hole sensor 3002 and the second big winning hole sensor 2602 are detected when the game is not in the jackpot game state. is input (when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007), etc., a winning abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created, It is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is Obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and set this obtained random number as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is determined (determines the hit type) whether it matches with any of the hit type determination values.

If these determination results (lottery results) are due to the first lower starting opening sensor 2101 or the first upper starting opening sensor 2524, while creating various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect, the judgment result (lottery If the result) is due to the second start opening sensor 2601, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol is described above. The first of the function display unit 1400 is determined based on the random number for the variation display pattern, and the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the special symbol display or the second special symbol display is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands classified as related to big wins (big win opening command, large winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1 closing display command, large winning mouth 1) Winning mouth 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, for example, the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second Set the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2652, store it in the output information storage area as output information, or the number of times (round) that the first big winning mouth 2006 or the second big winning mouth 2007 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2 times, the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp is set so as to light the 2nd round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area, When the number of rounds is 15, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp is set so as to light the 15th round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area. , to set the output of the lighting signal to the state indicator of the function display unit 1400 so as to light in a predetermined color to indicate the presence or absence of the occurrence of time saving, and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2501 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per judgment random number is extracted and incorporated into the main control as normal winning opening winning prize information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

0th section to 3rd section (four sections) are provided in this normal winning opening winning information storage area, and the normal winning opening is provided in order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2501 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening Winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage and the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning entry winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information of the third section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage. After shifting, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning entry winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning entry winning prize information in the second division of the normal winning entry winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning prize information in the second section of the normal winning entry winning prize information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning entry winning prize information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening prize information storage become empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is regarded as a reserved ball, and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 In order to light up the suspension indicator, the output of the lighting signal for the normal suspension indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol per determination is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2005 by opening the movable piece, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-described transmission information storage is performed as transmission information. In addition to storing in the area, output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging normal symbol hit matches the normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and transmitted. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2632 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. When the value of the random number for judging the symbol per pattern does not match the judgment value of the normal per symbol pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. , Creating various commands classified into normal pattern synchronization production related, storing as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and lighting the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause it to be set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the main payout control board 633 Or, when in a jackpot game state, output a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 that perform opening and closing operations of the opening and closing members of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 , In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2632 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to games such as a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the payout control board 633 .

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are classified into special figure 1 synchronization effect related, various commands that are classified into special figure 2 synchronization effect related, and are classified into big hit related Various commands (for example, detection signals from the first big winning hole sensor 3002 and the second big winning hole sensor 2602 when detecting a game ball entering the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 Large winning mouth 1 count display command equivalent to the big winning mouth count command based on), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal drawing synchronization effects, and classified as normal electric role related effects Various commands, various commands classified as notification displays, various commands classified as status displays, various commands classified as test-related, and various other commands classified as others (for example, when the main control board 1310 is connected to the game board 5 Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls entered into various prize holes provided in , a main prize ball number information output signal is generated as main prize ball number information to that effect. to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558, such as a main prize number information output command). One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. As described above, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. The main-circumference serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU transfers at least the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main-circumference serial data. can be done. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be performed, a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter for determining the number of main prize balls information output at power-on Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the order of the status, mode, and sum value that constitutes the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the output determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.
In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and terminates this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information that has executed the backup process as a return destination for the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. A main control return destination command at power-on that instructs the drive state of the starter solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, and the second attacker solenoid 2652, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine when the power is turned on. can be output to the peripheral control board 1510 . In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on process on the main control side shown in FIG. In order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of , a power-on state command classified as power-on, When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command and when the power is turned on, the main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 of this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on state command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value constituting the counter notification command for determining the output of the main winning ball number information at power-on. are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the power supply of the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, FIG. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared at step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. , main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands, namely, the status command, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the counter notification command for main prize number information output judgment command when power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at the time of power-on, are sent as the main peripheral serial data to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. Then, transmit to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then output the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of special symbol changes is limited (ST machine), etc.), and based on this, detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[12. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 220. FIG. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 217, and FIG. FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing an example of a payout control section timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[12-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508).
The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.). Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM can be performed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

After step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. At step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

After step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When the payout control MPU determines that they match in step S526, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and the value 0 is set when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the process at the time of power failure of the payout control unit is normally completed, payout control built-in RAM is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in the determination of step S528, that is, When it is determined that the processing at the time of power failure of the payout control unit has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

After step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that there is no power failure warning signal input, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544 ).

After step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, the payout motor 584 is controlled by payout ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self-check command) have been received normally. Various information such as drive information, information on the number of winning balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on an error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls). A prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 each time the ball is played.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter is provided for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information. The number of game balls put out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring.

In the process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, the number of prize balls information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize number information output determination counter value is read from the prize ball information storage area. In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, a prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of prize balls information output), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590, detection signal from dispensing detection sensor 591, detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154, BRQ signal from CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that tells that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is stuck due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball stickiness determination time set as the determination condition; Skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full with the game balls stored During the full tank determination time, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not inconsistent game ball payouts due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected in step 1 and the number of balls detected in step 1 are repeated Time management is performed for the mismatch counter reset determination time that is set as the condition. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. By setting it to 0, it accurately measures the time it takes to determine if the ball is stuck. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game balls is executed by the payout device 580 and cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU, while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, when the gaming balls are being put out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, the momentary power failure or power failure causes the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the game ball payout cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration By restoring the value stored as payout backup information to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, the instantaneous The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls can be continued. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stoppage when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stoppage occurs. This prevents the various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the effects of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, the logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out and controlled. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. Then, in, for example, a retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information to determine whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball stick operation determination setting processing, As an error state output setting to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that informs that the dispensing operation for dispensing rental balls is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit is output. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logical state of the PRDY signal to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and ball-out check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is detected by a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. , and the number of game balls introduced into the guide passage 570a of the above-mentioned ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 exceeds a predetermined number. and determine whether or not For example, the determination of whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made by using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is detected in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and bulb out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, timing of the full-tank determination time described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is stored in the above-described state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information is stored in the state information storage area.

Judgment whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms in this full tank and ball out check process. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is When it transitions from OFF to ON, it starts counting the above-mentioned dead ball determination time in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this judgment, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out is notified to that effect. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Bulb-out information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormalities occur in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball removal, and ball picking are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding action is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays are created based on the various types of information. and transmit it to the main control board 1310 . For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls introduced into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, frame state 1 It creates commands and transmits them to the main control board 1310 .

After step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 in step S546, value B is set to watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552. performs timer update processing, performs CR communication processing in step S554, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control unit main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control section timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition setting of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Incidentally, the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[12-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 217 to 219.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 220, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[13. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225. FIG. FIG. 221 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 222 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 224 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[13-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining hot start/cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 and various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after executing the current time information acquisition processing so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V-blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC that indicates that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 to check whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. Repeatedly determine whether or not By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when determining to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the production operation unit 300 Rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300”). Various types of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotating direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation Operation history information of the unit 303 and the like.
) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the push operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302 and the operation state of the push operation unit 303 are monitored. Whether or not to be reflected in the game performance is determined as appropriate. Specifically, if the sound volume has been adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the performance proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of LEDs used as direct light, the luminance of LEDs used as indirect light, and respectively. During the progress of the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, the player (or the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and the first When one specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-described scale set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set so as to achieve the specified specified brightness value. Tone information can be updated.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, respectively. A player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates an operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain a 31st luminance that is the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. A specified brightness value can be set up to a specified value.

For example, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) designates the 0th (zero) brightness assuming that the current brightness is the minimum brightness (turns off) when rotating the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise. When the value is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher along the tone curve or spline tone curve), while the rotary operation unit 302 is reversed. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of the clockwise rotation operation, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear or spline tone curve), the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. When the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the push operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress. , etc.) can set a desired brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 . In addition, when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302, the predetermined luminance value to the 31st luminance are displayed at predetermined positions in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the effect. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate in the form of an image how much brightness the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) desires. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are directly irradiated as light. be. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. A formula (for example, a linear tone curve , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the above-described brightness specified values, 0 (zero) brightness specified value ~ It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 levels up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the side of the game board that are set as the gradation information described above and that are directly illuminated as light, the palette A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0 (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. Palette values corresponding to luminance designations are set as the gradation information described above along predetermined mathematical expressions (for example, linear tone curves or spline curve-like tone curves).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance step after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the minimum luminance (lights off). As the lowest possible brightness, it is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, one luminance designation value and the corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

Thus, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED When setting the brightness and the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Brightness by operating While set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 and presses the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the luminance specified value by the operation of 303 . As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)), and in conjunction with this In addition, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even without setting, the light emission mode accompanying the flow of performance is set, and the flow of performance by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. , set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too bright (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more dramatic effect), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness. Even if one specified brightness value is set up to the specified brightness value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a particular decorative board. , one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for the other decoration boards, respectively, so that the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark Therefore, the brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship of .

Furthermore, indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust the brightness than direct light, but for LEDs used as indirect light, a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent from the normal palette value) The brightness can be set by . As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value. and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process to be described later. Drawing data for one frame is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed in excess of the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent delays in processing time, but so-called dropped frames may occur. The mechanism is such that priority can be given to performances by sound effects such as music and sound effects that match various performances from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers").

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process to be described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate the number of light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for light emission mode generation. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sounds and notification sounds, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do.
The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data, and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be instructed.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for pending lookahead-related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands received. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the schedule data for generating the lighting mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Executed, the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to become the maximum brightness from the first specified brightness value. When one luminance designated value is set up to the 31st luminance designated value, the grayscale information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to achieve the set luminance designated value. It is possible.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a starting entrance winning command for instructing the start of a starting entrance winning effect, a normal symbol Ordinary design storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), variation pattern for instructing the start of variable performance such as variable display of decorative designs in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special designs Command, pattern storage command output when the number of start pending changes, big winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 It analyzes whether or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands categorized as related to figure synchronization effect, various commands categorized as normal electric role effect related, various commands as categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display, various commands as categorized as test related, and In addition, there are various commands classified. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to advance notice and the like based on the received command, and based on the result of the lottery, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electronic Drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the performance display control section 1511, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating sound effects such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The schedule data for generating the lighting mode is configured by arranging the lighting mode data defining the lighting modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which of the plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is to be used, and a number of tracks of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated.
The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of anomalies can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly before the anomaly is resolved after the occurrence of one anomaly. can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is stored in the peripheral control ROM. is read (extracted) from and output to VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and renders (displays) one screen on the effect display device 1600. Minutes (one frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is changed based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. are identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponding to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is obtained, and in the sound data output processing of step S1018, the output set in the sound data generation processing is performed. Sound data is output from each channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into values in 1024 steps up to a value of 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4 Music and sound effects are played from In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume control switch. It's like

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. subvolume values to be included.

Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit 0.5 seconds after receiving the variable pattern command and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. ) can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, peripheral Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the variation pattern command in the control unit, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit has received the stop display command and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. Seconds have elapsed), by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate. The voltage is converted into seven levels of volume 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume to set the substrate volume.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, the volume of the sound flowing from the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4 is amplified to the master volume value, and the amplified production sound is serialized. output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3 is amplified to the master volume value. , the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 are set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effects, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the synthesized production sound, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually adjusted to the center of the top on the side of the door frame 3. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified to a master volume value, which is the volume, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data, and is used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of this synthesized notification sound is actually set to the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body for bass of the main body frame 4 It amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the frame speaker 622, serializes this amplified notification sound, and outputs it as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound to notify the staff of the hall of the fraudulent act against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this sound effect is suppressed. Synthesize the sound data of the embedded track, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the informational sound is embedded, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume. , the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are compared with the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the notification sound with the maximum volume actually flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4 . At this time, since the sound effect is muted, the sound effect does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It progresses according to the sound generation schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top central speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When this predetermined period elapses, the volume of the effect sound progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute until now is reduced to the substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume control switch. The volume value is set again (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the adjusted effect sound sub The sound is set to a volume value), and flows from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound on the body frame 4. FIG.

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko is played. When a notification sound is played to notify a hall clerk or the like of a fraudulent act on the machine 1, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame. 4, but the muted effect sound progresses in accordance with the schedule data for sound generation, so that the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. 462, when the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 cease to flow, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point at which the informative sound began to flow, but continues for a predetermined period after the informative sound starts to flow. The sound starts to flow again from the point where it progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the time has passed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume from muted to maximum volume by program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers become small, but the pachinko machine 1 does not. When a problem occurs or the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Make a backup by copying to the backup area for regular processing.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as execution completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. In this way, when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady-state processing, first, in step S1008, the value 1 is set to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. This V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, as described above, is a V-blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[13-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the normal processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the execution of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when no part-stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When the processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control of FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the peripheral control unit of this routine indicates that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input.

As a result, in the current peripheral controller steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral controller power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[13-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 221 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 223 (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

In step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt process has started when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer indicates the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids which are arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. According to the drive data, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3, an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 have been input, thereby providing history information (for example, original data) of detection signals from various sensors. position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 or acquire the movable position to grasp the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit 302 rotation (rotation direction) history information and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302 and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, and the brightness of various LEDs mounted in plurality on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the SDRAM. It is backed up by copying it to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. there is In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V-blank signal, the peripheral control unit will not be affected by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt. After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[13-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be sent as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to transmit the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 224 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the judgment of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, reads 1-byte (8-bit) information. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends.
A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, following the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, reads the second byte of the main circumference serial data. In a certain mode, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has been sequentially retrieved from the reception buffer, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value ).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facility of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become electrically charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated. in a receptive environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been affected by noise between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 and has changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. can judge.

In step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216 ), exiting this routine.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is When it is determined that the period for which information can be received has passed, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, the routine ends.

[13-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. When this peripheral controller power failure warning signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that two macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If so, this routine is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, power saving processing is performed. (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control ICs can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal has been input. determine whether In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing the determination in this manner, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it is no longer possible to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314. CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 221 is started again.

As described above, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state by executing the WDT clearing process in step S1314. It is designed not to take.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It's becoming As a result, even if the peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (especially the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. And on the condition that the detection signal by the first upper starting port sensor 2524 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004) (step S231), the first special symbol The first special random number is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2601 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2005) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second starting port passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big win execution flag indicating that the big win game state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the big win execution flag is set, the big win game state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display is stopped becomes a mode suggesting "15R big hit", 15R A process of opening and closing the first big winning opening 2006 according to the big winning game state is executed. Further, when the state of suggesting "5R big win" is reached, processing for controlling the opening and closing of the first big prize winning port 2006 is executed according to the 5R big win gaming state, and when the mode of suggesting "2R big win" is reached. Then, a process of opening and closing the first big winning opening 2006 according to the 2R jackpot gaming state is executed.

Also, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after performing the opening control of the first big winning opening 2006, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating a time saving state, and the 2R jackpot game based on the fact that the result of the lottery processing at the time when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state has become a mode suggesting "2R big hit". Set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot game state based on the mode suggesting the ``5R jackpot'', when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and non-time saving state. . Then, the time saving flag is the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuation times of the time saving state, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In that case, when the big hit game state is terminated, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. The time-saving frequency counter is counted down every time the variable display of the special pattern is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes "0". Sometimes, it is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 237 described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

Further, if the big hit running flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small winning running flag indicating that the small winning game state is controlled is set (step S236), and the small winning running flag is determined. is set, small winning control processing (step S236A) for controlling the small winning game state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting "small hit", A process for controlling the opening and closing of the second big winning hole 2007 is executed according to the small winning game state, and the game ball received in the second big winning hole 2007 is distributed to the V winning hole 2008 and detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603. When it is done, it controls the transition to the 15R big hit game state.

Also, if neither the big hit running flag nor the small winning running flag is set, the value of the second special pending number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol holding storage area On the condition that it is "0" (step S237), the first special symbol process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol is executed. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the reserved storage area is not "0" (step S237), the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation display of the second special symbol 2nd special design process processing including this lottery processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, the first lower starting hole sensor 2101 and the first upper starting hole sensor 2524 are in the ON state, and the game to the first lower starting hole 2003 and the first upper starting hole 2004 If it is determined that a ball has entered the ball, as shown in FIG. The first pattern random number and the variable random number are obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S242). In the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly suspend the variable display control of the first special symbol. The processing of S245 is to be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number obtained in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S241, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol. is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information are executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then the process is terminated.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

Also, when the number of first reserved storage changes based on the game ball entering the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004, the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is updated so as to correspond to the first reserved memory number, and a command (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (Special symbol 1 storage command 0-4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0-4). It's like

FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when starting the effect pre-determination process, uses the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in step S241 or the random number obtained in step S251 described later, specifically the special random number (first special random number, second special random number), symbol random number (first symbol random number, second special random number), reach random number, and fluctuating random number are compared to determine whether or not a big hit will occur. If the game effect is not a big hit, a ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600 Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reservation memory number (the One special pending number counter value), and set the first special symbol pre-determination command according to, and in the second special symbol performance pre-determination process executed in step S255 of the second start opening passage process described later, Set the second special symbol pre-determination command according to the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the second special random number, and the second reservation memory number (second special reservation number counter value) (step S262 ).

Then, by transmitting the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting In addition to the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is a big win, and if it is a big win, the big win. If the hit is not achieved, the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or advance determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is displayed in a variable display according to the start winning. Before starting, the peripheral control ICs mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol).

In addition, the reserved storage area (first reserved storage area, second reserved storage area) has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storage areas, and the peripheral control IC has a preliminary The determination information is stored in order from the first (first) storage area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored, and when a variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) that notifies the start of variation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is received, the received variation pattern command (second 1st variation pattern command, 2nd variation pattern command) Nth Move the pre-determination information stored in the (N=2 to 4) storage areas to the (N-1)-th (N=2 to 4)-th storage areas (pre-determination information stored in the reserved storage areas shift). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be notified at a predetermined timing, such as when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2601 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second starting hole 2005, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) is "4" (step S252). In the processing of this step S252, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253- The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S251, the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol. is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it becomes a big hit, and if it does not become a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win effect as a game effect executed on the display device 851, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed (variation pattern type) before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S255), and then the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the second reservation memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reservation memory. In addition to updating to correspond to the number, a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 2 memory command 0-4). It's like

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories based on the game ball entering the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004 is set to "4", The upper limit of the number of second reserved memories based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2005 is set to "4".
In addition, the second starting port 2005 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the second special symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, so the second retention memory number Even if the upper limit is set to "4", the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed for a long period of time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the second start port 2005 Even if a game ball enters the game ball, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being able to obtain the chance of a big winning lottery.

FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S239 of the special symbol process processing are similar program modules, and the random number used for determination And only the table is different, here only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag described above.

1. Read out the first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, based on the read first special random number, lottery processing and the like for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped First special Design normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop design setting process (step S281 )
3. Variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which lottery process etc. are performed for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed when the power is turned on.

FIG. 231 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read from the same RAM. . And next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the hit/loss of the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 232 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table shown in FIG. When the second special symbol normal process is executed, it is compared with the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 233 (A) is for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state ( A low-probability jackpot determination table used in a low-probability time-saving state)) and a high-probability jackpot determination table used in a high-probability game state (high-probability time-saving state) are provided. . Then, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and the setting value is 3 1/299 if the set value is 4, 1/289 if the set value is 4, 1/279 if the set value is 5, and 1/269 if the set value is 6. The first special random number coincides with the big hit determination value indicating that the small win was won with a probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are the above-mentioned losers. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is. Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the set value is 1, 1/319, set value 2 1/309 if set value 3, 1/299 if set value 3, 1/289 if set value 4, 1/279 if set value 5, 1/269 if set value 6 The second special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the jackpot with a jackpot probability, and the second special random number matches the small hit judgment value that indicates that the second special random number has won the jackpot with a small hit probability of 144/319. The second special random numbers are associated with each other such that the second special random numbers coincide with the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are lost. That is, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number has a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. Then, the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2005 than the case where the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004 is executed is executed, the state is more advantageous to the player. In addition, the high-probability win determination table is constructed such that the jackpot probability for each set value is ten times higher than that of the low-probability win determination table. As for the setting values 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities, the setting values can be changed by the hall manager performing a predetermined setting change operation using the setting key when the power is turned on. It has become.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special As a result of comparison with a random number), when it is determined to be a big win (step S312), a big win flag indicating that the variation wins a big win is set (step S313), and the win determination process is terminated.

Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 are compared (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time saving state. and a reach determination table at the time of state. And in the reach determination table at the time of the time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each of the 67 types of reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased more than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316). A reach flag is set to indicate reach, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 234, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 233(B). to determine the type of jackpot, and determine the mode (stopped pattern of the first special pattern) of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of jackpot when the variation control is stopped (step S322).

in particular,
1. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 15R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special pattern (first special pattern) is obtained. , second special pattern) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened more than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability variable jackpot 2. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern five times (five rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 5R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special symbol (first special symbol) is obtained. , Second special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 2R jackpot game state, and before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the time saving state is controlled. If it is, it is controlled to a time-saving state in which it is terminated unless a big win is achieved during the time when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the big win game state, and 2R is performed. 2R jackpot controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the jackpot game state;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

Also, if the big hit flag is set in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the second symbol random number read out in the second special symbol normal process and the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 233(B) are compared. to determine the type of the big hit, and determine the mode (stop design of the second special design) at the time of stopping the variation control of the second special design corresponding to the determined kind of the big hit.

in particular,
1. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 15R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special pattern (first special pattern) is obtained. , second special pattern) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened more than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability variable jackpot 2. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern five times (five rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 5R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special symbol (first special symbol) is obtained. , Second special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 2R jackpot game state, and before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the time saving state is controlled. If it is, it is controlled to a time-saving state in which it is terminated unless a big win is achieved during the time when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the big win game state, and 2R is performed. 2R jackpot controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the jackpot game state;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, in the big hit pattern determination table compared with the first pattern random number, 8 judgment values are distributed when the 15R probability variable jackpot is obtained, and 100 judgment values are distributed when the 5R short working time jackpot is obtained, and the 2R big hit. 92 judgment values are distributed when That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, a 15R big win has a probability of 4%, a 5R big win has a probability of 50%, and a 2R big win has a probability of 46%.
Similarly, in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, 92 determination values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 determination values are distributed in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R. Eight determination values are distributed when a big hit is achieved. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 46% probability of a 15R variable big hit, a 50% probability of a 5R big hit, and a 4% probability of a 2R big hit. . Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability that the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the second pattern random number is determined to be a 15R probability variable jackpot is higher than the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the first symbol random number. The second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2005 rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004 The state is advantageous to the player when the variable display is executed.

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the 2R big win is determined, the 2R big win pattern is determined as the big win pattern, when the 5R big win is determined, the 5R big win pattern is determined as the big win pattern, and when the 15R big win is determined, the big win is determined. A 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the pattern.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the big hit flag is not set in step S131, if the small hit flag is set (step S324), read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process The type of the small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

in particular,
1. An opening/closing pattern in which the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control a small winning game state in which the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 2007 (easily). , After the game ball accepted in the second big winning hole 2007 is distributed to the V winning hole 2008 and detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603, the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds). Alternatively, when the first big winning hole sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first big winning hole 2006, the opening and closing pattern for closing is repeated 14 times, so that the game balls can enter the first big winning hole 2006. Control to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible to enter (easy), and after the jackpot game state ends, the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 77 times. 2. The first sub-win which shortens the execution period more than usual and controls to a high-probability time-saving state in which the special lottery results are drawn with a higher probability than usual. An opening/closing pattern in which the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control a small winning game state in which the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 2007 (easily). , After the game ball accepted in the second big winning hole 2007 is distributed to the V winning hole 2008 and detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603, the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds). Alternatively, when the first big winning hole sensor 3002 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first big winning hole 2006, the opening and closing pattern for closing is repeated 14 times, so that the game balls can enter the first big winning hole 2006. If it is controlled to a 15R big hit game state in which it is possible to enter (easy), and if it is controlled to a time saving state before the start of the 15R big hit game state, special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the end of the big hit game state ) is controlled to a time-saving state that is terminated unless a big win is achieved until the variation display of 77 times is executed, and if the non-time-saving state is controlled before the start of the 15R big win game state, the big win game state ends. One of the two kinds of small wins of the second small win to be controlled to the normal state later is determined.

In addition, 200 determination values are distributed in the small hit design determination table compared with the first design random number in the case of the first small hit. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, the first small win is obtained with a probability of 100%, and the second small win is not won. On the other hand, in the small winning pattern determination table compared with the second random number, 20 judgment values are distributed when the first small prize is obtained, and 180 judgment values are distributed when the second small prize is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number, the first small win is obtained with a probability of 10%, and the second small prize is obtained with a probability of 90%.

Further, when the type of the small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of the small win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined as the first small hit, it is determined as the first small winning pattern as the small winning pattern, and when it is determined as the second small winning pattern, it is determined as the second small winning pattern as the small winning pattern. .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, determines the winning pattern (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S328, as the process of step S328. (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result (step S328 ). And after that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and left decorative design → right decorative design → middle Stop and display in the order of the decorative patterns (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies a small hit or a 2R big hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. is determined to be a small hit pattern ("Final Battle"), and if the 5R short-time jackpot is specified, the 5R short-time jackpot pattern (left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same among the patterns "0" to "9" If the 15R probability variation jackpot is specified, the 15R probability variation jackpot pattern (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern among the patterns "0" to "9"). combination). In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss If it is determined to be a design), and if a loss is specified, it is determined to be a design that does not involve reach (a combination in which at least the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are different patterns), and fluctuation When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has passed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and controlled.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be controlled to the time saving state until the maximum 77 times the variable display is executed, but the time saving state The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of big hits after the shift control is performed. Specifically, after the jackpot game state, control is performed to the time saving state, and when a predetermined number of (for example, two) jackpots occur thereafter, the time saving state is not controlled after the predetermined number of times of the jackpot game state is completed. , may be controlled to a normal state. In addition, even if the number of occurrences of big wins is less than a predetermined number, the non-time-saving state may be controlled during the big-win game state, and the time-saving state control may be performed again after the big win game state.

FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. If so (step S341), select a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342), and select a small hit flag. is set (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit corresponding to the type of the small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop design setting process is selected (step S344). , If the reach flag is set (step S345), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal In the case of a loss (a loss in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is obtained from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed.
The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's expectation for the big winning game state is increased.

Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as the process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter in which the number of times of continuation of the time saving state is set is "0". do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag indicating that the control of the time-saving state (time-saving control) ends is set (step S354).

When it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point , the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, while the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second during the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), A special pattern variation pattern is set in such a manner that the special pattern variation time information set to about 12 seconds in a non-working time state is associated with the special pattern random number (first special pattern, second special pattern). . That is, in the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during the time saving state, compared to the variation pattern at the time of loss selected in the non-time saving state, so that the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short, Fluctuation time information of the above special design is set.

FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has passed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process is terminated when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). Thereby, when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed for a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is terminated and the non-time saving control is performed. (Normal state control) will start.

Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game (step S387), and starts the big win game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to a jackpot number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process to be described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed. to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big win control process described later, the big win opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning mouth opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big win number counter reaches "0". When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), when the big win number counter is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0", the process shifts to the big winning mouth post-opening process (step S403) and ends the big win game. Execute control that causes

Then, a jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R short-time jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R short-time jackpot, 2R jackpot). As a result, the effect of the big win game corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, similarly, the jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R timing short jackpot) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time short jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) are set.

In addition, when the jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, when the jackpot game is ended, specifically, the jackpot is executed in the jackpot control processing (step S235A) after the jackpot opening (step S403). The opening and closing control of the first big winning hole 2006 according to the type (for example, after the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006 is described above. It is reset when the opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern that is closed when detected by the first big winning opening sensor 3002 is completed 2 times, 5 times, or 15 times (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). . While the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114) by resetting the jackpot executing flag, the first function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S386), if the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates to start the small hit game. A small-hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time (time for displaying the start of the small-hit game, etc.) until the start of the small-hit game is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small-hit running flag indicating that the small-hit game is being executed is set (step S393). In addition, the small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the kind of the small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the kind of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. As a result, the production of the small-hit game corresponding to the kind of the small-hit instructed by the small-hit start command is executed by the production display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second Second small hit start command) is set.

In addition, when the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically, the small hit middle process (step S411) of the small hit control process (step S236A) described later ), the opening/closing control of the second big winning hole 2007 according to the type of the small win (for example, the opening and closing pattern of opening the second big winning hole 2007 for a short period of time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated twice) is completed. sometimes reset. By resetting the small hit executing flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it becomes a loss, the waiting time (the time during which the stop design of the special design is displayed) until the variable display of the next special design is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processing of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (step S395), and the process ends.

FIG. 238 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The above-mentioned peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are shifted to the above-mentioned jackpot game state based on the fact that the mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a big hit symbol. 1510 or waits until the next round is started pre-opening big winning opening (step S401)
2. The first big prize winning port 2006 is controlled to an open state based on the fact that the state at the time when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped becomes a big hit pattern, or the first big prize winning port 2006 is controlled based on the start of the next round. is controlled to an open state, and after opening the first big winning hole 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when 10 game balls have won in the first big winning hole 2006, the first big winning hole sensor 3002 Large winning opening opening process (step S402) to be closed when detected
3. A post-opening process for the big winning opening to wait until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state will end when all the rounds are completed (step S403).

The big win process flag is operated in the process of step S42 so as to indicate that the big winning hole pre-opening process (step S401) should be performed. In addition, in the process during the opening of the big prize winning opening (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the opening of the first big winning opening 2006, a big winning round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the first big winning prize is set. At the end of the round for controlling the mouth 2006 to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is implemented by the device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like.

[Changes in the notice effect depending on the button operation timing]
In the present embodiment, in the operation effective period during which operations on the effect operation unit 301 can be accepted, the first half effective period corresponds to the first half that is the period before the specific timing, and The period is divided into a latter half effective period corresponding to the latter half of the period, and an advance notice effect to be executed when the player operates the effect operation section 301 is set corresponding to each effective period. there is Then, the button effect (operation effect) that is executed differs depending on whether the player operates the effect operation unit 301 in the first half effective period or the second half effective period in the operation effective period. ) is running.

In this example, the above-described button effects (operation effects) can be executed at the start of the variable display of symbols. Further, during execution of the button effect, the effect display device 1600 displays an image indicating the effective period of operation and specific timing. As a result, during execution of the button effect, it is possible to determine whether the effective period of the first half corresponds to the first half, which is the period before the specific timing, or the second half, which is the period after the specific timing. It is possible to recognize whether the second half of the effective period is being executed. It should be noted that the operation effective period is set to 3 seconds, and the first half effective period and the second half effective period are each set to 1.5 seconds, and the effective operation period is divided equally. It's becoming

Also, in this example, before the start of the button effect, it is determined which one of the notice effects belonging to the first notice effect group is to be executed as the notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period. Then, when the player operates the effect operation section 301 during the execution of the first half valid period, the previously determined advance notice effect is executed. During the execution of the button effect, the effect display device 1600 may display an image suggesting a preliminary effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated as a preliminary effect corresponding to the effective period of the first half. There is a case where an image indicating that the advance notice performance to be executed at the time of operating the performance operation part 301 is unknown is displayed without displaying the image suggesting the notice performance to be executed at the time of operating the operation part 301.例文帳に追加In other words, when an image suggesting an advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is displayed, regardless of whether the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half effective period, the effect While it is possible to grasp the advance notice effect to be executed when the operation unit 301 is operated, if the image suggesting the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is not displayed, the first half valid period If the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during the execution of , the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated cannot be comprehended.

On the other hand, before the start of the button effect, any one of the advance notice effects belonging to the second notice effect group, which is a group different from the first notice effect group, is executed as the notice effect corresponding to the latter half effective period. have decided whether Then, when the player operates the effect operation section 301 during the execution of the latter half valid period, the previously determined advance notice effect is executed. Further, during execution of the button effect, the effect display device 1600 may display an image suggesting a preliminary effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated as the preliminary effect corresponding to the latter half effective period. There is a case where an image indicating that the advance notice performance to be executed at the time of operating the performance operation part 301 is unknown is displayed without displaying the image suggesting the notice performance to be executed at the time of operating the operation part 301.例文帳に追加In other words, when an image suggesting an advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is displayed, regardless of whether the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half effective period, the effect While it is possible to grasp the advance notice effect to be executed when the operation unit 301 is operated, if the image suggesting the advance notice effect to be executed during the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not displayed, the latter half valid period If the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during the execution of , the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated cannot be comprehended.

In the above, the notice effect belonging to the first notice effect group, which is the notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period, and the notice effect belonging to the second notice effect group, which is the notice effect corresponding to the second half effective period. has set different notice effects. That is, the advance notice effect to be executed differs depending on whether the player operates the effect operation section 301 at the first half effective period or the latter half effective period of the operation valid period. . As a result, during execution of the button effect, the notice effect belonging to the first notice effect group, which is the notice effect corresponding to the effective period of the first half, and the second notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the effective period of the latter half. The performance operation part 301 may be operated at the operation timing of executing the advance notice performance desired by the player among the advance notice performances belonging to the performance group, and the advance notice performance to be executed after the button performance can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, during execution of the button effect, the effect display device 1600 does not display an image suggesting the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half valid period. An image indicating that the advance notice effect is unknown may be displayed. Similarly, during the execution of the button effect, the effect display device 1600 does not display an image suggesting the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half effective period. May display an image indicating that it is unknown. Thus, when an image indicating that the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is unknown is displayed, what kind of advance notice effect is to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is determined. There is a possibility that the player will execute the advance notice performance desired by the player without knowing it, and the player can be expected to participate in the button performance requiring the operation of the performance operation section 301.例文帳に追加In particular, if one of the advance notice effects corresponding to the first half effective period and the notice effect corresponding to the second half effective period is clear and the other notice effect is unknown , it is possible to give a choice of whether to select and execute an obvious notice effect or to select and execute an unknown notice effect that may cause the player's desired notice effect to be executed. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing an example of button effect execution processing. First, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not it is time to start the variable display of patterns (decorative patterns) (step S2101). Then, when it is determined that it is time to start the variable display of the pattern (decorative pattern), it is determined whether or not to execute the button effect (step S2102). Also, when executing a button effect, the mode of the button in the instruction image for instructing the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is also determined.

FIG. 240(A) is a table showing an example of a button effect determination pattern. Button effect determination patterns 0 to 2 are set in the button effect determination pattern table. In step S2102 described above, a random number for button effect determination is used based on whether the result of the symbol variation display is a win or a loss, and button effect determination patterns 0 to 0 set in the button effect determination pattern table are used. 2, one of the button effect determination patterns is determined.

Button effect determination pattern 0 is a pattern in which no button effect is executed. Button effect determination pattern 1 is a pattern in which a button effect is executed and the mode of the button in the instruction image for instructing the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed in a normal mode. Button effect determination pattern 2 is a pattern in which a button effect is executed and the mode of the button in the instruction image for instructing the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed in a red mode different from the normal mode.

In this example, when determining the button effect determination pattern, the button effect determination patterns 1 and 2 are determined so that the expectation for winning is higher than the button effect determination pattern 0. - 特許庁That is, when the button performance is executed, the degree of expectation for winning is higher than when the button performance is not executed, and the player can participate in the button performance with expectation. Further, among the button effect determination patterns 1 and 2, the button effect determination pattern 2 is determined so that the expectation for winning is higher than the button effect determination pattern 1. - 特許庁In other words, when the button effect is executed, if the button appears in the red mode, the expectation for winning is higher than when the button appears in the normal mode. It is possible to have them participate in the button production with anticipation.

Next, in the button effect execution process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the button effect is executed in the execution determination of whether to execute the button effect (step S2103). When it is determined that the button effect is to be executed, the effect content of the button effect is determined (step S2104). As for the effect content of the button effect, it is determined whether or not to divide the valid operation period during which operations on the effect operation unit 301 can be accepted into the first half valid period and the second half valid period. In the case of dividing into an effective period and a latter half effective period, an advance notice effect corresponding to each effective period (an advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated) and an image suggesting the advance notice effect are displayed. It also decides whether to

FIG. 240(B) is a table showing an example of a button effect execution pattern. Button effect determination patterns 1 to 10 are set in the button effect execution pattern table. In step S2104 described above, when the mode of the button is displayed in the normal mode, a random number for executing the button presentation is used based on whether the result of the variable display of the symbols is a win or a loss. One of the button performance execution patterns 1 to 10 set in the execution pattern table is determined. Further, when the button mode is displayed in a red mode, a button performance execution pattern table is generated using a random number for executing the button performance, based on whether the result of the variable display of the symbols is a win or a loss. One of the button performance execution patterns 2 to 10 set to 1 is determined.

The button effect execution pattern 1 is a pattern in which the operation effective period during which the operation to the effect operation unit 301 can be accepted is not divided into the first half effective period and the second half effective period, but is set as a collective effective period. In addition, in the button effect execution pattern 1, a notice effect A is set as a notice effect (an advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated) corresponding to the operation valid period. As an image suggesting that the advance notice effect corresponding to the effective period is the advance notice effect A, the pattern is set to display "notice A".

Button effect execution patterns 2 to 10 are patterns in which the operation effective period during which an operation to the effect operation section 301 can be accepted is divided into a first half effective period and a second half effective period.
Further, the button effect execution patterns 2 to 10 are the first notice effect group as the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period (the notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the first half valid period). A notice effect A, which is a notice effect belonging to Of these, the button effect execution patterns 2 to 6 are displayed in the effect display device 1600 as an image indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period is unknown (an image not suggesting the notice effect A). ?" is displayed. On the other hand, the button effect execution patterns 7 to 10 are patterns in which the effect display device 1600 displays "notice A" as an image suggesting that the notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period is the notice effect A.

Further, the button effect execution patterns 2 to 4 are the second notice effect group as the notice effect corresponding to the latter half effective period (the notice effect executed when operating the effect operation unit 301 during execution of the latter half effective period). A notice effect B, a notice effect C, and a notice effect D, which are the notice effects belonging to , are set respectively. Button effect execution patterns 2 to 4 are images indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period is unknown in the effect display device 1600 (an image that does not suggest the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D). ), the pattern is to display "Notice ???". In other words, for the button effect execution patterns 2 to 4, it is assumed that either of the advance notice effects corresponding to the first half effective period and the notice effect corresponding to the second half effective period is displayed so as to be unknown. there is

Further, the button effect execution patterns 5 and 6 are the second notice effect group as the notice effect corresponding to the latter half effective period (the notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the latter half effective period). A notice effect C and a notice effect D, which are the notice effects belonging to , are set respectively. In the effect display device 1600, the button effect execution patterns 5 and 6 are displayed as an image suggesting that the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period is the notice effect C or the notice effect D. D" is displayed. That is, for the button effect execution patterns 5 and 6, among the advance notice effects corresponding to the first half effective period and the notice effects corresponding to the second half effective period, the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period is unknown. However, the notice effect corresponding to the effective period of the latter half is displayed so as to be clear.

Further, the button effect execution patterns 7 and 8 are the second notice effect group as the notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period (the notice effect executed when operating the effect operation section 301 during execution of the latter half effective period). A notice effect C and a notice effect D, which are the notice effects belonging to , are set respectively. Button effect execution patterns 7 and 8 are displayed in effect display device 1600 as an image indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period is unknown (an image that does not suggest notice effect C or notice effect D). Notice ???" is displayed. In other words, for the button effect execution patterns 7 and 8, among the advance notice effects corresponding to the first half effective period and the notice effects corresponding to the second half effective period, the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period is clarified. However, the notice effect corresponding to the latter half effective period is displayed so as to be unknown.

Further, the button effect execution patterns 9 and 10 are the second notice effect group as the notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period (the notice effect executed when operating the effect operation unit 301 during execution of the latter half valid period). A notice effect C and a notice effect D, which are the notice effects belonging to , are set respectively. In the effect display device 1600, the button effect execution patterns 9 and 10 are displayed in the effect display device 1600 as images suggesting that the preview effect corresponding to the first half valid period is the preview effect C or the preview effect D. D" is displayed. In other words, for the button effect execution patterns 9 and 10, it is assumed that either of the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period and the notice effect corresponding to the second half effective period is displayed so as to be clear. there is

In this example, when determining the button effect execution pattern, one of the button effect execution patterns 1 to 10 is determined if the button mode is displayed in the normal mode, whereas the button mode is red. , any one of the button effect execution patterns 2 to 10 is determined without determining the button effect execution pattern 1. FIG. As described above in detail, when the button effect is executed, if the button appears in the red mode, the expectation for winning is higher than when the button appears in the normal mode. I'm trying For this reason, when executing the button effect, if the operation effective period is divided into the first half effective period and the second half effective period (button effect execution patterns 2 to 10), the operation effective period is the first half. The degree of expectation for winning is higher than when the period is not divided into the effective period and the latter half effective period (button performance execution pattern 1), and the player can participate in the button performance with expectation.

In addition, in this example, when determining the button performance execution pattern, the degree of expectation for winning increases in the order of button performance execution patterns 2 to 4, button performance execution patterns 5 to 8, and button performance execution patterns 9 and 10. have decided to In other words, the button effect execution patterns 5 and 6 are determined so that the expectation for winning is higher than the button effect execution patterns 2 to 4. If an image suggesting is displayed, if an image suggesting the notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period is not displayed (an image indicating that the notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period is unknown is displayed Expectations for a hit are higher than in the case of Similarly, since the button effect execution patterns 7 and 8 are determined so that the degree of expectation for winning is higher than the button effect execution patterns 2 to 4, the effect display device 1600 provides an advance notice corresponding to the latter half effective period. If an image suggesting an effect is displayed, if an image suggesting a notice effect corresponding to the latter half effective period is not displayed (an image indicating that the notice effect corresponding to the latter half effective period is unknown is displayed) Expectations for winning are higher than in the case where From this, when the button effect is executed, the more the notice effect that is clear between the notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period and the notice effect corresponding to the second half effective period, the more the expectation for winning. You can know that it is expensive, and you can have them participate in the button production with high expectations.

Next, in the button effect execution process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC executes the button effect based on the effect contents of the button effect determined in steps S2102 and S2104 (step S2105). After the start of the button effect, if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the operation effective period (step S2106), the operation effective period at the timing when the effect operation unit 301 is operated (the operation effective period is divided) If so, the advance notice effect corresponding to either the first half valid period or the second half valid period is executed (step S2107).

In this example, when the operation effective period is divided into the first half effective period and the second half effective period (button effect execution patterns 2 to 10), the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the first half effective period. In this case, the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period is executed, and when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the second half effective period, the advance notice effect corresponding to the latter half effective period is executed. . Further, if the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during execution of either the first half effective period or the second half effective period, the advance notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period and the second half effective period It is set so as not to execute any of the announcement effects corresponding to .

Note that, in the button effect execution pattern 2, a notice effect B is set as a notice effect corresponding to the latter half effective period (an advance notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the latter half effective period). However, after the advance notice effect B is executed, a specific effect is executed. In other words, the advance notice effect B is executed as a effect suggesting that a specific effect will be executed. Further, the specific effect is the effect set in the variation pattern, and only when the variation pattern in which the specific effect is set is executed, the button effect execution pattern 2 in which the advance notice effect B is set is determined. making it possible. In addition, since the specific effect is the effect set in the variation pattern, when executing the button effect based on the button effect execution pattern 2, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the latter half valid period , the advance notice effect B is executed and a specific effect is executed. It is designed to perform a specific production.

FIG. 241 shows a specific example of effect when button effect is executed. Here, a case of executing a button effect based on the button effect execution pattern 5 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), in the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started, the button effect is started immediately after that (FIG. 241(B)). During execution of the button effect, an instruction image for instructing the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed near the center of the effect display device 1600, and an operation to the effect operation unit 301 is displayed slightly below the center of the effect display device 1600. A validity period bar, which is an image indicating the validity period of operations that can be accepted, is displayed. In addition, inside the effective period bar, a dividing line indicating a specific timing for dividing the effective period of operation into the first half effective period and the second half effective period is displayed, and the left side of the dividing line inside the effective period bar indicates the first half valid period, and the right side of the dividing line inside the valid period bar indicates the second half valid period.

In addition, in each of the area indicating the first half valid period and the area indicating the second half valid period inside the valid period bar, the rendering operation part An image showing the advance notice effect to be executed when 301 is operated is displayed.
Specifically, in the area indicating the first half valid period inside the valid period bar, a notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period ??? is displayed as an image indicating that the effect is unknown (an image that does not suggest the effect A), and the area indicating the validity period of the latter half within the valid period bar shows the valid period of the latter half. "Notice C" is displayed as an image suggesting that the notice effect corresponding to the period (the notice effect executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the effect operation section 301 during the execution of the latter half effective period) is the notice effect C. . As time elapses after the start of the button effect, the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period inside the valid period bar decreases from left to right.

As shown in FIG. 241(C), when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the first half valid period, the previous notice effect A is determined as the previous notice effect corresponding to the first half valid period. is executed, it is possible to know that the previously unknown advance notice effect is the notice effect A (Fig. 241(D)). Further, as shown in FIG. 241(E), when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the latter half valid period, the notice effect C is determined as the notice effect corresponding to the latter half valid period, and the notice effect is determined. Effect C is executed (FIG. 241(F)). Further, as shown in FIG. 241(G), until the operation effective period elapses, the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during execution of either the first half effective period or the second half effective period. In this case, neither the notice effect A as the notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period nor the notice effect C as the notice effect corresponding to the second half effective period is executed.

In this example, if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the first half effective period or if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the second half effective period, the button effect being executed is terminated, Immediately after that, the advance notice effect corresponding to the operation effective period (either the first half effective period or the latter half effective period) at the timing when the effect operation section 301 is operated is executed. However, if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the first half effective period, or if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the second half effective period, the operation effective period of the button effect will not elapse. After waiting, the advance notice effect corresponding to the operation effective period (either the first half effective period or the second half effective period) at the timing when the effect operation unit 301 is operated may be executed. In addition, during the variable display of the pattern that executed the button effect, the advance notice effect corresponding to the operation effective period (either the first half effective period or the latter half effective period) at the timing of operating the effect operation part 301 is executed. For example, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect operation unit 301 was operated during the execution of the first half effective period or the second half effective period, the operation is valid at the timing when the effect operation unit 301 is operated. The advance notice effect corresponding to the period (either the first half valid period or the second half valid period) may be executed.

Further, in this example, the effective period of operation is set to 3 seconds, and the effective period of the first half and the effective period of the second half are each set to 1.5 seconds, and the effective period of operation is equally divided. However, the operation valid period is not limited to this, and the ratio between the first half valid period and the second half valid period in the operation valid period may be made unequal, and the operation valid period may be divided so that the first half valid period and the latter half valid period are different.
For example, the first half effective period is set shorter than the second half effective period in the operation effective period, and the notice effect corresponding to the first half effective period As a performance), a notice performance with a high degree of expectation for winning may be set. , the desire to operate the effect operation unit 301 can be generated during the execution of the first half effective period.

In this example, as the image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the image showing the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is displayed inside the valid period bar and during the remaining period of the operation valid period. is displayed in front of the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period, so that it is always visible regardless of whether the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period is reduced or not. On the other hand, the image showing the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated is displayed inside the effective period bar and behind the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period. When the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period has not decreased, it cannot be visually recognized while blindfolded. It may be configured to According to such a configuration, as time elapses after the start of the button effect, the filled area indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period inside the effective period bar decreases, and the effect is executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated. Since the image showing the advance notice effect is gradually revealed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to what kind of advance notice effect the image will reveal.
Before the image showing the advance notice effect to be executed when operating the effect operation unit 301 becomes clear, the effect operation unit 301 is operated, or the image showing the notice effect to be executed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated. After clarification, the player can be given a choice of whether to operate the effect operation unit 301, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest in the game.

[Execution of madness production and mute production triggered by pending winning]
In this embodiment, when the game ball B is entered into the first lower starting port 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, or the second starting port 2005, the special random number acquired in the production prior determination process described above , reach random number, pattern random number, and fluctuation random number, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special pattern is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit. Pre-determination information such as whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed or the type of game effect to be executed (variation pattern type) is determined before starting the variable display according to the start winning, and the main The configuration is such that the control board 1310 transmits a command related to the preliminary determination information to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the peripheral control board 1510 can also grasp the preliminary determination information.

In this example, when the mode type (variation pattern type) of the game effect specified by the pre-determination information is a specific ready-to-win effect, when there is a ball corresponding to the pre-determination information, the player It is possible to execute a madness production as a production for giving surprise. In the madness production, a cut-in image, which is an image in which the character goes mad, is displayed, and in a situation in which the production sounds such as BGM that are output as the production progresses are muted, the character's screaming sound is output. ing. That is, in the madness production, the production sounds other than the scream sound of the character are muted. In this way, when there is a hit ball for which a specific ready-to-win effect is executed, the madness effect is suddenly executed separately from the effect being executed, so that the player can be surprised. It is possible to make the player who is watching the effect being executed notice that such a ball has been entered.

In addition, in this example, after the execution of the madness production, the images displayed with the progress of the production are kept as usual, and all the production sounds such as BGM that are output with the progress of the production are included. A muting effect for muting the effect sound is executed. In this way, when a ball is entered for which a specific ready-to-win effect is to be executed, the madness effect is first executed to surprise the player, thereby making the mute effect to be executed after that stand out. , the player can be given a sense of tension and expectation. In addition, even if the player does not notice that there is a ball that causes a specific ready-to-win effect during execution of the madness effect, such a ball will not be detected by the silence effect that is executed after that. It can make you realize what happened.

In addition, in this example, the muting effect after the execution of the madness effect can be continued until the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the entering ball, which is to execute the specific ready-to-win effect, is started. there is In other words, if there is already a hold (memory of a special random number) at the time when there is a ball entering that will execute a specific reach effect, after executing the variable display of the pattern according to the hold, the specific reach Since the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the entering ball (holding) that will be executed is started, the mute effect after the execution of the crazy effect will be continued over multiple times of the variable display of the symbols. making it possible. In this way, by enabling the muting effect to continue over a plurality of times of variable display of symbols, the variable display of symbols according to the entry (holding) for which a specific ready-to-win effect is executed. Towards the start of , the tension and anticipation given to the player can be sustained.

Conventionally, as a pre-determination effect (so-called pre-reading effect) based on pre-determination information, by using the pending display displayed on the effect display device 1600 by starting winning during the execution of the variable display of the symbol, During the period from executing the variable display of the corresponding pattern to erasing the pending display, such a preliminary determination effect is executed by executing a pending change effect that suggests the degree of expectation for the win by changing the mode of the pending display. The player's sense of expectation is heightened by performing multiple operations in combination. In this regard, in this example, as a pre-determination effect (so-called pre-reading effect) based on pre-determination information, a mad effect and a mad By executing the mute effect after the execution of the effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and expectation, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing an example of the process of executing a mad effect when entering a ball. First, when there is a game ball B entering the first lower starting port 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, or the second starting port 2005, the main control board 1310 toward the peripheral control board 1510 However, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a command related to the preliminary determination information (step S2201), the CPU of the peripheral control IC selects the mode type of the game effect specified by the preliminary determination information (variation pattern type). type) is a specific ready-to-win effect (step S2202). Then, when it is determined that the aspect type (variation pattern type) of the game effect specified by the advance determination information is a specific ready-to-win effect, the variation display of the symbol being executed is normal variation (the symbol that does not become a reach) It is determined whether or not the pre-determination effect (so-called look-ahead effect) based on pre-determination information prior to the pre-determination information is being executed (step S2203). The specific ready-to-win effect corresponds to a ready-to-win effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect) with a high degree of expectation for winning among a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win effects with different expectations for winning.

In step S2203, at the time when a ball is entered for executing a specific ready-to-win effect, the symbol variation display being executed is a normal variation (variation display of symbols that do not become a ready-to-win effect), and the pre-determination information If it is determined that the pre-determination performance (so-called pre-reading performance) based on the previous pre-determination information is not being executed, the madness performance and the mute performance are executed after the execution of the madness performance (step S2204). That is, the variation display of the symbol being executed is normal variation (variation display of symbols that do not become reach), and in a situation where the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination information (so-called look-ahead effect) is not being executed, the specific reach Only when a ball is entered for execution of the production, the madness production and, after the execution of the madness production, the mute production are executed. Here, in the madness effect, a cut-in image, which is an image in which the character goes mad, is displayed for a predetermined period of time (two seconds in this example), and effect sounds such as BGM that are output as the effect progresses are muted. In this situation, the character's screaming sound is output.
That is, in the madness production, the production sounds other than the scream sound of the character are muted. In addition, in the mute effect after the execution of the madness effect, all the effects including the effect sounds such as BGM that are output as the effect progresses while the images displayed as the effect progresses are kept as normal. muting the sound.

In this example, as a condition for executing the madness effect and the mute effect after the execution of the madness effect, at the time when a ball is entered for executing a specific ready-to-win effect, the variation display of the symbol being executed changes normally. (Variable display of symbols that do not reach reach). For example, when the variation display of the symbol being executed is the reach variation (the variation display of the symbol that becomes the reach), and the reach effect is being performed, there is a ball entering that causes a specific reach effect to be performed, and the player goes insane. When the effect or the muting effect is executed, a situation occurs in which attention to the ready-to-win effect is obstructed. In this regard, by making it a condition that the variable display of the symbols being executed is the normal variation (variable display of symbols that do not result in reach), it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

Further, in this example, as a condition for executing the madness effect and the mute effect after the execution of the madness effect, when there is a ball that will execute a specific ready-to-win effect, the pre-determined information It is a condition that the pre-determination effect (so-called pre-reading effect) based on the pre-determination information is not being executed. As a pre-determination effect (so-called prefetch effect), in addition to the madness effect and the mute effect, the suspension display displayed on the effect display device 1600 by winning the start during the execution of the variable display of the symbol is used. During the period from the execution of variable display of patterns according to the prize winning to the erasing of the reservation display, it is possible to execute the reservation change performance suggesting the degree of expectation for winning by changing the mode of the reservation display. For this reason, for example, when a pending change effect is executed as a preliminary determination effect (so-called look-ahead effect), there is a ball entering that causes a specific ready-to-win effect to be executed, and a mad effect or a mute effect is executed. A situation occurs in which attention to the pending change effect is blocked. In this respect, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by making it a condition that the pre-determination effect (so-called pre-reading effect) based on the pre-determination information prior to the pre-determination information is not being executed. can.

Further, in this example, as the madness effect, a cut-in image, which is an image in which the character goes mad, is displayed, and in a situation where the effect sound such as BGM that is output as the effect progresses is muted, the character's "kya" is displayed. As for the scream sound of the character, the scream sound corresponding to the character appearing in the cut-in image is output. A plurality of types of characters are prepared as characters that can appear in the cut-in image, and the cut-in image is designed to display the character corresponding to the stage being executed. Also, as a stage, there are stages corresponding to each of multiple types of characters, and the stage is switched every time a few changes to several tens of changes are executed. I am trying to switch.
In this way, in the madness production, a production with a sense of unity can be executed by displaying a cut-in image and outputting a scream sound using a character corresponding to the stage being executed.

Next, in the mad effect execution processing at the time of entering the ball, after the execution of the mute effect, it is the time of starting the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the entering (holding) that will execute the specific ready-to-win effect, or the specific reach If it is the time when a predetermined silence period has elapsed since the entry of the ball (holding) to execute the effect, or if it is the earlier timing (step S2105), the execution is executed. The mute effect is ended, and effect sounds such as BGM that are output as the effect progresses are normally output (step S2106). This point will be described later in detail.

FIG. 243 is a time chart showing an example of execution of the mad effect and the silence effect. Here, a case will be described in which there are already three reservations (storage of special random numbers) at the time when there is a ball entry for executing a specific ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIG. 243(A), the variation display of the symbols being executed is normal variation (variation display of symbols that are not reachable), and execution of pre-determination effect (so-called pre-reading effect) based on pre-determination information. In a situation where the player is not in the midst of the game, when there is a hit ball for which a specific ready-to-win effect is executed, a madness effect is executed for a predetermined period (two seconds in this example), and a cut-in image, which is an image in which the character goes mad, is displayed. In addition to the display, the scream sound of the character is output in a situation where the effect sound such as BGM that is output as the effect progresses is muted. That is, in the madness production, production sounds other than the character's scream sound are muted. In addition, the cut-in image uses substantially the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is located on the front side of the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed and on the rear side of the suspended display being displayed. is displayed as In this way, the cut-in image is displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed using substantially the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, thereby executing the crazy effect. You can easily notice that.

In addition, after the execution of the madness production, a muting production is executed, and while the images displayed with the progress of the production are kept as normal, production sounds such as BGM that are output with the progress of the production are included. All production sounds are muted. After the start of the silencing effect, the specific ready-to-win effect is executed before a predetermined silence period elapses after the ball is entered (held) for executing the specific ready-to-win effect. When it comes to the start of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the different ball entry (holding), the muting effect being executed is terminated, and the effect sound such as BGM output as the effect progresses is output as usual. I am trying to output to

In this example, since there are already three reservations (memory of special random numbers) at the time when there is a ball entry that will execute a specific ready-to-win effect, the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the three reservations is executed. Afterwards, the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the entering ball (holding) for executing the specific ready-to-win effect will be started. In other words, the muting effect after execution of the madness effect can be continued over three times of variable display of symbols corresponding to the number of suspensions. In this way, by enabling the muting effect to continue over the three times of variable display of symbols, the variable display of symbols according to the entry (suspension) for which a specific ready-to-win effect is executed. Towards the start of , the tension and anticipation given to the player can be maintained. In addition, at the start of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the entering ball (holding) that will execute a specific ready-to-win effect, the mute effect is terminated, and the effect sound such as BGM that is output as the effect progresses. Since the game is output in the street, the tension given to the player can be released. In addition, as the specific ready-to-win production, among a plurality of types of ready-to-win production with different expectations for winning, a ready-to-win production with a high expectation for winning (for example, super ready-to-win production) is executed. As a result, the possibility of winning is high, so the sense of anticipation given to the player can be particularly heightened during execution of the madness effect or the mute effect.

In addition, as a pre-determination effect (so-called prefetch effect), in addition to the madness effect and the mute effect, it is possible to execute the above-described pending change effect, etc., but during the period when the mute effect is being executed , Restricts the execution of other pre-determination effects (so-called prefetch effects) such as pending change effects. As a result, while the mute effect is being executed, the tension given to the player continues, but by not executing other pre-determining effects (so-called pre-reading effects) such as pending change effects, It is possible to prevent such tension from being interrupted.

FIG. 244 is an explanatory diagram showing the luminous state of the door frame during execution of the madness effect and the silence effect. The door frame 3 includes a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a door. A door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430, each of which can emit light in a predetermined color. I have to. Then, as shown in FIG. 244(A), during execution of the madness effect, the light emitting portion is directed upward from the lower side of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 and further toward the door frame top unit 450. moves to control the light emission as if the light gathered on the door frame top unit 450, and during the execution of the muting effect after the execution of the madness effect, the door frame top unit 450 is kept until the muting effect ends. The lighted state is maintained (Fig. 244(B)). Also from this, during the execution of the mute effect, the player is given a sense of tension toward the start of the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the entering ball (holding) that will execute the specific ready-to-win effect. and maintain a sense of anticipation.

In the above description, the door frame top unit 450 is kept lit while the mute effect is being executed. , etc.), the execution of other light emitting effects using at least the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, and the door frame top unit 450 is restricted. As a result, the tension imparted to the player continues during execution of the mute effect, but such tension is interrupted by not executing other light emitting effects unrelated to the mute effect. can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 243(B), after the start of the mute effect, a specific When a predetermined silence period elapses after a ball is entered (suspended) for executing the ready-to-win performance, the silence performance being executed is terminated, and BGM is output as the performance progresses. , etc. are output as usual. In other words, after the start of the silencing effect, when a predetermined silencing period elapses after the ball is entered (held) for executing the specific ready-to-win effect, the specific ready-to-win effect is executed. Until the start of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the incoming ball (suspended), the performance sound such as BGM that is output along with the progress of the performance is output as usual.

Regarding the above-mentioned mute period, after the start of the mute effect, up to three times before the start of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the entering ball (hold) that will execute the specific reach effect. It is set on the assumption that the variable display of the symbol is executed by normal variation (variable display of the symbol that does not become reach). That is, about 10 seconds is set as the normal fluctuation time, and about 30 seconds is set as the mute period. As a result, after the start of the mute effect, the variable display of the pattern is normally changed (reach When the ready-to-win production (for example, 30 to 360 seconds) is executed by the ready-to-win production (for example, 30 to 360 seconds) instead of the variable display of the symbols that do not become With the lapse of time, the muting effect being executed is terminated, and the effect sound such as BGM output with the progress of the effect is output normally, so that the expectation of the effect sound of the ready-to-win effect can be expected as usual. can be enjoyed to Further, if it is not set whether or not the mute period has elapsed, if the mute effect is executed for a long period of time, there may be fear that the speaker may be broken. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by terminating the muting effect at the point in time.

In this example, after the start of the mute effect, the specific ready-to-win effect is executed before the start of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the entering ball (holding) for which the specific ready-to-win effect is to be executed. When a predetermined silence period has passed since the ball entered (hold), the silence effect being executed is terminated, and the effect sound such as BGM that is output along with the progress of the effect I'm trying to output to the street. On the other hand, while the muting effect is being executed, the door frame top unit 450 is kept lit, but the door frame top unit 450 remains lit even after the muting period has passed. is not ended, and the door frame top unit 450 is maintained in a lighted state until the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the incoming ball (holding) for executing the specific ready-to-win effect is started. I'm trying As described above, the lighted state of the door frame top unit 450 is maintained regardless of whether or not the silence period has elapsed. It can be grasped that the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the entering ball (reservation) for which the effect is to be executed has not been executed.

The plate unit 200 of this example is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player. The sound output from various speakers (main body frame speaker 622, etc.) can be adjusted step by step by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227. FIG. For example, the level of volume output from various speakers can be adjusted from 1 (minimum volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume). As the level increases, the volume output from the various speakers increases, and as the level is decreased by operating the volume control button 227 downward, the volume output from the various speakers decreases. In this example, the volume of the lowest level (1) is zero volume, and all the production sounds are inaudible. In addition, the volume of sounds output from various speakers can be adjusted both while the patterns are changing and when they are not changing. In such a configuration, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during execution of the mute effect, the volume can be internally adjusted, but the effect sound such as BGM output as the effect progresses. Silence is maintained for all the production sounds including .

On the other hand, it may be configured to limit the internal adjustment of the volume when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during execution of the mute effect. According to such a configuration, even if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, the volume is not adjusted internally, so that the user can notice that the mute effect is being executed.

In this example, while the muting effect is being executed, all the effect sounds including the effect sounds such as BGM that are output as the effect progresses are muted. Only the sound may be silenced. For example, during execution of the muting effect, the effect sound such as BGM that is output as the effect progresses is muted, while the first lower start port 2003, the first upper start port 2004, and the second start port 2005 The ball hitting sound that is output when the ball hits the ball may be configured to be output without muting the sound. According to such a configuration, even during execution of the muting effect, it is possible to notify that a ball has entered the first lower starting port 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, or the like. It can be confirmed by sound. Moreover, the operation sound that is output when the operation unit such as the volume control button 227 is operated may be configured to be output without being muted. According to such a configuration, during execution of the muting effect, the effect sound such as BGM that is output along with the progress of the effect is not output, and even if the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound will not be output. does not change, but the fact that the volume control button 227 has been operated can be confirmed by the operation sound.

[Execution of Suggestion Effect When Entering Ball Using Light-Emitting Member]
In this embodiment, depending on the type of hit, the execution period of the variable display is usually set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 77 times after the end of the jackpot game state. It is possible to control to a time-saving state (advantageous game state) that shortens than. In such a time-saving state, a normal lottery drawn by passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002 is more likely to result in a 'normal win' than in a normal state (non-time-saving state), and the normal lottery becomes a 'normal win'. This makes it easier for a large number of game balls B to enter the second starting port 2005 . Thereby, in the time-saving state, the second starting port 2005 is more likely than the first lower starting port 2003 and the first upper starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B, so the second starting port 2005 In order to accept the game ball B, the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called “right hitting”) is performed.

In this example, around the second starting opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2600, a second starting opening decoration substrate 2671 is provided on the upper surface of which a plurality of LEDs for decorating the second starting opening 2005 are mounted. . That is, by turning on the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the second starting port decoration board 2671, the periphery of the second starting port 2005 can be decorated with light. A plurality of LEDs provided around such a second start port 2005, in a normal state (non-time-saving state), in conjunction with LEDs of other decorative substrates provided in the game area 5a, the game This allows an integrated luminous decoration over the entire region 5a.

Also, in this example, when the game ball B is entered into the first lower starting port 2003, the first upper starting port 2004, or the second starting port 2005, the acquired special Based on a random number, a reach random number, a pattern random number, and a variable random number, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special pattern is a big win, the kind of the big win when the big win is made, and the production display device 1600 when the big win is not made. Pre-determination information such as whether to execute a ready-to-win effect as a game effect to be executed or the type of game effect to be executed (variation pattern type) is determined before starting the variable display according to the start winning, The main control board 1310 is configured to transmit a command related to the preliminary determination information to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the peripheral control board 1510 can also grasp the preliminary determination information.

In addition, in this example, when there is a game ball B entering the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, according to the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 , a suggestion performance is executed to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not a win is included in the variable display of symbols that will show the result after the ball enters the second starting port 2005.例文帳に追加Such "variation display of the symbol that results are shown after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005" includes the variable display of the symbol executed at the time of the ball entering the second starting hole 2005, Variation display of unexecuted symbols already stored as pending at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 and unexecuted symbols to be stored as pending at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 and a variable display of
As to whether or not the variable display of symbols being executed at the time of entering the second start port 2005 will be a hit, the winning/losing command transmitted at the start of the variable display of symbols or the variation pattern command is used. It can be grasped by information, and the fluctuation display of unexecuted symbols already stored as pending at the time of entering the second starting port 2005, and stored as pending at the time of entering the second starting port 2005. Whether or not the variable display of the unexecuted symbols will be a hit can be grasped by the advance judgment information based on the command regarding the advance judgment information transmitted when the ball enters the second starting port 2005. . In this way, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, a suggestive effect using a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 is executed. By doing so, it is possible to quickly grasp the possibility that the result of the variable display of the symbols shown after the ball enters the second starting port 2005 will be a win. In particular, when there is a variation display of unexecuted symbols already stored as pending, when there is a game ball B entered into the second start port 2005 after that, the vicinity of the second start port 2005 By executing the suggestive performance using a plurality of LEDs provided in the non-executed pattern variation without waiting for execution of the non-executed pattern variation display already stored as pending. It is possible to quickly grasp the possibility that one of the displays will be a hit.

Regarding the above, if the upper limit number of reservations is not reached, when the game ball B enters the second start opening 2005, it is stored as a reservation and is provided around the second start opening 2005. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect using a plurality of LEDs, and it is possible to expect whether or not a hit is included in the variable display of the pattern that will be shown after the ball enters the second starting port 2005. degree. In other words, when the upper limit number of reservations is not reached, the player continues to operate the handle 195 so that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, thereby enabling execution of the suggestive effect. It is possible to quickly grasp the possibility that any one of the variable displays of symbols that have not been executed and that have already been stored as pending will be a hit. Here, in the time saving state, it is easy to enter the second start port 2005, and the state is easy to reach the upper limit number of reservations. Hitting the game ball B that is going to enter the second start port 2005 is often stopped. In this regard, in this example, even if the number of pending is close to the upper limit, the player continues to operate the handle 195 to enable execution of the suggestive effect, so that the ball enters the second start port 2005. The driving of the game ball B to be played can be continued, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the number of reservations reaches the upper limit, when the game ball B enters the second start opening 2005, it is not stored as a reservation, but is provided around the second start opening 2005. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect using a plurality of LEDs in the second starting port 2005, and the degree of expectation of whether or not the winning is included in the variable display of the pattern that will be shown after the ball enters the second starting port 2005. It is meant to suggest. In other words, when the upper limit number of reservations has been reached, the player continues to operate the handle 195 so that the game ball B enters the second start port 2005, thereby enabling execution of the suggestive effect. It is possible to quickly grasp the possibility that any one of the variable displays of symbols that have not been executed and that have already been stored as pending will be a hit. Here, in the time saving state, it is easy to enter the second start port 2005, the state is easy to reach the upper limit number of reservations, and when the number of reservations reaches the upper limit number, further to the second start opening 2005 Even if there is a game ball B entered, the game ball B that is going to enter the second start port 2005 is often stopped because the variation display of the symbol due to that ball is not executed. It's becoming In this regard, in this example, even if the upper limit number of suspensions is reached, the player continues to operate the handle 195 to enable the execution of the suggestive effect, so that the second start port 2005 The driving of the game ball B to be entered can be continued, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this example, when there is a game ball B entering the second start port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, according to the light emission mode of a plurality of LEDs provided around the second start port 2005 , the result is shown after the ball enters the second starting port 2005, and a suggestion effect is executed to suggest the degree of expectation as to whether or not a hit will be included in the variable display of symbols, but this is not limited to this. First, in the suggestive effect, it is configured to suggest only the degree of expectation as to whether or not the variable display of unexecuted symbols already stored as pending at the time of entry into the second starting port 2005 will win. good too. Even by this, if there is a variable display of unexecuted symbols already stored as pending, the player continues to operate the handle 195 so that the game ball B enters the second start port 2005. By doing so, it is possible to execute the suggestive performance, and without waiting for the execution of the variable display of the unexecuted patterns already stored as pending, one of the variable displays of the unexecuted patterns becomes a hit. Possibility can be grasped at an early stage.

In addition, in this example, when there is a game ball B entering the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, according to the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 , the result is shown after the ball enters the second starting port 2005, and a suggestion effect is executed to suggest the degree of expectation as to whether or not a hit will be included in the variable display of symbols, but this is not limited to this. Alternatively, when it is determined that the player continues to operate the handle 195 (detection by the handle touch sensor 192 or the handle rotation detection sensor 189), the suggestive effect may be executed. Even with this, when there is a variable display of unexecuted symbols already stored as pending, if it is determined that the player continues to operate the handle 195, the ball is entered into the second start port 2005. Since there is an intention to make it possible to execute the suggestion performance, the variable display of the unexecuted symbols is performed without waiting for the execution of the variable display of the unexecuted symbols already stored as pending. It is possible to quickly grasp the possibility that one of them will be a hit.

In addition, in this example, when there is a game ball B entering the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, according to the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 , the result is shown after the ball enters the second starting port 2005, and a suggestion effect is executed to suggest the degree of expectation as to whether or not a hit will be included in the variable display of symbols, but this is not limited to this. However, when there is a ball entering the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004 during control of the normal state (non-time saving state), the first lower start It is configured to execute a suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not a hit is included in the variable display of the symbols that will show the result after the ball enters the opening 2003 or the first upper starting opening 2004.例文帳に追加may Even by this, when there is a variation display of unexecuted symbols already stored as pending, there was an entry of the game ball B into the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004 after that. At times, by enabling the execution of the suggestive effect, any of the unexecuted variable display of symbols can be performed without waiting for the execution of the unexecuted variable display of symbols already stored as pending. The possibility of winning can be grasped at an early stage. In addition, in the normal state (non-time-saving state), it is difficult to enter the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004 compared to the second starting port 2005 in the time-saving state. However, by making the ball enter the first lower starting hole 2003 and the first upper starting hole 2004, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect, so let's make the ball enter the first lower starting hole 2003 and the first upper starting hole 2004. It is possible to generate the desire of the player to play, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, when the upper limit number of reservations is not reached and the game ball B enters the second start port 2005, it is stored as a reservation, and when the number of reservations reaches the upper limit. When the game ball B enters the second start port 2005, it is not stored as a hold, and in both cases, a plurality of LEDs provided around the second start port 2005 2005, the result is displayed after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005, and the effect is executed to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not a win is included in the variable display of the symbol. , Not limited to this, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect only when the upper limit number of reservations is not reached and when the game ball B enters the second start port 2005 and is stored as a reservation. It may be configured to As a result, only when the upper limit number of reservations has not been reached, by continuing the player's operation of the handle 195 so that the game ball B enters the second start port 2005, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect. It is possible to quickly grasp the possibility that any one of the variable displays of symbols that have not been executed and that are stored as pending will be a hit. In addition, in this example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the period for executing the suggestive effect, but in the case of the above configuration, the game ball B enters the second start port 2005. It may be configured to enable execution of a new suggestive effect each time a new hold is stored as a ball.

In addition, in this example, when there is a game ball B entered into the second starting hole 2005, the second starting hole 2005 A suggestive effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a hit will be included in the variable display of the pattern that will show the result after entering the ball is executed, but it is not necessary to execute the suggestive effect. , When the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005, there may be cases where the suggestion performance is executed and cases where the suggestion performance is not executed. In such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is executed, the result is displayed after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005, and the result is shown in the variation display of the symbol more than when the suggestive effect is not executed. is included or not.

In addition, in this example, when there is a game ball B entering the second start port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, according to the light emission mode of a plurality of LEDs provided around the second start port 2005 , the result is displayed after the ball enters the second starting port 2005, and the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether or not a win is included in the variable display of symbols is executed, but this is not limited to this. First, in the suggestive effect, it suggests the degree of expectation as to whether or not a particular hold will be a hit among the fluctuation displays of symbols that have not yet been executed and which have already been stored as a hold at the point of entry into the second starting port 2005.例文帳に追加It may be configured as In such a configuration, for example, the effect display device 1600 displays the suspension display corresponding to each suspension, and which suspension is a specific suspension, that is, for which suspension the suggestive effect is executed. Preferably, the hold indication corresponding to a particular hold is displayed differently than the other hold indications so that it can be determined whether the person is on hold. As a result, when the game ball B enters the second start port 2005, the suggestive effect is executed for the specific hold that has already been stored as a hold at the point of entry into the second start port 2005. - 特許庁In this case, it is possible to quickly grasp the possibility that the specific hold will be a win without waiting for the execution of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the specific hold already stored as the hold. It is possible to wait with anticipation until the variable display of symbols corresponding to a specific hold is executed.

In addition, in the above, when there is a game ball B entering the second start port 2005 in a situation where there is a specific hold, a suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not the specific hold will be a hit However, the following modification may be used. Specifically, after the specific hold is stored, every time the game ball B enters the second start port 2005 and is stored as a new hold, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect for the specific hold. , the number of continuations of suggestive effects that can be executed each time a new hold is stored may be used to suggest the degree of expectation as to whether or not a specific hold will be successful. For example, it may be configured such that the greater the number of continuations of suggestive effects that can be executed each time a new hold is stored, the higher the degree of expectation of whether or not a particular hold will be successful. Further, when the number of continuations of suggestive effects that can be executed each time a new hold is stored reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the degree of expectation of whether or not a particular hold will be successful is increased. It may be configured to be higher. According to this, after the specific hold is memorized, by making the ball enter the second starting port 2005, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect for the specific hold, and it is possible to expect whether the specific hold will be successful. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the degree will increase, it is possible to motivate the player to enter the ball into the second start hole 2005, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Also, after the specific hold is stored, every time the game ball B enters the second start port 2005 and is stored as a new hold, the execution of the suggestive effect for the specific hold is continued (suggestive effect ), and the player can pay attention to the execution of the suggestion performance with anticipation until the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the specific hold is executed.

FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing an example of a suggestive effect execution process when entering a ball. First, when the gaming state is the time saving state (step S2301), the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the game ball B has entered the second start port 2005 (step S2302). Then, when it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2005 during control of the time saving state, the result is shown after the ball enters the second start port 2005 Variation of the pattern Based on whether or not the display includes a win, the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 is determined (step S2303). As described above, the ``variable display of the symbol whose result is shown after the ball enters the second starting port 2005'' is the symbol executed at the time of the ball entering the second starting port 2005. Variation display, variation display of unexecuted symbols already stored as pending at the time of entry into the second starting port 2005, and storage at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 as pending. and a variable display of unexecuted symbols. As to whether or not the variable display of symbols being executed at the time of entering the second start port 2005 will be a win, the win-lose command or the variation pattern command transmitted at the start of the variable display of symbols is used. It can be grasped by information, and the fluctuation display of unexecuted symbols already stored as pending at the time of entering the second starting port 2005, and stored as pending at the time of entering the second starting port 2005. Whether or not the variable display of the unexecuted symbols will be a hit can be grasped by the advance judgment information based on the command regarding the advance judgment information transmitted when the ball enters the second starting port 2005. .

In this example, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are set as the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 . Then, when determining the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005, the result is determined after the ball enters the second starting port 2005 in the order of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. It is determined so that the degree of expectation that a hit will be included in the variable display of symbols to be shown is high. It should be noted that the rainbow color is a lighting mode that can be determined only when a hit is included in the variable display of the pattern that will be shown after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 . From this, it is suggested that there is a high degree of expectation that a hit will be included in the variable display of the symbol that will be shown as a result after the ball enters the second starting port 2005 when the suggestive effect is executed. The more the plurality of LEDs are lit in the mode, the higher the possibility that the result of the symbol variation display shown after the ball enters the second start port 2005 will be a hit. You can draw attention to the results.

Next, in the ball-entering suggestive effect execution processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC causes the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 to blink at high speed in the lighting mode determined in step S2303. A suggestion effect is executed, and high-speed blinking in that light emission mode is continued until a predetermined period elapses (step S2304). In this example, when the suggestive effect is executed, a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 are flashed at high speed, so that it is easy to notice that the suggestive effect is being executed. Further, during execution of the suggestive effect, even if the game ball B enters the second start hole 2005, the suggestive effect is not newly executed. That is, only when the suggestive effect is not being executed, when the game ball B enters the second start hole 2005, it is possible to newly execute the suggestive effect.

In this example, a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the period during which the suggestive effect is executed. It is preferable to set the period during which such a suggestive effect is executed to be shorter than the pattern variation time during control of the time saving state. According to this, during the control of the time saving state, since it is possible to execute more suggestive effects than the result of the variable display of the symbol is shown, a plurality of provided around the second start port 2005 Depending on the lighting mode of the LED, the chance of suggesting that the result of the variable display of the pattern shown after the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 is highly likely to be a hit increases, and the execution of the suggestive performance is expected to be noticed. be able to.

In addition, in this example, during the control of the normal state (non-time saving state), during the execution of the variable display of the symbol from the start winning to the execution of the variable display of the symbol according to the start winning, the production The display device 1600 displays the pending display so that the number of pending can be known, while during the control of the time saving state, after starting winning during the execution of the variable display of the symbols, the variable display of the symbols according to the starting winning is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the execution of . That is, during the control of the time saving state, when the game ball B enters the second start port 2005, the number of reservations is not displayed because the number of reservations is not displayed, and the number of reservations reaches the upper limit. I can't tell if there is or not. Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, regardless of whether or not the number of reservations reaches the upper limit, the driving of the game balls B is continued so that many game balls B enter the second start port 2005.例文帳に追加be able to.

In addition, in this example, during control of the normal state (non-time saving state), as a pre-determination effect (so-called, look-ahead effect), it is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by starting winning during the execution of the variable display of the symbol. Using the pending display, a variable display of symbols according to the starting prize is executed and the pending display is erased until the pending display is erased. make it possible to In addition, in the suspension change effect, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are set as suspension display modes, and the final suspension display mode is blue, green, red, and rainbow colors in this order, and expectations for winning are It is intended to be implemented in a higher degree. In addition, in the suspension change performance, the degree of expectation for winning is high as a mode of suspension display from the start winning during the execution of the variable display of the symbols until the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the start winning is executed. It is possible to change to a mode that suggests.
In other words, at the time when the pending display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by starting winning during the execution of the variable display of the symbols, there is a possibility that the mode of the pending display will change after that, and the pattern according to the starting winning is possible. At the time of execution of variable display, it is necessary to wait for appearance of a mode suggesting a high degree of expectation for winning until the final mode of pending display is determined.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, a pending display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the start winning during the execution of the variable display of the symbols to the execution of the variable display of the symbols according to the starting winning. Since it is not displayed, the pending change effect described above is not executed either. Thereby, it is possible to draw attention to a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005, which are targets for execution of the suggestion effect, during control of the time saving state. In addition, in the suggestive effect, the plurality of LEDs provided around the second start port 2005 flash at high speed in either blue, green, red, or rainbow colors until a predetermined period of time elapses. The light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs does not change until the predetermined period elapses. For this reason, after the start of the suggestive effect, there is no need to continue to pay attention to the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second start port 2005, and according to the ball entering the second start port 2005 It is possible to quickly grasp the possibility that the result of the variable display of the symbols shown after the ball enters the second starting port 2005 will be a hit without waiting for the execution of the variable display of the symbols.

FIG. 246 is an explanatory diagram showing light-emitting locations on the game area when the suggestive effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 246, when there is a game ball B entering the second starting port 2005 during control of the time saving state, a plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 over a predetermined period is running a suggestive rendition that flashes fast. Also, the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 are designed to flash at high speed in any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. In this way, during the control of the time saving state, since the suggestive effect is executed using a plurality of LEDs provided around the second start port 2005 where the game ball B should be entered, the second start port A player who pays attention to whether or not the ball will be entered in 2005 will naturally notice that the suggestive effect is being executed.

In addition, when there is a game ball B entering the first lower starting port 2003 or the first upper starting port 2004 etc. during control of the normal state (non-time saving state), the lower left area of the effect display device 1600 In addition to displaying the suspension display, it is possible to execute the above-described suspension change performance until the suspension display is erased after executing the variable display of the symbol according to the start winning. Moreover, as a form of the pending display displayed on the effect display device 1600, any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors is displayed.

In addition, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, when executing the suggestive effect, the second starting port 2005 is opened during the execution of the suggestive effect. Not only are the plurality of LEDs provided in the periphery flashing at high speed, but also the predetermined light emitting section 2590 provided in the upper left part of the game area 5a lights up or flashes. As a result, when the ball is entered into the second starting port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, even the player who does not pay attention to the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 executes the suggestive effect. It's easier to notice what you're doing. Similarly, when there is a game ball B entering the first lower start port 2003 etc. during control of the normal state (non-time saving state), when executing the holding change production, the holding change production During the execution of , not only the state of the pending display displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes, but also the common light emitting unit 2590 lights up or blinks. As a result, even for the player who does not pay attention to the effect display device 1600 at the time of entering the first lower start port 2003 etc. during control of the normal state (non-time saving state), the holding change effect is executed. It's easier to notice that you're there. And for the common light emitting part 2590, the distance from the second starting port 2005 that should be entered during control of the time saving state and the first lower start that should be entered during control of the normal state (non-time saving state) It is provided at a position that is approximately the same distance from the mouth 2003 . As a result, depending on whether it is controlled in a time-saving state or a normal state (non-time-saving state), the position of the starting port (first lower starting port 2003, second starting port 2005) to be entered is different. As for whether or not an effect (suggestive effect, pending change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation for a hit is being executed, it is only necessary to visually recognize the common light emitting part 2590 located at approximately the same distance from each starting port, Even if the starting opening (the first lower starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2005) to which the ball is to be entered is changed, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook that such an effect is being executed.

In the above, when the suggestive effect is executed, not only are the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005 blinking at high speed, but the common light emitting unit 2590 is lit or blinking. The common light-emitting portion 2590 is lit or blinked in a different light-emitting color from the light-emitting colors (blue, green, red, and rainbow colors in this example) used for suggestive effects. For example, the common light-emitting portion 2590 may light or blink in yellow, purple, orange, or the like. According to this, even if the common light emitting unit 2590 lights up or blinks during the execution of the suggestive effect, it is difficult to misunderstand that the light emission mode itself indicates the degree of expectation for the win. After confirming that the light emitting part 2590 is lit or blinking, it is clearly recognized that the degree of expectation for the hit should be confirmed by the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs provided around the second starting port 2005. be able to.

In this example, the luminescent color used in the suggestive effect at the time of ball entry through the second starting hole 2005 is any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, whereas the first lower starting hole 2003 emits light in a suggestive effect. The emission color used in the time hold change effect is any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, and the same emission color is set, but it may be configured so that different emission colors are set. . In addition, as the light emission mode of the common light emitting unit 2590, not only is it configured to light or blink in a light emission color different from the light emission color used in the suggestive effect, but also the light emission color different from the light emission color used in the hold change effect. It may be configured to light up or blink at . According to this, even if the common light emitting unit 2590 lights up or blinks during the execution of the hold change effect, it is difficult to misunderstand that the light emission mode itself indicates the degree of expectation for the win. After confirming that the light emitting part 2590 is lit or blinking, it is possible to clearly recognize that the degree of expectation for winning should be confirmed by the form of the pending display displayed on the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this example, when there is a game ball B entering the second start port 2005 during the control of the time saving state, it is suggested using a plurality of LEDs provided around the second start port 2005 Although the production is executed, similarly, when there is a game ball B entering the first lower start port 2003 during control of the normal state (non-time saving state), the first lower start port 2003 It may be possible to execute the suggestive effect using a plurality of LEDs provided in the periphery. Also in such a case, during the execution of the suggestion effect in the control of the normal state (non-time saving state), not only a plurality of LEDs provided around the first lower start port 2003 flashes at high speed, A common light emitting unit 2590 is designed to light up or blink. In other words, for the common light emitting unit 2590, the distance from the plurality of LEDs provided around the second start port 2005 used during execution of the suggestive production during control of the time saving state, the normal state (non-time saving state ), and the distance from the plurality of LEDs provided around the first lower starting port 2003 used when executing the suggestive effect during the control of ) is approximately the same distance. . As a result, although the part where the suggestive effect is executed differs depending on whether it is controlled to the time-saving state or the normal state (non-time-saving state), the effect (suggestive effect) that suggests the degree of expectation for the hit is executed. As for whether or not it is performed, it is only necessary to visually recognize the common light emitting part 2590 located at approximately the same distance from the part where each suggestive effect is executed, and even if the part where the suggestive effect is executed changes, It is possible to make it difficult to miss that such an effect is being executed.

In addition, in this example, for the common light emitting unit 2590, the distance from the second starting port 2005 that should be entered during control of the time saving state and the distance from the second start port 2005 that should be entered during control of the normal state (non-time saving state) Although the distance from the first lower starting port 2003 is provided at a position that is substantially the same distance, the common light emitting unit 2590 is not limited to this, and the second starting used when executing the suggestive effect The distance from a plurality of LEDs provided around the mouth 2005 and the distance from the suspension display displayed in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600 used when executing the suspension change effect are substantially the same distance. It may be configured to be provided at such a position. As a result, depending on whether it is controlled in a time-saving state or in a normal state (non-time-saving state), the part where the production (suggestion production, pending change production) is executed is different, but it suggests the degree of expectation for the hit. As for whether or not the effects (suggestive effect, pending change effect) are being executed, it is only necessary to visually recognize the common light emitting part 2590 located at approximately the same distance from the part where each effect is executed. , hold change effect) is changed, it is possible to make it difficult to miss that such effect is being executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume control switch 1513 as shown in FIG. 247(A) is provided, protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. The resistance value is varied by rotating the sound volume control switch 1513 by a staff such as a store clerk in the game hall, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotating position is converted from an analog value to a digital value. are converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 247, 1024 steps of values are divided into 9, and volume settings from volume level 0 (always mute) to maximum volume level 8 are possible. On top of that, an "upper limit invalid mode" in which the player can set the volume up to the maximum volume level 8 by using the volume control button 227 without being subject to the upper limit volume limit, and a limit to the upper limit volume that the player can set are provided. It is configured to be switchable between "upper limit effective mode". The four base volumes of "0A" to "3A" are set in the "upper limit disable mode", and the four base volumes of "0B" to "3B" are set in the "upper limit enable mode". configured to be set by a dynamic operation.

In the base volume "0A" to "3A" corresponding to the "upper limit invalid mode", there is no upper limit volume limit, and the player can adjust the maximum volume level up to 8. is limited as shown in FIG. 247(B). In addition, in the base volumes "0B" to "3B" corresponding to the "upper limit effective mode", the lower limit volume can be adjusted without being restricted, while the upper limit volume level is changed according to each base volume. (B) is restricted as shown. For example, when an attendant such as a game hall clerk sets the volume control switch 1513 to “3A” by rotating it, the player operates the volume control button 227 to set the volume level from 6 to 8, which is the maximum volume. can be adjusted within the range of On the other hand, when a game hall clerk or other attendant turns the volume control switch 1513 to "3B" to set it, the volume level 6 is the upper limit that the player can set by operating the volume control button 227. , volume level 7 and maximum volume level 8 cannot be adjusted and set.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, a staff member such as a store clerk in the gaming hall rotates the volume adjustment switch 1513 to set the base volume, which is adjusted when the power is turned on again. It is set to either the "upper limit disabled mode" or the "upper limit enabled mode". That is, when the power is turned on, for example, if the basic volume is set to "3A", which is the "upper limit invalid mode", the range in which the basic volume can be selected by rotating the volume adjustment switch 1513 after power on is " It is limited to "0A" to "3A" of "upper limit invalid mode". On the other hand, when the power is turned on, for example, if the basic volume is set to "3B", which is the "upper limit effective mode", the range in which the basic volume can be selected by rotating the volume adjustment switch 1513 after the power is turned on is " It is limited to "0B" to "3B" of "upper effective mode". Therefore, after the power is turned on, although the volume control switch 1513 shown in FIG. However, the basic volume is configured to be set to "1A". Similarly, "2B" is set to "2A", "3B" to "3A", and "0A" to "0B". Of course, as a modification, even after the power is turned on, "0A" to "3A" of the "upper limit invalid mode" and "0B" to "3B" of the "upper limit valid mode" can be freely set. is also possible.

Next, a description will be given of how the player adjusts the volume and the like. As described above, in this embodiment, the plate unit 200 is provided with the volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 that can be operated by the player (see FIG. 51, etc.). The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are arranged with a plus operation part and a minus operation part, and the volume and the light amount are adjusted according to the player's operation of each button. Sounds output from various speakers (body frame speaker 622, etc.) can be adjusted within the range indicated by the volume levels (0 to 8) in FIG. It is adjustable. That is, by pressing the plus operation part of the volume control button 227, for example, when the base volume is "0A", the volume level is changed from 0 (mute)→1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8. (maximum volume), and the volume level can be decreased by pressing the minus operation unit as appropriate. As for the amount of light, the plus operation part and the minus operation part of the light amount adjustment button 228 can be operated appropriately to adjust the light amount of various light emitting devices, etc. in stages. is configured so that the upper limit cannot be set on the game hall side. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the amount of light is greatly restricted and the presentation effect intended by the designer cannot be obtained.

In this embodiment, the sound output from various speakers and the adjustment of the light amount of various light emitting devices can be adjusted by the player whether the decorative pattern is fluctuating or not fluctuating. there is FIG. 248 shows an example of an adjustment display mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the player performs a volume adjustment operation and a light amount adjustment operation. More specifically, FIG. 248(A) shows a volume adjustment bar display 4100 displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the player performs a volume adjustment operation, and FIG. An example of a light amount adjustment bar display 4200 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is shown in the drawing. The volume adjustment bar display 4100 includes a volume display frame 4110 and eight volume icons 4113 arranged in the volume display frame 4110 so as to be displayed in color. In the illustrated example, four volume icons 4113 from the left are displayed in color, indicating that the current volume level is "volume level 4". Also, in the light amount adjustment bar display 4200 shown in FIG. 248B, a light amount display frame 4210 and eight light amount icons 4213 are arranged in the light amount display frame 4210 so as to be colored. In the illustrated example, seven light intensity icons 4213 from the left are displayed in color, indicating that the current light intensity level is "light intensity level 7".

Further, as shown in FIG. 248(A), a maximum adjustment amount display 4300 is displayed above the volume adjustment bar display 4100 in this embodiment. The maximum adjustment amount display 4300 has a display frame 4310 and eight adjustment amount icons 4113 arranged in color in the display frame 4310 . By visually recognizing the maximum adjustment amount display 4300 by the player who adjusts the volume, it is possible to grasp the relative state of the current set volume with respect to the maximum volume level. For example, when the base volume is set to "2B" by the setting on the gaming hall side, even if the player operates the volume control button 227, the volume level is further increased from the lighting mode of the volume icon 4113 in FIG. 248(A). However, the display of the maximum adjustment amount display 4300 enables the player to clearly recognize that the current volume level is limited as the upper limit. Become.

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment bar display 4100 and the light amount adjustment bar display 4200 are displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228. When the light amount adjustment button 228 is not operated by the player, the volume adjustment bar display 4100 and the light amount adjustment bar display 4200 are not displayed. Further, even if five seconds have not elapsed since the player operated the volume control button 227 or the light amount control button 228, when the timing for starting the variation of the decorative pattern comes, the volume control bar display 4100 and the light amount are displayed. It is configured to hide the adjustment bar display 4200 . With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to adjust the sound volume and the amount of light at a convenient timing for the player, while suppressing the situation where the player misses the variation start timing of the decorative pattern and loses interest. ing.

In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment is configured to maintain the volume and light intensity set by the player as described above during the game. Clear the volume and light intensity that have been set, and set to the initial setting level. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 247(B), a staff member such as a game hall clerk operates the volume adjustment switch 1513 to set the volume of the "initial level" according to the base volume. The level is changed without notification by voice, image display, or the like. As the above-described predetermined clear condition, when 10 minutes have passed since the decoration pattern stopped, or when a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall operates the volume adjustment switch 1513 to set the base volume, It is possible to clear the volume and the amount of light. As a result, when the players who play the game are replaced, the setting state of the previous player continues to be continued, and the next player is prevented from feeling extremely uncomfortable with the performance. be able to.

Next, a display mode based on volume control during a game will be described. In this embodiment, a plurality of layers with different display priorities are used, image data is arranged for each layer, and the arranged images are displayed in a superimposed manner. That is, a display priority is set for each layer, and image data arranged in a layer with a higher priority is displayed in front of image data arranged in a layer with a lower priority. Rendering data is generated by synthesizing. In each layer, it is possible to place image data only on part of the layer, or to place image data on the entire layer. For example, when image data is placed only on a part of a layer with a high priority, drawing data is generated in such a manner that an image placed on a layer with a low priority can be visually recognized from an area where no image data is placed. It will happen. On the other hand, when image data is placed on the entire layer with high priority, even if some image data is placed on a layer with low priority, the image placed on this layer with low priority is visible. Rendering data in a form that cannot be generated is generated.

It may be configured such that the transparency can be set for the image data arranged in the layer. In this case, it is preferable that the transparency can be set for each pixel of the image data arranged in the layer. In this embodiment, transparency can be set in the range of 0% to 100%. When the transparency is 0%, the pixel is opaque, when the transparency is 50%, the pixel is translucent, and when the transparency is 100%, the pixel is transparent. In this embodiment, if there is no particular mention of transparency, the transparency of the pixel or the image is 0%, ie opaque.

By making it possible to set the transparency of the pixels of the image data placed on the layer, even if the images placed on layers with different priorities overlap, both images can be visible. is. For example, if the transparency of all pixels of image data placed on a layer with high priority is set to 50% and the transparency of all pixels of image data placed on a layer of low priority is set to 0%, , the image placed on the high-priority layer becomes translucent, and the image placed on the low-priority layer is visible in a display mode that makes the image placed on the high-priority layer transparent. It is possible to generate drawing data that can be used.

In the example shown in FIG. 249, in descending order of priority, the “background image” displayed on the effect display device 1600 is followed by “decoration pattern”, “volume/light amount adjustment display”, and “notification effect display”. . FIG. 249(A) shows a display mode during a variation game of decorative symbols. ” and “decorative pattern” are displayed in the foreground. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to adjust the sound volume (similarly, the amount of light can also be adjusted) even while the decorative pattern is changing. Then, in this embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pattern confirmation command from the main control board 1310, it cannot accept the adjustment operation of the volume and the amount of light (the operation signal output when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated is not accepted). 249C, the volume control bar display 4100 is forcibly hidden regardless of whether the display period of 5 seconds has elapsed. is being controlled.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when performing an effect display (in the illustrated example, a notification effect display saying "Press the pressing operation unit 303!") that requires a specified effect operation to be clearly indicated to the player, A prohibition flag is set, and control is performed to disable the operation for adjusting the sound volume and the amount of light. Then, from the display mode during volume adjustment shown in FIG. First, it is forced to be in a non-display state, and the notification effect display "Press!!" as shown in FIG. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to clearly see the important notification effect display, thereby improving the interest of the player. As described above, the volume control bar display 4100 (the light amount control bar display 4200 when the light amount is being adjusted) is forcibly turned into a non-display state by the reception of the pattern confirmation command and the prohibition flag associated with the notification effect display. As compared with the case where the priority of the display layer of the confirmed symbol image is given the highest priority as shown in FIG. 251(C), the visibility of the confirmed symbol image can be significantly improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described trigger (the trigger for disabling volume and light intensity adjustment operations), the trigger for hiding the volume adjustment bar display 4100 and the light intensity adjustment bar display 4200 is determined in advance. When the prohibition period starts, volume and light amount adjustment operations are disabled, and the volume adjustment bar display 4100 and light amount adjustment bar display 4200 are hidden to avoid player confusion. As for the prohibited period, for example, in the standby state in which the symbols are not variably displayed, a menu screen related to customization of various effects including other than adjustment of volume and light amount is displayed, and the volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are displayed. This includes a period during which the player can select a customization item using the display, a period during which the player selects a customization item other than adjusting the sound volume and the amount of light, and changes the selected item. In addition, during a specific jackpot game or a special period (fanfare period) before the start of the jackpot game after the special symbol corresponding to the jackpot game stops is set as a prohibited period. It is possible to limit the adjustment of the sound volume or the amount of light by using the control, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the production.

As described above, by turning the volume adjustment switch 1513 by a staff member such as a game hall clerk, it is possible to set the base volume to "0B" to "3B", which is the "upper limit effective mode". there is Therefore, in the present embodiment, the range of sound volume levels that can be adjusted by the player based on the setting of the base volume is made more clearly visible. For example, FIG. 252 shows a plurality of display modes of the volume adjustment bar display 4100 when the basic volume is set to "3B" (the upper limit volume level is limited to 6). In the example shown in FIG. 252(A), a cross mark, which is a setting disabled icon 4115, is displayed at the display location of the volume icon 4113 corresponding to volume levels 7 and 8, so that the player recognizes the upper limit of the volume level. I have to. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 252B, a character image expressing a meaning that the setting cannot be adjusted is displayed as the setting disabled icon 4115 . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 252(C), when the volume control based on the player's operation reaches the upper limit, the display of the + icon is turned off or displayed dimly so that the player recognizes the upper limit of the volume level. I am trying to let By displaying the upper limit of the adjustable volume level in such a display mode, the player can clearly recognize the upper limit of the volume level, and the player may suspect that the volume control button 227, speaker, or the like may be malfunctioning. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a complaint is filed with a hall clerk or the like. In other words, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that there is no problem by informing the player in advance that the range of adjustment of the sound volume is limited on the game hall side. It should be noted that the character image that expresses the meaning that cannot be adjusted is not necessarily limited to an image imitating a person's face as in the embodiment. It is sufficient if it makes it possible to understand in advance that the adjustment to increase the volume is not possible. As a result, the player's frustration due to unnecessary operations can be suppressed.

Also, conventionally, as shown in FIG. The display mode was changed as follows. In yet another method, as shown in FIG. 252(E), even if the adjustment upper limit is volume level 6, it is converted into a volume level 8 display mode. However, in the conventional display method as described above, when the base volume set between the adjacent game machine and the player's own machine is different, the player who compares the display mode of the volume adjustment feels uncomfortable with the difference in the display mode. I have something to think about. Furthermore, even if the player sets the same maximum volume for the adjacent gaming machine and the own machine, even if the volume output from the two gaming machines is different, the game that listens and compares it Some people feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 248 (A) and FIGS. Regardless of whether or not there is, the volume display frame 4110 of the volume adjustment bar display 4100 is displayed in the same frame range without being reduced. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the player's discomfort due to the difference between the adjacent gaming machine and the player's own machine as described above.

Next, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is configured to notify the player of specific information when a specific state occurs in the gaming machine. When a game ball is detected at the gate 2002 arranged in the right side area of the game area 5a, such as when hitting to the right, the player is prompted to hit to the left, such as "Please return to hitting to the left!" A notification image 4400 is displayed in the foreground of the effect display device 1600, and a corresponding sound is also output from the speaker. In addition, when instructing the player to hit the right hand in a specific game state such as a time-saving state, when the specific game state occurs, the player is urged to hit the right hand. is displayed in the foreground of the effect display device 1600, and the corresponding sound is also output from the speaker. However, the display layer of the notification image 4400 is lower than the display layer of the volume control bar display 4100, and the notification image 4400 overlaps the volume control bar display 4100, as shown in FIGS. If it is hidden in the back, there is a risk that information such as the shooting direction cannot be accurately transmitted to the player. In addition, when the notification image 4400 and the volume control bar display 4100 are viewed at the same time, there is a possibility that the setting disabled icon 4115 may be displayed in a confusing way for the player depending on how they overlap. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253(C), at least the display layer of the notification image 4400 is set higher than the display layer of the volume control bar display 4100 to prevent the visibility of the notification image 4400. Further, the display area of the notification image 4400 is configured so as to cover substantially the entire area of the volume icon 4113 and the setting disabled icon 4115 to make them difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the notification image 4400 or giving the player a sense of displeasure due to inadequate transmission.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the display pattern of the notification image 4400, there are a first display pattern and a second display pattern that are capable of transmitting the same information but have different display modes. The display patterns are switched for proper use. Specifically, in the first display pattern, when the notification image 4400 and the volume adjustment bar display 4100 are displayed simultaneously, the volume icon 4113 and the setting disabled icon are displayed as shown in FIG. 253(C). It is a mode having a large display area that covers almost the entire area of 4115 and makes it difficult to see. On the other hand, the second display pattern can be displayed when notification image 4400 and volume control bar display 4100 are not displayed at the same time (when only one of them is displayed). This is a mode in which a display area is smaller than the display area (see FIG. 253D). In this way, by providing a plurality of patterns with different display areas as the display patterns of the notification image 4400 and selectively using them according to the gaming situation, an effect image (for example, , decorative patterns, etc.) is prevented from being unnecessarily hindered by the notification image 4400 having a large display area (for example, in FIG. 253(C), the changing decorative patterns cannot be seen). .

As a method of indicating to the player that the volume adjustment range is limited, in addition to the method of displaying the setting disabled icon 4115 described above, a message such as "The upper limit of volume adjustment is volume level 4!" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and such a message may be displayed together with the setting disabled icon 4115. As a result, the upper limit of volume control can be indicated to the player in a more comprehensible manner. Also, every time the player operates the volume control button 227 in order to adjust the volume level to exceed the set upper limit volume level, a beep sound is output from the speaker to warn the player that the volume level is higher than this. It is also possible to indicate that no adjustment is possible. In addition, it is also effective to display a message such as "upper limit!"

FIG. 254 shows an effect display example displayed when the player adjusts the sound volume and the amount of light. In this embodiment, when the player operates the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228 to adjust the volume or the light amount, a plurality of characters are displayed as characters on the effect display device 1600 and shown in balloons. It is configured to display various lines such as Such effect display based on the operation for adjusting the volume and the amount of light makes it possible to add interest to the simple operation of adjusting the volume or the amount of light.

Further, FIG. 255 shows an effect display example displayed when the plus operation portion of the volume control button 227 is pressed again even though the volume set by the player has reached the upper limit volume. there is By performing such an effect display, in addition to the display of the setting disabled icon 4115 described above, the display of lines by the characters makes the player more clearly understand that the volume has reached the set upper limit. be able to. Further, when the volume control operation is performed and the volume control button 227 is pressed under the condition that the maximum volume has not yet been reached, it is also possible to display a line informing the user of the maximum volume that can be adjusted in advance. By configuring in this manner, it is possible for the player to grasp the adjustable upper limit sound volume in advance.

Further, in this embodiment, when the volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are pressed, an operation sound is output each time the button is pressed. However, it is set so that no operation sound is output while the decorative symbols are changing, so as not to reduce the interest of the player. The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 can be pressed for a long time, and by pressing the button for 1 second or more, it is possible to set the lower limit value or upper limit value of the adjustable range at once. In the present embodiment, when the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are pressed at the same time, the order of control priority is [plus operation part of the volume adjustment button 227>minus operation part of the amount adjustment button 227>light intensity adjustment button 228. >the minus operation portion of the light amount adjustment button 228]. As a result, the priority of adjusting the volume, which has a great effect on the perception of the player, is raised, and the priority of the operation to increase both the volume and the amount of light is set to be higher, so that a special game state does not occur. Accordingly, when the player desires to increase the sound volume to enjoy the realism of the game, the corresponding control is immediately performed.

(Modification)
In the above-described embodiment, the trigger for disabling the operation to adjust the volume and the amount of light (when entering ¥ during the prohibited period or receiving a specific command) has been described. A special opportunity may be provided to hide the volume adjustment bar display 4100 and the light amount adjustment bar display 4200 even though the light amount adjustment operation can be accepted. For example, as shown in FIG. 256(A), when the player operates the volume adjustment button 227 or the light amount adjustment button 228 during the variation of the ready-to-win state with the decoration pattern in the ready-to-win state as a trigger, an effect display is performed. It is possible to hide the volume control bar display 4100 or the light amount control bar display 4200 on the device 1600 and perform a simplified control display at the lower right display position that does not overlap the decorative pattern. In the illustrated embodiment, the currently set volume level is displayed as a fraction of 2 out of 8 steps, and the maximum adjustable volume level is displayed with a message such as "Adjustment upper limit is 4!" . By adopting such a display mode, it becomes possible for the player to clearly see the variation mode of the decoration pattern and to clearly grasp the current sound volume level and the adjustable upper limit sound volume level. . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 256(B), by displaying a message such as "upper limit!" that the adjusted sound volume level has reached the adjustable upper limit sound level, the player can see the variation of the decoration pattern. It is possible to allow the player to clearly recognize that the upper limit sound volume level has been reached while clearly visually recognizing the mode. With the display mode as described above, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player who is interested in the variation mode of the decorative symbols, and allow the player to appropriately perform the adjustment operation of the sound volume level and the amount of light. In addition, the transition to the simplified display mode as described above is not limited to the transition to the ready-to-win state of the decorative pattern, but also when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, when the big hit effect is executed, and the notification effect display for the player. A shift to a simplified display can be triggered by, for example, when (indicating display of right-handed, left-handed, button operation, etc.) is performed.

In the above-described embodiment, as the notification image 4400, in addition to an image that conveys information to the player ("Push!!", "Please hit right!", etc.), This corresponds to an image for transmitting information (for example, a notification regarding an error in the gaming machine 1) and an image that needs to be notified to the outside with the highest priority. Also, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment relating to adjustment of sound volume has been described as an example, but similar control is possible for adjusting the amount of light.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine, but the game machine is not limited to this, and the game is a pachislot machine or a game that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained. Also, the present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed type game machine in which the player never touches the game ball B, or a game machine called a management game machine.

In the above-described embodiment, the main body 2551 of the binding pedestal 2550 and the main body 2561 of the binding pedestal 2560 are flat plate-shaped or block-shaped. It may be used as a unit case for an opening/closing unit having a retractable door for opening/closing a prize winning slot or distributing game balls B, or as a unit base for an effect unit.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 227 volume control button 227a volume increase button 227b volume decrease button 228a light amount increase button 228b light amount decrease button EC1000 front component 1100 game panel 1510 peripheral control board 1600 Effect display device 2000 Front unit 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3600 Back back effect unit 3601 Unit base (fixed base)
3602 Guide shaft 3604 Slit for rotation 3700 Back rear lower decoration (movable decoration)
3710 First rotary decoration 3713 First rotary decoration decoration substrate (electronic component)
3720 Second rotary decoration 3723 Second rotary decoration decoration substrate (electronic component)
3730 third rotary decoration 3733 third rotary decoration decoration substrate (electronic component)
3740 Fourth rotary decoration 3743 Fourth rotary decoration decoration substrate (electronic component)
3750 rear decoration 3753 rear decoration decoration substrate (electronic component)
3760 Left unit 3780 Right unit 3781 Right slide base (movable base)
3787 Gear cover (movable base)
3787a Wire locking portion 3787b Wire locking portion (harness support portion)
3787c Wire locking portion 3788 Unit arm (arm)
4100 Volume adjustment bar display 4113 Volume icon 4115 Setting disabled icon 4200 Light amount adjustment bar display 4213 Light amount icon 4300 Notification image CT Binding band CTa Band part CTb Lock part WH3 Harness

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that variably displays symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and provides a predetermined profit based on the result of the variative display,
an effect sound output means capable of outputting a game-related effect sound;
volume change means capable of changing the volume of the effect sound based on the player's volume change operation;
volume level gauge image display control means for performing control to display a volume level gauge image that allows the player to recognize which volume is set as the volume of the effect sound;
a volume limiting means for limiting the upper limit of the volume that can be changed by the volume changing means based on an administrator's operation;
The volume level gauge image can be displayed when the volume change operation is performed,
The volume level gauge image display control means includes:
When the upper limit of the volume is limited by the volume limiter, it is possible to execute limit display control based on the limit of the upper limit,
When the upper limit of the volume is not limited by the volume limiting means, it is possible to execute unrestricted display control based on the fact that the upper limit is not limited,
The limited display control at least displays a maximum level of the selectable volume level gauge image that is less than a maximum level of the selectable volume level gauge image that would be displayed when the unrestricted display control is executed. is a control that allows
Furthermore, it further comprises specific level gauge image display control means for controlling display of a specific level gauge image different from the volume level gauge image,
The specific level gauge image and the volume level gauge image can be displayed simultaneously from a state in which both the images are hidden ,
When the volume change operation is performed, the display mode of the volume level gauge image can be changed by the performed volume change operation, but the display mode of the specific level gauge image is not changed. is configured as
Further, the specific level gauge image may be displayed on the specific level gauge image depending on which of the limited display control and the unrestricted display control the display control of the volume level gauge image is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the display mode of an image is not changed.

Images